JP6547727B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine, the gaming machine is known for adjusting the flow-down direction of the game ball flowing down Yu technique area (Patent Document 1).

JP-A-11-197311

  However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the operation rate of the gaming machine is reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the rate of operation of Yu technique machine.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side , a first member for arranging on the front side of the gaming board, and a first member of the first member. It is disposed at a predetermined interval on the front side, and a second member to allow flow down game balls between opposite of said first member, which includes a pre-Symbol first member or the second member It includes a predetermined portion between the first member or the other as opposed to change means to change the interval of the second member disposed on at least one of, by said changing means, a first state, and the first state Is capable of forming a second state in which the flow-down direction of the gaming ball flowing down between the facing of the first member and the second member is different .

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it can be suppressed that the player recognizes as disadvantageous, and the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the second aspect, the position of the second member can be made hard to be recognized.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. (A) is a front view of a general winning a prize mouth unit, (b) is a sectional view of the general winning a prize mouth unit in the XIIb-XIIb line of Drawing 12 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIII-XIII line of FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a rear view of a general winning a prize mouth unit. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the game board in the range XIV of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a 1st unit, (b) is a side view of a 1st unit, (c) is a rear view of a 1st unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 1st unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 1st unit. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXI-XXI line | wire of FIG.18 (b). It is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit shown in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIII-XXIII line | wire of FIG.18 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. 21, (c) is a diagram It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in XXIVc-XXIVc line of 21. FIG. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st unit in range XXVa of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is the elements on larger scale of the 1st unit in range XXVa of FIG. 21, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line of FIG. 26 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the first unit along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross section of the first unit along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 25 (a) FIG. 25C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. (A) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the XXVb-XXVb line of FIG. 25 (a), (b) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit in the XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb line of FIG. 25 (a) is there. (A) is a front view of a 2nd unit, (b) is a rear view of a 2nd unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a 2nd unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a 2nd unit. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd unit in the XXXII-XXXII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is a side view of a center frame. (A) is a perspective front view of a center frame, (b) is a perspective rear view of a center frame. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a center frame. It is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXVI-XXXVI line of FIG. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a game board, and (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of a back case, (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a perspective rear view of a back case and a substrate box, (b) is a rear view of a back case and a substrate box. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a 1st overhang state. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the second overhang state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in a 1st overhang state. It is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the second overhang state. (A) is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first overhang state, and (c) in the second overhang state. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement unit in the LIVa-LIVa line of FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement unit in the LIVb-LIVb line of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 51, (c) is a diagram It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in 52 LVc-LVc lines. (A) is sectional drawing of the lower displacement unit in the LVIa-LVIa line | wire of FIG. 52, (b) is a front view of the 1st link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in a 2nd overhang | projection state. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (b) is a rear view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (A) to (c) are the elements on larger scale of a lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. (A) to (c) are front views of a lower displacement member. FIG. 68A is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in a range LXIXa of FIG. 68B, and FIG. 68B is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in a range LXIXb of FIG. (A) is a top view of a distribution unit, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a distribution unit. FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view of a distribution unit taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 70 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit in range LXXIV of FIG. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a top view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is sectional drawing of a distribution unit. It is a front view of rotation unit. It is a rear view of rotation unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit in the arrow XCIIa direction view of FIG. 91, (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in the arrow XCIIb direction view of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a decoration unit. It is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVa direction view of FIG. 89, (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVb of FIG. It is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVa direction view of FIG. 89, (b) is a rotation unit in the arrow XCVb of FIG. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in the closed state, (b) in the intermediate state, and (c) in the open state. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in the open state, (b) in the intermediate state, and (c) in the closed state. (A) is a side view of the decoration unit in the closed state, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in the open state. (A) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100 (a), and (c) is an arrow Cc in FIG. 100 (a). It is a side view of the rotary body in direction view. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotating body. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a rotary body. (A) is a side view of the rotating body in the closed state of the opening and closing member, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body in the opened state of the opening and closing member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a decoration unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit in the direction of the arrow CVI in FIG. 105. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of a ball stand, (b) is a front view of a ball stand, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the ball stand taken along line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in FIG. 108 (a). It is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball stand. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a ball | bowl stand. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the rotation unit in the CXI-CXI line of FIG. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of an upper displacement unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of an upper displacement unit. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state where the upper displacement member is arranged at the retracted position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state by which the upper displacement member was arrange | positioned in the middle position. It is a front view of the upper displacement unit in the state by which the upper displacement member is arrange | positioned in the overhang position. (A) is a front view of a variable part, (b) is a rear view of a variable part. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a lower displacement member. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a lower displacement member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. (A) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (A) is a top view of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a distribution unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. It is sectional drawing of the distribution unit in the CXXXIV-CXXXIV line | wire of FIG. 131 (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit in range CXXXV of FIG. It is a front view of the rotation unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled perspective rear view of a distribution unit. (A)-(c) is a side view of the decoration unit in arrow CXXXIX direction view of FIG. (A)-(c) is a side view of the decoration unit in arrow CXXXIX direction view of FIG. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a side schematic diagram of a displacement unit. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in case a game ball is hold | maintained at a displacement member. It is a side schematic diagram of the displacement unit in case a game ball is hold | maintained at a displacement member. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 8th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a rotation operation unit. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the pachinko machine in the CXLVII-CXLVII line of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective front view of the 1st link member in a 9th embodiment, and (b) is a cross section schematic diagram of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a game board in a 10th embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the lower displacement member in 11th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member. (A) is a front view of the lower displacing member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacing member taken along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 153 (a), (c) is FIG. 153 (a) It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of. (A) is a disassembled perspective front view of the ball | bowl receiving part in 12th Embodiment, (b) is a front view of a ball | bowl receiving part. (A) And (b) is a front view of a lower displacement member, (c) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member in the CLVc-CLVc line of FIG. 155 (b). (A) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, (c) is a line CLVIc-CLVIc in FIG. 156 (a). It is a sectional view of a special winning device. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a special winning device. (A) is a top view of a special winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device taken along line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158 (a). (A) is a back view of the back case in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CLIXb-CLIXb line | wire of FIG. 159 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the back case in 15th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 161A is a back view of the back case in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161B is a cross-sectional view of the back case taken along line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of the back case in 18th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a back case. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a back view of a back case. (A) is a schematic top view of a game board, (b) is a schematic top view of a pachinko machine 10. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the engaging member in 19th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is sectional drawing of the one way in the CLXVIb-CLXVIb line | wire of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a back case and a rotation unit in a twentieth embodiment. (A) is a front view of an engagement member, (b) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engagement member. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engagement member, (b) is a rear view of rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of a back case and a rotation unit according to a twenty-first embodiment. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engagement member, (b) is a schematic cross section of the rotation unit in the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb of FIG. 171 (a). (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engagement member, (b) is a schematic cross section of a back case and a rotation unit. (A) is a rear view of a rotation unit and an engagement member, (b) is a schematic cross section of a back case and a rotation unit. It is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (A) And (b) is a front view of a back case. (A) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa line | wire of FIG. 175 (b). FIG. 177 (b) is a front view of the back case in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb of FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII in FIG. 177 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 25th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 26th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in 27th Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the gaming board in the twenty-ninth embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a general winning opening unit in the thirtieth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of a general winning opening unit in the thirty-first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special winning device in a thirty-second embodiment. (A) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device taken along line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185 (a). It is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device taken along line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186 (a). (A) is a disassembled perspective front view of the 1st path | route member in 33rd Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of a special winning a prize apparatus. (A) is a front view of the game board in 34th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb line | wire of FIG. 188 (a). It is a disassembled perspective front view of a game board. FIG. 188 is a cross-sectional view of a pachinko machine taken along line CXC-CXC of FIG. 188. (A) is a front view of the game board in 35th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the CXCIb-CXCIb line | wire of (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a special winning device. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191 (b). (A) is a disassembled perspective front view which showed the game board in 36th Embodiment typically, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a game board. (A) is a disassembled perspective front view which showed the game board in 37th embodiment typically, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a game board. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in a 38th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lower displacing member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacing member taken along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb in FIG. 197 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 197 (a) It is sectional drawing of the lower displacement member in a CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc line. It is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member in a 39th embodiment. (A) is a front view of a lower displacement member, FIG. 199 (b) and FIG. 199 (c) are sectional drawings of a lower displacement member. FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit at line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200 (a). FIG. 201 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 201 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line CCIb-CCIb in FIG. 201 (a). (A) is a schematic cross section of the first unit along line CCIIa-CCIIa in FIG. 201 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross section of the first unit along line CCIIb-CCIIb in FIG. 201 (a) is there. It is an exploded perspective front view of a back case in a 42nd embodiment. (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CCIVb-CCIVb line | wire of FIG. 204 (a). (A) is a front view of a back case, (b) is a schematic cross section of the back case in the CCVb-CCVb line | wire of Fig.205 (a). (A) is a rear view of a game board, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board on the line CCVIb-CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. 1 to 111. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the drawing is the front (front) side, and the rear side of the drawing is the rear (rear) side. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper side (upper side), the lower side is the lower side (lower side), the right side is the right side (right side), and the left side is the left side Each side will be described. Furthermore, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 4, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 4, a ball emitting unit 112 a (see FIG. 4) for emitting a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding the ball emitted from the ball emitting unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 5c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with a top surface opened and projecting upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a display lamp 34 is provided which incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED and can display the payout of the prize ball and the occurrence of an error.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be viewed. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Below the window portion 5c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 76 and 77. The first opening 63, the second opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5 c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. Rubber rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a certain amount of momentum hits the rubber pair 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed in the lower left side of the game area in the front view (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 has a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, ie, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but also the time for which the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is open is changed, and it is longer than normal. The time is set. When the first motorized product 640a is in the opened state (opened state), the second winning opening 640 is compared to the case where the first motorized object 640a is closed (closed state). It will be easy to win the ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 or changing the opening time of the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, a single hit is made. In this case, the number of times the first motorized product 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during the normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during positive or negative, and the first motorized symbol associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first motorized symbol is held once At least one of the number of times of opening 640 a may be changed. In addition, the time during which the first motorized symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the first motorized symbol 640a is opened at one time does not change during definite change or during time saving. Only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed to be higher than that of the normal pattern.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning of any of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol using a passage of a ball of the first through gate 66 as a trigger And a second symbol display device (not shown).

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternates a symbol of “o” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) and a symbol of “x” for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the first electric combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening during positive or negative time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the first motorized part 640a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win to 640, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board among the balls launched to the game board. When the ball passes the first through gate 66, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Also in)) is displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). . Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. In FIG. 4, a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  Further, on the left side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a third winning opening 82 in which a ball can win is disposed. The third winning opening 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 described later via the sending unit 600 when the ball wins. That is, the third winning opening 82 is disposed in communication with a first opening 511 described later.

  The third winning port 82 is accompanied by a third motorized product 82a. The third motorized product 82a is configured so as to be opened and closed by rotational displacement with respect to the game board 13. Normally, the third motorized product 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) and the ball is the third prize. It is difficult to win the mouth 82. On the other hand, when there is a determination of the jackpot triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the third electric jack 82a is opened for a predetermined time (before, after, or after the jackpot) State), and the ball is likely to win the third winning opening 82. Further, on the downstream side of the third winning opening 82, a sensor device SE1 that detects a ball that has passed is mounted.

  The opening timing of the third motorized winning object 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 5640. When the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol performed with the symbol "", the symbol may be released.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a first motorized symbol 640 a. The first motorized product 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the first motorized product 640a is in the closed state (reduced state), and the ball is less likely to win the second winning opening 640. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric role object 640a is The ball is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” tends to be displayed, and the number of times the first motorized accessory 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during a definite change or during a short time, the time during which the first motorized component 640a is open is also longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation or during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric combination 640 a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball to the first through gate 66, the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state during definite variation or time, and the second winning opening 640 is won. The ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display unit 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 as well as opening the first electric role product 640a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, the stop of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, for example, The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. Ru. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. The other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 200 and the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 rotates downward from the state shown in FIG. 7. In FIG. 9, the lower displacement member 440 has the largest overhang in FIG. 10 from the state shown in FIG. 7 where the lower displacement member 440 is overhanging to the first overhang position described later. The state of being displaced to the second overhanging position which is the position is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the inner space of the rear case 300, an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700 and A sorting unit 5 00 attached to the back of the game board 13 and a throwing unit 600 are accommodated.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 to the front, and the respective wall portions 301 and 302 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible.

  The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably disposed on a base member 910 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape and disposed in an upper portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the base member 910. An upper displacing member 940 is provided, and on the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81), an effect of rotating and displacing the upper displacing member 940 can be performed. The detailed description of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described later.

  The lower displacement unit 400 is slidably disposed on the base member 410 and the base member 410 in a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape disposed in the lower portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. The lower displacement member 440 is formed, and on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case (that is, the third symbol display device 81), an effect of rotationally displacing the lower displacement member 440 can be performed. The detailed description of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described later.

  The rotation unit 700 has a rear base 720 having a rectangular shape in a front view and a rectangular shape as viewed from the front, which is disposed on the right side (arrow) of the lower portion of the opening 301 a of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300. The player can visually recognize an effect of rotationally displacing the rotary body 800 through a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the gaming board 13 in the front view. The detailed description of the rotation unit 700 will be described later.

  The ball sending unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and the game ball which is sent from the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 to the back side of the game board 13 is attached to the first opening 511 of the sorting unit 500 described later. A path for throwing is formed.

  The sorting unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13 and a base plate 520 provided with a predetermined gap formed opposite to the path forming member 510, and the base plate And a distribution member 540 for distributing the game balls, which are attached to 520 and flow down between the path forming member 510 and the base plate 520, to the respective ball sending paths (the second ball sending path KR2 or the third ball sending path KR3). The game balls distributed to the distribution member 540 are sent to the lower displacement unit 400. The detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are disposed adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11 to FIG. 16, a general winning opening unit 150 disposed on the game board 13 will be described.

  First, the general prize winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, FIG. 12 (a) is a front view of the general winning opening unit 150, and FIG. 12 (b) is a line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12 (a). It is sectional drawing of the general prize-winning mouth unit 150 in.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening portion formed in the base plate 60. And a general winning opening unit 150.

  The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a opened in the central portion in a front view, and a second opening 60b opened downward in the direction of gravity of the game area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. . A center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and a general winning opening unit 150 is disposed in the second opening 60b. In addition, a seal on which a decoration (pattern, pattern, etc.) is formed is attached to the base plate 60 on the front side (arrow F direction side), and the player can visually recognize the decoration. The decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to the seal, and the decoration may be printed (painted) on the front of the base plate 60.

  The general winning opening unit 150 is disposed in the gaming area of the gaming board 13 (in front of the base plate 60), and can change the path of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. In addition, the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is the end of gravity direction lower side (arrow D direction side) in front view (arrow B direction view) vis-a-vis the game territory which is formed to be enclosed by inner rail 76 and outer rail 77 It is arranged at the position along the part. In FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal disposed on the base plate 60 is illustrated with the symbol of the decorative member 60 c. Further, in the present embodiment, a character (person) is drawn on the decoration member 60c.

  The general winning opening unit 150 has a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape in a front view, and a first standing portion 152 provided upright on the front side (arrow F direction side) from an end of the main body 151; The second standing portion 153 extending toward the center of the game area from the end of the first standing portion 152 in the gravity direction upper side (arrow U direction side), and disposed on the back side of the main body 151 A decorative member 154 to be formed and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body 151 are mainly provided.

  The main body portion 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60 b opened in the thickness direction of the base plate 60, and the base plate 60 is covered with the opening of the second opening 60 b. It is disposed on the front side of the In addition, the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 63 disposed in the main body 151 can be thrown to the back side of the gaming board 13 (base plate 60) by the second opening 60b. Furthermore, the main body portion 151 has an inclined surface 151a that inclines toward the base plate 60 from the inner portion toward the outer end in a front view, and a concave portion recessed on the back surface of the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side) It is mainly provided with 151b and back part 151d which forms the back of main part 151 except crevice 151b.

  The inclined surface 151 a is formed to be inclined approximately 30 degrees with respect to the front of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be moved to the front side of the main body 151 by coming into contact with the inclined surface 151a and flowing down along the inclination of the inclined surface 151a.

  Here, when the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end of the main body 151, and the side surface of the main body 151 is formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, the game area of the game board 13 flows down. The game ball is in contact (collision) in a direction orthogonal to the side surface of the main body 151, and there is a risk that the game ball in contact may bounce back in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the gaming ball in contact with the side surface of the main body 151 can be moved to the front side of the main body by the inclined surface 151a, the flow of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is temporary. It is possible to suppress stagnation. As a result, the gaming balls can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

  The back surface 151 d is the back surface of the main body 151 as described above, and is formed with a constant width around the recess 151 b in the back surface view. Further, the back surface portion 151 d is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (the decorative member 60 c) in a state in which the general winning opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60.

  The recess 151 b is recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). The concave portion 151b has a concave bottom surface 151b2 which is a bottom surface in the concave direction, and an inner side surface 151b3 which is erected from the outer edge of the concave bottom surface 151b2 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction).

  The recessed bottom surface 151 b 2 is an adhesive surface of the decoration member 154 described later, and is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front of the main body 151. Thereby, when the decoration of the decoration member 154 is visually recognized through the main body portion 151, the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be visually recognized uniformly.

  The inner side surface 151b3 is extended in the front-rear direction (the arrow FB direction). Further, the shape of the inner side surface 151b3 in a front view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decoration member 154 described later. Thereby, when the decoration member 154 is arrange | positioned in the recessed part 151b, it can suppress that the decoration member 154 protrudes outside the recessed part 151b. Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back surface 151 d and the base plate 60, whereby the back surface 151 d of the main body 151 and the base plate 60 Formation of a gap between them can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the main-body part 151 protrudes on the front side rather than a normal arrangement position with respect to the base board 60. FIG. As a result, the gaming balls can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

  The recess 151 b is a recess that accommodates a decoration member 154 described later in the recess space, and the recess depth (the distance of the recess on the front side (the arrow F direction side)) is greater than the thickness dimension of the decoration member 154 It is set large. The recess 151 b is recessed along the shape of the end of the main body 151 at a position spaced apart from the end of the main body 151 by a predetermined distance from the end of the main body 151 in a front view.

  Therefore, when arranging the decoration member 154 inside the recessed part 151b, it can suppress that the back surface of the decoration member 154 protrudes to the back side rather than the main-body part 151. FIG. Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the recessed bottom surface 151 b 2 and the base plate 60, whereby the back surface 151 d of the main body 151 and the base plate 60. Formation of a gap between them can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the main-body part 151 protrudes on the front side rather than the usual arrangement | positioning position with respect to the base board 60. As shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow the gaming ball from the upper side of the main body 151 in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow U) to the front of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150.

  The first standing portion 152 is erected on the front side (arrow F direction side) from the end of the main body 151 on the end side (inner rail 76 side) of the game area. The first standing portion 152 has its standing dimension set substantially the same as the width dimension of the inner rail 76 planted on the front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) in the planting direction. Further, in the first standing portion 152, the distance between the facing of the front door 5 covering the front side of the gaming board 13 with the glass unit 16 is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, the gaming ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 can collide with the first standing portion 152 at the end in the gravity direction of the gaming area. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body 151 can be prevented from colliding with the inner rail 76, and the inner rail 76 can be suppressed from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

  Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is a space for guiding the game ball fired from the ball launch unit 112 a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. There is a limited space for arranging reinforcement or the like between the outer rail 77 and the other. Therefore, it is difficult to arrange reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from being bent, and there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down the game area may collide with the inner rail 76 and the inner rail 76 may be bent.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the gaming area are less likely to collide with the inner rail 76 by the general winning opening unit 150 (first standing portion 152) disposed in the gaming area. it can. Therefore, bending the inner rail 76 can suppress a change in the distance between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to stably launch the gaming ball into the gaming area.

  The second standing portion 153 extends downward from the end of the first standing portion 152 in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side) toward the center (first winning opening 64) of the game area in front view and extends Provided (see FIG. 2). Thus, the gaming ball flowing down between the inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 (see FIG. 2) is on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the extension portion of the second standing portion 153 which is inclined downward. When the ball is thrown, the gaming ball can be rolled along the downward inclination of the second standing portion 153, and can be thrown toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area on the side between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 (in the direction of arrow L) are won (inflow) in the first winning opening 64 disposed at the center of the game area. It can be done easily.

  The decorative member 154 is formed in a plate shape and is adhered to the back side of the main body 151. In the decoration member 154, a decoration formed on the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and a decoration connected in a front view are formed on the front of the main body 151 side. Thus, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be combined with the decoration of the decoration member 154 to make one decoration visible. In the present embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be combined and visually recognized as one character.

  In addition, the decoration member 154 is formed of a light transmitting material. Thereby, the light passing through the second opening 60b from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 is made incident from the back side of the decoration member 154, and emitted from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decoration member 154. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration formed on the front of the decoration member 154, and to make the player easily recognize the decoration of the decoration member 154.

  Next, the base plate 60 and the general winning opening unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XIII-XIII in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 is larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60 b of the base plate 60 in a front view. Thus, when the general winning opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the end of the decoration member 154 is between the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the concave portion 151b of the main body 151 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Will be placed. Accordingly, when the adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 is peeled off due to aging or the like, the decorative member 154 can be prevented from dropping off from the game board 13.

  In addition, the decorative member 154 has a width that overlaps the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) is a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 protruding from the back of the main body 151 described later is inserted. The diameter of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11) is set to be larger than the diameter of the opening 60g. Thereby, a gap is formed between the decorations of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c in the front view by the positional deviation of the arrangement of the decoration member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or the position deviation of the decoration member 60c. Can be suppressed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

  Also, the three general winning openings 63 disposed in the main body 151 are connected to the openings 514 to 516 of the sorting unit 500 (see FIG. 71) disposed on the back side of the game board 13, The gaming ball having won the winning opening 63 is sent to the fourth sending route KR4 of the sorting unit 500. The detailed description of the distribution unit 500 will be described later.

  Furthermore, in the distribution unit 500, a substrate (not shown) including a light source capable of emitting light on the front side is disposed on the base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light irradiated from the substrate is the base plate The light is irradiated to the back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 through the second opening 60 b of 60.

  Therefore, the second opening 60 b is used as a space for irradiating light to the path of the game ball winning from the general winning opening 63 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the back surface of the general winning opening unit 150. As a result, it is not necessary to divide the opening for throwing the game ball, the opening for passing the light, and the two openings separately, so that the entire back surface of the general winning opening unit 150 is irradiated with light. While being able to make it easy, the general winning a prize mouth 63 can be arranged in the whole region of the main part 151 of the general winning a prize mouth unit 150. As a result, the degree of freedom in the design of the general winning opening unit 150 can be improved, and light is emitted from the entire area of the general winning opening unit 150 for the player to decorate the general winning opening unit 150 (decorative member 154). It is easy to make it visible.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 for decoration connected to the decorative member 60 c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is a main body disposed along the front of the base plate 60. Since it arrange | positions on the back of 151, the decoration member 60c of the base board 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be arrange | positioned in the position which adjoined (approached) in the front-back direction (arrow F- B direction). Thereby, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member are viewed from an angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the gravity direction upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)) with respect to the front view of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 When visual recognition of 154 is performed, it is possible to suppress that the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 is shifted and visually recognized as compared with the case where the decoration of the general winning opening unit is disposed in front of the general winning opening unit. As a result, the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be viewed by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, and the design of the game board 13 is improved. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In FIG. 14, the path of light visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As described above, the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order to make the player visually recognize the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decoration member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation between the two decorations. However, when forming the decoration on the base plate 60 or when arranging the decoration member 154 on the main body 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at the correct position (the same position every time). Therefore, when the general winning opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is disposed so that the position of the decoration of the decorative member 154 with respect to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is offset. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize as the decoration of 1 in combination with the decoration of.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end of the decorative member 154 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the connection between the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration of the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be made less likely to be accurately recognized by the player (the connection portion can be blurred for visual recognition by the player). Therefore, the player can recognize the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration.

  Describing in detail, as shown in FIG. 14, a connecting portion between the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration of the decoration member 60 c (hereinafter, referred to as “boundary P1” (see FIG. 14) is an inclined surface 151 a of the main body 151. Located on the back side of the Therefore, the light emitted toward the player's viewpoint from the boundary P1 and the connecting portion between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as "the boundary P2" (see FIG. 14)) The light emitted toward the viewpoint can be light reflected at different positions of the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (ie, on the path of light emitted toward the player's viewpoint from the boundary P1 Can suppress the formation of the boundary P2).

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize the misalignment of the arrangement of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 at the boundary P1 as the misalignment of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, the misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the light refracting direction Because it is possible to make the decoration that the player visually recognizes from the respective positions of the boundaries P1 and P2 different from the positions of the boundaries P1 and P2, the positional deviation of the decorations at the boundaries P1 and P2 is the same. It can suppress that a player visually recognizes. Therefore, the positional displacement of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the positional displacement of the decoration at the boundary P2 are combined, and it is possible to suppress the amount of positional displacement of the decoration becoming large and being recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily recognize the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as the decoration 1 and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

  Further, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, the connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the main body 151 (hereinafter referred to as "the boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)) from the player's viewpoint A boundary P1 can be placed between the boundary P2 and the boundary P2. Therefore, the boundary P1 can be disposed between the misalignment positions (boundaries P2 and P3) of the decoration due to light refraction when the light is emitted from the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension of the area recognized due to the position of the decoration being offset. That is, the area where the position of the decoration is shifted and viewed can be limited with respect to the front of the game board 13. As a result, the misalignment area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, so that the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the face of the character is decorated by the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60, and the body of the character decorated by the decoration member 60c is decorated by the decoration member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. That is, the contour of the decoration is located at the connection portion of the decoration between the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the positional deviation of the connection portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the outline of the decoration. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the body of a character in which up to the neck of the face of the character is decorated by the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration member 154 is decorated with the decoration member 60c with the decoration member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. The clothes worn by the are decorated, and the face (neck) of the character and the clothes are decorated with different color tones (in the present embodiment, the face is skin color and the clothes is black). Thus, by making the positional deviation of the connection portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 different in color, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are divided. Can. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized as one decoration by the player.

  As described above, the concave portion 151b is recessed in the back surface side of the main body portion 151, and the decorative member 154 is disposed inside thereof. The shape of the inner side surface (inner surface 151b3) of the recess 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in a front view. Thereby, when arranging the decoration member 154 in the main-body part 151, the inner surface 151b3 of the recessed part 151b can be utilized as a guide (positioning). As a result, when the decorative member 154 is attached to the main body portion 151, positional deviation of the decorative member 154 with respect to the main body portion 151 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, on the back side of the main body portion 151, projections (see FIG. 15) projecting in a cylindrical shape are formed at a plurality of places (in the present embodiment, at three places (see FIG. 15)). The projection 155 is a positioning projection for positioning with the base plate 60 when the general winning hole unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and is inserted into a recess 60d recessed in the base plate 60. Further, at least one (one in the present embodiment) of the protrusion 155 is protruded from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recess 151b and is inserted into the opening formed in the decoration member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used as positioning in the case of arranging the decoration member 154 in the main body 151.

  Therefore, the projection 155 can position the general winning opening unit 150 on the base plate 60, and can position the decoration member 154 on the main body 151. Therefore, the positioning portion for arranging the decoration member 154 on the front side of the decoration member 60c can be the same portion, so that the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 are displaced. It can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be combined to be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

  Further, the protrusion 155 protruding from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 is formed in an area (affixing area of the adhesive tape 154a) of a range E1 (see FIG. 15) described later. Thereby, when arranging the decoration member 154 in the main body portion 151, with the projection 155 inserted in the opening of the decoration member 154, one position of the edge of the decoration member 154 is positioned on the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. By aligning and arranging, two places of the decoration member 154 can be positioned with respect to the main body portion 151. Accordingly, it is not necessary to arrange the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 by aligning the edge of the decorative member 154 at two places on the inner side surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. As a result, the work of arranging the decoration member 154 on the main body 151 can be simplified.

  Next, adhesion between the main body 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning opening unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the range XIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 15, the range of the adhesive tape 154a stuck to the decoration member 154 is attached | subjected the code | symbol of E1, and is illustrated with a dashed-two dotted line. Further, in FIG. 14, a light path visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In the present embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed of a light-transmissive double-sided tape and is attached to the range E1.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, an adhesive tape 154 a for bonding the decorative member 154 and the main body 151 is attached with a constant width along the end of the decorative member 154. Thereby, in the area (part other than the range E1) where the adhesive tape 154a is not attached, the thickness of the adhesive tape 154a corresponds to that of the main body 151 (concave bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (front of the decorative member). A gap (space) of a predetermined width is formed therebetween.

  Further, the adhesive tape 154a is bonded to a region beyond the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) which passes the boundary P3 from the end of the decoration member 154 and is orthogonal to the inclined surface 151a. Thereby, the area E1 (decorative member) to which the adhesive tape 154a is applied to a portion (a portion where the wavelength is changed) of the light emitted from the inclined surface 151a passing through the main body portion 151 being affected by the decoration of the decorative member 154 (Ends of 154). As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

  Here, if the player visually recognizes the game board 13 from a position higher than normal (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity), FIG. As shown, the light L coming out of the inclined surface 151 a toward the player's eyes repeatedly reflects on the front and back of the main body 151 and passes through the inside of the main body 151. In this case, if the entire front surface of the decorative member 154 is in contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of light is changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 every time it is reflected on the decorative member 154 side. Ru. Therefore, the light which passes through the inside of the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151 a can not be reflected only by the change of the wavelength by the decoration of the end of the decoration member 154. Therefore, the decoration recognized by the player from the inclined surface 151a is different from the wavelength of the decoration visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, so that the decoration is not continuous between the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by setting the adhesion part of the decorative member 154 to the main body portion 151 only in the range E1, the light L reflected and passed through the inside of the main body portion 151 can be used for decoration of the decorative member 154. It can be made unaffected (the wavelength of the light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the portion of the light which passes through the main body 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a is affected by the decoration of the decoration member 154 (the portion where the wavelength is changed) The range E1 (end portion of the decoration member 154) to be attached can be used, and it can be made easy for the player to visually recognize as being continuous with the decoration of the inclined surface 151a visually recognized by the player and the decoration adjacent thereto. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36, the special winning device 550 will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 17, a method of arranging the special winning device 550 will be described. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 has a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding an opening at the center of the base plate 60, and a projecting portion projecting outward in the radial direction of the base frame 86a. And 86 b.

  The base frame 86a is shaped along the central opening of the base plate 60, and a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and the portion excluding the part of the base frame 86a is the base plate 60. It is arrange | positioned by the base board 60 in the state which protruded to the front side of.

  The projecting portion 86 b is provided on the right side (arrow R direction side) in a front view with respect to the gaming area of the gaming board 13. As a result, the special winning device 550 disposed in the projecting portion 86b can be disposed on the right side in the front view (arrow R direction side) with respect to the game area, and when the special game state is entered The special winning device 550 can constitute a part of the ball sending path of the game ball.

  In addition, the projecting portion 86b is located at the opening 86b1 opening in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) and above the opening 86b1 (arrow U direction) toward the back side (arrow B direction) And a recess 86b2 to be recessed.

  In the opening 86 b 1, a part of a first unit 551 of a special winning device 550 described later is inserted. Thus, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special winning device 550 disposed on the back side of the projecting portion 86 b through the opening 86 b 1.

  The recess 86 b 2 can accommodate a part of a first unit 551 of a special winning device 550 described later. Further, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is disposed in the recess 86b2. As a result, it is possible to detect gaming balls passing through a portion housed inside the recess 86 b 2 of the first unit 551.

  The special winning device 550 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the protruding portion 86 b of the center frame 86 And a second unit 552, which is mainly configured.

  The first unit 551 is provided with a space (path) where the game ball can flow down inside, and a part thereof is disposed in the game area of the game board 13. In addition, the first unit 551 is disposed on the center frame 86 by a screw through which the second unit 552 is inserted. In addition, the detailed description about the arrangement | positioning method of the 1st unit 551 and the 2nd unit 552 is mentioned later.

  Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. 18 (a) is a front view of the first unit 551, FIG. 18 (b) is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18 (c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. . FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and a second path member 570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 560. And a third path member 580 disposed on the back of the second path member 570.

  The first path member 560 has a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 and a substantially U-shaped cross section opened on the upper side (arrow U direction side). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, a third receiving portion 563 and a first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562 and a third receiving portion which are provided on the back side from the upper side end of the face plate 564 A first wall portion 565 continuously formed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the portion 563 and extending along an end portion of the front plate 564, and the lower side of the first wall portion 565 The second wall 566 and the third wall 567 are mainly formed of two sets of a second wall 566 and a third wall 567 which are formed at two positions spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance.

  The front plate 564 is a plate member serving as a front wall of the flow-down path of the gaming ball formed between the second path member 570 or the third path member 580 described later, and is formed of a light transmitting member Ru. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551 through the front plate 564 (through).

  Further, the front plate 564 is provided with a guide portion 564a which is provided so as to protrude on the second path member 570 side (rear side (arrow B direction side).

  The guiding portion 564a is a wall portion that prevents the whole area of the wall surface of the front plate 564 from being soiled by the gaming balls flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and the second path member 570 or the third path member 580 described later Extending along the flow path of the gaming ball flowing down between the two. Further, the guide portion 564a is provided at a position where the radius of the gaming ball is separated from the rolling surface of the gaming ball flowing down the first unit 551. In other words, the guide portion 564a is provided so as to protrude substantially at the same position as the central position of the gaming ball flowing down the first path member 560. Thus, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball abut can be limited to the protruding tip end portion of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a scratch by bringing the entire surface of the front plate 564 into contact with the gaming ball and the transfer of the dirt adhering to the gaming ball. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down the inside of the first path member 560 via the front plate 564.

  The first receiving unit 561, the second receiving unit 562, and the third receiving unit 563 are portions that receive the game balls flowing down from the game area above the first unit 551 (the direction of the arrow U) into the first unit 551. The opening on the upper side is set to a size larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. The first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are juxtaposed in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at the end of the front plate 564 on the upper side (arrow U direction). Ru.

  In the first receiving unit 561, the receiving width (the width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction)) of the gaming ball is set larger than that of the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563. Thus, the gaming balls flowing into the special winning device 550 are more likely to flow into the first receiving unit 561 than the second receiving unit 562 or the third receiving unit 563.

  Further, the first receiving portion 561 is in communication with the flow-down path formed inside the first unit 551. Thereby, the gaming ball received by the first receiving unit 561 flows down inside the first unit 551. In addition, the flow-down path of the gaming ball of the first unit 551 will be described later.

  The second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 are in communication with a flow-down path formed inside a second unit 552 described later. Thus, the gaming balls received by the second receiving unit 562 and the third receiving unit 563 flow downward inside the second unit 552. The flow-down path of the second unit 552 will be described later.

  The first wall 565 is an inner wall that forms a space for throwing the game ball between the first wall 565 and the fourth wall 573 formed on the second path member 570 described later. One end of the first wall portion 565 is connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end side extends below the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 (arrow L-R And a curved wall portion 565b which is curved in a substantially C-shape in a rear view and is connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

  The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall which covers the upper side of the rolling surface when the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface (the surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fourth wall portion 573 described later. It is formed in the position which is separated above the diameter of the gaming ball in the direction orthogonal to the upper surface of the game ball (in the direction of the arrow U).

  The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573 Ru. Further, the curved wall portion 565 b is formed in a semicircular arc shape centering on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. Thus, by causing the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 to flow down along the inner wall of the curved wall portion 565b, it can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall portion 573, and The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

  The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall forming a space of a path branched from the main flow-down path of the gaming ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and a pair of wall portions protruding from the back surface of the front plate 564 Is set to a size slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thus, the number of paths flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

  The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion that forms the inner surface of the path branched from the main ball throwing path (main path SK3) of the gaming ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551, and protrudes from the back surface of the front plate 564 Between the facing of the pair of wall portions to be set is set to a size slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of paths of game balls flowing down the first unit 551.

  Further, the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 are disposed such that their downstream end portions are opposite to the first unit 551 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction). As a result, it is possible to throw the game balls on both sides in the left-right direction of the first unit 551 from a branch passage described later.

  The second path member 570 is a plate-like base plate 571 that faces the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 573 protruding from the front of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560. And a fifth wall portion 574 projecting downward from the fourth wall portion 573 by a predetermined distance, and a position projecting downward from the fifth wall portion 574 by a predetermined distance And the sixth wall portion 575.

  The base plate 571 is disposed at a position slightly apart from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 and the diameter of the game ball. Thus, the gaming ball can flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. In addition, the base plate 571 is opened at positions corresponding to the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563, respectively, the first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c. A fourth opening 571d opening below the first opening 571a, and a fifth opening 571e and a sixth opening 571f opening respectively above the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575; And a recessed portion 571g located between the fifth wall portion 574 and the sixth wall portion 575 and recessed on the back side.

  The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c are game balls that flow into the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 of the first path member 560 described above. It is an opening for passing the back side of the base plate 571.

  In addition, the base plate 571 has a first rolling portion 576, a second rolling portion 577, and a second rolling portion 577 that protrude to the back side from lower ends of the first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c. A rolling unit 578 is provided. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is transmitted to the third path member 580 described later, and the game ball passing through the second opening 571b or the third opening 571c is transmitted to the second unit 552 described below. Each is thrown.

  In the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d, a part of a third path member 580, which will be described later, is provided on the back side. As a result, the gaming ball passing through the first opening 571a is thrown from the fourth opening 571d to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 571.

  The fourth wall 573 protrudes from the base plate 571 along the lower end of the fourth opening 571 d and extends in the left-right direction (the arrow L-R direction). Further, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward as going from the fourth opening 571d side opened on the left side in the front view of the base plate 571 to the right side in the front view (arrow R direction). . As a result, the game ball, which passes through the fourth opening 571 d and is thrown to the front side of the base plate 571, is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall 573, and the base plate 571 is inclined by the inclination of the upper surface of the fourth wall 573. Can be thrown to the right side (arrow R direction).

  The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion to be a rolling surface of the gaming ball which is thrown from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565 described above, and is of the gaming ball in a direction orthogonal to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. The base plate 571 is provided so as to protrude downward from the diameter and to extend in the left-right direction (the arrow L-R direction) of the base plate 571. In addition, the fifth wall slopes downward in the upper surface (surface in the arrow U direction) from the curved wall 565b side (arrow R direction) to the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction) described later. It is formed. Thereby, the gaming ball which is thrown from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can be rolled to the recessed portion 574g side. Furthermore, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b which are recessed downward in the rolling surface of the gaming ball.

  The first receiving recess 574 a and the second receiving recess 574 b are juxtaposed in the extending direction of the fifth wall portion 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set such that the recess width and the recess depth are larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Furthermore, a fifth opening 571 e opening to the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574 a and the second receiving recess 574 b. As a result, the gaming balls flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b pass through the fifth opening 571e and are thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

  The recessed portion 574 g is formed above the downstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the fifth wall portion 574, and the gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 is recessed The ball can be made to flow into the inside of 574 g and be thrown to the upper portion of the sixth wall portion 575 formed below the concave portion 574 g (in the direction of the arrow D).

  The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion to be the rolling surface of the gaming ball rolled on the fifth wall portion 574 and thrown to the recessed portion 574g, and the gaming ball is directed downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574 The base plate 571 projects from the base plate 571 at a position spaced apart from the diameter of the base plate 571 and extends in the left-right direction (arrow L-R) of the base plate 571. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward from the concave portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the above-described third wall portion 567 side. As a result, the gaming ball which is thrown from the recessed portion 574 g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled to the side of the throwing path formed by the third wall portion 567. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 is provided with a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b which are recessed downward in the rolling surface of the gaming ball.

  The third receiving recess 575 a and the fourth receiving recess 575 b are juxtaposed in the extending direction of the sixth wall 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set such that the recess width and the recess depth are larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Furthermore, a sixth opening 571 f opening to the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575 a and the fourth receiving recess 575 b. Thus, the gaming balls having flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b pass through the sixth opening 571f and are thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

  The third path member 580 is a first covering member 581 disposed on the back side of the second path member 570 in the gravity direction upper side (arrow U direction side) and a gravity direction lower side of the second path member 570 (arrow A second covering member 582 disposed on the back surface in the direction D), a first drive unit 583 disposed between the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582, and a second covering member And a second drive unit 584 disposed on the back of the member 582.

  The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a disposed on the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d described above, and a plate-like attachment portion 581b continuous to the lower side of the curved portion 581a. , Mainly.

  The curved portion 581a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side is opened, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside thereof (See FIG. 24 (a)). Further, the separation distance between the inner wall surface of the curved portion 581a and the projecting end of the first rolling portion 576 is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, the gaming ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576 can be made to flow down along the inner wall of the bending portion 581a, and the ball can be thrown to the lower side of the first rolling portion 581a. Therefore, the rolling time of the gaming ball can be extended by sending the gaming ball to the curved portion 581a which is curved to the back side. As a result, even when the rolling surface of the gaming ball can not be secured on a plane parallel to the gaming area of the gaming board 13, the rolling speed of the gaming ball can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the curved portion 581a is disposed at a position where the lower end is slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game balls, which are flowed down from the first rolling portion 576 along the inner wall of the curved portion 581a and sent to the fourth opening 571d, from flowing back and flowing into the inside of the curved portion 581a.

  In the attachment portion 581b, through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted are formed in two places. Further, the attachment portion 581 b includes a columnar body 551 a protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. The columnar body 551a is provided with a screw hole at its tip end for fastening a second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. As a result, a screw inserted from the rear surface side of the second unit 552 can be screwed into the columnar body 551 a to fasten the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

  The second covering member 582 is a second curved portion 582a disposed on the back side of the sixth opening 571f, and a back side wall portion disposed on the back side of the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b. And 582b.

  The second curved portion 582a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side is opened (see FIG. 24C). In addition, the second curved portion 582a includes an upright wall 582a1, which is erected from the front side toward the back side, inside the U-shape. The inner space of the second curved portion 582a is formed by the standing wall 582a1 next to the first space 582a2 with the first space 582a2 on the left side in the front view (arrow L direction side) and the standing wall 582a1 interposed therebetween. And the second space 582a3.

  The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and are formed from the front side toward the back side. Further, the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are connected on the back side. The inner surface of the first space 582a2 is inclined downward as it goes to the rear side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is inclined downward as it goes to the front side. As a result, the gaming ball fed from the recessed portion 571g to the second bending portion 582a rolls to the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and the bending of the second bending portion 582a at the end on the back side The ball is thrown to the second space 582a3, rolled to the front side by the inclination of the second space 582a3, passed through the opening of the sixth opening 571f, and thrown to the front side of the base plate 571.

  The back side wall 582b is a ball sending path for guiding the gaming balls passing through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f to the lower part of the special winning device 550 by being thrown to the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b. On the back side of the Thereby, the game ball sent to the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b can be collected. Therefore, the ball is thrown to the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, passes the detection devices SE3 to SE6 described later, and the gaming ball having given the gaming value to the player flows down the gaming area again, and the gaming value Can be prevented from being given to the player again.

  The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft which is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, a first solenoid 583a and a first variable plate And a first protection member 583c surrounding the periphery of 583b.

  The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member elongated in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) in accordance with the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a. . Further, in a state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the tip end of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the fifth opening 571e described above, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess It is arranged on the upper side of 574b. Thus, in the state where the first variable plate 583b is projected to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent the game balls from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

  The first protective member 583c is formed in a box shape opened on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is disposed therein. Further, the first protection member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The through hole 583c1 is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through hole 583c1 is inserted through the through hole 581b1 of the first covering member 581 or the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582 into the hole formed in the second path member 570. Screwed together. Therefore, by arranging the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be arranged on the second path member 570. Thereby, the fastening portion of the screw of the 1st covering member 581 and the 2nd covering member 582 can be decreased, and a manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be held between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 is a special prize. If the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 and the second path member 570 are not completely fastened when the device 550 is forcibly removed from the device 550, the gaming ball may become the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 581. It is easy to make it impossible to pass the covering member 582. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the game while being cheated.

  Similar to the first drive unit 583, the second drive unit 584 includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, and a second variable plate 584b connected to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a. And a second protection member 584c covering the periphery of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

  The second variable plate 584 b is formed of a long plate-like body in the left-right direction (the arrow L-R direction), and is bent in a crank shape in a front view. Further, in a state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the tip end of the second variable plate 584b is inserted into the above-described sixth opening 571f, and the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving It is disposed on the upper side of the recess 575b. Thus, in the state where the second variable plate 584b is projected to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game balls from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

  The second protection member 584c is formed in a box shape opened on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is disposed therein. Further, the second protection member 584 c includes a back side wall portion 584 c 1 that covers the back side of the throwing path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. As a result, not only the throwing path can be formed by the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566, but the second path member 570 can be covered by the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566. As a result, an unauthorized member can be inserted from the side surface of the first unit 551, and the detection devices SE3 to SE6 disposed in the second path member 570 can be easily restrained from being tampered with.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21 to FIG. 24, the throwing path of the gaming ball flowing into the inside of the first unit 551 from the first receiving unit 561 will be described. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXI-XXI in FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 24 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa of FIG. 21, and FIG. 24 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb of FIG. FIG.24 (c) is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in the XXIVc-XXIVc line | wire of FIG.

  The gaming balls flowing into the first unit flow down the main routes SK1 to SK6 of the gaming balls along the main route SK1, the main route SK2, the main route SK3, the main route SK4, the main route SK5, and the main route SK6. Alternatively, the main route SK3 in the middle of flowing down the main routes SK1 to SK6 flows into the sub route HK1 communicating with the main route SK3 and flows down the sub route HK1. Alternatively, the main route SK1 flowing through the main route SK1 to the main route SK6 flows into either the secondary route HK2 or the secondary route HK3 communicating with the primary route SK5 and flows down either the secondary route HK2 or the secondary route HK3 Do.

  Further, detection devices SE3 to SE6 for detecting passage of gaming balls are arranged in the sub-paths HK1 to HK3, and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player by detection of the gaming balls of the detection devices SE3 to SE6. Granted. In the present embodiment, the game value is given to the player by the winning balls of the predetermined number of balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is formed by the curved portion 581a of the first covering member 581 and the first rolling portion 576 (see FIG. 24A) of the second path member 570. It is a space, and communicates the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. As described above, the bending portion 581a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side is opened, and the game passes through the main path SK1 The ball can be diverted to the back side. Thereby, when the game ball passes through the space where the area in front view is limited (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d, the amount of movement of the game ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, It is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the main route SK1.This makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551, thereby enhancing the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, as described later, since the game ball flowing into the main route SK1 is given a predetermined game value to the player, the player can play the rolling game ball which may be given the game value It can be made easy for the person to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to make the player more entertaining. The main path SK1 is in communication with a main path SK2 described later, and game balls passing through the main path SK1 can flow into the main path SK2.

  The curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is accommodated and disposed in the recess 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86 described above. Thereby, when the game ball is clogged in the main path SK1 (the flow is slow), the defect can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and an error can be notified.

  Further, the passage width of the main path SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and set smaller than the opening through which the gaming ball of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) passes. As a result, when a gaming ball (illegal gaming ball) having a diameter larger than the reference gaming ball diameter (11 mm) is manufactured and fraud (gaming) is performed with the ball, the ball is used as a main route. It can be fixed inside of SK1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that an unauthorized gaming ball is flowed down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 disposed on the downstream side of the main path SK1 and the fraud is performed. Further, by holding an illegal gaming ball on the main path SK1, it is possible to detect by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and to notify an error (incorrect). In this case, an illegal game ball is inserted into one of the openings of the detection devices SE3 to SE7, and the detection devices SE3 to SE7 continue detection, and payout of the illegal game ball (gaming value) To get

  The main path SK2 is a space formed between the first wall portion 565 of the first path member 560 and the fourth wall portion 573 of the second path member 570. The gaming ball introduced into the main path SK2 rolls down the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flows downward. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed to extend in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and to be inclined downward as it is separated from the fourth opening 571d.

  Therefore, since the above-described curved portion 581a (curved path to the back side) is formed in the switching portion of the game ball in the throwing direction (connected portion of the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), the player can It is possible to suppress losing the game ball flowing down the SK1. That is, in the case where a curved path is formed on the back side in the middle of a linear ball sending path (for example, the main path SK2) extending in the left-right direction, the gaming ball rolls with constant acceleration in the curved path. Since the acceleration is changed (smaller), the player may lose sight of the game ball if the line of sight following the game ball precedes the game ball.

  On the other hand, since the curved path to the back side is formed in the part where the rolling direction of the gaming ball is switched and the rolling speed of the gaming ball is originally slowed down, the player's line of sight precedes the gaming ball. Can be suppressed to prevent the player from losing sight of the game balls.

  The curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is the left side (arrow L direction) of the first unit 551 arranged slightly rightward (arrow R direction) with respect to the central portion of the game board 13 in the left-right direction. Formed at the side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where it is easy for the player located at the front of the game board 13 to visually recognize the first unit 551. It can be easy to suppress losing the game ball passing SK2.

  Further, the main path SK2 is in communication with the curved path WK1, and is in communication with a main path SK3 described later via the curved path WK1. As a result, the gaming balls passing through the main path SK2 flow into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. The detailed description of the curved path WK1 will be described later.

  The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall portion 573 of the second path member 570 and the fifth wall portion 574. The gaming ball introduced into the main path SK3 rolls down the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flows downward. In addition, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above is projected onto the main path SK3 at the time of extension of the main path SK3. In a state where the first variable plate 583b protrudes above the main path SK3, the gaming balls rolling on the upper portion of the fifth wall portion 574 roll on the upper surface of the first variable plate 583b and are thrown to the main path SK4. Ru.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the first variable plate 583b is retracted from above the main path SK3, the subpath HK1 of the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574 A game ball is flowed in. The secondary path HK1 is thrown to the recovery path formed by the back side wall 582b through the fifth opening 571e.

  As described above, the first unit 551 includes the first variable plate 583b projecting on the throwing path of the gaming ball or retracting from the throwing path, and the displacement of the first variable plate 583b makes the main unit of the first unit 551 Since it can be changed between when the gaming ball flowing down the route SK3 is guided to the sub route HK1 and when it is guided to the main route SK4, it changes in the flowing direction of the gaming ball flowing down the first unit 551 Can be given.

  In this case, since the gaming ball flowing into the secondary path HK1 is given a predetermined gaming value to the player, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the gaming ball has flowed into the secondary path HK1. Further, the first variable plate 583b is disposed in the middle of the throwing route formed in the first unit 551 and is displaced in the player's viewing direction (arrow F-B direction). The displacement of 583 b can be made less visible. As a result, it is possible to focus on the flowing game balls of the first unit 551, and it is easy to give the player an interest due to the flow of the game balls.

  In addition, the sub-passage HK1 is located below the main pass SK3 to throw the gaming ball from the right (arrow R direction side) to the left (arrow L direction side) in front view, and the gaming ball from the left It is formed in the fifth wall portion 574 that forms between the main path SK6 for throwing the ball to the right side. Therefore, since the sub route HK1 is formed by utilizing the space between the game balls being thrown to the left and right, it is possible to suppress the outer shape of the first unit 551 from increasing in the vertical direction. As a result, by making the external shape of the first unit 551 smaller, the range in which the player can follow the game ball with eyes can be narrowed, and it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. it can.

  The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recess 571g and the projection 568 of the first path member 560. The gaming ball flowing into the main path SK4 contacts the projection 568 and is thrown to the inside (rear side) of the recess 571g, and then rolls around the projection 568 along the inner surface of the recess to be recessed The ball is thrown to the outside (front side) of the installation part. That is, the gaming ball is rolled so as to bypass the projection 568. Further, the main path SK4 is in communication with the main path SK5, and game balls passing through the main path SK4 can flow into the main path SK5.

  The main path SK5 is a space formed by the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above. The gaming ball introduced into the main path SK5 rolls the inside of the second space 582a3 to the front side after rolling the inside of the first space 582a2 to the back side as described above. Further, in the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the above-described second drive unit 584 protrudes onto the main path SK5 when it is extended. In a state in which the second variable plate 584b protrudes on the main path SK5, the gaming ball rolling on the inside of the second curved portion 582a is thrown to the main path SK6.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the second variable plate 584b is retracted from the main path SK5, the subpath HK2 of the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall portion 575 The game ball is dropped. The sub-passage HK2 is thrown to the recovery path formed by the back side wall 582b through the sixth opening 571f.

  Further, the second curved portion 582a constituting the main path SK5 is formed to be curved to the back side as described above, and the game ball passing through the main path SK5 can be diverted to the back side. As a result, even when the area in front view is set to a predetermined limited space, it is possible to increase the distance over which the game ball can roll.

  Furthermore, the second variable plate 584b is configured to be extended or retracted by a part on the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part on the downstream side of the main path SK5. The curved path to the back side is formed between the upstream side of and the downstream side of the main path SK5, so the time during which there is a possibility that the gaming value may be given to the player by the gaming ball passing through the main path SK5. It can be long. As a result, it is possible to extend the time for giving the player an interest.

  An auxiliary passage HK3 is in communication with the communication portion between the main passage SK4 and the main passage SK5. The secondary path HK3 is a space formed between the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the back side wall portion 584c1 of the third path member 580.

  Secondary path HK3 is in a different direction (front view left direction (arrow L direction)) from the flow-down direction (front view right direction (arrow R direction)) of the gaming ball when gaming balls flowed from main path SK4 to main path SK5 Further, the sub-passage HK3 is set such that the lower inner edge of the inflow port thereof is lower than the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of the arrow D).

  Here, when the gaming ball normally flows from the main route SK4 to the main route SK5 (in a state where no external force other than gravity acts), the gaming ball is flowed from the main route SK4 to the main route SK5 or the sub route HK2. Ru. On the other hand, the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 to the sub route HK2, and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b abuts on the game ball, external force other than gravity on the game ball. When the second variable plate 584 b causes the game ball to be pushed out to the inflow port of the sub path HK 3 by the second variable plate 584 b, the game ball is introduced into the sub path HK 3.

  Therefore, the first unit 551 is provided with a second variable plate 584b projecting on the throwing path of the gaming ball or retracted from above the throwing path, and the main path SK4 of the first unit 551 is displaced by the displacement of the second variable plate 584b. Alternatively, since the gaming balls flowing down the main route SK5 are guided to any of the main route SK5, the secondary route HK2 or the secondary route HK3, it is possible to give a change in the flow direction of the gaming balls flowing down the first unit 551.

  In this case, since a predetermined gaming value is given to the player by the gaming ball flowing into the secondary path HK2 or secondary path HK3, the player is carefully watched whether the gaming ball has flowed into the secondary path HK2 or secondary path HK3. It can be done. In addition, since the second variable plate 584 b is disposed in the middle of the throwing path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584 b 2. As a result, it is possible to focus on the gaming balls flowing down the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player an interest due to the flow-down of the gaming balls.

  Further, as described above, on the upstream side across the main path SK4, the first variable plate 583b switches the flow path of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game ball not to flow into the upstream sub-route HK1 and to which the game value is not given to the player to flow further downstream and to flow into the sub-route HK2 or HK3. Therefore, by passing the switching portion of the flow path through the game ball, which may have been given the game value to the player once, the game ball is given the desire to flow into the secondary paths HK2 and HK3 again. be able to.

  Further, a main path SK4 curved to the back side is disposed between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 in which the flow paths of the game balls are switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range in front view, and the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball. That is, by causing the player to recognize the position of the gaming ball through the main route SK4 after flowing down the main route SK3, the player pays attention to the game ball rolling on the main route SK5 connected downstream of the main route SK4. It can be done easily. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the game balls in which the game balls flow into the sub routes HK2 and HK3, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  At the left and right ends on the front side of the second variable 584b, an inclined surface 584b1 (see FIG. 24C) is formed to be inclined toward the back side toward the end in the left-right direction. Thereby, when the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the gaming ball flows from the main route SK4 into the sub route HK2, the inclined surface 584b1 is brought into contact with the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b and the gaming ball. Thus, the gaming ball can be pushed out to the inflow side of the sub route HK3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the second variable plate 584 b and the first path member 560 by the inclined surface 584 b 1 and the sub route HK 2, and the flow direction A plurality of paths (three paths in this embodiment) can be formed.

  The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main path SK6 is thrown to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, when the gaming balls having flowed into the first receiving portion 561 are not flowed into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, the game value is not given to the player, and the main path SK6 through the game board 13 is The ball is thrown to the game area and collected from the out port 71 formed on the game board 13.

<Guide means for displacing the game ball in the back and forth direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the gaming ball from the main route SK2 to the main route SK3 will be described. 25 (a) and 26 (a) are partial enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa of FIG. 21, and FIGS. 25 (b) and 26 (b) are XXVb of FIG. 25 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st unit 551 in -XXVb line | wire. FIG. 27A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25A, and FIG. 27B is a first unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 27 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a first unit 551 taken along line XXVIIc-XXVIIc of FIG. 25 (a). Fig.28 (a) is a schematic cross section of the 1st unit 551 in the XXVb-XXVb line of FIG. 25 (a), FIG.28 (b) is the 1st unit in the XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb line of FIG. 25 (a) It is a schematic cross section of 551. FIG. In FIG. 26, a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main path SK2, the main path SK3 and the curved path WK1 are first recesses recessed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 in an arc shape in cross section toward the back side. 571h, a second recessed portion 571i and a third recessed portion 571j, a first step portion 571k protruding in a step-like manner from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and a second step protruding in a step-like manner from the inner wall on the main path SK3 And a unit 571 m.

  The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first protrusion 564b, a second protrusion 564c, and a third protrusion 564d at positions facing the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j. It is provided in a projecting manner.

  The dimension L11 (see FIG. 28A) between the second recess 571i and the second protrusion 564c is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the gap between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571 is also set. Is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28A). As a result, the game ball which is thrown between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d is opposed to the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d, so as to slow the rolling (flowing down) speed of the gaming ball it can.

  Further, the dimension between the first concave portion 571 h and the first convex portion 564 b and the dimension between the third concave portion 571 j and the third convex portion 564 d are the dimension between the second concave portion 571 i and the second convex portion 564 c. The distance is set to be substantially the same as L11.

  Furthermore, the protruding end surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d face the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28A) is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, the game ball to be thrown between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d is opposed to the first convex portion The portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d can collide with each other. As a result, it is possible to slow the rolling (falling) speed of the gaming ball.

  Also, in this case, the gaming balls in contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d flow down the inside of the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. . Therefore, the game balls flowing down can be guided in the direction in which the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j are recessed.

  The stepped portion 571k is protruded to the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2. Further, the stepped portion 571k is formed on the downstream side in the path of the main path SK2. The upstream end of the main path SK2 of the step portion 571k is set to a position projecting to the front side from the front surface of the base plate 571 and the downstream end is at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. It is set. As a result, the gaming ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be moved to the front side by contacting the shoulder 571k.

  Further, the stepped portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface in which an end portion on the upstream side protrudes to the front side from the upstream side toward the downstream side. As a result, it is possible to flow down the main path SK2 and guide the gaming ball in contact with the upstream end of the step portion 571k to the front side while guiding it to the front side.

  Further, the upstream end of the step portion 571k is formed on the upstream side of the main path SK2 with respect to the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, it is possible to make the gaming ball guided to the front side in contact with the stepped portion 571k be easily in contact with the first convex portion 564b.

  The first concave portion 571 h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2 and is formed in an elliptical shape long in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) in a front view. Further, the first concave portion 571 h is formed on the base plate 571 at a position where it is protruded to the front side by the stepped portion 571 k. The depth of the recess on the back side at the center in the vertical direction of the first recess 571h is set to be substantially the same as the height L22 (see FIG. 27B) on the front of the step 571k. As a result, the gaming ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown without runaway flows into the inside of the first recess 571h without displacing the first recess 571h in the recess direction (back side (arrow B direction)). be able to.

  On the other hand, the game ball which is thrown the main path SK2 in a violent state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the step 571k and is guided to the front side of the main path SK2 and the first convex of the front plate 564 Abut on the portion 564b. As a result, it is possible to throw the gaming ball to the inside of the first recess 571 h while suppressing the runaway of the gaming ball.

  Furthermore, the first concave portion 571h has a height dimension Y8 from the rolling surface of the gaming ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface on the fourth wall portion 573 on the arrow U direction side) to the concave bottom surface in the orthogonal direction FIG. 25A is set to the radius of the gaming ball, and is concave in the direction orthogonal to the rolling surface of the gaming ball on the downstream side of the main path SK2 (the surface on the fourth wall portion 573 in the direction of arrow U). The height dimension Y9 (see FIG. 25A) to the bottom surface is set higher than the radius of the gaming ball. Thereby, when the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is sent along the first recess 571h, the resistance in the direction of lifting up (direction of arrow U) acts on the game ball to rotate the game ball. Dynamic speed can be reduced. As a result, the rolling speed of the gaming ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be made sufficiently small, and the gaming ball can be made to flow smoothly smoothly.

  The radius X11 (see FIG. 27B) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the gaming ball, and when the gaming ball is thrown inside the first recess 571h, It is possible to abut the gaming ball on the inner wall. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the contact portion of the gaming ball in contact with the first concave portion 571h is two places, and to suppress an increase in resistance to rolling of the gaming ball due to the increase in the contact portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from stopping on the main route SK2.

  The first convex portion 564b formed at a position opposed to the first concave portion 571h is the throwing direction of the game ball in the main path SK2 from the upstream end of the first concave portion 571h (arrow R direction in FIG. 27B). The distance value is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball. Accordingly, it is possible to easily throw the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 to the inside of the first concave portion 571h by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

  The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1, and the outer shape in front view is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the gravity direction (arrow U-D direction). Further, in the second concave portion 571i, the central position in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in the front view is set at the middle position of the curved path WK1. Furthermore, the second concave portion 571i is formed at the central position in the direction perpendicular to the ball throwing direction of the curved path WK1 at the central position in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) in front view.

  The main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25A) orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball in the front view. The width dimension L18 is set to approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the gaming ball.

  In the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j, the maximum width dimension in the short direction in a front view is set to about 1/2 of the width dimension L18 described above. Thereby, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1 and main path SK2) can be passed through the front side of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j. The game ball can be easily thrown inside of the first recess 571 h, the second recess 571 i and the third recess 571 j.

  The stepped portion 571m is protruded to the front side from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3. Further, the stepped portion 571m is formed on the upstream side in the path of the main path SK3. The step 571m is set such that the downstream end of the main path SK3 protrudes to the front side of the base plate 571 and the upstream end is set to the same position as the back side of the curved path WK1. Ru. As a result, after the gaming ball flowing down the main path SK3 is thrown to the downstream side more than the shoulder 571m, it is possible to suppress backflow (springing back) beyond the shoulder 571m.

  The third concave portion 571 j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK 3, and is formed in an elliptical shape long in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) in a front view. In addition, the third concave portion 571 j is formed on the base plate 571 at a position where it is protruded to the front side by the stepped portion 571 m. The depth of the recess on the back side at the center in the vertical direction of the third recess 571 j is set to be substantially the same as the height dimension L 23 (see FIG. 27C) on the front side of the step 571 m. As a result, the gaming ball to which the main path KR3 is thrown can be easily discharged from the inside to the outside of the third recess 571j.

  Furthermore, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is the end on the upstream side of the main path SK3 of the first variable plate 583b that switches the path flowing down to the sub path HK1 described later (arrow R direction side It is arranged above the direction of gravity (the direction of arrow U) of the end portion). Thus, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b is displaced upward due to its displacement (when the variable plate 583b is disposed above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), the main path By throwing the game ball passing through SK3 along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, the ball can be thrown without being caught by the first variable plate 583b. As a result, in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583 b are adjacent to each other, the first variable plate 583 b does not need to be disposed downward, and an increase in the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 can be suppressed. .

  Further, in this case, the third concave portion 571 j is formed such that the longitudinal direction in the front view is horizontal (in the arrow L-R direction), and is spaced upward with respect to the gaming ball flowing down the main path SK3. The resistance in the lifting direction can be exerted on the gaming ball which is thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball, which is thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b, is caught on the first variable plate 583b.

  Furthermore, the first unit 551 is a main path SK2 for throwing game balls on one side (arrow R direction side) in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board 13 in front view, and the game balls thrown from the main path SK2. The curved path WK1 includes a main path SK3 for throwing the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the main path SK2, and a curved path WK1 for connecting one side of the main path SK2 and the main path SK3. Because guide means (the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i) for throwing the game ball to at least one of the front side or the back side of the game board is provided on the inner wall of the front side and the back side of the game board, The game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-rear direction of the game board 13 in front view).

  Therefore, the flow of the game ball accelerated by rolling the main path SK2 (first path) than when the ball sending path of the game ball passing the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction in front view You can slow down the speed. Therefore, the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2 because the flow-down speed of the gaming ball can be reduced, or the throwing direction of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1 (horizontal direction in front view It is possible to suppress shaking (in the direction of the arrow L-R)). As a result, the player's line of sight can follow the gaming ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a predetermined direction. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the gaming ball thrown on the curved route WK1.

  In addition, since it is possible to suppress swinging (flickering) of the gaming ball in the horizontal direction (front view left and right direction) with respect to the game board 13 in front view, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 It is not necessary to lengthen the path to suppress swinging of the gaming ball, and the path of the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be accommodated in a predetermined area with respect to the gaming board 13, and a space for arranging the first unit 551 with respect to the gaming board 13 can be secured.

  Furthermore, the first concave portion 571h has a larger recess width in the direction (arrow U-D direction) orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the main path SK2 toward the upstream side of the main path SK2. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received in the first recess 571h. In addition, since the first recess 571h is set to have a smaller recess width toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, the gaming ball received in the first recess 571h can be easily removed from the same position. That is, the first concave portion 571h can easily receive the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2, and can easily make the game ball come out of the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily throw the gaming ball to the second concave portion 571i of the curved path WK1 communicated with the downstream side of the main path SK2.

  In this case, the recessed end in the flow-down direction (arrow R direction) of the main path SK2 of the first recess 571h is the rolling surface (fourth) of the main path SK2 in the rolling direction of the gaming ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown. It is formed at a position beyond the upper surface of the wall portion 573). Therefore, it is possible to make the gaming ball coming out of the first recess 571 h less susceptible to the influence of the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily throw the gaming ball that has slipped out of the first recess 571 h to the second recess 571 i of the curved path WK1.

  In addition, the main path SK2 is the inside of the path from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (that is, from the left side in the front view (direction side of arrow L) to the right side in the direction of arrow R). A space is formed inclined to the front plate 564 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). Further, the main path SK2 is formed such that its rolling surface (surface on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the fourth wall portion 573) is inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the gaming ball can be easily reduced by the first convex portion 564b, and it is possible to suppress the backflow of the main path SK2 by the reaction force of the gaming ball flowing down the main path SK2 colliding with the curved wall portion 565b. . As a result, the gaming ball can be stably flowed down at the change point in the throwing direction of the gaming ball.

  The upper end portion (arrow U direction side end portion) of the second concave portion 571i is drawn linearly along the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the main path SK2 (the fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25A). As a result, it is possible to easily receive the game balls flowing into the curved path WK1 by sending the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed to the second recess 571i.

  A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at a change point (curved path WK1) in the throwing direction of the gaming ball. As described above, the front face of the base plate 571 excluding the protruding end surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d, and the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28 (a)) between the face and the face is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, the gaming ball flowing down between the second recess 571i and the second projection 564c is It can be made to abut on convex part 564c, and can be pushed in inside the 2nd crevice 571i. Thus, the gaming ball flowing into the main path SK3 (disengaging from between the second recess 571i and the second protrusion 564c) can flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

  Here, the game ball sent from the main route SK2 to the curved route WK1 is more likely to flow down the position of the main route SK2 in the rolling direction of the game ball. Therefore, the gaming ball flowing down the inside of the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the area on the right side (the arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i in the front view, and flows down. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the throwing direction of the gaming balls flowing into the main path SK3 to the flow-down direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the concave portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow-down at the change point in the throwing direction of the game ball (see FIG. 28).

  Furthermore, since the throwing direction of the gaming ball to be thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 can be directed in the direction toward the flow-down direction of the main path SK3, the force of the gaming ball colliding with the curved wall portion 565b is reduced. Can. As a result, breakage of the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collision of the game ball with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

  The first convex portion 564b is formed on a first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed on a second path member 570 disposed on the back side.

  Here, when a recess (a recess corresponding to the first recess 571 h of the second route member 570) recessed toward the front side is formed in the first route member 560, the first route member 560 for recessing the recess is formed. Needs to be thicker. Accordingly, the transparency of the first path member 560 is deteriorated by the increase in the thickness of the first path member 560, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

  In addition, when a recessed portion is formed on the back surface of the bulging portion that partially bulges in the front of the first path member 560, the bulging portion bulges out on the front side of the first path member 560. It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front side of the lens. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560 by the amount the first path member 560 is separated from the glass unit 16.

  On the other hand, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first concave portion 571h is formed on the second path member 570 disposed on the back side. The thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be reduced. Moreover, since the part which protrudes in the front side of the 1st path | route member 560 is not formed, the 1st path | route member 560 can be closely approached to the glass unit 16, and can be arrange | positioned. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the gaming ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

  The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow D) and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 in front view It is formed to be inclined. As a result, the gaming ball flowing down between the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the area on the right side (arrow R direction) of the second concave portion 571i by the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, since the second concave portion 571i is formed by curving the concave surface, the gaming ball that flows downward by coming into contact with the inside of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second concave portion 571i in front view The ball can be thrown toward the flow-down direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall 565b side to the concave portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the inflow of gaming balls from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 can be made smooth.

  In addition, the second concave portion 571i is a virtual line IL4 (the end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the front view is drawn linearly along the rolling trajectory of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the main path SK3. It is formed at a position in contact with FIG. 25 (a). Thus, the height of the center of the gaming ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recess 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game balls discharged from the second recess 571i are thrown toward the flow-down direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the concave portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side) Because the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is in contact with the main path SK3 or the inner surface of the curved path WK1 and the ball is thrown to the main path SK3, the ball collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1. It is possible to suppress stagnation inside those paths.

  The flow-down direction of the gaming ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed to the throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main path SK3. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the gaming balls flowing into the main route SK3 from the bending route WK1 are thrown in a direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming balls of the bending route WK1. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball thrown to the main path SK3 collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and stagnates.

<Arranging the first member to which high gaming value is awarded>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29 (a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29 (b) is a rear view of the second unit 552. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 includes a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)), and a fourth path member 610 thereof. Between the fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and the back side of the fifth path member 620 to form a ball sending path of the gaming ball between the fifth path member 620 And a decorative member 650 disposed on the side surface of the second unit 552.

  The fourth path member 610 is attached to the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above. Further, the fourth path member 610 is a mounting plate 611 formed in a plate shape having a vertically-long rectangular shape in a front view, and stands from the end of the mounting plate 611 on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) A side wall portion 612 is provided, and a first communication passage 615 and a second communication passage 616 whose internal space is in communication with the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551.

  The mounting plate 611 is circularly recessed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)), and a through hole is formed on the bottom surface of the concave portion, and a fifth path member 620 A path side fastening portion 618 and a decoration side fastening portion 619 which are provided in a circular shape protruding on the side (the back side (arrow B direction side)) and in which holes to which screws are screwed are formed It has an opening 613 opened at the center of the plate 611, and a second insertion part 614 opened outside the opening 613.

  The insertion portion 617 is a portion through which the tip of a screw for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is inserted, and is formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment) of the mounting plate 611.

  The path side fastening portion 618 is a portion to which a screw inserted through an insertion hole 632 of a sixth path member 630 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. Thus, the sixth path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

  The decorative side fastening portion 619 is a portion to which a screw inserted through a fastening hole 652 formed in a decorative member 650 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. Thereby, the decoration member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

  The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583 a and the second solenoid 584 a disposed in the first unit 551. Accordingly, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed inside the opening 613. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the fourth path member 610 can be prevented from becoming large in the front-rear direction, and the circumference of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is It can be surrounded by the fourth path member 610.

  The first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are formed in a U shape in which the upper side (arrow U direction side) opens in a front view, and is extended in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) . In addition, the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are abutted to the back side of the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551 at the end on the front side, and The end of the side is brought into contact with the front side of the end of the first inlet 625 and the end of the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620 described later. Furthermore, the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are formed to be inclined downward toward the fifth path member 620 from the first unit 551 side. As a result, the gaming ball which is thrown from the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551 to the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 is the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 615. The communication passage 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620.

  The second insertion portion 614 is a hole for inserting a screw to be screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the projecting portion 86b when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the projecting portion 86b of the center frame 86, and the projecting portion It is formed at a position corresponding to the screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. Thus, the fourth path member 610 can be disposed on the back surface of the projecting portion 86 b of the center frame 86.

  The side wall portion 612 is a side surface of the first solenoid 583 a and a second solenoid 584 a disposed on the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the first unit 551 when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened. The plate member covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611, and is erected on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611. The vertical dimension of the side wall portion 612 on the front side (the first unit 551 side) is set to a length that contacts the protruding portion 86 b of the center frame 86. Thus, the side wall portion 612 is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that the formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be suppressed. As a result, it can be suppressed that an illegal thing is inserted between the 1st unit 551 and the 2nd unit 552.

  The fifth path member 620 is a plate member 621 formed of a substantially rectangular plate in a front view, a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inlet 626. From the periphery of the first inlet 625, and a second standing wall 623 standing on the sixth path member 630 side (rear side (arrow B direction side)) from the lower side of the second inlet 626 to the lower side of the second inlet 626; The first upright wall 624 erected on the sixth path member 630 side below the inflow port 625 and the to-be-fastened portion 627 projecting from the plate member 621 to the sixth path member 630 are mainly used. Prepare for

  The plate member 621 is formed in an outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 in a front view, and is disposed on the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the fourth path member 610. Further, the plate member 621 includes a central opening 622 which is opened at a central portion in a front view. The central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in a rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. Thus, when the plate member 621 (fifth path member 620) is disposed on the back side of the fourth path member 610, the second solenoid 584a, which is inserted through the inside of the opening 613 of the fourth path member 610, It can be disposed inside the opening 622.

  The first inflow port 625 and the second inflow port 626 are, as described above, the gaming ball that interlocks the first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 of the fourth path member 610 with the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member It is a portion (opening to allow inflow) to be received between the facings of 630.

  The to-be-fastened portion 627 is a portion to which a tip end of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in a sixth path member 630 described later is screwed, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. Thus, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened. Further, the projection dimension of the to-be-fastened portion 627 to the sixth path member 630 side is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, a gap capable of flowing the gaming ball is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630.

  The first upright wall 624 is a wall for guiding the gaming ball introduced from the first inlet 625 between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630, and is extended downward and 2 It is connected with the standing wall 623. The second upright wall 623 is a wall for guiding the gaming ball introduced into the fifth path member 620 from the second inlet, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. In addition, the description about the throwing path | route formed of the 1st standing wall 624 and the 2nd standing wall 623 is mentioned later.

  The sixth path member 630 is a base plate 631 formed of a substantially rectangular plate in a front view, and a second central opening 634 opened in the base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. And an insertion hole 632 and a fastening hole 633 formed through the periphery of the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.

  The second central opening 634 is formed to have substantially the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 in a front view, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. As a result, when the second unit 552 is disposed on the back side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be disposed inside the second central opening 634.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the second unit 552 along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 is formed by being surrounded by the sub-path HK4 formed by being surrounded by the first standing wall 624 of the fifth path member 620 and by the second standing wall 623. And a secondary path HK5.

  The sub-passage HK4 is extended downward from the first inlet 625, and then bent to the side of the sub-passage HK5 described later to be communicated with the sub-passage HK5. In addition, a detection device SE7 that detects the passage of the game ball is disposed in the extension portion downward in the sub path HK4. Thereby, it can be detected that the gaming ball has passed through the sub route HK4. In addition, when the detection device SE7 detects the passage of the game ball, a predetermined game value is given to the player (in the present embodiment, a winning ball of the game ball).

  In the present embodiment, the number (for example, three) of game balls played by the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is provided in the first unit 551 as the detection device SE3. The number of game balls (for example, 15) which are awarded to the player as the game ball passes through SE6 is smaller than the number of game balls (for example, 15). That is, the gaming value given to the player as the detection device SE7 passes is given to the player as the game ball passes the detection devices SE3 to SE6 disposed in the first unit 551. It is set higher than the game value to be played. This makes it easy to focus attention on the gaming balls passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to make the player more entertaining.

  The sub-passage HK5 extends downward from the second inlet 626 and is in communication with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10 below the second unit 552. Therefore, the gaming balls flowing down the secondary path HK5 are collected without giving the player a gaming value. In addition, the gaming ball detected by the detection device SE7 flowing down the sub path HK4 is thrown to the sub path HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, the special winning device 550 is formed of a material capable of transmitting light and is disposed on the front side of the game area, and the second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit 551. The first unit 551 includes a first receiving unit 561 capable of entering game balls, and the second unit 552 includes a second receiving unit 562 and a third receiving unit capable of entering game balls. The gaming ball having 563 and entering the first receiving part 561 has a higher gaming value to the player than the gaming ball entering the second receiving part 562 and the third receiving part 563 (payout of gaming ball) Is granted.

  Therefore, the routing of the ball sending paths of the game balls of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is formed in a complicated manner (for example, the ball sending path of the first unit 551 and the ball sending path of the second unit 552 are in the front-rear direction in front view In the case where the game balls are flowed down at the same timing to the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the game balls flowing down the first unit 551 can be more easily watched by the player as compared with the case where Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down the first unit 551 including the first receiving portion 561 having high gaming value. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the gaming balls passing through the path where the player is given a high gaming value, so it is possible to easily improve the player's interest.

  In addition, the inflow port (first receiving portion 561) of the throwing path for throwing the gaming ball to the first unit 551, and the inflow port (second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving path for throwing the gaming ball to the second unit 552). Since the receiving unit 563 is formed in the adjacent position, it flows into the first unit 551 to which a high gaming value is imparted, or flows into the second unit 552 to which a low gaming value is imparted, or the gaming ball is It can be made difficult for the player to make a decision until the inflow. As a result, it is possible to easily give the player an interest until immediately before the gaming ball flows into the special winning device 550.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the arrangement of the special winning device 550 on the center frame 86 will be described. FIG. 33 (a) is a front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the center frame 86. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. As shown in FIG. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86 taken along the line XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. FIG. 37 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37 (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 37 (a) and 37 (b) correspond to the cross section of FIG.

<Fixing means for biasing the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 has the first unit 551 removable on the front side of the center frame 86 and the back side of the center frame 86 with the center frame 86 interposed therebetween. And a possible second unit.

  The first unit 551 has the front surface side of the projecting portion 86b in a state where the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side of the first unit 551 are inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86. Will be placed on In addition, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551 a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the second unit 552 side.

  The columnar body 551a is formed at a position opposed to the insertion portion 617 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552, and has a hole at its tip end in which a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 is screwed.

  Fixing of the first unit 551 to the center frame 86 is fixed by screws inserted in the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. Specifically, the first unit 551 is disposed between the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) with the projecting portion 86 b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween. Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted from the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

  Furthermore, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, a screw hole 86b4 (a screw provided in the second insertion portion 614 formed in the second unit 552 is recessed in the projecting portion 86b) By screwing together with reference to FIG. 35), it is possible to fasten the protruding portion 86b and the fourth path member 610. As described above, since the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, the first unit 551 is engaged with the projecting portion 86b by fastening the fourth path member 610 to the projecting portion 86b. It is concluded against.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37B) in the vertical direction of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570) It is set to be slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37 (b)). Further, a distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37B) from the contact surface of the first unit 551 with the front of the base plate 60 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is the first unit When 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, they are set to be slightly smaller than the thickness dimension Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37B).

  Thus, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened, the first unit 551 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (back side). Thus, the formation of a gap between the front surface of the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is not necessary to fasten the first unit 551 from the front side of the base plate 60 with a screw, and a fastening margin for the screw is not necessary for the front of the first unit 551. An area on the front side can be used as a throwing space for gaming balls. As a result, it is possible to secure a throwing space for gaming balls formed in the first unit 551.

  In addition, the fastening portion (columnar body 551a) of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is formed so as to protrude on the back side of the first unit 551, so that the fastening portion is formed on the front side of the base plate 60 In comparison with the above, it is possible to secure a throwing space for gaming balls formed in the first unit 551.

  Further, since the second unit 552 can be biased to the base plate 60 (front side), the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being tampered with by inserting an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire from between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60 facing each other. it can.

  Furthermore, since the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 by a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, a fastening margin (screw is inserted to the base plate 60 on the front side of the first unit 551). It is not necessary to form the extended portion in which the opening is formed. As a result, with respect to the outer shape of the first unit 551 in front view, the entire region can be used as a throwing route, and the throwing route of the first unit 551 can be enlarged.

  Further, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is out due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. Can be suppressed. As a result, fraud to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the fastening portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, by the player recognizing the configuration for fixing the first unit 551 to the base plate 60, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  Further, the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base plate 60 by the fixing means (screws) fastened from the back side of the base plate 60. The first unit 551 and the base plate 60 can be disposed in close contact with each other by the urging force to the back side acting on the one unit 551.

  Furthermore, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 in a state in which a throwing path capable of throwing gaming balls is formed, respectively, the throwing path of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 It can suppress that the throwing path | route of the unit 552 shifts | deviates at the time of the assembly with the 1st unit 551 and the 2nd unit 552. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the gaming balls flowing down the inside of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 stop in the throwing path of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

  In addition, the first unit 551 includes rolling surfaces (a second rolling portion 577 and a third rolling portion 578) for causing the game balls sent to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552. Therefore, if each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is to be fastened to the projecting portion 86 b of the center frame 86, an assembly error of the first unit 551 with respect to the center frame 86 occurs, and There is a risk that the game balls will not be smoothly sent from the unit 551 to the second unit 552.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 as described above, the error in fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is minimized (when fastening) It is possible to minimize the place where the error can occur. As a result, it is possible to smoothly send the game balls from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

  The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping with at least a portion of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in a rear view . Thus, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after removing the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the first units 551 forming the main routes SK1 to SK6 are removed from the center frame 86 and the main routes SK1 to SK6 are tampered with.

  Further, the projecting portion 86b includes an erected portion 86b5 erected (folded back) on the second unit 552 side at an end portion (see FIG. 33B). Thus, in the state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with the projecting portion 86 b of the center frame 86 interposed therebetween, the standing portion 86 b 5 is the same as that of the first unit 551. A state in which the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side are enclosed is provided.

  Therefore, in a state in which the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible that an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire is inserted between the opposing sides of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first solenoid 583 a and the second solenoid 584 a of the first unit 551 from being tampered with when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86.

  Further, between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, a part on the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed, and a standing portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed using the space where the standing portion 86b5 is disposed. Therefore, since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are partially accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are on the rear side. It can suppress projecting. As a result, the rear side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be easily surrounded by the second unit 552, and the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be tampered with from the rear side. This can be suppressed by the two units 552.

  Furthermore, since a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the gaming ball flowing down the second unit 552 can be The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can hide the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize. Thereby, even if the flow line of the gaming ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the gaming ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in the front view, the gaming ball flowing down the first unit 551 It can be made easy for the player to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 where the game value higher than the game value given to the player is given to the player by the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 Being able to do this, it is easy to give the player an interest.

  In the state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is disposed in a state of covering the inner side surface of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the insertion of an illegal object such as a wire or a piano wire into the special winning device 550 through the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 583a disposed in the first unit 551 has a central opening formed on the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 on the back side. 622 and is inserted inside the second central opening 634. Thus, it is possible to suppress the second unit 552 from bulging back (in the direction of the arrow B) and to prevent the unauthorized access of the first solenoid 583a such as a wire or a piano wire.

  In addition, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, bending of the second path member 570 of the first unit 551 in which the first solenoid 583a is disposed can be suppressed. As a result, the passage of the game balls of the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are disposed so as to be enclosed by the opening 86b1 of the projecting portion 86b formed in the center frame 86, the load is relatively large (heavy). The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be supported by the opening 86b1 (protruding portion 86b). As a result, it is possible to suppress that the protruding portion 86b is bent by the load of the special winning device 550.

  Therefore, the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from bending (bending), so that the arrangement of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 is displaced relative to the base plate 60. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow the game balls from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

  Further, the second rolling portion 577 and the third rolling portion 578 for sending the game balls from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the projecting portion 86b. Thereby, the rolling of the gaming ball thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 is inhibited by the electromagnetic force generated by the driving of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged inside the opening 86b1. Can be suppressed. In other words, the projecting portion 86b can suppress the electromagnetic force generated by the driving of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the projecting portion 86b. As a result, the throwing of the gaming ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 can be stabilized.

  As described above, the first solenoid 583a is disposed so that the back side is inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. As a result, the wirings of the detection devices SE3 to SE6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a can be disposed through the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. In addition, since the wires can be disposed along the first solenoid 583a, the wires can be prevented from being entangled.

  Furthermore, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the projecting portion 86b on which the first unit 551 is disposed is bent. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from bending (bending), so that the arrangement of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 may be offset with respect to the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to smoothly flow the game balls from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member for disposing the fixing member of the substrate unit on the back member>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42, the connection structure of the rear case 300 and the substrate unit 110 will be described in detail. First, with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, the structure of the back case 300 will be described.

  FIG. 38 (a) is a front view of the back case 300, and FIG. 38 (b) is a back view of the back case 300. 39 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 39 (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the back case 300 includes an engagement member 310 disposed on the front side (open side (box F direction side formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the back surface). And a fixing member 320 which is disposed on the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the case 300 and fixes the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) described above.

  In addition, the rear case 300 has a protruding portion 301 b protruding from two places on the front side in the bottom wall portion 301, a first opening 301 c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. And a second opening 301d that opens at the opposite position.

  The projecting portion 301 b is a shaft for holding the engaging member 310 in a slidable state, and is inserted inside a sliding groove 314 opened in the engaging member 310 described later. In addition, the protruding portion 301b is formed in a circular ring shape, and a screw can be screwed into the inner side of the circular ring shape. Therefore, after inserting the protruding portion 301b into the inside of the sliding groove 314, the engagement member is screwed with a screw having a head with a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding groove 314. 310 can be disposed on the back case 300.

  The first opening 301 c is an opening for inserting a part (engaging portion with the engaging member 310) of the fixing member 320 described later, and an engaging portion (engaged portion 332 described later) of the fixing member 320. It is formed in the shape which can be inserted. Thereby, the fixing member 320 disposed on the back side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engagement member 310 disposed on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

  In addition, the first opening 301c is a protruding wall 301c1 that protrudes to the back side at an end portion on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the engagement side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310. Equipped with The projecting wall 301c1 is formed in a hook shape in which the projecting tip on the back side is bent by approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction (arrow R direction) separating from the first opening 301c.

  The projecting wall 301c1 has its tip inserted into a locking portion 331 of a fixing member 320 described later. Thereby, the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the engagement part of the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed in the rear case 300 can be supported (engaged) at both ends (in the direction of the arrow L-R), and the engagement portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 It is possible to suppress the concentration of the force to prevent the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310 from being broken. A detailed description of the disposition of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be described later.

  The second opening 301 d is an opening for inserting a part of the engagement member 310 (an operator 315) described later into the back side of the back case 300, whereby the engagement member 310 is the back side of the back case. You can operate from Therefore, as described above, after arranging the fixing member 320 on the back surface of the back case 300, the engagement member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300, and the fixing member 320 and the engagement member are It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301).

  The engagement member 310 has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 extend in a direction parallel to each other, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 thereof. The third ends 313 are connected to each other in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first and second pieces 311 and 312.

  The two sliding grooves 314 described above are formed in one place in each of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 and are long in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 It is opened like a long hole. Thus, the engagement member 310 can slide in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312.

  The first piece 311 has an end on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected as an engagement portion with a fixing member 320 described later Engaging portions 316 which are formed on both outer sides in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and two engaging portions 316 thereof. From the substantially middle position toward the recessed portion 317 which is recessed in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first piece 311 and the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction)) of the back case 300 And an operator 315 which protrudes.

  The external shape in front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape, and the engaging portion 316 is formed so that the outer surface on one side (arrow R direction side) goes from the one end to the other side (arrow L direction side). It is formed as an inclined surface which protrudes to the outside of piece 311, and the up-and-down direction (arrow U) which is a direction approximately orthogonal to the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the 1st piece 311 on the other side. -D direction) extended.

  The recess 317 is formed by cutting away in the thickness direction of the first piece 311 and is recessed from one end (the arrow R direction side) end of the first piece 311 toward the other side (the arrow L direction side) Ru. Thus, one side of the first piece 311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engagement member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. A detailed description of the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described later.

  The operating member 315 is an operating portion for operating the engaging member 310, and is formed at the other end of the first piece 311, and the projecting dimension thereof is larger than the thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. It is set to a value, and is projected to the back side of the back case 300 by a size that can be at least grasped by the operator with a finger. As a result, the operating element 315 can be made to project from the second opening 301 d of the bottom wall 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operating element 315) can be grasped and operated.

  The second piece 312 is provided with a fastening hole 318 recessed circularly on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is a portion into which a screw inserted through a hole (see FIG. 89) which is penetrated by the back surface base 720 of the rotation unit 700 described later is screwed. Thus, after the rotation unit 700 is disposed on the inner side (the front side of the bottom wall portion 301) of the back case 300, the engagement member 310 disposed on the back side of the rotation unit 700 is operated to engage the engagement member. 310 can be operated to a prescribed position (engagement position with a fixing member 320 described later), and a screw is screwed into a fastening hole 318 to fasten the engaging member 310 and the rotation unit 700 (rear base 720) can do. Therefore, the operation of the engagement member 310 disposed at the prescribed position can be disabled only by the operation of the operation member 315 projecting from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operating member 315 is operated illegally, and the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) are easily exchanged for an illegal substrate box. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, the screw inserted into the hole on the back surface base 720 of the rotation unit 700 and fastened to the fastening hole 318 can be operated from the hole from which the first winning opening 64 disposed on the game board 13 is removed. Good. In this case, since it is not necessary to release the fastening between the game board 13 and the back case 300, it is possible to suppress the complication of the replacement work for the normal substrate box 100. As a result, the replacement operation of the normal substrate box 100 can be simplified.

  Fixing member 320 is configured of a separate member from rear case 300. Thus, the substrate box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 whose outer shape is smaller than that of the rear case 300. Therefore, as compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the rear case 300, It can be easy to arrange. As a result, the substrate box 100 can be easily disposed on the back case 300 in a state in which the substrate box 100 is not easily removed from the fixing member 320.

  Also, the rear case 300 can be diverted as parts of the same shape in the respective pachinko machine types, but since the substrate box 100 differs in shape and size in the respective pachinko machine types 10, the substrate box 100 can be used. Can not be used as a flow product with another pachinko machine. Therefore, compared with the case where the fixing member 320 is integrally formed with the rear case 300, the mold for molding the rear case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold of the fixing member 320 whose outer shape is smaller than that of the rear case 300, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The fixing member 320 includes an intervening member 330 engaged with the above-described engaging member 310, and a pivoting member 340 fastened to the interposed member 330. As a result, the shaft support member 340 can be used as a flow product of the same shape as the fixed member of another game machine.

  The interposing member 330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (the arrow F direction side) is open, and is provided with a locking portion 331 provided on the other side (the arrow L direction side) and the other side (the arrow L direction). To be engaged with the bottom of the box-like bottom, and the support hole 340 from the back side And a protrusion 334 protruding to the side.

  The locking portion 331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 301c described above. Is inserted into the bottom wall portion 301 by the insertion of a protruding wall 301c1 provided in a protruding manner. Thereby, when arranging the interposition member 330 (fixing member 320) in the back case 300, the projecting wall 301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the interposition member 330 to one side of the interposition member 330 (arrow R The direction side can be locked to the back case 300.

  The engaged portion 332 is a portion engaged with the engagement member 310, and the dimension of the projection toward the rear case 300 (the arrow F direction side) exceeds the engagement member 310 disposed in the rear case 300. The distance from the inner surface on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the space to be enclosed to the front of the bottom wall 301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engaging member 310 to the front of the bottom wall 301 It is set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are disposed at the overlapping position in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction).

  The insertion hole 333 is a through hole for inserting a screw that fastens the interposed member 330 with the pivoting member 340 described later, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the pivoting member 340.

  The protrusion 334 is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip on the bending side and the bottom surface of the interposition member 330 is set larger than the thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340 described later. Be done. Accordingly, the insertion portion 344 can be inserted and disposed between the facing end of the protrusion 334 on the bending side and the bottom surface of the interposing member 330.

  The pivot support member 340 has a box-like shape opened in the rear case 300 side (arrow F direction side) and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the main body portion 341 And a bulging support portion 342.

  The main body portion 341 has an insertion portion 344 protruding upward from the side surface on the upper side (arrow U direction side), and a back surface side (arrow direction from the bottom side (arrow D direction side) of the main body portion 341 formed in a box shape. A fastening hole 343 which is recessed toward the B direction side is mainly provided.

  The insertion portion 344 is a plate member inserted between the tip of the bent side of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the interposed member 330 as described above. Thus, the tilting of the upper side of the pivot support member 340 toward the back side of the rear case 300 can be suppressed.

  The fastening hole 343 is disposed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) biased to the end opposite to the insertion portion 344. Further, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is a hole for fastening a screw through which the insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39B) of the interposition member 330 is inserted. Accordingly, the upper side (arrow U direction side) insertion portion 344 of the pivotal support member 340 is inserted into the projection 334 of the interposing member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the interposing member 330. Therefore, since the pivotal support member 340 is fixed to the interposed member 330 only by the fastening of the lower screw, the fastening portion can be reduced, and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

  The support portion 342 is a portion to be crimped and fastened to the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) described above, and is formed in a hollow shape in which a crimp metal can be disposed. In addition, the board | substrate box 100 is hold | maintained in the state which can be rotated with respect to the pivotal support member 340 by the fastening by a caulking metal fitting.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40 (a) to FIG. 41 (b), the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described. FIG. 40 (a) is a front view of the back case 300 before engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 40 (b) is before engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320. It is a rear view of back case 300 in a state of. FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the back case 300 in a state after engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320, and FIG. 41 (b) is after the engagement of the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320. It is a rear view of back case 300 in a state of. In FIGS. 40 (b) and 41 (b), a part of the outer shape of the engagement member 310 overlapping the back case 300 is illustrated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), before the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the interposed member 330 and the pivotal support member 340 are on the interposed member 330 side (the front side (arrow It is fastened and combined by the screw inserted from F direction side)). Thereby, it can be suppressed that the interposing member 330 and the pivotal support member 340 are improperly disassembled from the rear side of the rear case 300 (the screw which has been fastened is removed). As a result, it can be suppressed that the substrate box 100 caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 is replaced with an incorrect substrate box.

  In the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in the fastened state, the projecting wall 301c1 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the interposed member 330 as described above Be inserted. In this case, the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 320) in a fastened state are disposed in the first opening 301c from the bending side (arrow R direction side) of the protruding wall 301c1.

  When the fixing member 320 is disposed in the rear case 300, a space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is disposed at a position facing one end (the engaging portion 316 side) of the engaging member 310. Thus, by sliding the engagement member 310, one end (the arrow R direction side) of the end of the engagement member 310 can be inserted into the space enclosed by the engaged portion 332.

  Here, the outer dimensions in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the two engaging portions 316 of the engaging member 310 are the opening in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimension. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 can not be disposed in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

  On the other hand, in the engaging member 310, the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed by the concave portion 317 which is recessed on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above. The triangular shape of the engaging portion 316 allows the force when the engaging member 310 is slidingly displaced and abuts against the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 to act on the recessed portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, it is possible to elastically deform the bifurcated first piece 311 and insert it into the space enclosed by the engaged portion 332.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), in the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320, the engagement member 310 is slidingly displaced, and the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is an interposed member When inserted into the space enclosed by the engaged portion 332 of the 330, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to the shape before deformation. As described above, the engaging portion 316 is extended in the direction in which the side surface on the other side is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311. Therefore, the force that causes the first piece 311 to elastically deform toward the recess 317 is not exerted only by the force that causes the engaging member 310 to slide in the opposite direction. That is, the inclined surface of the engaging portion 316 and the concave portion 317 make it easy to insert the first piece 311 into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332, and the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portion 316 It is possible to make it difficult for the first piece 311 inserted in the space enclosed by the engaged portion 332 to come off. As a result, it can be suppressed that the fixing member 320 is removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to the player's cheating, and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) crimped and fastened to the fixing member 320 is an incorrect substrate box. Can be suppressed.

  The rear case 300 is disposed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300, and is the rear side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60, and the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The fixed member 320 includes an engaged portion 332 that protrudes to the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the back case 300, and the engaged portion 332. And the engaging member 310 are engaged with each other and disposed in the rear case 300, the accessory device (in this example, the rotation unit 700) is disposed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300. The engaging member 310 can be operated from the outside between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320.

  Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be disposed on the rear case 300 without being interrupted by the accessory device disposed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300 facing each other. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily disposed on the back case 300.

  Further, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300, the engagement portion between the rear case 300 and the fixing member 320 is a base plate 60 and the rear case 300 can be disposed between the facing. This makes it difficult to access the engagement portion between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released from the back surface side of the base plate 60, and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being illegitimate (for example, being replaced with an incorrect fixing member). it can.

  The rear case 300 further includes a first opening 301c opened in a portion where the fixing member 320 is disposed, and a second opening 301d opened in a portion where the engaging member 310 is disposed. The engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the rear case 300 and from the rear side (the arrow B direction side) of the rear case 300 via the second opening 301 d (inserted). The fixed member 320 is operable, and the engaged portion 332 which has passed through the first opening 301c is disposed on the front side of the back case 300, so that the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310 and the fixed member 320 is engaged. Access from the rear side of the rear case 300 can be made difficult. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be fixed to the rear case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device disposed in the rear case 300, and the illegal board box operated from the rear side of the game board 13 Can be prevented from being replaced.

  Furthermore, since the engagement member 310 includes the operating element 315 which is inserted through the second opening 301 d and protrudes to the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the back case 300, the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the back case 300. The engaging member 310 can be easily operated in a state in which the engaging member 310 is disposed. As a result, the engaging operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the engaging member 310 can slide on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can move in the front-rear direction with respect to the back case 300 (arrow Since the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the engagement member 310 can be easily used as a disposition space of the accessory device disposed in the back case 300, since it is not displaced in the direction F-B). As a result, the area on the front side of the rear case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as the installation space for the accessory device.

  Next, an operation for removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L shape in a front view, and the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 It is possible to operate from the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the back case 300 via the 1 opening 301c.

  Therefore, the engagement between the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 is achieved by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 to the recessed side of the recess 317 with a dedicated tool or the like. The match is canceled. After disengaging the engagement member 310 from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332 in the state of releasing the engagement, the deformation of the engagement member 310 is returned by returning the deformation of the engagement member 310. The engagement between the engagement member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

  It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 and the first opening 301c be formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300 can not be inserted and insertion of a dedicated tool is enabled. As a result, only the worker having a dedicated tool can replace the substrate box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to suppress replacement of the substrate box 100 with an incorrect one.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) crimped to and fixed to the shaft support member 340 will be described. FIG. 42 (a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case 300 and the substrate box 100 (main controller 110), and FIG. 42 (b) is a rear view of the rear case 300 and the substrate box 100 (main controller 110). It is. In FIG. 42 (b), the outline of the engaging member 310 overlapping the substrate box 100 is shown by a dashed line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the substrate box 100 is provided with a bearing portion 117 projecting from an end on one end side (arrow R direction side). The bearing portions 117 are disposed in a pair at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). As described above, the pair of bearing portions 117 is a portion to be caulked and fastened to the support portion 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the dimension of the support portion 342 in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) It is set identically. Thus, the substrate box 100 has the support portion 342 disposed between the pair of bearing portions 117 facing each other, and is crimped to the pivot support member 340 by inserting and caulking the caulking pin from above the bearing portion 117. Be done.

  According to the substrate box 100 configured as described above, the substrate box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the pivot support member 340 and disposed on the back side of the engagement member 310, so As described above, when operating the operating element 315 to engage the engagement member 310 with the fixing member 320, the operating element 315 can be easily operated by rotating the substrate box 100. In addition, after the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, arranging the substrate box 100 on the back side of the engagement member 310 makes it difficult to operate the operating element 315 from the back side of the back case 300. . As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, it is possible to prevent the operator 315 from being operated and being replaced with an incorrect substrate box.

  The other end of the substrate box 100 (arrow L direction) is inserted from the back side (arrow B direction) of the substrate box 100 toward the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and fastened to the back case 300 It is fixed by the screw. Thus, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described.

  FIG. 43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIGS. 43 to 14 illustrate the lower displacement member 440 disposed at the retracted position (the position located at the lowermost position relative to the base member 410).

  As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 connected to the base member 410 and displaced according to the displacement of the transmission member 420, one end slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end connected to the link member 430 And a lower displacement member 440 which is displaced by transmitting a driving force from the link member 430.

  The base member 410 is formed by combining two front and rear rectangular plate members in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 disposed on the front side and a back base 412 disposed on the back side. Between the facing of the front base 411 and the back base 412, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 are disposed.

  The front base 411 includes two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in the page of FIG. 43), two cylindrical support pins 411c and 411d projecting to the rear side, and a support pin 411d. And a curved wall portion 411e that protrudes in an arc shape with the axis as an axis.

  The sliding grooves 411 a and 411 b are holes through which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 are respectively inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend long in the left-right direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction by displacing the protrusions 472 and 473 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

  The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in a circular arc and formed from the left (Fig. 43 left) end of the front base 411 to the right (Fig. 43 right) end upward (Fig. 43 upward) It is opened to). Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different, and the gap between the facing in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

  Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 described later does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced while making it. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated along with sliding without applying a driving force for rotation to the lower displacement member 440. The detailed displacement of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

  The pivotal support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. In addition, the pivotal support pin 411 c is formed of a metal rod-like body, and is externally fitted to the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface, it is possible to suppress that the pivotal support pin 411c is broken (damaged).

  The pivot support pin 411 d is a protrusion inserted into a through hole 431 a formed at one end of a first link member 431 described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431 a. In addition, the bearing pin 411 d is formed of a metallic rod-like body, and is externally fitted to the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to suppress that the pivotal support pin 411d is broken (broken).

  The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and is formed to be curved around the axis of the pivotal support pin 411d. The protruding distance of the curved wall 411e is set to a distance that contacts the protruding end surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431 described later. Thus, the first link member 431 is prevented from being displaced forward. In addition, since the curved wall portion 411e is formed to be curved around the axis of the pivotal support pin 411d, even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axial of the pivotal support pin 411d, the first link member 431 is formed. The plate-like protrusion 431b can be brought into contact with the projecting end surface of the curved wall 411e.

  The recovery port 411f is an opening for allowing the sphere, which is ejected from the emission opening 471, to flow into the recovery port 411f and be recovered by the movement of the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 described later. The downstream side of the recovery port 411 f is connected to the recovery path of the balls. The recovery port 411 f is a hole formed to project from the right end of the front base 411, and the opening surface thereof is a surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the lower displacement member 440 in the first overhang state. The surface is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity of the exit opening 471.

  Further, the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is disposed above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received in the recovery port 411 f and can be recovered promptly.

  The rear surface base 412 has grooves 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (the front side in FIG. 44) toward the rear surface, and a locking portion 412c formed protruding toward the front in the vicinity of the groove 412b. It is formed in preparation for the main.

  The groove portion 412a is a hole into which the tip end side of the pivoting pin 411c of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circle having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivoting pin 411c and facing the pivoting pin 411c. Recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held so as not to be detached from the base member 410 by the front base 411 and the back base 412 being combined after the axial support pin 411c is inserted into the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the rear surface base 412 can hold the tip end portion of the pivotal support pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface thereof, the pivotal support pin 411c and the front base 411 It can control that it bends and breaks from a connection part.

  The groove portion 412b is a hole into which the tip end side of the pivotal support pin 411d of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivotal support pin 411d and facing the pivotal support pin 411d. Recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is held so as not to be detached from the base member 410 by inserting the pivot support pin 411d into the through hole 431a and then combining the front base 411 and the back base 412. In addition, since the rear surface base 412 can hold the tip of the pivotal support pin 411d, when a force acts on the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the pivotal support pin 411d and the front base 411 It can control that it bends and breaks from the connection part of.

  The locking portion 412c is a plate for locking one end side of a biasing spring SP1 described later, and is formed outside the biasing spring SP1. Thereby, the one end side of biasing spring SP1 can be latched. A detailed description of the biasing spring SP1 will be described later.

  The transmission member 420 has a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam that is engaged with the transmission gear 421 and rotated with the drive of the transmission gear 421. And the member 422 is mainly formed.

  The transmission gear 421 is a gear having a toothed surface on the entire outer peripheral surface, and is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM1. Thus, when power is applied to the drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, the transmission gear 421 is also rotated.

  The cam member 422 is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, as well as being formed in a shape combining one end of two semicircles having different sizes in outer shape in front view. A tooth surface 422b meshing with the transmission gear 421 is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the small semicircle portion of the cam member 422, and a shaft portion 422a is formed to penetrate at the center of the semicircle. In a large semicircular portion of the outer shape of the cam member 422, a sliding groove 422c which is recessed on the back surface opposite to the link member 430 described later is formed.

  The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted as described above, and the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c, whereby the cam member 422 is used as the shaft of the shaft support pin 411c. It is held rotatably around the center.

  The cam member 422 is disposed on the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshed with the transmission gear 421. Therefore, when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 rotates about the axis of the shaft portion 422a. it can.

  The sliding groove 422 c is recessed along the outer peripheral portion of the semicircular portion having a large radius of the cam member 422. Therefore, the distance to the shaft portion 422a is increased from the one end side to the other end side. In addition, the sliding groove 422c is displaced downward from the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is positioned in the retracted state described later. When the member 440 is positioned in a second extension state described later, a stepped portion 422c3 extending in the direction from the sliding protrusion 431d to the through hole 431a, and the lower displacement member 440 in a retracted state and a second extension state A step portion 422c2 is provided extending in the direction from the sliding protrusion 431d to the through hole 431a when positioned in the first extension state in the intermediate state.

  The link member 430 is formed of two link members of a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the respective end portions of the first link member 431 and the second link member 432.

  The first link member 431 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, as well as being bent in a generally U-shape in a front view. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced with displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a columnar connecting protrusion 431c projecting on the other side on the other side. The projection 431b is mainly provided with a plate-like projection 431b projecting to a position facing the above-mentioned curved wall portion 411e and a columnar sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion.

  The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot support pin 411d is inserted as described above. The first link member 431 is rotatably held with respect to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the rear base 412 in a state where the pivot pin 411d is inserted into the through hole 431a.

  The plate-like protrusion 431 b is a protrusion which suppresses the first link member 431 from being displaced in the front-rear direction, and suppresses the collision of the first link member 431 with the cam member 422 disposed forward, The projection is formed into a plate-like body that protrudes in a curved shape around the hole 431 a, and the projection length thereof is set larger than the thickness in the front-rear direction of the cam member 422. Thereby, the collision of the rear surface of the cam member 422 and the front surface of the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

  Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431 b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the arrow F-B direction) dimension of the cam member 422. Furthermore, the base member 410 (curved wall 411e) opposed to the protruding end face of the plate-like protrusion 431b is disposed with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55A)).

  The cam member 422 is disposed in a state in which the region between the front of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 431b and the protruding surface (rear surface) of the curved wall 411e can be displaced. In addition, the dimensions of the two gaps, which is the total of the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410, are greater than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

  As a result, when the first link member 9431 is bent in the direction (arrow F direction) in which the distance X14 described above becomes smaller, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) that faces the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b It can be made to abut. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the cam member 422 is pinched between the facing of the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (rear surface) of the curved wall 411e to restrict the displacement.

  The connection projection 431c is a shaft connected with a second link member 432 described later, and is inserted into the through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head from the back side is larger than that of the through hole 432a. A large screw etc. are fastened. Thereby, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

  At the edge of the through hole 431a, a wall 431f protruding to the back side is formed. The wall portion 431f is a wall surface for inserting and holding an urging spring SP1 described later on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

  The link side engaging portion 431e is a projection for locking the other end side of the biasing spring SP1 fitted in the wall portion 431f, and is formed to protrude like a hook on the back side of one end side of the first link member 431 . Therefore, one end of the biasing spring SP1 is engaged with the locking portion 412c of the back surface base 412, and the other end is engaged with the link-side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. Ru. Therefore, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 can be made to act to rotate the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 can be suppressed.

  The sliding protrusion 431 d is formed at a position separated from the through hole 431 a by approximately the same distance as the separation distance between the through hole 431 a and the shaft portion 422 a of the cam member 422. Further, the tip of the sliding protrusion 431 d is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 422 c. That is, the size of the outer diameter of the sliding projection 431d is smaller than the width of the sliding groove 422c facing each other.

  The sliding projection 431 d is disposed on the inner side of the sliding groove 422 c, and is thereby displaced by sliding on the inner side of the sliding groove 422 c in accordance with the rotational displacement of the cam member 422. That is, as the cam member 422 is displaced, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. A detailed description of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be described later.

  Further, since the sliding protrusion 431 d and the plate-like protrusion 431 b are formed at positions adjacent to each other, forward displacement of the first link member 431 is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion 431 b. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the sliding projection 431 d pushes the cam member 422 forward. As a result, it is not necessary to increase the recessed depth of the sliding groove 422c recessed in the cam member 422, and the rigidity can be secured without increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction of the cam member 422.

  The second link member 432 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, one of which is long, and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly provided with a through hole 432a formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction on one end side and a through hole 432b formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction on the other end side.

  The through hole 432a is a hole for being connected to the first link member 431 as described above, and the connection protrusion 431c is inserted into the inside. Thus, the second link member 432 is rotatably coupled to the first link member 431.

  The through hole 432 b is connected to a lower displacement member 440 described later, and can transmit the displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432 b is a hole into which a protrusion 482 a of the rear case 482 described later is inserted, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482 a. Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 is the second link member 432 by inserting the projection 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the projection 482a. Is held rotatably with respect to the Therefore, when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced, the displacement of the drive of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted through the link member 430.

  Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhang state, and FIG. 49 is a lower displacement unit in the second overhang state. It is a front view of 400. FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhang state, and FIG. 52 is a lower displacement unit in the second overhang state. It is a rear view of 400. 50 to 52, the state in which the back surface base 412 is viewed as transparent is illustrated. Moreover, in FIGS. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-like protrusion 431b and the curved wall 411e of the first link member 431 is illustrated by a dashed line.

  In the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d disposed inside the sliding groove 422c is disposed between the steps 442c1 facing each other, and the lower displacement member 440 is disposed on the lower side. In the second overhang state, the sliding projection 431d is disposed between the steps 442c3 facing each other, and the tip end of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the uppermost position. In the first overhanging state, the sliding projection 431 d is disposed between the steps 442 c 2 facing each other, and the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second overhanging state.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 at the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 and the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the sliding groove 422c is The shaft portion 422a is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the rear view. In this case, the sliding projection 431 d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422 c and is positioned at the step 422 c 1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated with the other end side (connection projection 431c side) positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a at one end side with respect to the rear view The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

  Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, one end side (through hole 432a side) connected to the first link member 431 is positioned on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) in a rear view. Thereby, in the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432, the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411 are located on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b in a rear view. It will be in the state. As described above, since the distance between the opposing sides in the vertical direction of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is larger on the right side in the rear view than on the left side, the lower displacement member 440 has the longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the lateral direction. Are placed in the In other words, the front base 411 is disposed in front of it.

  The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first overhanging state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

  In the first extension state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position in the retracted state and displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (the step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. By this rotational displacement, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is disposed at the third driven position. In the first projecting state, the sliding protrusion 431d is guided between the facing inner walls of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c.

  Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees centering on the through hole 431a by the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (connection projection 431c side) is at the upper left in the rear view (FIG. 51) Upper left).

  By the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the projections 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, since the distance between the facing in the vertical direction of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is narrowed as going from the right side to the left side in the rear view, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in FIG. The tip end side is rotationally displaced upward while being displaced.

  Further, in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411f is positioned at the lower side in the direction of gravity on the tip end side. That is, by rotating and displacing the lower displacing member 440 while slidingly displacing it at the time of transition from the retracted state to the first overhanging state, the tip end side of the lower displacing member 440 projects to the right of the base member 410 in a front view. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement area different from the variable areas of other displacement parts. Collision with other displacement features can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the recovery port 411f is positioned below one end side of the lower displacing member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing member 440 described later In the case of the firing operation, when the ball falls downward from the exit opening 471 as it is, the ball can be sent to the recovery port 411f.

  The displacement from the first extension state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second extension state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extension state.

  In the second overhang state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1 from the first overhang state, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position (third position) in the first overhang state. Is placed in the second position. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (the stepped portion 422c3 side is positioned above the shaft portion 422a), and the sliding of the first link member 431 guided to the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c by this rotational displacement. The moving projection 431d is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c and disposed at the second driven position. In the second projecting state, the sliding projection 431d is the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. It is guided between the opposing sides of the inner wall.

  Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees centering on the through hole 431a by the displacement of the sliding projection 431d, and the other end side (the coupling projection 431c side) is in a rear view approximately from the position in the first overhang state. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 52).

  By the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shape of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b because the projections 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411. As described above, since the distance between the facing in the vertical direction of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b is narrowed as going from the right side to the left side in the rear view, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in FIG. The tip end side is rotationally displaced upward while being displaced.

  Further, similarly to the first overhanging state, in the second overhanging state, the recovery port 411 f is positioned at the lower side in the gravity direction on the tip end side. That is, when the lower displacing member 440 transitions from the retracted state to the second overhanging state, the distal end side of the lower displacing member 440 projects to the right of the base member 410 by rotating displacing while sliding displacing it. It can be displaced without causing it. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement area different from the variable area of another displacement part, and it is possible to suppress collision with another displacement part.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. 53 (a) is a rear view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, FIG. 53 (b) in the first expanded state, and FIG. 53 (c) in the second expanded state. is there. In FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c), the portion of the cam member 422 overlapping the first link member 431 is illustrated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), in the retracted state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the step portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Further, as described above, the sliding projection 431 d is formed at a position substantially apart from the through hole 431 a by substantially the same distance as the separation distance between the through hole 431 a and the shaft portion 422 a of the cam member 422. Therefore, when a force rotating about the axis of the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the retracted state, the force is applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding protrusion 431d. it can. Accordingly, the rotation of the cam member 422 can be suppressed by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, in the retracted state, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (b), in the first overhang state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 and the inner wall of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are disposed to face each other. Therefore, when the force rotating about the through hole 431a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the first extension state, as in the retracted state, the force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 431d to the first link member 431a. It can act on the shaft 422a. Accordingly, the rotation of the cam member 422 can be suppressed by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, in the first overhang state, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 coupled to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed.

  Here, in the first extension position, in order to maintain the stopped state in order to be the middle position of the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, it is necessary to maintain the drive motor KM1 in the stopped state. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first overhanging position (intermediate position of displacement), there is a problem that energy consumption is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the first extension state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the step 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c, as described above In addition, the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from being displaced. Therefore, when the lower displacing member 440 is stopped at a midway position of displacement, displacement of the lower displacing member 440 can be suppressed even if the power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped on the way of displacement, it is possible to suppress the consumption energy of the drive motor KM1 from being increased.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (c), in the second projecting state, the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 and the inner wall of the step portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c are disposed to face each other. Therefore, as in the retracted state and the first overhanging state, when a force rotating about the axis of the through hole 431 a acts on the first link member 431 positioned in the second overhanging state, the force is slid The protrusion 431 d can act on the shaft portion 422 a of the cam member 422. Accordingly, the rotation of the cam member 422 can be suppressed by the rotational force of the first link member 431. As a result, in the second overhang state, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 coupled to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed.

  Further, the step portions 422c1, 422c2, and 422c3 are extended in the direction connecting the sliding protrusion 431d and the through hole 431a, so the sliding groove 422c in the direction in which the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced. The width dimension of can be reduced. Therefore, the clearance between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding projection 431d which allows the first link member 431 to be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a at the retracted position, the first projecting position and the second projecting position is small. it can. Therefore, the first link member 431 in each state can reduce the gap that can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. As a result, the width of the lower displacement member 440 in each state swings due to vibration or inertial force at the time of the displacement stop can be reduced, and the player can easily recognize the stopped state.

  Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) for driving the lower displacement member 440 restrict the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 in the direction of the reaction when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467. Since the lower displacement member 440 is displaced relative to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. 54 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 54 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. is there. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the back surface base 412 is illustrated as being transparent, but in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in a state where it is not transparent is illustrated. .

  As shown in FIG. 54A, the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is disposed between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422. Thus, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction. That is, since the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected to the lower displacement member 440 configured by combining a plurality of fixtures via the second link member 432, the load of the lower displacement member 440 causes a longitudinal direction Since there is a possibility of bending, the cam member 422 is disposed in the front, so that the first link member 431 can be suppressed from bending in the front. As a result, since the first link member 431 can be prevented from moving forward, the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhang state is disposed between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as in the retracted state. Thus, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is disposed on the front side of the connection portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, since it is necessary to make the connecting portion rotatable when the link member 430 is formed of two members, the rigidity is weaker than the other portions and it becomes easy to bend by the gap, and the cam on the front side Since the member 422 is disposed, bending of the connecting portion of the link member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Restricting the displacement of the displacing member by the restricting means for restricting the displacement of the driven member>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. FIG. 55 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LVc-LVc of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are in the front-rear direction (the arrow FB direction). It is placed at a different position. Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement unit 400 from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), it is possible to suppress an increase in the resistance acting on the cam member 422. As a result, the displacement start of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 is a curved wall 411e. Is disposed at a position on the front side (the side indicated by the arrow F) to separate a predetermined gap. Accordingly, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 can be made to abut on the curved wall portion 411e, and the displacement of the cam member 422 to the front side can be suppressed.

  The surface on the front base 411 side (the arrow F direction side) of the cam member 422 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the back surface of the front base 411 (see FIG. 45). Thus, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall 411e. Therefore, it is possible to suppress partial contact of the cam member 422 with the curved wall 411e, and to suppress concentration of a force on a part. As a result, breakage of the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

  Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first overhang state (third position), the projection 473 connected to the front base 411 is used. And longitudinally opposite side) is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, the force component with which the lower displacement member 440 tilts in the front-rear direction is increased as the direction component of the lower displacement member 440 in the longitudinal direction approaches the gravity direction. Therefore, when in the first extended state (third position), the force in the front-rear direction acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is greater than in the retracted state (first position). Be enlarged. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) beyond the first overhang state (third position), a portion of the cam member 422 is a curved wall Since it is arrange | positioned by the front side of the part 411e, the displacement of the cam member 422 to the front side can be controlled. As a result, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from swinging back and forth between the first overhang state (third position) and the second overhang state (second position), and the player is allowed to displace the lower displacement member 440. It is easy to make

  The displacement of the link member 430 toward the back surface can be restricted by arranging the link member 430 between the back surface base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings to the back side, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back surface base 412 to restrict the displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the lower displacement member 440 swings in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the front base 411 is provided with restricting means (curved wall 411e) for restricting the swing of the link member 430 in directions other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaced between the first position and the second position. The first displacement area for displacing the third position of the intermediate position between the first position and the second position from the first position and the second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position, The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by displacing the cam member 422 from the first position to the second position, and from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. A first driven area for displacing a third driven position at an intermediate position between the second driven area and a second driven area for displacing a second driven position from the third driven position, and the second displacement area and the first driven area And the cam member 422 is partially set in the same area. When the second displacement region is displaced, the pivoting of the cam member 422 in directions other than the displacement direction is restricted by the restricting means (curved wall 411e), so the same portion of the restricting means (curved wall 411e) Swing of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be restricted.

  Therefore, since it is sufficient to form the restricting means (curved wall 411e) in one place, the shape of the restricting means is formed as compared with the case where the restricting means for restricting the displacement is formed on each of the cam member 422 and the link member 430. Can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, since swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be restricted using the same part of the restriction means (curved wall 411e), the link member 430 can be one of the restriction means (curved wall 411e). In addition, since it is not necessary to form the cam member 422 and the restricting portion, the restricting means (the curved wall 411e) can be made smaller accordingly.

  Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second overhang state, the protrusions 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (The collar C (see FIG. 14) disposed on the projections 472 and 473) is the front side (arrow F direction) of the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). Thereby, when the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back side by the protrusions 472 and 473 (collars C disposed on the protrusions 472 and 473), the cam member 422 is a shaft portion There is a possibility that it may be rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction around 422 a and abut on the link member 430.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 to the front side can be controlled by coming into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, so the cam member 422 is centered on the shaft portion 422a. Rotational displacement in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. As a result, contact between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first projecting state (third position), the displacement is regulated by the curved wall portion 411e, so the cam member 422 is curved at the time of initial operation. It can be abutted against the wall portion 411e to suppress an increase in frictional resistance. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

  Next, referring to FIG. 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is brought into the second displacement state will be described. 56 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along line LVIa-LVIa of FIG. 52, and FIG. 56 (b) is a first sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second overhang state (second position). FIG. 10 is a front view of a link member 431 and a cam member 422. In FIG. 56 (b), the outer shape of the base member 410 is shown by a dashed line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end of the cam member 422 abuts on the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction in which the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the second displaced state can be restricted. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b and the abutting portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431, Damage to the tooth surfaces of the gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b can be suppressed.

  When the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the contact surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 contacts the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is set in a direction orthogonal to a virtual line KS1 passing through the part. Thus, when a force that displaces from the second displacement state toward the retracted state (first position) acts around the axis of the first link member 431, the force acts on the axis of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is possible to suppress the action of rotating around. As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from rotating by the force acting on the first link member 431.

  Here, as described above, the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) at the tip end side (opposite to the projection 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction). Accordingly, the rotational force acting on the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is maximized as the direction component of the lower displacement member 440 in the longitudinal direction approaches the gravity direction. Since transmission of force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

  Furthermore, when the cam member 422 is disposed at the position of the second displacement state, the load of the lower displacement member 440 exerts a force to rotate around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431. In this case, the end of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-like protrusion 431b, and the force PW1 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a The inner wall of the moving groove 422c is pushed out from the sliding projection 431d, and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft 422a acts in the direction of canceling each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from rotating by the force applied from the first link member 431.

  Next, the configuration of the lower displacing member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. As shown in FIG. 60A and 60B are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

  60 (a) shows that the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is seen as transparent, and FIG. 60 (b) shows that the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are seen as transparent. The situation is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and back of the base member 470, and the case member 480 and the base member 470. It is mainly provided with the transmission mechanism 460 disposed displaceably between them and the decorative member 450 formed in such a manner as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.

  The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and has projections 472 and 473 projecting on the back side on one end side, and an upright wall 471a standing on the front side from the edge on the other end side. A projecting wall 477 projecting in a U-shape upside down from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 57) and an end of the projecting wall 477 at the upper end of the base member 470; The rack gear 476 to be provided, the shaft portions 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, the rectangular wire engagement portion 478 attached to the back surface on one end side of the base member 470, and the vertically central portion of the base member 470 And an opening 479 which is recessed from one end to the other end.

  The protrusions 472 and 473 are connection portions that are inserted into the slide grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 as described above and connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, it is formed in the column shape of the outside diameter smaller than the dimension between the opposing of the inner wall of sliding groove 411a, 411b.

  The upright wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the facing of the front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481 described later is attached to the base member 470, and has a diameter of a sphere. It is set to a larger standing size.

  The shaft portions 474 and 475 are protrusions inserted into the shafts of the transmission gears 462 and 463 of the transmission mechanism 460 described later and rotatably holding the transmission gears 462 and 463. The shaft portions 474 and 475 are larger than the inner diameter of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 462 and 463. It is formed in a cylindrical shape with a small outer diameter.

  The rack gear 476 is engraved with a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465 described later. As a result, the transmission gear 465 can be rotated by sliding displacement of the movable rack 464 described later with respect to the base member 470.

  When the projecting wall 477 receives a ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600 described later into the front of the base member 470 via the opening 451 a of the decoration member 450, the ball falls to the outside of the lower displacement member 440. Between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U-shape, which is larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The wire locking portion 478 is a member for locking a flexible wire (not shown) to a control substrate disposed on the back side of the base member 470, and one end of the flexible wire between the wire locking portion 478 and the base member 470. Is attached to the back side of the base member 470 in the state of Thereby, even if the lower displacement member 440 is disposed displaceably with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to suppress the flexible wiring from being entangled.

  In addition, the wire locking portion 478 includes a protrusion 478a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the back side. The projection distance of the projection 478 a is set to a distance projecting to the rear side with respect to the link member 430 connected to the rear side, and to a distance that can contact the front of the rear base 412. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging rearward and to suppress the link member 430 from colliding with the back surface base 412.

  The opening 469 is an opening that defines the sliding displacement direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464 d of the movable rack 464 described later is inserted into the inside.

  The transmission mechanism 460 is a member disposed in front of the base member 470, and meshes with the transmission gears 461, 462, 463, the drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463 A movable rack 464 having a tooth flank and slidably disposed forward of the base member 470, and a transmission gear rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with the rack gear 476 A rack 466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and slidably disposed in front of the movable rack 464 and a ball rotatably disposed at one end of the rack 466 The receiving portion 467 is mainly provided.

  The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is internally fitted in the shaft hole, and the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 in a state of being coupled to the drive motor KM2. Will be placed on

  As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 have the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470 inserted into the shaft holes, and are rotatably held by the base member. The transmission gears 461 to 463 are gear trains engaged with each other, and the transmission gear 463 is rotated by the drive motor KM2 to rotate the transmission gear 463 at the end.

  The movable rack 464 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and protrudes upward from a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b projecting cylindrically from the front side, and one end side of the upper end surface Abutment plate 464c, a guide plate 464d projecting from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, a rack guide portion 464e projecting to the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d, and a lower end project to the other end It is mainly provided with the collision part 464f.

  The rack gear 464 a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, by disposing the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in a meshed state on the base member 470, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2.

  The shaft portion 464 b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 465.

  The contact plate 464 c is a contact portion that contacts the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 described later to displace the distribution member 540. That is, the distribution member 540 can be displaced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. The contact mode between the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 will be described later.

  As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-like member inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the displacement direction of the movable rack 464 displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 464 displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2 can be displaced along the extending direction of the opening 479. In the present embodiment, the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, so the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

  The rack guide portion 464 e is a projecting wall for regulating the displacement direction of the rack 466 described later, and is provided to project laterally from one end to the other end.

  The collision portion 464 f is a wall portion that abuts on a projection 492 b of a displacement member 492 described later to displace the displacement member 492, and is formed to project from the lower end of the movable rack 464. In addition, the collision portion 464f is formed in a state in which the other end side is inclined. Thereby, the projection 492b of the displacement member 492 can be slid along the inclined surface and displaced.

  The rack 466 is formed of a rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b projecting cylindrically from the end on the other end side, and a front side It is mainly provided with two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

  The rack gear 466 a meshes with a transmission gear 465 attached to the movable rack 464. Thus, in a state where the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, the movable rack 464 is slide-displaced, so that the transmission gear 465 is rotated according to the slide displacement, and the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 . Thus, the rack 466 can be displaced relative to the movable rack 464.

  The shaft portion 466b is a protrusion inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467 described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball | bowl receiving part 467 can be rotatably hold | maintained.

  The sliding plate 466c is a protrusion inserted into an opening 481a of a front case 481 described later, and is formed of a plate-like body having a predetermined thickness. Thereby, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced relative to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 is defined in the direction in which the opening 481a extends. it can.

  When the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, the recessed portion 466d has a rack guide portion 464e disposed inside. Thus, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 is defined in the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. it can.

  Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, if the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e are formed, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extension direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced while slidingly displaces in the left-right direction, depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, the state of meshing of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 is changed by its own weight. There was a risk that the driving force could not be transmitted from the gear 465 to the rack 466 well.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacing member 440 is formed at two places, ie, the sliding plate 466c and the opening 481a, and the recessed portion 466d and the rack guiding portion 464e, which define the displacement direction of the rack 466. It is possible to suppress the change in the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the displacement state of is changed. As a result, inhibition of the transmission of the drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 can be suppressed.

  The slide plate 466c is formed to project from two places in the left and right direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 57A) of the rack 466, and the slide plate 466c on the other end side (the opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most extended with respect to the movable rack 464), it is disposed below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57).

  Here, since the ball receiving portion 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) at the displacement end position as described later, the ball receiving portion disposed on one end side of the rack 466 The other end of the rack is likely to be displaced by the inertial force due to the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, load tends to be applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and there is a possibility that the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (the opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most projected to the movable rack 464) , And the rack 466 at a position where it meshes with the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 when the ball receiving portion 467 performs a firing operation (rotational operation). Can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed.

  The ball receiving portion 467 is a portion for holding a game ball, is formed in a substantially U-shape in a front view, and is formed so as to be able to receive the ball in an inner portion of the U-shape. That is, the inside of the U shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball is made possible on the inner portion of the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is mainly provided with an axial hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape and a leg portion 467a projecting downward from the lower outer peripheral surface.

  The shaft hole 467 b is a shaft hole for holding the ball receiving portion 467 rotatably in the rack 466 as described above, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466 b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, the biasing spring SP2 is disposed around the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like whose head is larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. Ru. Thus, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466 in a state of being biased clockwise in a front view. A detailed description of the embodiment of the ball receiving portion 467 will be described later.

  The leg portion 467a is a projection for urging the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and the front end of the ball receiving portion 467 whose front end is described later with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 directed upward. The position is set in contact with the bottom wall 481 b of the case 481. Thus, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be restricted.

  The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 481 disposed on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side.

  The front case 481 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and has an opening 481a extending in the lateral direction at a substantially intermediate position in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall 481b projecting from a lower end face on the back side, and a lower edge It is mainly provided with an axial hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted inside.

  The bottom wall portion 481 b is formed to project from the lower end portion of the front case 481 to the back side, and is extended in the left-right direction. Further, when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the bottom wall portion 481b is in a state in which the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the upper surface thereof.

  The rear case 482 is a plate member for disposing the control substrate 491 on the rear side of the base member 470, and the outer shape in a front view is formed in a rectangular laterally smaller size than the outer shape of the base member 470. The rear case 482 also includes a protrusion 482 a that protrudes to the rear side.

  As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the projection 482a into the through hole 432b, the rear case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotated by fastening a screw or the like having a larger head than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b at the tip of the projection 482a. Can be connected in the

  The decorative member 450 is formed in an external shape imitating a pattern or a character, and a picture of the pattern or the character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 mainly includes a front side decoration 451 disposed on the front side of the front case 481 and a rear side decoration 452 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 482. In the present embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

  The front side decorative portion 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the front case 481 in a front view, and is attached to the front case 481. Thereby, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front side decorative portion can be made invisible from the player.

  The rear side decorative portion 452 is disposed at the upper rear end of the front side decorative portion 451. Thereby, the member disposed on the back side of the front side decorative portion 451 from above the back side decorative portion 452 can be made invisible to the player.

  Further, the displacement member 492 is disposed on the same plane as the front side decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is mainly provided with a shaft portion 492a protruding to the back side and a protrusion 492b.

  The shaft portion 492a is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, the displacement member 492 can be coupled to the front case in a rotatable state by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c. Further, a biasing spring SP3 is disposed on the tip end side of the shaft portion 492a into which the shaft hole 481c is inserted. Thereby, the displacement member 492 can be disposed in a biased state. A detailed description of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be described later.

  The shaft portion 492a can transmit the driving force rotating around the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by being collided with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 in accordance with the displacement.

  Therefore, the lower displacing member 440 includes the displacing member 492 (disposed member) disposed displaceably on the lower displacing member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) can hold the game ball Since the displacement member 492 is displaceable when the game ball is emitted from the ball receiving portion 467, generation of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  That is, when the game ball is fired from the ball receiving portion 467, the position of the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, the change of the position of center of gravity accompanying the release of the game ball is offset In the case of adopting a configuration in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in the direction of movement, the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed as the center of gravity changes. In addition, when the game ball is fired from the ball receiving portion 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction with the launch of the game ball, for example, the displacement member 492 in a direction to cancel the reaction with the launch of the game ball. When the configuration for displacement is adopted, the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is disposed at the position of the second displacement state, the force PW1 in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56B). The cam member 422 acts from the first link member 431 in such a direction that the force PW2 (see FIG. 56B) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a cancels out. It can suppress rotating by force. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when the gaming ball is fired from the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 at the position of the second displacement state, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings by the inertia force by the firing of the gaming ball. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the displacement of the displacement member 492 is performed by the collision of the colliding portion 464f with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492 . That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced accordingly, and rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by a sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is detected according to the detection result. Can be eliminated, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467 can be secured.

  Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. 61 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. FIG. 64 (a) to 64 (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

  The first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed substantially at the center of the base member 470 in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 61). The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed below the projecting wall 477 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the right end in the left-right direction of the base member 470.

  Further, in FIGS. 61 to 64, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are viewed as transparent, and the outer shape of the bottom wall 481 b of the front case 481 is illustrated by a dashed line. Further, in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the transition state immediately before being displaced to the third position is sequentially illustrated, and in FIG. 64 (c), the lower displacement member 440 at the third position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, the movable rack 464 is positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. In the first position, the rack 466 is disposed in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, similarly to the movable rack 464, the rack 466 is also positioned at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

  In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are in a state of being collected at the left end in the left-right direction of the base member 470. Here, since the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced while sliding (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states), the center of gravity of the lower displacing member 440 is disposed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft It is desirable to be in the closed state.

  According to the present embodiment, the transmission mechanism 460 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superimposed on the front and back (two-stage rack). It can be brought close to the grooves 411a and 411b (the rotation shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

  Therefore, as described above, when displacing the lower displacing member 440 from the position in the retracted state to the positions in the first and second overhanging states, the lower displacing member 440 is set to the first position. The driving force at the time of rotating and displacing can be reduced. Therefore, the consumption energy of the drive motor KM1 for displacing the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

  When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. Thereby, the transmission gear 462 and the transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the movable rack 464 from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463, and the movable rack 464 is slidingly displaced in the right direction with respect to the base member 470.

  When the movable rack 464 is slidingly displaced, the transmission gear 465 disposed on the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 in accordance with the sliding displacement. As a result, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a engaged with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slidingly displaced to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

  Similar to the displacement from the first position to the second position, the displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by the drive of the drive motor KM2. The transmission of the drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 releases the contact between the leg 467a and the bottom wall 481b of the front case 481. The rotational force of the biasing spring SP2 disposed on the shaft portion 466b causes rotational displacement about the axis of the shaft hole 467b.

  Explaining in detail, in the first and second positions (a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged on the left side in front view than the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position), the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 The upper surface of the bottom wall 481b of the case 481 is in contact with the upper surface, and the clockwise rotation about the shaft hole 467b due to the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 is restricted.

  On the other hand, when the tip end of the leg 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, it is disposed on the right side in front view than the end of the bottom wall 481b, and the bottom wall 481b and the base member 470 are erected. It is arrange | positioned inside the recessed part 481b1 formed between opposing with the wall 471a. Thus, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2. When the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position, the tip end of the leg portion 467a abuts on the end surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, and the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 around the axial hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. In addition, below, the rotational displacement of the ball | bowl receiving part 467 in a 3rd position is called and demonstrated as a firing operation.

  The ball receiving portion 467 is provided with a recess 481b1 recessed in the track area when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction), and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. And the leg 467a is engaged with the recess 481b1, and the posture is changeable by engaging the leg 467a with the recess 481b1, so that the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed. The structure can be simplified.

  Furthermore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464 f is slid to the right in front view by the displacement of the movable rack 464 and collides with the projection 492 b of the displacement member 492. Thereby, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

  That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotationally displaced and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 performs a firing operation to discharge the ball from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, and the lower displacement member 440 is lightened so that the lower displacement member 440 swings, and the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced. Force can be applied in the opposite direction. As a result, when the ball is discharged from the inside of the lower displacing member 440, it is possible to suppress the lower displacing member 440 from swinging.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the operation of receiving the ball to the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 65 (a) to 65 (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. In FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), transition states in which the ball receiving portion 467 receives a ball are illustrated in order.

  In FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are viewed as transparent, and the outer shape of the bottom wall 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by a dashed line.

  Furthermore, in FIGS. 65 (a) to (c), the horizontal direction in the retracted state of the lower displacement member 440 is illustrated by a double-dotted line with the symbol of the imaginary line H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is the first tension. The horizontal direction in the outgoing state is illustrated with the symbol of the virtual line H2. Further, the angle by which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the first overhanging position is illustrated with a symbol of an angle θ. The imaginary line H1, the imaginary line H2 and the angle θ are also shown in the drawings after FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is at the first position. The game ball T1 is thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, to the opening 451a formed in the front side decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440 by displacing it. The game ball T 1 which is thrown to the opening 451 a is thrown to the inside of the projecting wall 477 and is thrown to the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed below the protruding wall 477, the gaming ball T1 which is thrown to the inside of the protruding wall 477 is made inside the ball receiving portion 467. You can throw a ball. By the game ball T1 being received by the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced along with the operation of the ball receiving portion 467.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiving portion, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. Thus, the ball receiving portion 467 can be disposed at the first position in a state where the gaming ball T1 is disposed at the ball receiving portion 467.

  Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a base member, a base member disposed on one side of the base member so as to be displaceable, and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable. According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of being displaced between the overhanging position where the base member is projected to the game area and made visible to the player, and the retracted position retracted from the game area, the base member is An effect of displacing the displacement member can be performed in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the overhanging position.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is disposed displaceably on the base member, and therefore, when the displacing member is displaced, the base member is deformed relative to the base member with the one side serving as a dead point. There is a problem that the stick is easy to occur. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from the stop state, the change in acceleration is maximized, and therefore the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of the inertial force.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts the displacement from the second position and the displacement from the first position closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position. In a state where it is possible to form a mode to start, and at least the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 overhangs the gaming area and is visible to the player) In the first extended state), since the displacement is started from the first position, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member than the second position, by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving portion 467, The weight can be kept close to the dead point when the lower displacing member 440 rattles against the base member 410, and the influence of the inertia force when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stop state is reduced accordingly. It can be made difficult for the displacement member 440 to act. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while being slidably displaced. Therefore, when the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced in a state where the gaming ball T1 is disposed at a distance from the rotary shaft, a centrifugal force is easily generated in the gaming ball T1, and the gaming ball T1 moves and the inner wall of the ball receiving portion 467 There is a problem that a collision sound is generated due to a collision between the game ball T1 and the game ball T1, or the ball receiving portion 467 is broken.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position after the gaming ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467. It can be placed close to (closer to). Therefore, when the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second overhanging states) while the lower displacing member 440 receives the gaming ball T1, centrifugal force is applied to the gaming ball T1. It can suppress that it occurs. As a result, when the game ball T1 collides with the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the generation of a collision sound or the damage of the ball receiving portion 467.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 440, the transmission mechanism 460 for operating the ball receiving portion 467 is formed by the movable rack 464, the transmission gear 465 (pinion gear) and the rack 466 (rack member) Since the portion 467 is disposed, when the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 is started from the first position, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weight of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 is one side of the lower displacement member 440 The lower displacing member 440 can be brought close to a fulcrum when the base member 410 rattles. As a result, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stop state, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the game ball T1 is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by setting the lower displacing member 440 to the first position, the center of gravity of the lower displacing member 440 is on the side of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 (rotational axis of the lower displacing member 440 Can be easily moved to the Therefore, when displacing the lower displacing member 440 from the position in the retracted state to the positions in the first and second overhanging states, the lower displacing member 440 is rotationally displaced by setting the lower displacing member 440 to the first position. The driving force can be reduced. Therefore, the consumption energy of the drive motor KM1 for displacing the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the ball dispensing operation will be described. 66 (a) to 66 (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG. In FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 in the ball dispensing operation are sequentially illustrated. In FIGS. 66A to 66C, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are viewed as transparent, and the outer shape of the bottom wall 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, the ball dispensing operation is an operation of dispensing the game ball T1 received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the emission opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (c), the dispensing operation for discharging the balls received by the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing member 440 displaces the lower displacing member 440 from the first position to the third position in order. Is done.

  That is, by receiving the gaming ball T1 inside the ball receiving portion 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 disposed at the first position to the third position, the gaming ball T1 is of the ball receiving portion 467 Along with the displacement, it is transported to the side of the exit opening 471. The game ball T1 moved to the emission opening 471 side is imparted with an inertial force to the emission opening 471 side by the slide displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the third position. It pops out from the inside of the part 467. Thus, the ball can be discharged from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

  Here, since the displacement direction when the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member) starts displacement from the first position is the direction away from the position side of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is at the first position. In the disposed state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order to displace the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) from one side of the lower displacing member 440 in the direction to move away, the rack 466 transmits the transmission gear 465 (displacement of the ball receiving portion 467). The portion on the rack gear 466 a side where the pinion gear is engaged is directed to one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be made closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 rattles against the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can be The rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed when being displaced from the stopped state.

  The ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction), and when it reaches the third position, the posture is formed so as to be changeable, so the ball receiving portion 467 receives the ball B1 of one ball at the third position. The state held by the part 467 can be easily maintained, and dropout of the gaming ball T1 from the ball receiving part 467 can be suppressed, while when the second position is reached, the change of the posture of the ball receiving part 467 is used. The game ball T1 can be easily paid out from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

  66 (a) to 66 (c) when the lower displacing member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacing member 440 is arranged horizontally to the imaginary line H1). When performing an operation, the gaming balls paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 are thrown into the inside of the collection port 411 f.

  On the other hand, when the lower displacing member 440 is in the first projecting state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacing member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the imaginary line H1), the lower displacing member The game balls paid out to the outside of 440 are thrown to the upper part of the ball stand 710 of the rotation unit 700.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the discharging operation when two or more balls are thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 67 (a) to (c) and 68 (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. FIG.

  In FIGS. 43 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 44 (a) to (c), transition states of the discharge operation are sequentially illustrated. In FIGS. 43 (a) to (c) and 44 (a) to (c), the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are viewed as transparent, and the bottom wall 481b of the front case 481 The outer shape of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (c), in the case where balls of two or more balls are continuously thrown from the distribution unit 500 described later, the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T <b> 2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467.

  That is, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced from the first position to the second position, and the first game ball T1 can be thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467, and the second ball game ball T2 is the first ball. The game ball T1 can be held in contact with the inside of the projecting wall 477 (see FIG. 67 (b)). By receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position and then displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position, the ball receiving portion 467 receives the first game ball T1, and the ball receiving portion is received. The game ball T2 of the second ball can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 by displacing 467 to the first position.

  Here, in the gaming machine in which the ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position is displaced to the third position by the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, if a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the distributing member 540 of the distributing unit 500 described later. There is a risk that more than the specified number of game balls will be thrown to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, there is a problem that a problem may occur due to the game balls exceeding the specified number. For example, there is a possibility that the game balls for the amount exceeding the specified number enter the transmission mechanism 460 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 and get caught by the movable part, resulting in breakage. Alternatively, there is a risk that the game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board 13 or the inside of the back case 300).

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaceable from the second position to the first position in the direction opposite to the ball sending direction of the ball. The orbit area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even when the distribution member 540 malfunctions and the game balls of the specified number or more are thrown, the game ball of the portion exceeding the specified number is expanded because the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is expanded. It can be accepted in the orbit area. As a result, it is possible to move the game balls for the amount exceeding the specified number in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game balls for the amount exceeding the specified number enter into the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 and to flow out of the game area, and as a result, the game for the amount exceeding the specified number. It is less likely to cause problems due to the ball.

  In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 sent from the distribution unit 500 described later at the second position, and the direction from the second position to the first position (second direction ) Is formed so as to be displaceable by at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the gaming ball, so after receiving one gaming ball at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (first direction) By displacing to the), it is possible to send the game balls of a portion exceeding the specified number to the orbit area (area of the ball receiving section in the first direction than 467) of the ball receiving section 467. Therefore, the game ball T2 after the second ball can be moved along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction).

  In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1 and can throw the second and subsequent game balls T2 to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. It is possible to separate from the game ball T2 after the ball. Thus, for example, by displacing the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position direction (first direction), the ball receiving member holds the game ball T1 of the first ball, and the game after the second ball is maintained. An operation of discharging only the ball T2 from the track area is possible.

  In addition, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position and the first ball is received, the ball is displaced to the third position and the gaming ball T1 is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467. The second game ball T2 is dropped between the ball receiving portion 467 and the transmission gear 465, and the second game ball T2 is moved downward. There is a risk that it will be impossible to discharge outside of the

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the game ball T1 is received inside the ball receiving portion 467 at the second position, the first position opposite to the emission opening 471 is received. Since the second game ball T2 can not be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, it can be suppressed.

  In other words, in a gaming machine provided with an item that performs discharge operation for discharging the game ball thrown into the property, the position for receiving the ball in the operation of the member for discharging the ball (the ball receiving portion 467 in this embodiment) (The second position) and the position to discharge the ball (the third position) only, when two or more game balls are thrown into the character, it is discharged to the member that discharges the ball Although there is a risk of discharging the second game ball T2 on the opposite side to the exit (exit opening 471), in the present embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving portion 467 is exited opening 471 And the second game ball T2 can be thrown between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471 by displacing the first position on the opposite side.

  As shown in FIGS. 68 (a) to (c), after the second ball game ball T2 is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position before firing operation. By doing this, the game ball T2 of the second ball can be rolled to the side of the emission opening 471 in a state of being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be discharged from the emission opening 471.

  In this case, the ball receiving portion 467 is above the center position of the second game ball T2 whose lower end surface of the U-shaped portion is thrown on the displacement path of the ball receiving portion 467 (upper in FIG. 68A). Will be placed. Further, in a state in which the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged to be inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Further, the right side (right side in FIG. 68A) of the U shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end portion of the leg portion 467a. The outer surface of T2 can abut against the leg 467a.

  Further, since the leg 467a is inclined approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall 481b, the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall 481b side) and It is abutted. Thus, when rolling the second game ball T2 toward the emission opening 471, it is possible to generate a force for lifting the second game ball T2 upward on the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall 481b. As a result, when rolling the second game ball T2 to the emission opening 471 side, it is possible to suppress that the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped.

  In other words, the leg 467a is projected from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction (first direction) from the first position toward the third position, and the protruding tip thereof is the track of the ball receiving portion 467 The ball receiving portion 467 is positioned from the first position to the third position direction (the first direction) because the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be able to abut on the lower half of the gaming ball (i.e., the second and subsequent gaming balls T2) sent to the area. When being displaced, the game ball can be moved while pushing the lower half of the game ball with the leg 467a. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467.

  In addition, the leg 467a is between the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball (the game ball T2 for the second and subsequent balls) thrown to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467. By interposing, it is possible to secure an interval between the game ball T1 of the first ball and the game ball T2 of the second and subsequent balls by the length of the protruding length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls T2 from the second ball onward from the track area while maintaining the state where the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball T1.

  Furthermore, since the leg portion 467a doubles as the role of changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 and the role of moving the gaming ball while pushing the lower half thereof by the engagement with the concave portion 481b1, It is possible to reduce the product cost by reducing it.

  In addition, the recess 481b1 is smaller in size from the first position to the third position direction (first direction) than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball is thrown to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 (ie, When the second or subsequent game ball T2) is moved with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction, it can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, it is possible to easily eject the second and subsequent game balls T2 from the track area.

  As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the retracted state, the recovery port 411 f is disposed below the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the game ball T2 which has been discharged in the retracted state is thrown to the collection port 411f.

  On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is disposed in the first overhanging state, the recovery port 411 f is positioned below the exit opening 471. The upper side of the recovery port 411f is open. Therefore, the game ball T2 subjected to the discharge operation is sent to the collection port 411f.

  That is, since the recovery port 411f is disposed vertically below the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (the standing wall 471a side) and has an opening in the vertical direction, Receiving the game ball (that is, the game ball T2 after the second ball) which is moved along with the movement to the three position direction (first direction) and discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 from the opening of the recovery port 411f Can be collected.

  Further, the opening of the recovery port 411f is perpendicular to the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (the standing wall 471a side) at least at the positions of the retracted state, the first overhang state, and the second overhang state. It is disposed below the direction. Thus, the game ball discharged from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 regardless of whether the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first overhang state, or the second overhang state (that is, the second ball The subsequent game balls T2) can be received from the opening of the collection member and collected.

  67 (a) to (c) and 68 (a) to (c) at the position of the lower displacing member 440 in the retracted state (the state where the longitudinal direction of the lower displacing member 440 is arranged horizontally to the imaginary line H1). When performing the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467 shown in, the gaming balls paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 are thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f. When the lower displacing member 440 performs the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467 at the position where the lower displacing member 440 is in the first projecting state (the state where the longitudinal direction of the lower displacing member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the imaginary line H1), the lower displacing member The game balls paid out to the outside of 440 are sent to the recovery port 411 f as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is discharged from the emission opening 471 will be described. 69 (a) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is a partial enlargement of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68 (a) FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the firing operation, the gaming ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiving portion 467 on the standing wall 471a side The lower displacement member 440 can be pushed outward from 471.

  In this case, the leg 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a, and when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 contacts the ball receiving portion 467 By doing this, the power of the rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the gaming ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily discharged from the emission opening 471. In addition, it is possible to return the ball receiving portion 467 to the state before the rotation operation by using the repulsive force when the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when discharging the game ball T2 sent to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the first game ball T1 held by the ball receiving portion 467 from falling off.

  Furthermore, the lower displacing member 440 is erected at a height lower than the radius of the gaming ball in the track area when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position direction (first direction). With the standing wall 471a positioned on the first direction side than 481b1, the game balls after the second ball sent to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 are displaced along with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction When moved, the gaming ball T2 is abutted against the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving portion 467 can be regulated so that the first gaming ball T1 is set. Only the game balls after the second ball can be easily discharged from the track area while maintaining the state held by the ball receiving portion 467.

  That is, since the erected wall 471a is erected at a height lower than the radius of the gaming ball from the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the tip of the erected wall, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the first direction. Accordingly, when the gaming ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the legs, the lower half of the gaming ball T2 is brought into contact with the standing wall 471a, so that the gaming ball can easily ride over the standing wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is in contact with the ball receiving portion 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiving portion 467 and the standing wall 471a), and the reaction force from the game ball T2 to the ball receiving portion 467 Therefore, it is possible to regulate the change in posture of the ball receiving portion and to suppress the drop of the first game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls T2 of the second and subsequent balls from the game area while maintaining the state where the ball receiving portion 467 holds the first game ball.

  On the other hand, when the game ball T2 of the second and subsequent balls is not thrown in the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, the game ball is not interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving portion 467. The posture of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed by engaging the portion 467a with the concave portion 481b1. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the first game ball T1 (that is, the game ball held by the ball receiving portion 467) from the ball receiving portion 467 by using the change of the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467.

  Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. FIG. 70 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. FIG. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of distribution unit 500.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the distribution unit 500 is attached between a base plate 520 formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and the front side of the base plate 520. And a distribution member 540 rotatably attached to the back side of the base plate 520, and a base plate 520 attached to the end face of the base plate 520. And a path forming member 510, and mainly includes an extension path member 530 for extending the flow-down path of the ball formed between the facings of the two.

  The base plate 520 has a cylindrical shaft portion 523 protruding to the back side, a first opening 521 formed in a circular arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius larger than that of the first opening 521. A second opening 522 formed in a large arc shape, a rolling portion 525 having a U-shaped cross section whose upper end is open on the side surface of the upper end and extending in the left-right direction The locking portion 524 is mainly provided.

  The shaft portion 523 is a shaft which is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of the distributing member 540 described later and rotatably attaches the distributing member 540 to the base member, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545 Be done.

  The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings through which the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 of the distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted, and are openings having a width larger than the thickness of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 It is formed. Further, since the distributing member 540 is attached to the base plate 520 in a rotatable state, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are larger than the circumferential dimension of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in a front view. The length of the arc is formed large.

  The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the biasing spring SP4 is locked.

  The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is formed to be inclined downward toward one end of the left side in the rear view (left side in FIG. 70 (b)) and has a curved shape formed in a U shape It is formed larger than the outer shape of the ball. Thus, the balls rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be prevented from stopping at the rolling portion, and the balls can be rolled on one end side.

  Further, the rolling portion 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525b protruding inward of the U from the front and rear side surfaces, and an opening 525a opened to the back side at an end on one end side.

  The projections 525b are formed at regular intervals on the front and rear side surfaces, and are formed at positions where the projections 525b formed on the front side and the projections 525b formed on the back side alternate in a front view. Therefore, since the balls rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be made to collide with the protrusions 525 b, the rolling speed of the balls rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced.

  Here, as described above, the ball is sent to the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing unit 400 in the state where the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position (FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b)). )reference). Therefore, when the throwing speed of the gaming ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 of the third throwing path KR3 is increased, the gaming ball throws the ball inside the lower displacement member 440 before moving the ball receiving portion 467 to the second position. There is a risk of being

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed protruding on the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending route KR3, and the gaming ball passes through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending route KR3. Since resistance can be imparted, the speed of the gaming ball passing through the third ball sending route KR3 can be reduced. Therefore, since the time required for moving the ball receiving portion 467 from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) can be extended by that amount, the gaming ball can be reliably used for the ball receiving portion 467. Can be received by Further, since the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be reduced, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  The opening 525a is formed open on the back side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and the outer shape in the rear view is formed larger than the size of the sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 to one end side is discharged from the opening 525a.

  The path forming member 510 is formed in a rectangular vertically elongated plate shape having a smaller horizontal width than the base plate 520, and a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball are formed on the back side. The flow path of the plurality of spheres is formed in the interior by forming the space between the opposite sides larger than the outer diameter of the spheres.

  The path forming member 510 has a first opening 511 opened in the upper end surface, a first ball passing path KR1 formed between the opposing side walls of the first port 511, and a second ball passing path connected to the first ball passing path KR1. The KR2 and the third ball sending path KR3 and the second and third openings 512 and 513 opened on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the second ball sending path KR2 and the third ball sending path KR3 The fourth ball sending path KR4 formed by the plurality of openings 514, 515, 516 and the back wall of the openings 514, 515, 516, and the side of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth ball sending path KR4. It is mainly provided with the 4th opening 517 opened.

  The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing the ball fed from the ball sending unit 600 to be described later to flow into the inside of the distribution unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510 It is formed large. In addition, the first opening 511 is connected to the throwing unit 600, and can be made to receive a ball to be thrown from the throwing unit 600.

  The first ball sending path KR1 is a path for allowing the sphere, which has flowed in from the first opening 511, to flow down between the base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed extending downward. Further, the fourth ball sending path KR4 is formed to extend approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and the downstream end is connected to the second ball sending path KR2 and the third ball sending path KR3. Be done. That is, the ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 is formed to be able to flow down to the second ball sending path KR2 or the third ball sending path KR3.

  As described above, the second ball sending path KR2 is a path formed by being connected to the first ball sending path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when the ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 flows down to the second ball sending route KR2, the ball is discharged from the second opening 512 to the outside of the distribution unit 500.

  The second opening 512 is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting the spheres. Thus, the balls discharged from the second opening are collected by the collection path. Further, inside the second opening 512 (the downstream end of the second ball sending route KR2), a sensor device SE2 that detects the passage of the game ball is disposed. Therefore, the third throwing ball is detected by detecting the number of gaming balls passing the third winning opening 82 by the sensor device SE1 and detecting the number of gaming balls passing the second throwing path KR2 by the sensor device SE2. The number of gaming balls passing through the route KR3 can be detected.

  That is, it is possible to detect whether a game ball having a predetermined number of balls (one ball) has been stored upstream of the regulation plate 541 described later, based on the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third motorized product 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third winning opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the ball passing through the second sending path KR2 (sensor device SE2) When the number is seven, it is possible to detect that one game ball has flowed down (stored) in the third ball sending route KR3.

  As described above, the third ball sending path KR3 is a path formed by being connected to the first ball sending path KR1, and the downstream end is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when the ball flowing down from the first opening 511 and flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 flows down to the third ball sending path KR3, the ball is discharged from the third port 513.

  The third opening 513 is formed above the other end of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520 (the end opposite to the opening 525a). Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is thrown to the inside of the rolling portion 525. That is, the ball that is thrown to the third ball sending path KR3 is sent to the rolling portion 525 via the third opening 513.

  The openings 514 to 516 are formed on the back side of the third winning opening 82 formed on the game board 13, respectively, and the balls winning in the third winning opening 82 are thrown. That is, when the ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 wins the third winning opening 82, the ball is thrown into the inside of the distribution unit 500 from the opening 514 to 516.

  The fourth ball sending path KR4 is formed to be connected to the openings 514 to 516, and is connected to one path on the downstream side and is connected to a fourth opening formed on the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a collection path (not shown) for collecting the spheres. Therefore, the ball that has won the third winning opening 82 of the game board 13 is sent to the fourth sending path KR4 of the sorting unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

  The extension path member 530 is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose lower side opens, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extension path member 530 is formed such that the inner diameter of its U shape is larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Therefore, by being disposed on the upper portion of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520, the ball fed to the upper portion of the rolling portion 525 can be fed inside the rolling portion 525 and the extension path member 530. The balls rolling on the rolling portion can be suppressed from falling from the rolling portion 525.

  Further, in the extension path member 530, protrusions 531 formed at regular intervals in the same position as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525 are formed. Thereby, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced similarly to the protrusion 525 b.

  The distributing member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, one of which is formed to be long, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distributing member 540 includes a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 protruding in the form of a plate on the front side, an axial hole 545 penetratingly formed on the upper end side, and a locking portion 544 formed in a hook shape on the rear side. And are mainly formed.

  As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The distributing member 540 can be rotated on the base plate 520 by inserting the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 into the shaft hole 545 and fastening a screw or the like having a larger head than the shaft hole to the shaft portion 523 from the back side. It is attached in the state.

  The restricting plate 541 is disposed at a connecting portion between the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2 via the first opening 521, and a ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 flows into the second ball sending path KR2. The plate member is formed to project to the front side more than the end face on the front side of the shaft hole 545, and the projection distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

  Further, the restriction plate 541 is curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 545. Thus, when the distributing member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the displacement region of the restricting plate 541 can be minimized.

  The storage plate 542 is a plate member disposed on the second ball sending path KR2 via the second opening 522 and storing the ball flowing down the second ball sending path KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. The projection on the front side is more than the end face on the front side, and the projection distance from the base plate 520 to the front side is set larger than the radius of the sphere.

  Further, the storage plate 542 is curved in an arc shape centering on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is formed larger than the radius of the curved portion of the restriction plate 541. Therefore, the storage plate 542 is formed at a position spaced apart from the axial hole 545 more than the restriction plate 541. As a result, the restricting plate 541 can be protruded to the connecting portion of the first ball sending path KR1 and the second ball sending path KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be disposed on the second ball sending path KR2. Furthermore, the displacement region when the distributing member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

  The projection 543 is a drive transmission member that causes the distribution member 540 to exert a rotational driving force by being collided with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and protrudes to the other end side of the distribution member 540 It is formed. That is, on the side opposite to the one end side where the shaft hole 545 which is the rotation shaft of the distribution member 540 is formed, the projection 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed. Thereby, the colliding force of the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced.

  Therefore, since the driving force of the drive motor KM3 for displacing the contact plate 464c can be reduced, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. In addition, since the energy when the contact plate 464c collides with the projection 543 can be reduced during driving, the collision noise can be reduced when the contact plate 464c collides with the projection 543. In addition, the detailed aspect in the case of the collision with the contact plate 464c and the projection part 543 will be described later.

  Furthermore, a bulging portion 543a that is bulging in a circular shape is formed at the contact point of the protruding tip of the protrusion 543 with the contact plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, when the distributing member 540 is rotationally displaced, the frictional resistance between the projection 543 (the bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c can be reduced. As a result, the consumption energy of the drive motor KM3 can be suppressed from increasing.

  The locking portion 544 is a portion for locking the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520 as described above. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a force rotating to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from swinging due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 10 or the like.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow-down path of the ball of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 500 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 70 (a). In FIG. 73, the distributing member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 73 illustrates the state in which the distributing member 540 is disposed at the storage position.

  Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is a state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is disposed on the second ball sending path KR2. .

  As shown in FIG. 73, the lower end side of the flow-down path of the first ball sending route KR1 is tilted toward the central portion in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 73) of the base plate 520, and the tilted portion is gentle. It is curved in an S-shape. In addition, a tip portion curved in an S shape is connected to the third ball sending path KR3, and the second ball sending path KR2 is inclined at the end of the first ball sending path KR1 in the opposite direction to the tilting direction of the first ball sending path KR1. It is connected in the state of

  Thus, by causing the ball flowing down the first ball sending path KR1 to collide with the lower surface of the tilting portion, it is possible to turn the ball down direction from the gravity direction to the tilting direction of the first ball sending path KR1. Therefore, the ball can be made to flow down toward the entrance of the third ball sending route KR3 (the connection portion between the first ball sending route KR1 and the third ball sending route KR3). Therefore, in a state in which the distribution member 540 is not disposed, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 can be thrown to the third throwing path KR3.

  Here, to the one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the flow-down path through which the gaming ball flows, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down path, and the gaming ball flowing down the flow passage. Game machines for sorting are known.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game balls having flowed down the flow down passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one ball at a time, the game balls flowing down the flow down passage are the first branch It distributes equally to the passage and the second branch passage (that is, half by half). That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can not be changed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is provided with the ball receiving portion 467 which is formed displaceably and receives the game ball from the third sending path KR3. Since the distributing member 540 is displaced by being displaced in contact, the number of gaming balls to be distributed to the third ball sending path KR3 or the second ball sending path can be changed according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third ball sending route KR3 can be changed.

  In addition, since the displacement of the distributing member 540 can displace the distributing member 540 by utilizing the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is necessary to separately provide a drive means and a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing member 540. It can be unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the product cost.

  Further, for example, in the structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled using position detection by the sensor device or the drive by the driving means, the reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member is lowered by malfunction due to detection failure or control failure. As a result, according to the present embodiment, the destination of distribution by the distribution member 540 can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

  In particular, since the ball receiving portion 467 is a member for receiving game balls from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending path KR3, the distribution destination of the distributing member 540 is synchronized with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 as the third ball sending path By switching to the above, it is possible to make the displacement member reliably receive the gaming balls distributed to the third throwing path KR3.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, since the gaming balls flowing down the flowing path are only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, it is insufficient to give the player an interest.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state in which the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541 (distribution means) is set to the third ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage), the flow down of the third game ball is restricted. In the state where the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is set to the second ball sending route KR2 (the second branch passage), the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is provided that allows the flow of gaming balls in the third ball sending route KR3. The player can be entertained.

  That is, when the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541 is set as the third ball sending route, the flow of the gaming ball distributed to the third ball sending route KR3 is restricted to store the game balls in the third ball sending route KR3 and the restriction plate When the distribution destination according to 541 is set to the second ball sending route KR2, the flow of the gaming ball in the third ball sending route KR3 is allowed, and the gaming ball stored in the third ball sending route KR3 is allowed to flow down (open). it can. Thus, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the first ball transfer route KR1 (flow down route) to one of the third ball transfer route KR3 or the second ball transfer route KR2, the game balls distributed to the third ball transfer route KR3 are A downflow (open) action can be formed. Furthermore, these storing and releasing operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distributing operation. As a result, the player can be given an interest.

  Further, since the distribution member 540 (integral member) in which the restriction plate 541 (distribution means) and the storage plate 542 (flow-down state changing means) are integrally formed is provided, the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are operated. Since simplification of the structure and improvement of the operation reliability can be achieved, that is, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are separately formed, they become two parts, so these two parts are operated And the operation reliability is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the restricting plate 541 and the reservoir plate 542 can be formed as one part, the structure can be simplified accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved. be able to.

  Furthermore, the distribution member 540 is displaceably formed between the storage position (first state position) and the restricted position (second state position), and in a state in which the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the restriction plate 541 is 3) The ball sending path KR3 (first branch path) is disposed at the position where the distribution destination is located, and the storage plate 542 is disposed at the position where the flow of gaming balls in the third ball sending path KR3 is restricted, and the distributing member 540 is displaced to the restricting position In the closed state, the restricting plate 541 is disposed at the position where the second ball sending route KR2 is the distribution destination, and the storage plate 542 is disposed at the position where the flow of gaming balls in the third ball sending passage is allowed. By swinging the gaming ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 (falling passage) to one of the third ball sending route KR3 or the second ball sending route In addition to the player's kicking action, an action to temporarily stop (store) the flow of the gaming ball distributed to the third throwing route KR3 and an action to flow down (release) the stopped (stored) gaming ball These storage and release operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the operation reliability.

  The distribution member 540 (integral member) is rotatably formed, and the storage plate 542 (flow-down state changing means) is formed to be able to protrude and retract with respect to the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path). Since it is formed in the shape curving in the shape of a circular arc centering on the axis of rotation of distribution member 540 by projecting to KR3 while controlling the flow-down of the game ball, the third throwing path KR3 The area of the hole (concave portion 519) opened in the inner wall of can be reduced.

  The storage plate 542 (flow-down state changing means) is disposed in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the third ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage) is concave, so the storage plate 542 to the third ball sending route KR3 protrudes In the initial state (that is, in the state where only the tip side of the flow-down state changing means is projected into the passage), the shape of the tip side of the reservoir plate 542 can be arranged in a direction facilitating restriction of the flow of gaming balls; It is possible to easily restrict the flow-down of the game balls distributed to the third throwing route KR3.

  In addition, in a state where the storage plate 542 is maximally protruded to the third ball sending path to restrict the flow of the gaming ball, the depression of the storage plate 542 can stably hold the gaming ball, so that the runaway of the gaming ball can be suppressed.

  The distribution unit 500 applies an urging force to the distribution member 540 (integral member) to urge the restricting plate 541 in the direction in which the restriction plate 541 protrudes to the third ball sending path (first branch path) (biasing means). And the distance from the restriction plate 541 to the rotation shaft of the distribution member 540 is larger than the distance from the restriction plate 541 to the rotation shaft of the distribution member 540, so using the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4. The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in the posture (that is, the storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third emergency path.

  In this case, the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation shaft of the distribution member 540 is larger than the distance from the restriction plate 541 to the rotation shaft of the distribution member 540. The storage plate 542 is easily inserted even if the same impact force is applied because the distance from it is large, and the biasing direction of the biasing spring SP4 is a direction in which the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third ball sending path KR3. Thus, the reservoir plate 542 can be prevented from being inserted into the recess 519 by the amount of the biasing force.

  In addition, since the distributing member 540 (integral member) is rotated in the direction in which the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) protrudes to the third ball sending path (first branch path) by its own weight, using its own weight The distribution member 540 can be easily maintained in the posture (that is, the storage position) in which the storage plate 542 protrudes to the third ball sending path KR3. Therefore, when the game ball collides, the storage plate 542 can be prevented from being sunk into the recess 519 by its own weight.

  Also, even when the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) falls off, the distributing member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the restricting plate 541 protrudes to the third ball sending path KR3 by its own weight, and the third ball feeding path is played It can suppress that the ball flows down.

  The ball receiving portion 467 further includes a biasing spring SP4 that applies a biasing force to the distributing member 540 to maintain the distributing destination by the distributing member 540 in one of the third ball sending path KR3 and the second ball sending path KR2. By displacing 540 in a direction that opposes the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the sorting destination by the distributing member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball sending path KR3 or the second ball sending path KR2, and the biasing force of the biasing spring The distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to one of the third ball sending route KR3 and the second ball sending route KR2.

  Therefore, it can be suppressed that the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is inadvertently switched. In this case, the distribution member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, and after the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4. Therefore, it can be unnecessary that the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the distributing member 540. That is, the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540. Therefore, the freedom of design of the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be enhanced.

  Next, the displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 (a) and (b) are the elements on larger scale of distribution unit 500 in range LXXIV of FIG. FIG. 74 (a) shows the state where the distributing member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 74 (b) shows the state where the distributing member 540 is located at the restricted position. Further, in the state where the distributing member 540 is arranged at the restricted position, the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the projection 543 of the distributing member 540, and the distributing member 540 centers on the axis of the shaft hole 545. It is a state which is rotated and arrange | positions the control board 541 in the connection part of 1st ball sending path | route KR1 and 3rd ball sending path | route KR3.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the state where the distributing member 540 is arranged at the storing position, the storing plate 542 is arranged on the third ball sending path KR3, and the regulating plate 541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is disposed inside the recess 518 formed in the wall of the

  In this case, the distance dimension L1 between the end of the tip of the reservoir plate 542 projecting inward of the third ball sending path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball sending path KR3 opposite to the tip is smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball sent from the upstream of the third ball sending route KR3 (first ball sending route KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

  Further, the distance dimension L2 from the inside of the curved portion of the reservoir plate 542 to the connection portion between the first ball sending path KR1 and the third ball sending path KR3 is set larger than the radius of the ball and is greater than the diameter of the ball. It is set small. Thereby, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 can be one. In the following, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 is referred to as a storage state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the state where the distributing member 540 is arranged at the restricting position, the restricting plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball sending path KR1 and the third ball sending path KR3. The reservoir plate 542 is disposed inside the recess 519 formed in the back wall of the path forming member 510.

  In this case, the distance dimension L3 between the end of the tip of the restricting plate 541 that protrudes inside the first ball sending path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball sending path KR3 is smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the restriction plate 541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

  That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the restricted position and the storage position, the ball to which the first ball sending path KR1 is sent is sent to the third ball sending path KR3 and stopped on the third ball sending path KR3; It is possible to form a state in which the ball flowing down the first ball passing path KR1 can not flow into the third ball passing path KR3 and the ball can be thrown into the second ball passing path KR2.

  Therefore, by displacing one distribution member 540, the flow-down path of the ball can be reliably switched to either of the two flow-down paths from the one flow-down path.

  Further, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distributing member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distributing member 540 in the second ball sending path KR2, so that the ball receiving portion 467 can not receive the gaming ball, It can be suppressed that the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the third ball sending route.

  Further, the restriction plate 541 (sorting means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball sending path KR1 (falling path) or the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path), Since it is an inner wall on the extension of the downstream direction at the downstream end of the 1 ball sending route KR1, the restricting plate 541 can be protruded at a position close to the gaming ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball sending route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the game balls to be distributed after the control plate 541 starts to project to the down flow path or the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path). As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541.

  In addition, the restriction plate 541 (sorting means) is projected to the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path), and thereby the gaming ball flowing down the first ball passing path KR1 (falling path) is moved to the second ball passing path Since the projecting direction of the restricting plate 541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second ball sending route KR2, the game balls flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 perform a projecting operation. When it abuts on the control plate in the middle of the above, it is possible to push the gaming ball into the second ball sending route KR in accordance with the projecting operation of the control plate. As a result, distribution to the second ball sending route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

  In the present embodiment, the restricting plate 541 of the distributing member 540 is disposed at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the reservoir plate 542, but the position at which the restricting plate 541 is separated from the shaft hole 545 than the restricting plate 541. It may be located at That is, the axis of the distributing member 540 may be disposed at the point P on the back surface of the third ball sending path KR3 shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b). . In this case, the arrangement position of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 formed on the distribution member 540 is formed at the same position as this embodiment.

  In the state where the shaft hole 545 is disposed at the point P, the displacement speed of the restricting plate 541 when the distributing member 540 is rotationally displaced can be made faster than the reservoir plate 542. Therefore, as described later, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restriction position, the restriction plate 541 can be quickly protruded onto the flow-down path. As a result, at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the restricted position to the storage position, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 from flowing into the third ball sending route KR3.

  Further, in this case, the shapes of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 in a front view are formed in an arc shape centering on the point P. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the restricted position to the storage position (or opposite), the displacement area of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Furthermore, the recessed portions 518 and 519 for receiving the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 outside the third ball sending path KR3 have a recessed shape along the displacement locus of the restricting plate 541 and the restricting plate 541.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, description will be given of the case where two or more balls are thrown from the throwing path when the distributing member 540 is placed at the storage position. 75 (a) and (b) are the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit 500. FIG. 76 (a) and 76 (b) are partial enlarged views of distribution unit 500. FIG.

  FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Moreover, from FIG. 75 (a) to FIG. 76 (b), the transition state of the ball when a ball flows in is illustrated in order. Further, in FIG. 75 (a) to FIG. 76 (b), the distributing member 540 is in the state of being disposed at the storage position.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (a) and 75 (b), when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first throwing route KR1 in the state where the distributing member 540 is disposed at the storage position, as described above The game ball T1 is thrown to the third ball sending path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

  In this case, the storage plate 542 is positioned downstream of the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3 by the distance between the radius and the diameter of the ball, so a part of the ball stopped at the top of the storage plate 542 Is projected to the first ball sending route KR1 side (see FIG. 75).

  Therefore, as described above, the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path) is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the gaming ball is formed so that the inner wall on the gravity direction side can roll. Reservoir plate 542 (flow down state changing means) is formed to be able to be ejected and retracted from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity into third throwing path KR3, and therefore gaming balls after starting to project reservoir plate 542 into third throwing path KR3 The time required to be able to regulate the flow of water can be shortened. As a result, when the distribution destination of the restriction plate 541 is switched from the second ball sending path KR2 (second branch path) to the third ball sending path KR3, and when the gaming ball is distributed to the third ball sending path KR3, The protrusion of the reservoir plate 542 can be easily adjusted to the flow restriction.

  Further, the restricting plate 541 is formed to be able to appear in and out with respect to the third ball sending path KR3, and in the state where the third ball sending path KR3 is maximally projected, a force component in the projecting direction is applied from the gaming ball to the storage plate 542 Therefore, when restricting the flow-down of the game balls distributed to the third ball sending route KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from being inserted into the recess 519 due to the impact when the game balls collide. Therefore, it is possible to easily restrict the flow of the game ball.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (b), when the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first ball sending route KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the game ball T2 is The ball is thrown in the direction from the first throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third throwing path KR3. Since the gaming ball T1 is stopped at the upper end portion of the third throwing path KR3, the gaming ball T2 collides with the gaming ball T1 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

  In this case, as described above, since the game ball T1 is projected to the side of the first ball sending route KR1, the game ball T2 is not thrown to the inside of the third ball sending route KR3 and the second ball sending route KR2 is used. Since guidance can be made, it is possible to throw the game ball T2 to the second throw path KR2 without staying inside the third throw path KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the throw of the first throw path KR1 and the second throw path KR2.

  That is, the inner wall on the side where the second throwing path KR2 (the second branch path) is desired in the first throwing path KR1 (the falling path) is the third throwing path KR3 (the first throwing ball) which flows down the first throwing path KR1. Since the last game ball of the specified number (one ball) of game balls stored in the branch passage) can be guided to the side surface of the third ball sending route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball passing route KR1 After colliding with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls, it can be made easy to flow down to the second ball sending route KR2.

  In addition, of the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means a game ball located on the upstream side (opposite to the regulation plate 541). Further, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to one ball. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third throwing route KR3.

  Further, as described above, the lower end side of the flow-down path of the first ball sending path KR1 (flow-down path) is tilted toward the central portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 73) The portion is formed to be curved in a gentle S-shape. That is, since the flow-down direction of the downstream end of the first ball-sending path KR1 (flow-down path) is formed in the flow-down direction of the upstream end of the third ball-sending path KR3, the gaming balls flowing down the first ball-sending path KR1 are the third If it collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the throwing route, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is different from the flow-down direction of the upstream end of the third sending route KR3 You can As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball at the end from jumping out from the upstream end of the third throwing path KR3 and flowing into the second throwing path KR2 by the repulsive force at the time of the collision.

  Further, the upper end portion of the third ball sending path KR3 is formed to be inclined in the inclination direction of the lower end portion of the first ball sending path KR1, so the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. And the second throwing path KR2 side. Therefore, the rebounding direction of the gaming ball T2 that has collided with the gaming ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball sending route KR2. Therefore, it is possible to easily throw the game ball T2 colliding with the game ball T1 to the second ball sending route KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the ball stagnates in the first ball sending route KR1 and the second ball sending route KR2.

  Further, the distribution destination by the restriction plate 541 is set to the third ball sending route KR3 (first branch passage) and the flow-down of the gaming balls in the third ball sending route KR3 is restricted by the storage plate 542 (flow state change means). 3 In a state where a predetermined number (one ball) of gaming balls are stored in the third throwing route KR3, gaming balls flowing down the first throwing route KR1 (falling passage) can flow down to the second throwing route KR2 (second branch passage) Therefore, when more than the specified number of game balls flow down the flow-down passage, it is suppressed that the game balls (the game balls T2 of the second and subsequent balls) exceed the specified number stay on the first throwing route KR1 it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the restricting plate 541 (operation of setting the distribution destination to the second ball sending route KR2) from being inhibited by the gaming ball stuck on the first ball sending route KR1.

  Then, with reference to FIG. 77, when the distribution member 540 is arrange | positioned in a control position, the case where a ball is thrown in the throwing path | route is demonstrated. 77 (a) and 77 (b) are partial enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIG.

  77 (a) and (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b) illustrate the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Further, in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), the distribution member 540 is placed in the restricted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), when the ball is thrown to the first ball sending path KR1 in a state where the distributing member 540 is disposed at the restricting position, the game ball T1 which is thrown is the first ball The control plate 541 collides with the lower end of the path KR1. Thereby, the gaming ball T1 is guided to the second throwing route KR2 and flows down the second throwing route KR2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, an operation at the time of dropping the ball to the downstream side of the third ball sending route KR3 will be described. 78 (a) and (b) are the elements on larger scale of the distribution unit 500. FIG.

  FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the distribution unit 500 of FIG. 74 (a). Further, FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b) illustrate the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Furthermore, FIG. 78 (a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the storage position, and FIG. 78 (b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the restricted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), when the distribution unit 500 is placed in the storage state (the state shown in FIG. 78 (a)), the distribution member 540 is displaced and disposed at the restricted position. The gaming ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 flows downstream of the third throwing path KR3.

  That is, the flow of the balls to the third ball sending path KR3 is only the balls stagnated above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, since the ball stagnating above the storage plate 542 is 1, it is possible to perform the flow of the ball to the third throwing path KR3 one ball at a time. Therefore, since the number of balls flowed down to the downstream side of the third ball sending path KR3 can be stabilized, it is possible to suppress the flow of balls having an unintended number of balls into the third ball sending path KR3.

  Therefore, the distribution member 540 (distribution means) is formed with the restriction plate 541 (first projection / recession portion) formed so as to be able to protrude and retract with respect to the third ball sending path (the first branch passage) with displacement of the distribution member 540. A storage plate (second in-and-out part) is provided, and the restriction plate 541 protrudes into the third ball-sending path, whereby the game ball flowing down the first ball-sending path KR1 (falling path) is subjected to a second ball-sending path KR2 (second branch The storage plate 542 is disposed on the downstream side of the third ball sending route KR3 with respect to the restriction plate 541 and protrudes to the third ball sending route KR3 so as to be distributed to the third ball sending route KR3. In the state where one of the restriction plates 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball sending passage KR3, the other is outside the passage of the third ball sending passage KR3 (recessed portion (recessed portion 518,519 Side), the distribution member 540 is displaced according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member), and only the specified number (one ball) of game balls is distributed to the third ball sending route KR3 and the balls are distributed. It can be received by the receiving unit 467.

  That is, the first state in which the gaming balls flowing down the first throwing path KR1 are distributed to the second throwing path by the restriction plate 541 protruding, and the restriction plate 541 retracts, thereby flowing down the first ball sending path KR1. The second state in which the game ball to be distributed is distributed to the third ball-sending path, and the projection of the second in / out portion restricts the flow-down of the game ball distributed to the third ball-sending path KR3 (reserves the game ball) And the fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third throwing path is made to flow down and be received by the ball receiving portion by retracting the second in / out portion, and each of these states is possible. By combining these, only the specified number (one ball) of gaming balls can be distributed to the third ball sending route KR3 and received by the ball receiving portion 467.

  Further, since the distributing member 540 includes the restricting plates 541 and 542, ie, is formed as one component, the structure of the distributing member 540 (in order to operate the restricting plate 541 and the storage plate 542 and exert their functions) Can be simplified). Furthermore, in the state where one of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball sending passage KR3, the other is retracted out of the passage of the third ball sending passage KR3. Depending on the position (first position and second position), it is sufficient if the distribution member 540 is also formed to be displaceable at two positions. That is, the first to fourth states described above can be formed by displacing the distributing member 540 at two positions. Therefore, the structure of the distribution member 540 and the structure for displacing the distribution member 540 with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be simplified, and the reliability of the distribution operation of the game balls can be improved accordingly.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 79 to 80, distribution unit 500 and lower displacement unit 400 will be described. FIG. 79 is a front view of distribution unit 500 and lower displacement unit 400. FIG. FIG. 80 is a top view of distribution unit 500 and lower displacement unit 400. FIG. The lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in the state of being disposed at the retracted position.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, distribution unit 500 is disposed on the front side (lower side of FIG. 80) of lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the distribution unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are arranged at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is fed to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 via the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

  In other words, the ball is sent to the lower displacement member 440 from the third winning opening 82 formed on the game board 13 through the ball coming from the game area in front of the game board 13 via the throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. Be done.

  Therefore, the sorting unit 500 includes the rolling portion 525 communicated with the track area of the ball receiving portion 467, and the sorting member 540 regulates passage of the gaming ball in the rolling portion 525. Even if a malfunction occurs and game balls T2 for the second and subsequent balls are thrown, ensure that the game balls T2 for the second and subsequent balls are sent to the track area of the distribution member 540 via the rolling portion 525 Can. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the second and subsequent game balls to have a problem.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 81, 83 and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84 and 86 are cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 500. In FIGS. 81, 83 and 85, the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are viewed as transparent, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 disposed on the front side is shown. . In FIGS. 82, 84 and 86, the distributing member 540 is shown by a chain line, and the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 disposed on the back side is shown by a chain line.

  Further, in FIGS. 81 and 82, the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing member 440 is disposed at the first position, and the distributing member 540 is disposed at the regulated position, and the lower displacing member 440 is retracted. The position is illustrated. In FIGS. 83 and 84, the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing member 440 is disposed at the second position and the distributing member 540 is disposed at the storage position, and the lower displacing member 440 is in the retracted state. The state is illustrated. In FIGS. 85 and 86, the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing member 440 is shown at the first position and the distributing member 540 is shown at the storage position, and the lower displacing member 440 is in the first overhanging state. The situation where it is located is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the state in which the lower displacing member 440 is disposed in the retracted state and in the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing member 440 is disposed at the first position, the ball receiving portion A rack 466 for driving 467 is disposed on the other end side (left side in a front view of the lower displacement member 440) of the lower displacement member 440, and a movable rack 464 is disposed on the back side in a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction.

  That is, similarly to the rack 466, the movable rack 464 is disposed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side in a front view of the lower displacement member 440). Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is positioned on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side in front view) is in contact with the projection 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the driving force of rotation is applied to the distributing member 540 about the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the distributing member 540 is displaced to the position (regulating position) where the regulating plate 541 is protruded to the first ball sending path KR1.

  Therefore, when the lower displacing member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position, the ball sent to the first ball sending path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is the third ball sending path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second ball feeding path KR2. Further, as described above, by shifting the distributing member 540 from the storage state storing the balls above the storage plate 542 to the restricted position, the game is performed on the downstream side of the third ball sending route KR3 (the downstream side of the storage plate 542) You can throw a ball. At this time, the game ball can be thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467 by causing the ball receiving portion 467 to perform a ball receiving operation.

  Note that the opening operation of the third motorized combination 82a for keeping the gaming balls in the sorting unit 500 is performed before the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the first position, and the ball receiving portion 467 is the first position. When being displaced to the position, the third motorized workpiece 82a is in a closed state. Thus, when the distributing member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restricted position, the gaming balls passing through the first ball sending route KR1 are not restricted from flowing down by the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and the unintended gaming balls are 3) It can be suppressed that the ball is thrown to the downstream side of the ball throwing route KR3.

  Further, since the distributing member 540 is formed so as to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, the throwing of the gaming ball to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted. Or acceptable. That is, since restriction or allowance of throwing of the game ball can be mechanically synchronized with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 and switched, for example, the distributing member according to the detection result of the sensor that detects the position of the distributing member 540 The control of the driving means or the means for driving the driving means 540 can be omitted, so that the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved.

  Further, the distributing member 540 throws the game ball T2 to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the ball receiving portion 467 being displaced from the second position to the first position direction (second direction). Therefore, it is possible to reliably throw the game ball to the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 and to the area on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467.

  Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaceably formed at a switching position at which the distributing member 540 is switched and at a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). In the state where the part 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distributing member 540 is switched to the third ball sending route KR3, and in the state where the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving part Since the 467 can receive the game ball and the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 can be switched to the second ball sending route KR2, the ball receiving portion 467 can receive a predetermined number (one ball in this embodiment) that can receive the ball. It can suppress that the game ball which exceeded is distributed to 3rd ball sending course KR3.

  That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the ball receiving unit 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distributing member 540 is switched to the third ball sending path. There is a risk that the game balls may be distributed to the third ball sending route KR3 more than the specified number which can be received by the ball receiving portion 467. When a means for restricting the inflow of gaming balls to the third throwing path KR3 is separately provided, the structure is complicated and the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position, and after the specified number (one ball in the present embodiment) of game balls is distributed to the third ball sending route KR3, the distributing member 540 receives the receiving position. Since the distribution destination is switched to the second ball sending route KR2 when being displaced to the second ball sending route KR2, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding one ball from flowing down to the third ball sending route. Therefore, it can suppress that the ball receiving part 467 can distribute the game ball which exceeded the defined number (one ball) which can be received to 3rd ball sending course KR3. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-described means (means for restricting the inflow of gaming balls to the third ball sending route KR3), it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (turned on), it starts from the position where each operating unit is powered off (turned off). Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, only its control may be reset. In that case, when the distributing member 540 includes the driving means, when the power is turned on, the distributing unit 500 in the storage state operates at the time of the initial operation to cause the gaming ball to flow down to the third ball sending route KR3. There is a risk that the game ball will be thrown on the retraction side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 disposed at the third position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the distributing member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 are synchronized, even if the power is turned off in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is not positioned at a predetermined reference position, pachinko It can be suppressed that a game ball which is not intended when the power of the machine 10 is turned on is thrown to the orbit area of the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, clogging of the gaming ball inside the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, when the game ball is left in the orbit area of the lower displacement member 440 and the power is turned off, the ball receiving section 467 is left in the orbit area of the ball receiving section 467 by the above-described discharging operation. The gaming ball can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

  Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the lower displacing member 440 is disposed in the retracted state, and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacing member 440 is disposed at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position). In the closed state, as described above, the rack 466 for driving the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 83) of the lower displacement member 440. From the end on the other end side (the left side in FIG. 83 in the left-right direction), it is disposed at a position movable to one end side.

  Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is disposed at a position separated from the end on the other end side of the lower displacement member 4440 to the one end side. In this case, the surface on the other end side (the surface on the left side in front view) of the contact plate 464c is separated from the projection 543 of the distribution member 540. Thus, the distributing member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the distributing member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third throwing ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected to the route KR3.

  Therefore, when the lower displacing member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the second position or the third position (position other than the first position), the first ball sending path of the distribution unit 500. The ball to be thrown to KR 1 is stopped above the reservoir plate 542. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball thrown to the first ball sending route KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball sending route KR2. .

  Next, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacing member 440 is arranged in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the lower displacing member 440 slides relative to the front base 411 as described above. It is displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464 c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced along with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 and is in a state of being separated from the projection 543 of the distribution member 540. Thus, the distributing member 540 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4 interposed between the distributing member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is moved to the third throwing ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) projected to the route KR3.

  Therefore, when the lower displacing member 440 is brought into the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state, the ball thrown to the first ball sending path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542 and Be done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the ball thrown to the first ball sending route KR1 collides with the ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball sending route KR2. .

  That is, when the lower displacing member 440 is brought into the first overhanging state and the second overhanging state (states other than the retracted state), when the lower displacing member 440 is displaced, the opening 451 a of the decorative member 450 is Since the position is displaced, the ball communication state between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the distribution unit 500 is released. Therefore, there is a possibility that the ball may be discharged to the inside of the back case 300 from the opening 451a if the ball flows down the third ball sending path KR3, in the present embodiment, the third ball sending is performed by setting the distributing member 540 to the storage position. It is possible to suppress the flow of the ball downstream of the path KR3. As a result, the balls of the back case 300 can be prevented from being discharged inside.

  In other words, the lower displacing member 440 of the lower displacing unit 400 is displaceable in the retracted state, the first overhanging state, and the second overhanging state, and when the lower displacing member 440 is positioned in the retracted state, Since the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the lower displacing member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with the lower displacing member 440 disposed in the retracted state, and is disposed in the first or second overhanging state. And the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced by that amount.

  In this case, in a state where the lower displacing member 440 is disposed in the first or second projecting state, the ball receiving portion 467 can not receive the game ball from the rolling portion 525 of the third ball sending path KR3 (third ball sending path KR3 When the rolling portion 525 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 do not communicate with each other, the contact plate 464c interlocking with the ball receiving portion 467 can not contact the distribution member 540 in a state where it Therefore, in a state where the ball receiving portion 467 can not receive the game ball (the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first overhanging state or the second overhanging state), the distribution destination by the distributing member 540 is the third throwing path. It is possible to suppress switching to KR3.

  Further, since distribution member 540 is disposed on base plate 520 of distribution unit 500 formed as a separate member from base member 470 of lower displacement member 440, the size of base member 470 of lower displacement member 440 is increased accordingly. Can be suppressed.

  Here, since displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first extension state to the retracted state is not only rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also rotational displacement, when the contact plate 464c in the inclined state is subjected to rotational displacement. The protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 may abut on the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540 may not be rotationally displaced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted state from the state of being displaced to the first projecting position shown in FIG. 85, the ball receiving portion 467 is a place other than the first position. It is in the state of being displaced to (the second position or the third position). Thereby, the abutment plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced in the retracted state can be prevented from colliding with the projection 543. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts on the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 can not be rotationally displaced.

  Further, since the distributing member 540 is formed with the bulging portion 543a as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first overhanging state to the retracted state due to a control failure or the like, Even when the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts on the upper surface, the distribution member 540 can be rotationally displaced.

  That is, since the contact area with the contact plate 464c can be reduced by the bulged portion 543a, the bulged portion 543a can be easily slid along the surface when the contact plate 464c abuts. Therefore, the distributing member 540 can be easily rotated and displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 abuts on the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 can not be rotationally displaced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotation unit 700 will be described. 87 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 90 is an exploded view of the rotation unit 700. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 configured of a plurality of displacement members, a ball pedestal 710 disposed on the upper side of the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity, and its ball pedestal. 710 and a back base 720 disposed on the back side of the decoration unit 750, a left transmission member 730 disposed on the left side in a front view of the decoration unit 750, and a right transmission member disposed on the right side in a front view of the decoration unit 750 And 740 are mainly provided.

  The ball holder 710 is a member for dropping the game ball emitted from the emission opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. Thereby, the ball thrown to the inside of the lower displacement member 440 can be thrown to the rotation unit 700. The detailed configuration of the ball pedestal 710 will be described later.

  The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body in which a curved portion is disposed at the upper side in a side view, and a decoration of a character or a pattern is provided on the front side. The decoration unit 750 is configured of a plurality of members, and is configured to be displaceable by transmission of a drive described later. The description of the configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

  The back surface base 720 is a plate member that connects the back surface side of the ball pedestal 710 and the back surface side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view. As described above, since the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of movable members, the fastening portion is limited, and the decoration unit 750 and the ball stand 710 are located on the back side of the position where it is not visible to the player. And the decoration unit 750 and the ball pedestal 710 can be assembled as one unit while securing the movable range of the decoration unit 750.

  The left side transmission member 730 has a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface (the left side in FIG. 87) of the decoration unit 750, a transmission member 730 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4 attached. Mainly formed with a motor base 732, a gear cover 733 for covering the transmission member 730, and a ball feeding path cover 734 attached to the gear cover 733 and forming a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the facing Ru.

  The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750 described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730 described later.

  The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c And a load gear 731 e engaged with the transmission gear 731 d. The transmission gear 731 d is disposed to be adjacent to and coaxial with the shaft 735.

  The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates as the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

  The transmission gear 731b has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein, and an inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft JB1 for transmitting a driving force of rotation to the right transmission member 740 on the right.

  The one-way clutch OW1 is disposed on the inner side and has a cam surface formed on the outer circumferential surface, an outer ring disposed on the outer side of the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the inner ring, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller becomes high, which acts as a resistance to transmit power to the inner ring, and the outer ring in the other direction with respect to the inner ring The contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller is lowered, and the cam clutch slips and cuts off the power transmission.

  Therefore, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the driving force of rotation to the shaft portion JB1 when the driving force of one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, and when the driving force of the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, The outer ring slides with respect to the inner ring and the transmission of the driving force to the shaft portion JB1 is blocked.

  Similarly to the transmission gear 731 b, the transmission gear 731 c has the one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein. A shaft 735 is disposed inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

  Therefore, the transmission gear 731c can transmit the driving force of rotation to the shaft 735 when the driving force of one direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4, and the driving force of the other direction is transmitted from the driving motor KM4. On the other hand, the outer ring slips and transmission of driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. Further, the transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and their rotational directions are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction, the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in one direction. That is, switching the direction of rotation of the drive motor KM4 switches the mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or the mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

  The transmission gear 731 d is attached to the shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is rotated only when the transmission gear 731 c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731 c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731 c is rotated in one direction, and rotation in the other direction is non-rotation.

  The load gear 731 e is connected to the shaft portion 791 a of the resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed to have a shaft 791a rotatable relative to the base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed such that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, a force for rotating the load gear 731e connected to the shaft portion 791a is also required to have a predetermined amount or more.

  Thereby, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped by the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, it is possible to suppress the rotation by the inertia force. That is, the resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force acting around the axis of the rotating body 800 when the rotation of the rotating body 800 stops.

  The load gear 731 e is connected to a transmission gear 731 d disposed coaxially with the transmission gear 731 c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 can be made to rotate only in one direction by rotating the transmission gear 731d. That is, when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction, the transmission of the drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when rotating the transmission gear 731b in one direction, it is possible to suppress the resistance of the load gear 731e from acting.

  The motor base 732 is formed in a box-like body opened on the decoration unit 750 side, and the drive motor KM4 is disposed outside the bottom portion of the box (left side in FIG. 87) with the shaft inserted through the inside of the box. Thus, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 can be disposed inside the motor base 732. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is set larger than the width dimension of the transmission gear 731a. As a result, the drive motor KM 4 and the transmission gear 731 a can be mounted on the motor base 732 in the decoration unit 750, and collision of the transmission gear 731 a with the decoration unit 750 can be suppressed.

  The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape in a rear view, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. Further, in the decoration unit 750, a through hole 733a is formed to penetrate at a position facing the shaft hole of the rotating body 800 described later. Thus, the balls rolling on the inside of the rotary body 800 can be discharged outward through the through holes 733a. In addition, the description about the ball sent to the rotary body 800 is mentioned later.

  The throwing path cover 734 is a member disposed on the outer side (left side in FIG. 87) of the gear cover 733, and is formed of a plate-like body, and a wall projecting from the edge to the gear cover 733 side is erected. Thus, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball feeding path cover 734, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 is inserted into the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotation unit 700. Can. The balls discharged from the gap between the facing of the gear cover 733 and the throwing path cover are sent to a collecting path (not shown) and collected.

  The right side transmission member 740 covers the rotation member 741 connected to the other end side of the above-mentioned shaft portion JB1, the arm member 742 whose one end is connected to the rotation member 741, the rotation member 741 and the arm member 742 And the crank cover 743 disposed on the decoration unit 750 in the above state.

  The rotating member 741 has a main body portion 741b formed in a disk-like plate shape, a one-way clutch OW1 fitted in the shaft of the main body portion 741b, and a cylindrical shape projecting on the opposite side (right side in FIG. 87) of the decoration unit 750. The projection 741a is mainly provided.

  In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. The one-way clutch OW1 is arranged such that the inner ring and the outer ring are not transmitted when the rotation opposite to the rotation direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring.

  Thus, when a driving force having a rotational speed faster than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated to rotate the rotating member 741 of the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can rotate two or more at different speeds.

  The arm member 742 has a shape in which a side view C-shape and an I-shape are combined, and is formed by connecting the other end of the I-shape to one end of the C-shape. Further, the arm member 742 has a shaft hole 742a formed through the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b formed through the end of the I-shaped portion, and And an elliptical second sliding groove 742c which is formed through the other end of the V-shaped portion.

  The shaft hole 742a is a hole into which a shaft portion 764a formed on the right side surface plate 764 of the box member 760 described later is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is rotatable relative to the decoration unit 750 because the shaft portion 764a is inserted into the shaft hole 742a and disposed in the decoration unit 750.

  The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotation member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction formed in an ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the projection 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotation member 741.

  Further, the rotation member 741 is formed such that the outer diameter is smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742 and the axis is a half distance of the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion from the axial hole 742 a of the arm member 742 It is disposed at a position more distant than the other. Thus, by rotating the rotation member 741, the arm member 742 can be made to reciprocate in rotation around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

  The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a protrusion 773a of a right side lid 773 described later is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction formed in an ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a. Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. In addition, the right side lid 773 is formed so as to be rotatable and displaced with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, the rotation member 741 is rotated, and the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates, thereby rotating the right lid 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

  The crank cover 743 is mainly provided with an oval portion 743a formed in an oval in a rear view and a ball throwing portion 743b continuously formed on the back side of the oval portion 743a.

  The oval portion 743a is a cover for covering the arm member 742. The outer shape in a side view is formed larger than the displacement region of the arm member 742 and the arm member 742 and the arm member 742 from the edge to the decoration unit 750 side. A projecting wall is formed that is larger than the thickness of Thus, when the crank cover 743 is disposed on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be disposed between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

  The ball sending portion 743b is a path member for sending the ball to the collection path when the ball flowing down the front down flow area of the gaming board 13 is collected from the predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside It is formed in the shape of a bar with space. Further, the upper end side of the ball sending portion 743 b is opened and connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and the lower end side is connected to the opening formed in the decoration unit 750. Thus, the balls collected on the game board 13 can be guided to the collection path (not shown) through the inside of the decoration unit 750 through the ball sending part 743b.

  Next, the decoration unit 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. FIG. 92 (a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the arrow XCIIa direction view of FIG. 91, and FIG. 92 (b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the arrow XCIIb direction of FIG. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. 91 (b) and 91 (c), a state in which the right side plate 764 and the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 are viewed as transparent is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decoration unit 750 is a lid disposed on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the box member 760 and the box member 760 serving as the outer decoration part of the decoration unit 750 (FIG. 91A upper side). It is mainly provided with the member 770, and the rotary body 800 arrange | positioned by the inside of the box member 760 and the cover member 770.

  The box member 760 includes a base member 762 disposed below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 disposed in front of the base member 762 and a lower plate 763 disposed on the bottom of the base member 762. It is mainly provided with a right side plate 764 disposed on the right side in a front view of the base member 762 and a left side plate 765 disposed on the left side in a front view of the base member 762.

  The base member 762 is formed to have a rectangular lateral length larger than the rotating body 800 in top view, and is formed to have a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The upper surface of the base member 762 is formed in a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is disposed in the vicinity of the rotating body 800, a collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

  The base member 762 is mainly provided with a recess 762a recessed downward on the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a ball feeding portion 762b recessed in a substantially L shape on the bottom surface.

  The recess 762 a is a groove in which the above-described shaft portion JB 1 is disposed, and is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731 b disposed on the side surface of the decoration unit 750. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

  The ball sending portion 762b is bent in an L shape on the bottom and is recessed, one end side is connected to the opening 764b of the right side plate 764, and the other end is the back side of the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 Connected to In addition, the recessed width of the ball sending portion 762b is formed larger than the diameter of the ball. As a result, the ball can be fed to the inside of the box member 760 by arranging the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side.

  The front plate 761 is formed to have a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness on the back side. Further, the front plate 761 is formed with a winning opening 761a of a size that can insert a ball on the front side. The winning opening 761a is connected to the ball sending portion 762b of the base member 762 disposed on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball sent to the inside of the winning opening 761 a is sent to the ball sending portion 762 b of the base member 762.

  The right side plate 764 is formed in a D-shape whose outer shape in a side view is curved upward. Further, the right side surface plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a protruding to the outside of the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c formed penetrating below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape of the same shaft as the rotation shaft of the rotating body 800. The opening 764d is formed in the opening, the opening 764b opened at a position opposite to the lower end of the ball sending portion 762b of the crank cover 743, and the through hole formed in a side view semicircular on the axis of the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 The engaging portion 764 e is mainly provided.

  The opening 764 b is a hole for making it possible to send the ball, which is thrown from the ball sending portion of the crank cover 743, to the base member 762, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Thereby, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762.

  The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the above-described shaft portion JB1 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, the driving force can be transmitted to the right side transmission member 740 described above.

  The curved opening 764d is an opening through which the protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid 773 is inserted. Further, the curved opening 764 d is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced. Thereby, when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, collision between the protrusion 773a and the curved opening 764d can be suppressed.

  The engaging portion 764 e is a member that engages with the end portion of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotary body 800 on the right side in a front view to hold the base plate 810 in a non-rotatable manner. That is, the tip end portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted into the engaging portion 764e and disposed. Thus, the base plate 810 can not be rotated.

  The left side surface plate 765 is formed so that the outer shape in a side view is substantially the same as the right side surface plate 764. Further, the left side surface plate 765 is a through hole into which the through hole 765a formed on the shaft of the rotating body 800, the shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 are inserted. The hole 765c is mainly formed.

  The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side in a front view of the rotary body 800 into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 765a is formed on the axis of the rotary body 800, and the size of the inner diameter is set to the same size as the inner diameter of the opening on the left of the rotary body 800 in a front view.

  The shaft portion 765b can be inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation restricting member 780 described later, and can hold the rotation restricting member 780 in a rotatable state. The displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described later.

  The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

  The lower surface plate 763 is a plate member which is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 to form a ball feeding path through which a ball can pass by the ball sending portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower surface plate 763. Further, the lower surface plate 763 is formed with an opening 763a penetrating in the vertical direction. The opening 763a is an opening for throwing a ball, which is thrown inside the ball throwing portion 762b, to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball that has won the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the ball play area 743b of the right transmission member 740 can be thrown from the ball and the game area, and the ball can be discharged from the inside of the decoration unit 750.

  The lid member 770 has a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right lid portion 773 fastened to the side surface of the curved lid portion 771 on the right side in a front view, and a curved lid portion 771. And a left side lid portion 772 fastened to the side surface on the left side in a front view of the vehicle.

  As described above, the curved lid portion 771 is formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 and has a larger radius than that of the rotating body 800 as described above. The curved lid portion 771 includes a transparent portion 771a formed of a transparent plate on a part of the front side.

  The transparent portion 771a is a plate that allows the player to visually recognize patterns, characters, and the like drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 from the player. That is, the player can view the display of the rotating body 800 via the transparent portion 771a even if the rotating body 800 is in a mode in which the upper end side is provided on the lid member 770.

  The right side lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right side lid portion 773 is formed larger than the size of the outer shape of the right end portion 811 of the rotary body 800 in a side view. Thus, the right side lid 773 is disposed in a state in which the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the annular inner portion.

  Furthermore, the right side lid portion 773 is mainly provided with a projection 773a that protrudes to the outside (right side in front view) of the decoration unit 750, and a recess 773b that is recessed toward the inside in the radial direction at the outer peripheral edge. . The protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 as described above.

  The concave portion 773 b can rotate the opening and closing member 870 by inserting a projection 871 of the opening and closing member 870 described later. Therefore, the recess 773 b has a recess width set larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. In addition, the concave portion 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge portion of the right side lid portion 773 in which the curved lid portion 771 is disposed.

  The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set to be substantially the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the left side lid portion 772 is formed larger than the outer diameter of a tooth surface 881 a of the left rotating portion 880 described later. Thus, the left lid portion 772 is disposed in a state in which the left rotation portion 880 of the rotating body 800 is inserted into the annular inner portion.

  In addition, the left lid 772 is formed with a plate-like sensor plate 772a that protrudes to the outside (left side in front view) of the decoration unit 750. The sensor plate 772a is disposed between the facing of a not-shown bifurcated sensor, so that the position of the left lid 772 can be detected.

  Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be described. The cover member 770 in the assembled state of the rotating body 800 is a state in which the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 are respectively inserted inside the right side cover 773 and the left side cover 772 before assembly (separate members). Do. Then, by assembling the right side lid 773 and the left side lid 772 and the curved lid 771, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected. Therefore, lid member 770 is rotatable relative to the rotating body around the axis of rotating body 800.

  The rotation restricting member 780 is bent in a substantially L shape in a side view. The rotation restricting member 780 mainly includes an axial hole 781 penetrating to a bent portion, a protrusion 782 projecting in the bending direction on one end side, and an abutting surface 783 formed flat on the tip on the other end side. Be done.

  The shaft portion 765b of the left side surface plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781 as described above. Thus, the rotation restricting member 780 is rotatably held with respect to the left side surface plate 765. Further, a biasing spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is exerted on the rotation restricting member 780.

  The protrusion 782 can regulate the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 by engaging with an engaging protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 described later. The contact surface 783 is a surface on which the end on the back surface side of the lid member 770 mentioned above abuts, and the rotation restricting member 780 can be rotated by the lid member 770 being abutted. The restriction mode of the rotation restriction member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 to 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95 (a) and 96 (a) show the rotation unit 700 in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95 (b) and 96 (b) show the rotation unit 700 in arrow XCVb in FIG. is there.

  In FIG. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the axis of the drive motor KM 4 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise), the displacement direction of each member is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

  In this case, in the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is not rotated. Accordingly, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is stopped.

  On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Thus, the transmission gear 731 d connected to the shaft 735 is rotated. Thereby, the load gear 731 e meshed with the transmission gear 731 d and the tooth surface 881 a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM 4 rotates forward, the drive force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the drive force to the rotary member 800 is transmitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

  In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Thus, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

  On the other hand, in the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731, the rotation of the outer ring is not transmitted to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is not rotated. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are not rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM 4 rotates in the negative direction, the drive force to the lid member 770 is transmitted, and the drive force to the rotary member 800 is not transmitted.

  Therefore, the transmission gear 731b (displacement transmission means) transmits the drive force from the drive motor KM4 to the opening / closing member 870 described later via the transmission gear 731c (rotation side drive means) transmitting the rotation body 800 and the lid member 770. Further, by disposing the one-way clutch OW1, it is possible to transmit the rotational force to one of the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b and to interrupt the transmission to the other according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4. . As a result, only by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the drive target driven by the rotation drive force can be switched. That is, according to the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the rotation of the rotating body 800 and its rotation The stop can be switched between the displacement of the opening and closing member 870 and the stop, and the structure can be simplified while a plurality of modes can be formed.

  Here, in the structure in which the driving object (the rotating body 800 or the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770) is switched according to the rotation direction of the driving means using the one-way clutch OW1, the transmission of the driving force from the driving motor KM4 is When it is shut off, rotation or displacement in the direction in which it was driven by the driving force is free, so that, for example, the driving object of the driving means is switched from the rotating body 800 to the opening / closing member 870 (lid member 770). When the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body 800 is in a rotatable state, and there is a possibility that the rotation may be continued (rotation) by the inertial force.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the load gear 731 e (gear for load) engaged with the transmission gear 731 d driven by the transmission gear 731 c is provided, transmission of the driving force of the rotation from the drive motor KM 4 is interrupted. However, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731 e can be used to prevent the rotation of the rotating body 800 from being continued.

  Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97 (a) and 98 (c) are in the closed state, FIGS. 97 (b) and 98 (b) are in the intermediate state, and FIGS. 97 (c) and 98 (a) are in the open state. FIG. 18 is a side view of the decoration unit 750 and the right side transmission member 740.

  In FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (c) and 98 (a) to 98 (c), a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right side transmission member 740 is removed is illustrated. Further, the closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the cover member 770 is disposed in a state of covering the upper surface (upper side in FIG. 97) of the rotating body 800, and the open state means that the cover member 770 rotates. It is in a state of being displaced and being disposed on the back side (right side in FIG. 97 (c)) of the rotating body 800. The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is disposed at a position between the closed state and the open state.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 97 (a) to FIG. 97 (c), the state of being displaced from the closed state to the open state is sequentially illustrated, and in FIG. 98 (a) to FIG. 98 (c), the state is displaced from the open state to the closed state. The illustrated states are sequentially illustrated.

  First, displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described with reference to FIG. Transmission of the drive force to the arm member 742 is performed by rotating the drive motor KM4 in the negative direction as described above.

  In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotation member 741 is disposed on the rear side (right side in FIG. 97) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, in the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742 b into which the protrusion 741 a is inserted is disposed on the back side of the shaft hole 742 a.

  The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 97) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding on the right side surface of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is disposed above the rotating body 800.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the rotary member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees and the projection 741a is positioned below the axis of the rotary member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 With the displacement of the protrusion 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced to the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 97 (b)).

  Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is disposed on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the shaft hole 742a (upper side in FIG. 97). As a result, the projection 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is disposed at the position where the rotary lid 800 is rotationally displaced to the back side. .

  In this case, the barycentric position of the lid member 770 is disposed on the back side with respect to the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotary body 800 formed in a cylindrical shape). Therefore, a rotational force is applied by the load of the lid member 770 in the direction to displace the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, since the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 and the outer ring is configured to be rotatable ahead of the inner ring, the load of the cover member 770 stops the driving of the drive motor KM4. The lid member 770 can then be rotated continuously.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c), when the cover member 770 is displaced to the back side of the rotating body, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the position in the intermediate state. That is, it is the end on the leftmost side (left side in FIG. 97) of the displacement area of the protrusion 741a. Thus, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

  That is, displacement of the cover member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by an operation of driving the drive motor KM 4 to displace it to an intermediate state and an operation of dropping the load of the cover member 770 and dropping it.

  As a result, when displacing the cover member 770 from the closed state to the open state, the section for driving the drive motor KM4 can be set to a half of the entire section, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be made to follow the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be made to follow the load from the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two steps. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the cover member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, the control does not have to be complicated. As a result, control can be simplified and generation of control failure can be suppressed.

  The displacement section according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section, the displacement section according to the load of the cover member 770 is referred to as a second section, and the first section is denoted by DK1. In the second section, the symbol DK2 is given and explained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

  As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotation member 741 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 98A) relative to the axial hole 742a of the arm member 742. The portion 771 is disposed on the back side of the rotating body 800.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the rotary member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees and the projection 741a is positioned above the axis of the rotary member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 With the displacement of the protrusion 741a, the shaft hole 742a is displaced to the lower side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in FIG. 98 (b)).

  Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is disposed on the upper side in the direction of gravity of the shaft hole 742a (upper side in FIG. 98). As a result, the projection 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the rotational displacement is performed approximately 45 degrees upward from the state where the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is positioned on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is in the state of being placed at the position where it was made.

  Also, the lid member 770 displaced to the closed position (position in FIG. 97 (a)) is disposed in the game area (front side of the game board 13), and is in the open position (FIG. 97 (c) The lid member 770 displaced to the position of) is disposed outside the area of the game area (the back side of the game board 13). Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is rotated. In particular, in the present embodiment, as described later, the rotary member 800 is provided with the opening / closing member 870 that is displaced toward the gaming area, so that the gaming machine flowing down the game area collides with the opening / closing member 870, It is possible to prevent the opening and closing member 870 from being opened (projected).

  In addition, since the cover member 770 is disposed outside the game area in the open position, the displacement of the cover member 770 to the open position causes a space for the opening / closing member 870 to project to the game area. It can be secured. Accordingly, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the gaming area side by that amount, and the player can more easily view the opening and closing member 870.

  Furthermore, the lid member 770 is formed rotatably around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotary body 800 and is formed in a curved plate shape along the outer surface of the rotary body 800, so that the lid member 770 is closed. A space required for displacement between the position (covering position) and the position in the open state (retracted position) can be reduced, and accordingly, a space for disposing other members can be secured. Also, by forming the cover member 770 in a curved manner in this manner, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing down the game area from being retained on the cover member 770 disposed at the position of the closed state, and thus smooth. Can be drained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98C, the rotary member 741 is further rotated approximately 90 degrees to displace the projection 71a to the right of the axis of the rotary member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is moved. Is displaced to the rear side (right side in FIG. 98) with respect to the shaft hole 742a in accordance with the displacement of the protrusion 741a.

  Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the opposite end of the first sliding groove 742b is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 98 (c)) relative to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the projection 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is disposed above the rotating body 800.

  In this case, with the displacement of the lid member 770, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced to the front side relative to the rotation axis of the lid member 770. Therefore, in the middle of the intermediate state to the closed state, the load of the cover member 770 exerts a rotational force in a direction to displace the cover member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving of the drive motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

  Therefore, since the lid member 770 can be put in the closed state by the load of the lid member 770, the lid member 770 can be put in the closed state surely.

  Here, if the rotational displacement of the cover member 770 is displaced only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the cover member 770 can not be stopped at a normal position when the drive stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is shifted. Further, as in the present embodiment, in the case where the rotation direction of the rotation member 741 is one, when the stopping operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, rotation for one rotation is required to return to the normal position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the position at which the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped using the load of the lid member 770, the displacement of the stop position of the lid member 770 can be suppressed. it can.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with drive means for generating a drive force, a displacement member displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means for transmitting the drive force to the displacement member. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the drive means to the displacement member is always constant, the displacement member is also constant when the drive means is driven at a constant drive speed. It is displaced by speed, and no change can be given to the displacement aspect of such a displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the rendering effect of the rendering accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

  The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the driving means, but the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in the other sections. In order to achieve the speed, a sensor device for detecting the position of the displacement member is disposed, and control is required to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device. Invite. In addition, the structure and control become complicated, and the reliability thereof is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission means (the rotation member 741 and the arm member 742) includes the one-way clutch OW1, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1. On the other hand, when displaced in one direction, the rollers engage with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit the driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the inner ring and The engagement of the roller to the outer ring is released, transmission of the driving force is blocked, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement sections of the lid member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is against the inner ring Because displacement is made in one direction, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 is higher than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the other sections regardless of the driving state of the rotary member 741. Can Kusuru. Therefore, a change can be given to the cover member 770, and the rendering effect accompanying the displacement of the cover member 770 can be enhanced.

  Further, regardless of the driving state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be made to precede the inner ring in one direction, so for example, in all sections in the displacement section of the lid member 770, the drive motor KM4 is driven at a constant driving speed It is possible to drive, and it is not necessary to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 in the middle of the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, according to the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operation reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, the consumption energy can be suppressed.

  Further, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the engagement of the roller is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, so the displacing member is brought into a stopped state (driven state). The drive force of the drive means (drive motor KM4) in such a drive state can be used as a drive force for driving the rotating body 800. That is, by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4), the two members of the cover member 770 and the rotating body 800 can be displaced respectively.

  Further, the lid member 770 is formed rotatably, and the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is disposed at a position decentered from the rotation center, and the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction in the second section DK2. Since it is formed to be operable in the direction, the weight of the lid member 770 can be used to displace the outer ring in advance in one direction with respect to the inner ring. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the section of the first section DK1. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement mode of the lid member 770, and the rendering effect associated with the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced.

  Further, transmission of the driving force is performed by projecting from the main body portion 741b to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached and the main body portion 741b, and a projection 741a (pin portion) displaced from the rotation center of the main body portion 741c The rotation member 741 (crank member) and the arm member 742 rotate the rotation member 741 by the outer ring and slide the protrusion 741a along the first sliding groove 742b. Can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end side of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the displacement direction of the cover member 770 can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive motor KM4.

  Further, in this case, since the section of the second section DK can be formed in both of the reciprocation operation, when the lid member 770 is reciprocated, it is from the middle of the displacement when displacing in either direction. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be changed to enhance the rendering effect associated with the displacement of the lid member.

  Subsequently, displacement of the rotation restricting member 780 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 (a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99 (b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the open state. In FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is seen as transparent.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation restricting member 780 is in a state where the protrusion 782 side is pushed downward by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP5 (FIG. 99). In (a), it is set as the state rotated clockwise centering on the axis | shaft of the axial hole 781).

  Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is smaller than the distance dimension L5 from the rotation axis of the rotation body 800 to the tip of the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L4 <L5).

  Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are not engaged, and the rotating body 800 is rotatable.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), when the cover member 770 is in the open state, the rotation restricting member 780 is configured such that the contact surface 783 is displaced to the back side of the rotary member 800. In the state of contact, the contact surface 783 is pushed downward (in FIG. 99 (b), the contact surface 783 is rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

  Therefore, the distance dimension L4 from the rotation axis of the rotating body 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is larger than the distance dimension L6 from the rotation axis of the rotation body 800 to the tip of the projection 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 (L6 <L4).

  As a result, the protrusion 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 can be inserted inside the engagement protrusion 882 in the rotary body 800 in which the engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotation portion 880 is disposed at the lowermost in the direction of gravity. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation restricting member 780 are engaged, the rotating body 800 can not rotate. In the present embodiment, the position where the rotation of the rotary body 800 is disabled (the position where the projection 782 is inserted inside the engagement projection 882) is a position where the opening / closing member 870 of the rotary body 800 is opened. Set to

  That is, in the rotation restricting member 780 (rotation restricting means) for restricting the rotation of the rotating body 800, the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position) and the other side of the displacement member is stretched in the game area Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when being pulled out, the rotating body 800 is rotated in a state in which the opening and closing member 870 is extended, and the opening and closing member 870 interferes with other members located on the rotation locus. Can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the rotary body 800 by the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

  Here, the first member includes a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed, and the first member is disposed at a covering position that covers at least a part of the second member in an invisible manner and at the covering position There is known a gaming machine which is more displaceable between a retracted position where the second member can not be visible and a reduced position. According to this gaming machine, the first member is disposed at the covering position, and the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state in which the second member is not visible from the player. It is possible to perform an effect of making the player visually recognize.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, when the second member is exposed, the second member may be displaced. As a result, the player can not visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of rendering is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) can regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) in the state of being displaced to the position (retracted position) in the open state. Since it is formed, the player can be made to visually recognize the rotating body 800 in a proper state, and the effect of presentation can be secured. That is, when performing an effect of displacing the cover member 770 to the position of the open state and exposing the rotary body 800, the displacement of the cover member 770 to the position of the open state can not be performed for the effect. It is used as a means to regulate the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide or control a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

  Further, as described later, the shape of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically from the rotation center (see FIG. 101). Thus, the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity position is decentered from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in design of the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, the rotary body 800 does not have to have a shape whose center of gravity is located at the rotation center, and an asymmetric shape can be adopted with respect to the rotation axis, so the rendering effect by the rotary body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is decentered in this way, the rotating body 800 is displaced to a closed position by rotation (possibly rotating) around its rotation center by its gravity. The configuration in which the cover member 770 is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, whereby the player can be made to visually recognize the rotating body 800 in an appropriate state, and a rendering effect can be secured.

  The rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about an axis. In this case, by forming the rotating body 800 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the center of gravity can be arranged at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one surface from a metal material and forming the other surface from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be located on the side of the metal material generally having a specific gravity larger than that of the flexible material.

  Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. FIG. 100 (a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100 (a), and FIG. 100 (c) is It is a side view of the rotary body 800 in the arrow Cc direction view of Fig. 100 (a). FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed in a cylindrical shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 disposed in the shaft portion, and a first display unit 830, a second display unit 840, a third display unit 850, and a fourth display unit 830 that are disposed to surround the base plate 810. A display unit 860, a right rotation unit 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, a left rotation unit 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an open / close member disposed inside the first display unit 830 And 870 are mainly provided.

  The base plate 810 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section as viewed in the axial direction and a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed to have a right end 811 and a left end 812 protruding outward from the left and right ends.

  The right end portion 811 protrudes annularly from the right side (right side in FIG. 100A) of the base plate 810 in a front view. The right end portion 811 is mainly provided with a tip end portion 811 a partially projecting from the protruding tip end of the right end portion 811 and a communication hole 811 b of an annular inner portion.

  The tip end portion 811a is further protruded in the axial direction from the tip end portion of the right end portion 811 and the projecting region in the right side view (view in the direction of FIG. 100C) is the inner side of the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764 It is set smaller than the area of. The tip end portion 811a is inserted into the inside of the engagement portion 764e of the right side plate 764 as described above. As a result, the base plate 810 and the right side plate 764 (lid member 770) are engaged. As a result, it is possible to stop the base plate 810 against rotational displacement of each display surface (the first display unit 830, the second display unit 840, the third display unit 850, and the fourth display unit 860) described later.

  The communication hole 811 b is an opening for inserting a wire (not shown) connected to an LED base 820 described later, and is formed through the side surface of the base plate 810 on the right side in a front view. Thereby, the wiring can be inserted.

  The left end portion 812 protrudes annularly from the left side (left side in FIG. 100A) of the base plate 810 in a front view. The left end portion 812 is mainly provided with a tip end portion 812 a protruding from a lower half circle of the left end portion 812 and a communication hole 812 b of an annular inner portion.

  The tip end portion 812a is further protruded in the axial direction from the tip end portion of the left end portion 812, and the projecting shape in a left side view (direction view in FIG. 100 (b)) is an annular lower semicircle.

  The communication hole 812 b is a path for discharging the ball, which has been thrown into the inside of the rotating body 800 by the opening / closing member 870 described later, to the outside of the rotating body 800. The inner diameter of the communication hole 812 b is set to be larger than that of the ball, and the communication hole 812 b is set to be substantially the same as the through hole 733 a formed in the gear cover 733.

  Further, the communication hole 812 b is an opening connected to the through hole 733 a of the gear cover 733, and the protrusion distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance in contact with the through hole 733 a. Further, a protrusion 733 b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end face of the through hole 733 a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733 b is set to be substantially the same as the protrusion distance of the tip end portion 812 a. As a result, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left transmission member 730) are engaged. As a result, it is possible to stop the base plate 810 against rotational displacement of each display surface (the first display unit 830, the second display unit 840, the third display unit 850, and the fourth display unit 860) described later.

  On the bottom surface of the base plate 810, a reverse rotation preventing member 813 is rotatably disposed. The reverse rotation preventing member 813 is formed in a substantially circular shape in top view, and a protrusion 813a inclined to one end side is formed. Further, the reverse rotation preventing member 813 is provided with a biasing spring SP6 between it and the base plate 810, whereby the projection 813a is always biased to the left side in the front view (the left side in FIG. 100A). It is assumed.

  The right rotation portion 890 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The right rotation portion 890 is formed such that the inner diameter of the inner side of the annular ring is larger than the size of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810. Thereby, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the right rotation portion 890. Further, the right rotation portion 890 is mainly provided with an axial hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a sliding groove 892 which is curved and opened centering on the axial hole 891.

  The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 described later is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 872. Accordingly, displacement of the shaft portion 872 of the opening and closing member 870 relative to the first display portion 830 can be suppressed.

  The sliding groove 892 is formed in a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and the radius thereof is set to be the same as the distance between the projection 871 of the opening and closing member 870 and the shaft portion 872. As a result, the projection 871 of the opening and closing member 870 is inserted into the inside of the sliding groove 892, so that the projection 871 can slide inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening and closing member 870 is displaced.

  The left rotation portion 880 is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness and is formed in an annular shape in a side view. The left rotation portion 880 is formed such that the inner diameter of the inside of the annular ring is larger than the size of the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810. Thus, the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 can be inserted into the left rotation portion 880. The left rotation portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 projecting in an annular shape from the inner edge portion, an engagement protrusion 882 projecting from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 in which an inclined surface is continuously arranged at the inner edge portion. It is formed and provided.

  The wall portion 881 is formed to protrude on the left side of the rotating body 800 in a front view. The wall portion 881 is provided with a communication hole 881 b having a gear tooth surface 881 a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the projecting tip and opening inward. The tooth flank 881a is engaged with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

  The communication hole 881 b is an opening that communicates the internal space of the rotating body 800 with the external space, and can discharge the ball fed into the rotating body 800 by opening an opening / closing member 870 described later.

  The engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation restricting member 780 is engaged, as described above. The engagement protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the side surface of the left rotation portion 880 on the left side in a front view. Further, two engaging protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and the protrusions 782 of the rotation restricting member 780 are formed so as to be insertable therebetween.

  The locking portion 883 is formed in a sawtooth shape in cross section. When the left rotation portion 880 is disposed on the base plate 810, the tip end of the projection 813a of the reverse rotation prevention member 813 described above is in contact with the locking portion 883. Thereby, when the rotational force for rotating the left rotation portion 880 in one direction acts, the projection 813a can be slid along the inclined surface of the locking portion 883 to rotate the left rotation portion 880. When the rotational force for rotating the left rotation portion 880 in the other direction is applied, the surface of the locking portion 883 is hooked on the protrusion 813a and the rotation is suppressed.

  Thereby, it is possible to regulate that the rotating body 800 is rotated in the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotating body 800 is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving motor KM4. It is possible to suppress reverse rotation of the rotating body due to a collision or the like.

  Each of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 is formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into a single annular shape by connecting the end surfaces with each other. Further, the inner diameters of the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860, which are formed into a single ring, are set to be substantially the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotary units 880 and 890. Thus, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 can be formed into a single cylindrical shape by arranging the display units 830 to 860 on the left and right rotating units 880 and 890.

  In addition, the first display unit 830 to the fourth display unit 860 have characters and patterns drawn respectively, and as described above, they are rotated by transmitting the driving force from the left rotation unit 880, and the respective characters are rotated. The pattern can be made visible to the player.

  The first display portion 830 is mainly provided with an opening 831 opened in the curved surface, and a bearing portion 832 opened in the shaft side and projected in a U-shape.

  The opening 831 is an opening for disposing an opening / closing member 870 described later inside, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer shape of the opening / closing member 870. The bearing portion 832 is formed in such a size that the shaft portion 872 of the opening and closing member 870 can be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening / closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening / closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening / closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display 830. The description of the displacement mode of the opening and closing member 870 will be described later.

  The LED substrate 820 can emit light from the LED light mounted on the LED substrate 820 by being supplied with power. Also, the LED base 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810.

  Next, opening and closing of the opening and closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 (a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the open / close member 870 closed. FIG. 103 (b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the open / close member 870 in the open state. In FIG. 103, when the opening and closing member 870 overlaps with another member, the outer diameter thereof is illustrated by a chain line.

  The closed state of the opening and closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening and closing member 870 is disposed substantially in parallel with the outer peripheral surface of the first display portion 830. On the other hand, the open state of the opening and closing member 870 is a state in which the outer peripheral surface of the opening and closing member 870 intersects the outer peripheral surface of the first display portion 830.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the opening / closing member 870 is in the closed state, the projection 871 of the opening / closing member 870 is the shaft on one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation portion 890 (in FIG. 103 (a) (Lower side of the portion 872).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the protrusion 871 of the opening and closing member 870 is positioned on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotating portion 890 when the opening and closing member 870 is in the open state. That is, the displacement of the opening / closing member 870 is performed by the projection 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation portion 890.

  Next, displacement of the projection 871 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 104 (a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. FIG. In FIG. 104 (a) and FIG. 104 (b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is illustrated in a transparent state.

  Further, in FIG. 104 (a), a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state and the opening and closing member 870 is in the closed state is illustrated. In FIG. 104 (b), a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in the open state and the opening and closing member 870 is in the open state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer edge of the right side cover 773 is in contact with the projection 871. When the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer diameter L7 from the rotation axis in the lower half surface of the right lid 773 is smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotation portion 890 to one end side of the sliding groove 892 (L7 <L8).

  Further, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the projection 871. Therefore, in the state where the outer edge portion of the right side lid 773 abuts on the projection 871, the projection 871 is displaced to one end side of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening and closing member 870 is closed. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, it is possible to suppress the opening / closing member 870 from being displaced to the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the decoration unit 750 is in the open state, the concave portion 773b formed in the outer edge portion is displaced with the displacement of the right side lid portion 773. In this case, the projection 871 is inserted inside the recess 773 b. Thus, the projection 871 can displace the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening / closing member 870 is opened by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP7 disposed between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

  As described above, the displacement of the opening and closing member 870 can be performed according to the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since it is not necessary to arrange the drive source which drives the opening-closing member 870 in the rotary body 800, the rotary body 800 can be formed small.

  Further, the drive motor KM 4 for displacing the opening and closing member 870 can also be used as a driving means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening and closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of different driving means, there is a possibility that the opening and closing member 870 and the lid member 770 may interfere with each other when control failure occurs. And the cover member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, so that interference between the opening / closing member 870 and the cover member 770 can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the opening and closing member 870 is opened, the tip end of the rotation is disposed above the winning opening 761a of the box member 760. Thereby, the ball thrown from the ball throwing part 711c of the ball stand 710 mentioned later can be dropped on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 870.

  In this case, the opening / closing member 870 is disposed such that the rotation tip side is above the shaft 872. Therefore, the ball falling on the upper surface can be rolled to the inside of the rotating body 800. The gaming balls rolled to the inside of the rotary body 800 roll on the upper surface of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotary body 800. Furthermore, since the base plate 810 is inclined downward toward the left end portion 812 side, the ball rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled to the left end portion 812 side and rotated from the inside thereof The body 800 can be discharged outward. That is, the inside of the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball throwing path of a ball.

  Further, as described above, since the rotation restricting member 780 restricting the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disposed on the rotating body 800, the lid member 770 is displaced to the position of the open state to expose the rotating body 800. When the effect is performed, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced by displacing the open / close member 870. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the rotating body 800 may rotate (rotation). Therefore, a configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the position in the open state is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotary body 800 is particularly effective, thereby making the player visually recognize the rotary body 800 in an appropriate state. The effect can be secured.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating member which is rotatably formed and whose outer surface around the rotation axis is disposed so as to be visible to a player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and it is possible to make the player visually recognize the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface while rotating the rotating member or stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the utilization of the rotating member is insufficient only by being used as a member for holding the display for making the player visually recognize on the outer surface thereof. . That is, the rotating member is formed relatively large because it is necessary to hold the display which is visible to the player. Therefore, while the occupied space becomes bulky, parts other than the outer surface are not utilized.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed inside with the outside, and the opening 831 and the communicating hole 881 b formed so that the game ball can pass through. Since the (communication port) is provided, the game balls flowing down the game area can be made to flow into or out of the internal space through the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space of the gaming ball or a throwing passage, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized by that amount.

  Further, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form the effect mode for causing the player to visually recognize the display on the outer peripheral surface when the rotating member is stopped, the change in the effect mode is scarce and the effect is insufficient. There was a problem that

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening and closing member 870 (displacement member) disposed displaceably on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface is rotated with the rotation or stop of the rotating body 800. In addition to the effect mode for making the player visually recognize the display of the effect mode, the effect mode for displacing the opening and closing member 870 can be formed, so that the effect can be enhanced by giving a change to the effect mode.

  When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), a part of the outer surface of the rotator 800 (rotation member) is formed by the opening / closing member 870. The space can be reduced, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening and closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening and closing member 870 is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the player can easily recognize the displacement of the opening and closing member 870 The effect can be enhanced. In addition, the rotating body 800 is rotated in a state in which the opening and closing member 870 is disposed at the closed position, and when the rotation is stopped, the opening and closing member 870 is disposed (displaced) at the opening position. It is possible to form an aspect in which the portion (opening and closing member 870) which has been visually recognized protrudes outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, and it is possible to enhance interest.

  In addition, an LED substrate 820 emitting light to the base plate 810 is disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800. Therefore, when the opening and closing member 870 is in the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and light emitted from the LED base 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening and closing member 870 is in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and the emission of light from the LED base 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to dispose the opening and closing member 870 on the rotating body 800 so as to be displaceable, driving means are required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening and closing member 870 It is bulky. In addition, when the driving means for displacing the opening / closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 is increased, so it is difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening / closing member 870 is displaced along with the displacement of the lid member 770, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. The rotation of the rotating body 800 and the displacement of the opening and closing member 870 can be performed by using KM4. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the driving means for displacing the opening and closing member on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

  Further, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 serves as an inlet for letting the game ball flow into the internal space from the outside, and the communication hole 881b Can be an outlet that allows the game ball to flow out of the internal space. That is, even without rotating the rotating body 800 (rotating member) (while keeping the stopped state), the rotating body 800 can be used as a throwing passage of the gaming ball.

  Further, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, and the communication hole 881b is formed on the end face in the axial direction of the rotating body 800. Therefore, the gaming ball to the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) The inflow can be easily recognized by the player, and the game ball can be discharged while maintaining the rotating body 800 in the stop state.

  That is, since the opening 831 (inflow port) is formed on the outer surface of the rotary body 800 where the outer surface is provided so as to be visible from the player, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the inflow of gaming balls. On the other hand, when the communicating hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, the gaming ball can not flow out from the internal space when the rotating body 800 is disposed at the rotational position where the communicating hole 881b is upward. The communication hole 881 b (outlet) is formed on the end face of the rotating body 800 in the direction of the rotation axis, so that regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800, it is possible to form a state where the gaming ball can flow out from the internal space.

  A displaceable opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed inside the opening 831 (first communication port), and when the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 The opening 831 is opened when it is shielded by the opening and closing member 870 and the opening and closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), so the inflow of gaming balls through the opening 831 is switched to the shield state and the permit state be able to.

  Furthermore, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and the opening / closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position). Since the other side that is to be projected is extended to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the rotary body 800 using the opening and closing member 870.

  In addition, it is possible to easily stop the game ball flowing down the game area on the upper surface of the opening and closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the rotating body 800, the game ball flowing down the game area can be made easy to flow into the inflow port using the opening and closing member 870. In this case, when the opening and closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated by the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, a configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the position in the open state displaces the rotation restricting member 780 so as to be capable of restricting the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective. It is easy to maintain the state of being overhanged at the predetermined position of the region.

  The shaft portion 872 of the opening and closing member 870 is disposed on the rotational direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening / closing member 870 (displacement member) is positioned on the front side in the rotational direction of the rotary body 800 (rotational member) than the other side. Therefore, even if the opening and closing member 870 interferes with the member disposed around the rotating member when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated due to such interference is used to close the opening and closing member 870 (displacement to the closing position Can act in the direction. That is, it is possible to suppress displacement of the opening / closing member 870 into interference (the second position) when it interferes with other members when the rotating body 800 rotates. Moreover, it can suppress that the opening-and-closing member 870 engages with another member, and rotation of the rotary body 800 is inhibited.

  Further, the base plate 810 (fixing member) disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800 is not rotated relative to the box member 760 (base member) on which the rotating body 800 is rotatably disposed. By rolling the game ball introduced from the opening 831 into the internal space of the rotating body 800 toward the communication hole 881b with the upper surface of the base plate 810, the gaming ball runs wild in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the rolling of the gaming ball from being inhibited and staying in the internal space.

  As described above, since the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 870 is restricted by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening and closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) interferes with the members around the rotating body 800. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the rotating body 800, the communication hole 811b for inserting the wiring to the LED base 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is opposite to the end face of the rotating body 800 in which the communication hole 881b is formed. Formed on the end face of the Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881 b and the communication hole 811 b.

  That is, when electrically wiring the LED base disposed in the inside of the rotating body 800, when the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, the wiring is entangled by the rotation of the rotating body 800, so the axial end face of the rotating body If it is preferable to form an opening through which the gaming balls flow in and an opening through which the gaming balls flow out on both end surfaces in the axial direction of the rotary body 800, it is difficult to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inflow port of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be the outer peripheral surface thereof, one of the end faces in the axial direction of the rotating body 800 serves as the outflow port of the game ball, and the other is inserted into the wiring. Since it can be a mouth, it is easy to secure a space for inserting the wiring.

  As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged through the communication holes 881b, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line (wiring to the LED base 820) can be easily performed. Further, since the communication holes 881b and the communication holes 811b can be separated as much as possible, interference between the game balls rolling into the communication holes 881b and the electrical connection lines can be easily suppressed.

  Next, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. FIG. 105 is a front view of lower displacement unit 400 and rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of lower displacement unit 400 in the arrow CVI direction view of FIG. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. In the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed substantially at the center of the ball support 710 in the front-rear direction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, an aspect will be described in which the ball is thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. Note that FIG. 107 illustrates the lower displacement unit 400 in the first overhanging state.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacing unit 400 is in the first overhanging state, and the ball receiving portion 467 disposed inside the lower displacing member 440 receives the ball inside (the ball receiving operation is performed When the firing operation is performed in the state, as described above, the ball disposed inside the ball receiving portion 467 is discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440.

  The ball discharged from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 falls freely and falls to the ball pedestal 710 of the rotation unit 700 disposed on the right side in a front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

  Next, the configuration of the ball pedestal 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 (a) is a top view of the ball pedestal 710, FIG. 108 (b) is a front view of the ball pedestal 710, and FIG. 108 (c) is a CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108 (a). It is a sectional view of ball stand 710 in a line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball pedestal 710. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball pedestal 710 is connected to a plate receiving portion 711 formed in a box shape, a solenoid 712 disposed inside the plate receiving portion 711 and a solenoid 712 thereof. And a cover member 714 for covering the solenoid 712.

  The bowl receiving portion 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, a standing portion 711b erected at the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a ball sending portion 711c projecting from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and the ball sending portion 711c And an axial hole 711d which is formed through the standing portion 711b erected at the edge of the frame.

  The bottom plate 711a is formed in a shape bent downward toward the side of the ball throwing portion 711c described later. Thereby, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a can be rolled to the ball sending part 711c side by its bending (inclination).

  Further, the bottom plate 711a is formed of a flexible material, and the lower surface (the lower surface in FIG. 108C) of the bottom plate 711a is embossed to form fine irregularities on the surface. As a result, when the bottom plate 711a is formed, the heat shrinking ratio can be made different between the top surface and the bottom surface so that the bottom plate can be easily bent. That is, when the bottom surface subjected to the embossing is thermally shrunk due to the unevenness, the force hardly acts in the direction in which the bottom plate side is curved in a convex manner. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed to be a flat surface, when thermally shrunk, a tensile force acts in the horizontal direction and the end is easily changed upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, it can be easily bent in the direction in which the balls roll easily when thermally shrunk. As a result, when the bottom plate 711a is molded, it can be suppressed that the product becomes a defective product.

  The standing portion 711b is a wall portion standing upright on the upper side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in FIG. 108C) from the outer edge portion of the ball sending portion 711c. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the ball thrown to the upper portion of the bottom plate 711a falls downward from the edge thereof. In the present embodiment, the standing dimension of the standing portion 711b is set to about 1.5 times the diameter of the ball.

  Further, the standing portion 711b is formed by connecting a central standing portion 711b1 that divides the region of the bottom plate 711a into two, to the standing portion 711b. The central standing portion 711b1 divides the upper area of the bottom plate 711a into an area in which one ball is thrown and an area in which a solenoid 712 described later is disposed.

  The ball sending portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Further, the position in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 108A) is disposed on the right side (the right side in FIG. 108) than the approximate center position of the bottom plate 711a. Furthermore, the throwing portion 711c is protruded from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. Thus, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can be dropped downward via the ball throwing portion 711c. In addition, the winning opening 761a of the lid member 770 is disposed below the throwing portion 711c (see FIG. 106), and a ball falling from the throwing portion 711c can be thrown into the winning opening 761a.

  The shaft portion 713a of the displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. Thus, the displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

  The solenoid 712 can displace a shaft inserted into the solenoid 712 by applying a power to the piston. The transmission member 712 a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member for transmitting the driving force of the solenoid 712 to the displacement member 713, which will be described later, and a communication hole 712a1 is formed through the tip of the transmission member 712a.

  The displacement member 713 is formed to have a C-shaped cross section, and is mainly provided with a protrusion 713b protruding to the outside of the C at one end thereof, and a shaft 713a protruding to the inside of the C at both ends.

  The protrusion 713 b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712 a 1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712 a 1. Thereby, the displacement of the solenoid 712 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

  The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, the displacement member 713 is driven by the displacement of the solenoid 712.

  The cover member 714 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the solenoid 712, and is disposed above the solenoid 712 disposed above the bottom plate 711a, and is fastened and fixed to the bowl receiving portion 711. Thereby, the solenoid 712 can be fixed.

  Next, the ball falling onto the ball holder 710 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) are cross-sectional views of the ball pedestal 710. FIG. FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) correspond to the cross section of the ball pedestal 710 of FIG. 108 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 110, the ball thrown from the lower displacing member 440 of the lower displacing unit 400 falls freely in the direction of gravity and the firing operation of the ball receiving portion 467 causes the rotating unit 700 side (FIG. 110 (a) right side). To). That is, it is dropped to the bottom plate 711 a of the ball pedestal 710 in the lower right direction in a front view.

  In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball sending portion 711c, and since the ball sending portion 711c is formed on the right side with respect to the bottom plate 711a, the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a from which the balls fall Can be inclined downward to the right. Therefore, the displacement direction of the ball and the inclination direction of the bottom plate 711a from which the ball falls can be made close to parallel.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), it is possible to suppress that the ball dropped to the bottom plate 711a bounces upward (in FIG. 110 (b)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball, which is thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball pedestal 710 of the rotation unit 700, from falling from the ball pedestal 710.

  Furthermore, the ball dropped to the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the ball sending portion 711c by the force of the drop. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball to the ball sending portion 711c can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to smoothly throw the ball which is thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball pedestal 710.

  Next, the light emission of the ball pedestal 710 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 111A and 111B are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 700 taken along line CXI-CXI in FIG. 111 (a) shows the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 111 (b) shows the decoration unit 750 in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), emission of light to the ball pedestal 710 in the state where the decoration unit 750 is disposed in the closed state is performed by the LED base 721 disposed on the back side of the back base 720. .

  Describing in detail, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED substrate 721 is reflected to the back side of the lid member 770 to be incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball pedestal 710. Further, as described above, since emboss processing is performed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a, light incident due to the emboss processing unevenness can be irregularly reflected. Thus, the entire bottom surface of the ball pedestal 710 can be made to emit light.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), in the state where the decoration unit 750 is disposed in the open state, as described above, the transparent portion 771a is formed on the lid member 770. The light is not reflected by the lid member 770 but transmitted. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, it can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and be incident on the ball pedestal 710.

  In this case, by rotating the third display portion 850 of the rotating body 800 to the ball support 710 side (the upper side in FIG. 111B), light is emitted from the LED 821 of the LED base 820 disposed on the back side of the base plate 810 Light can be reflected on the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display unit 850.

  As described above, the inner wall of the third display portion 850 is embossed to form a plurality of irregularities on the surface. Therefore, the third display unit 850 can more easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display units. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display unit 850 on the ball support 710 side.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, the structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIG. 112 to FIG.

  FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. In FIGS. 112 to 114, the state in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the retracted position (the position disposed at the uppermost position relative to the base member 910) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 is disposed inside the base member 910 and the base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300. A transmission member 920, a rotation member 930 rotatably connected to the base member 910 and displaced according to the displacement of the transmission member 920, and one end thereof is slideably connected to the base member 410 and the rotation member 930 And an upper displacing member 940 that is displaced by transmitting a driving force from the rotating member 930.

  The base member 910 is formed by combining two front and rear rectangular plate members in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 911 disposed on the front side and a back base 912 disposed on the back side. Between the facing of the front base 911 and the back base 912, the transmission member 920 and the rotation member 930 are disposed.

  The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 911c, 911d, 911e penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in the plane of FIG. 112), a pivot pin 911b projecting to the back side at the circumferential center position, and one end side of the front base It is mainly provided with the axial part 911f which protrudes in the front of (the front view left side), and the opening 911a penetrated in the front-back direction of one end side.

  The opening 911 a is an opening for inserting the axis of the drive motor KM5 disposed in the front base 911 to the back side. Thus, the axis of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted through the back side of the front base 911.

  The bearing pins 911g and 911b are inserted into shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923 described later, and can rotatably hold the transmission gear 922 and the transmission gear 923. That is, the bearing pins 911 g and 911 b are formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameters of the transmission gear 922 and the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923.

  The sliding groove 911 c is formed to penetrate in an arc shape centering on the axis of the pivotal support pin 911 b. The sliding groove 911c is an opening through which a pivoting pin 923a of a transmission gear 923 described later is inserted, and the radius of the arc thereof is substantially the same as the distance from the axial hole of the transmission gear 923 described later to the pivoting pin 923a. It is set. Thus, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated in a state where the pivot pin 923a is inserted into the inside of the slide groove 911c, collision of the pivot pin and the inner wall of the slide groove 911c can be suppressed.

  The sliding grooves 911 d and 911 e are grooves into which pivot pins 951 and 952 of the upper displacement member 940 described later are inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pins 951 and 952 Be done.

  The sliding groove 911 e is formed in a straight line in the longitudinal direction (front view left and right direction) of the front base 911. On the other hand, the sliding groove 911 d is formed in an arc shape centering on the lower side of the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911 e and the sliding groove 911 d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distance between the two sliding grooves 911 e and 911 d facing in the vertical direction is formed to be different. Thus, when the bearing pins 951 and 952 slide in the sliding grooves 911 e and 911 d, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated and slid due to the difference in the distance between the opposing vertical directions. Ru.

  The shaft portion 911 f is formed to protrude in a cylindrical shape on the front side. The shaft portion 911 f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of a rotation member 930 described later, and can hold the rotation member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911 f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotation member 930.

  The back surface base 912 is a plate member attached to the back surface side of the front surface base 911 at a predetermined interval. The back base 912 is formed of a metal material. Thereby, the overall rigidity of the base member 910 can be improved. As a result, when the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the base member 910 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, it is possible to suppress the base member 910 from being twisted.

  The transfer member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the back base 912 facing each other. The transmission member 920 mainly includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, a transmission gear 922 meshed with the transmission gear 921 and a transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922. It is formed.

  The transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 in the shaft hole as described above. Thus, the transmission gear 921 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the drive motor KM5.

  The transmission gear 922 is meshed with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above. Thus, the driving force of the rotation of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

  The transmission gear 923 is formed with a pivot pin 923a projecting to the front side at the outer peripheral edge thereof. Thus, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the pivot pin 923 a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

  The rotation member 930 is formed in a rod shape having a long side on one side, and mainly includes a through hole 931 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at an end on one end side and an opening 932 extending in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. It is formed and provided.

  As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft 911 f of the front base 911 is inserted, and the rotation member 930 can be rotated relative to the front base 911 by the insertion of the shaft 911 f. Can be held. Further, a biasing spring SP8 is disposed at the tip of the shaft portion 911f. Thereby, the rotation member 930 is biased in the direction of lifting the other end side upward with respect to the front base 911.

  The opening 932 is a groove into which the pivot pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and the pivot pin 923a is formed so as to be slidable therein. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the pivot pin 923a is displaced, the pivot pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, since the rotation member 930 is disposed in a state in which one end is rotatably supported, the rotation member 930 is rotated about one end by the displacement of the shaft support pin 923a.

  Further, on the other end side of the rotation member 930, an annular member 933 which is formed in an annular shape in a front view and is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness on the rear surface side is disposed.

  On the front side of the annular member 933, two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along the outer peripheral edge thereof are formed. The annular member 933 is a portion connected with the upper displacement member 940 described later, and the shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. The annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and the upper displacement member 940 is displaceable as the rotation member 930 is rotationally displaced.

  The projection 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and the projection 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member. it can.

  Further, the arc axis of the sliding groove 933 a is disposed at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930, the first open portion 960 can be displaced. A detailed description of the first opening portion 960 will be described later.

  In addition, on one end side (rotational shaft side) of the rotation member 930, a shaft portion cover 913 and a deformation restriction cover 914 which are formed from a plate-like body on the front side are disposed. The shaft cover 913 is disposed in front of the rotation shaft portion of the rotation member 930, and rattling of the rotation member 930 in the front-rear direction is suppressed. The deformation restricting cover 914 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the rotation axis by a predetermined distance, and the rotation member 930 can be prevented from being deformed in the front-rear direction by the weight of the upper displacement member 940 disposed on the other end side.

  The upper displacement member 940 includes a base body 950 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930, two first open portions 960 rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950, and a base body 950. It is mainly provided with two second open parts 970 rotatably disposed on the front side and a variable part 980 disposed on one end side.

  The base body 950 is mainly provided with two pivotally supporting pins 951 and 952 that are formed to protrude on the back surface on one end side, and a shaft portion 953 that is formed to protrude on the back surface on the other end side.

  The bearing pins 951 and 952 are protrusions inserted into the sliding grooves 911 e and 911 d of the front base 911 as described above. Therefore, when the upper displacing member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the pivotal support pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, thereby sliding the upper displacing member 940 in the lateral direction. The other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

  As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably coupled to the rotation member 930. Therefore, when the rotating member 930 is rotationally displaced about the one end by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 by the displacement of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911 e and 911 d.

  The first open portion 960 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two sheets are disposed on the back side of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 is rotatably supported at the other end of the base body 950. Further, the first open portion 960 is provided with a protrusion 961 that protrudes on the back side and is disposed inside the sliding groove 933a of the annular member 933. Accordingly, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotation member 930 due to the displacement of the rotation member 930, the protrusion 961 can slide inside the sliding groove 933a.

  In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the sliding groove 933a is disposed at a position different from the rotation axis of the upper displacing member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the projection 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Accordingly, the first open portion 960 pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

  The second open portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two sheets are disposed on the front side of the base body 950. The second open portion 970 is rotatably supported by the other end of the base body 950. Also. The second opening 970 is formed with an engagement protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening 960 is displaced a predetermined distance. Thus, as described above, when the upper displacing member 940 is rotationally displaced by a predetermined amount, the first opening 960 engages with the second opening 970 when being rotationally displaced about the pivot portion. Thus, the second open portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

  Next, displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 115 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at an intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 in a state where the upper displacement member 940 is disposed at the extended position.

  The retracted position of the upper displacing member 940 is the position where the pivot pins 951 and 952 are disposed on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911 d and 911 e of the front base 911 (right side in front view of the front base 911). It is. Further, the extended position is a position where the pivotal support pins 951 and 952 are disposed at one end side of the sliding grooves 911 d and 911 e of the front base 911 (left side in front view of the front base 911). Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper displacing member 940 is displaced to an intermediate position between the retracted position and the extended position.

  When the upper displacing member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911 as shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, the upper displacing member 940 is substantially vertically oriented from the substantially horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 115). In FIG. 117).

  Further, along with the rotational displacement, the position of the one end side of the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the position of the front end right side of the front base 911 to a substantially central position in front view. That is, as described above, when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the upper displacing member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slid.

  Also, at the time of displacement from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 117, the first open portion 960 disposed on the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. The second open portion 970 engaged and displaced with the rotational displacement of the first open portion 960 is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed in the vertical direction, and the first open portion 960 and the second open portion 970 are displaced.

  In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape that simulates the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, by displacing the first opening 960 and the second opening 970 from the first position to the third position, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize such a displacement that the human arm becomes thick. .

  Next, referring to FIG. 118, detailed description of variable portion 980 will be made. FIG. 118 (a) is a front view of the variable part 980, and FIG. 118 (b) is a rear view of the variable part 980.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b), the variable part 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and the main body 981 and the main body 981 form the rear part of the hand. It is mainly provided with the finger parts 982-986 which are connected and form the finger part of a hand.

  A drive motor (not shown) is disposed inside the main body 981 so that a variable plate (not shown) disposed inside can be piston-displaced in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118 (a)). Be done.

  The finger 982 corresponds to a thumb, and the base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body 981. Thus, the finger can be displaced by piston movement of the variable plate.

  The finger portions 983 to 986 are mainly formed including a first link RB1 disposed on the base side inside thereof and a second link RB2 disposed on the tip side.

  The first link RB <b> 1 is rotatably connected to the second link RB <b> 2 at the front end side and is connected to the variable plate of the main body 981 at the base side. Therefore, the second plate RB can be displaced through the first link RB1 and the first link RB1 by the piston plate of the variable plate of the main body 981 being moved. Thus, the fingers 983 to 986 can be displaced. In the present embodiment, by displacing the finger portions 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the operation of opening and closing the finger of the hand.

  The front base 411 includes two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction in the page of FIG. 43), two cylindrical support pins 411c and 411d projecting to the rear side, and a support pin 411d. And a curved wall portion 411e that protrudes in an arc shape with the axis as an axis.

  The sliding grooves 411 a and 411 b are holes through which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back surface side of the lower displacement member 440 are respectively inserted. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend long in the left-right direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction by displacing the protrusions 472 and 473 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b along the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

  The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in a circular arc and formed from the left (Fig. 43 left) end of the front base 411 to the right (Fig. 43 right) end upward (Fig. 43 upward) It is opened to). Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged at positions where the axes of the respective arcs are different, and the gap between the facing in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

  Since the distance between the projections 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacing member 440 does not change, when the lower displacing member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacing member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated along with sliding without applying a driving force for rotation to the lower displacement member 440.

  The pivotal support pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 of the transmission member 420 described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. In addition, the pivotal support pin 411 c is formed of a metal rod-like body, and is externally fitted to the front base 411. Therefore, when a force acts on the cam member 422 in the axial direction from the outer peripheral surface, it is possible to suppress that the pivotal support pin 411c is broken (damaged).

  Next, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. However, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment has the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466 It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the driving motor KM2. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacing member 2440 in the second embodiment. FIG. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. In FIG. 120, a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are viewed as transparent is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and back of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 2460 disposed displaceably between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 450 formed in such a manner as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.

  The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and has projections 472 and 473 protruding on the back surface on one end side, and an erected wall 471a erected on the front side from an edge on the other end side; A projecting wall 477 projecting in a U-shape opposite in the vertical direction to the front side from the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 120), shaft portions 474 and 475 projecting on the front side, and shaft portions 474 and 475 It is mainly provided with axial parts 2470a and 2470b protruding above 475.

  The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a described later is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

  The shaft portion 2470 b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468 b described later is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than a shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468 b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 2468a and the shaft portion 2470a are disposed in a state in which the gear tooth surfaces engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof are engaged with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft 2470a and the shaft 2470b in a front view is set to a distance corresponding to the radius of the transmission gear 2468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

  The transmission mechanism 2460 is disposed in front of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462 and 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface meshing with the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 2464 slidably disposed forward of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a meshing with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b meshing with the transmission gear 2468a, and A rack 46 engaged with the transmission gear 2468 b and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466 are mainly formed.

  The movable rack 2464 is formed in a rectangular plate-like body having a rectangular shape in a front view, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision portion 464f projecting to the lower end. Mainly to be formed.

  The rack gear 2464g is meshed with a transmission gear 2468a described later. Thereby, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated with the displacement.

  The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are respectively pivotally supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470 in a state of meshing with each other as described above. Thus, when the transmission gear 2468a is rotated, the transmission gear 2468b is rotated. The transmission gear 2468 b is meshed with the rack gear 466 a of the rack 466. When the transmission gear 2468 b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 to displace the rack 466.

  That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the driving motor KM4. The transmission gears 2468 a and 2468 b are arranged at positions partially offset in the front-rear direction, and the transmission gear 2468 a is suppressed from colliding with the rack 466 and the transmission gear 2468 b is suppressed from colliding with the movable rack 2464.

  Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. FIG. In FIG. 121, similarly to FIG. 120, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 2440 and the front case 481 are illustrated in a transparent state.

  As shown in FIG. 121, when power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the firing position by the transmission mechanism 2460 described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in mutually different directions. Ru.

  Describing in detail, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side (left side in FIG. 121) of the lower displacement member 440 by the rotation of the drive motor KM4. Along with this displacement, the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (right side in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball | bowl receiving part 467 can be displaced to a 3rd position.

  Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. It is possible to reduce the displacement of the movable rack 464 that the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member 2440 is changed. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 2440 caused by the change of the center of gravity position.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball receiving portion 467 is slidingly displaced by the rack and pinion mechanism has been described, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidingly displaced by the link mechanism. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 122 (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125 (a) and 91 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440. FIG.

  125 (a) shows that the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is seen as transparent, and FIG. 125 (b) shows that the decorative member 450 and the front case 3481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are seen as transparent. The situation is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 covering the front and back of the base member 3470, a case member 480 and a base It is mainly provided with a transmission mechanism 3460 disposed displaceably between the member 3470 and a decorative member 450 formed in such a manner as to cover the front and back of the case member 480.

  The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and includes projections 472 and 473 projecting on the back surface on one end side, and an erecting wall 471 a standing on the front side from an edge on the other end side; The sliding wall 3470c formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and standing at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and the upper end of the central portion in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 122 (a)) A projecting wall 477 projecting in the U-shape opposite in the vertical direction to the front side from the front, and an opening 479 recessed from the one end side to the other end side in the vertical center of the base member 470 It is formed.

  The sliding wall 3470 c is a wall that abuts on the leg portion 467 a of the ball receiving portion 467 and regulates the position (aspect) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed so as to protrude to a position below the ball receiving portion 467. Thus, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion directed upward.

  The sliding wall 3470c is formed with a recess 3470c1 which is recessed below the end on the standing wall 471a side. The recess 3470c1 is a groove for receiving the tip of the leg 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 in its inside. Thus, when the ball receiving portion 467 is slid toward the standing portion by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving portion 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to cause the ball receiving portion 467 to perform a firing operation (operation of discharging the ball held in the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

  The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480 described later, a first link member 3468 rotatably connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a first link member 3468 thereof. It is mainly provided with a second link member 3469 rotatably connected and a ball receiving portion 467 connected to one end side of the second link member 3469.

  The first link member 3468 is formed of a rectangular horizontally long plate-like member and bulging to the other end side with a shaft hole 3468b penetratingly formed at one end side, a connection hole 3468a connected with the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and It is mainly provided with the load part 3468c to be formed.

  The shaft hole 3468 b is a through hole through which a rotation shaft 3469 a of a second link member 3469 described later is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotation shaft 3469 a.

  The connection hole 3468a is a hole fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 as described above, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The shaft of the drive motor KM2 is fitted in and engaged with the connection hole 3468a, whereby the first link member 3468 can be rotated by the drive force of the drive motor KM2.

  The load portion 3468 c is formed to bulge out to the other end side from the connection hole 3468 a. The load portion 346c is a member for applying a load to position the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side relative to the connection hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

  The second link member 3469 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular state, and is disposed on the back side of the first link member 3468. The second link member 3469 mainly includes a rotary shaft 3469a projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the front from the other end side, and a through hole 3469b formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at one end side.

  The rotation shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468 as described above. Thereby, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 can be rotatably connected.

  The through hole 3469 b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469 b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467 b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the axial hole 467b and the through hole 3469b of the ball receiving portion 467 are coaxially arranged, and a screw whose head is larger than the width of the opening 469 in the short direction is the opening 479 and the axial hole 467b from the back side of the base member 3470. The ball receiving portion 467 is coupled to the second link member in a rotatable state by inserting and fastening the through hole 3469 b.

  The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 3481 disposed on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side.

  The front case 3481 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and an opening 3481d penetrated to a position facing the drive motor KM2, a bottom wall portion 481b projecting from a lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge And an axial hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The opening 3481 d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted on the back side, and has an outer diameter larger than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 disposed on the back side.

  Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, and FIG. 126 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position. FIG. 127 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position.

  Note that from FIG. 126 (a) to FIG. 127 (b), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are illustrated in order. Also, FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b) or FIGS. 127 (a) and 127 (b) illustrate that the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 481 are viewed as transparent.

  As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, in the lower displacement member 440 at the first position, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are in the longitudinal direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 126A) of the base member 3470. The first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged in an overlapping manner in the front-rear direction, as well as being substantially parallel to the direction (FIG. 126 (a) left-right direction).

  That is, the connection portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on one end side (left side in FIG. 126A) of the base member 3470. Thus, the second link member 3469 is disposed at one end. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the state of the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 is the base member 3470 Is displaced relative to As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving portion 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470. Therefore, one end side of the second link member 3469 is the base member 3470 Is pushed to the other end of the As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469 can be displaced to the second position.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), when the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the state of the second position and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the state of the first position. The connection portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is arranged on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to the rotation axis. Accordingly, one end side of the second link member 3469 is further pushed out to the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the third position.

  In this case, the tip end of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 and the firing operation is performed.

  Further, the load portion 3468 c of the first link member 3468 is displaced to one end side of the base member 3470. Thereby, when the ball | bowl receiving part 467 is displaced with respect to a base member, it can suppress that the gravity center position of the lower displacement member 3440 is changed. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

  That is, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change of the center of gravity of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the change of the center of gravity position.

  Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468. Therefore, there is no need to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be performed quickly.

  Therefore, when the gaming ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the center of gravity of the lower displacing member 440 changes, so that the lower displacing member 3440 is easily rattled, the ball receiving portion 467 is quickly retracted. The rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed by quickly bringing its center of gravity position close to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440.

  Furthermore, by immediately performing the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the discharge operation when the gaming ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467.

  That is, when the gaming ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is lightened by the amount of the discharged gaming ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is easily displaced upward by reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a reaction force caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 causes the base member 470 to be displaced downward, thereby counteracting the reaction when the sphere is discharged from the lower displacing member 3440. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the lower displacing member 440 disposed in the retracted state is formed to be capable of firing operation, but the lower displacing unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment is the lower displacing member disposed in the retracted state. The firing operation of 440 is restricted. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 128, a state in which the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are viewed as transparent is illustrated, and the bottom wall portion 481 b of the front case 481 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 128 illustrates the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state, in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment is an opening that is opened between the upright wall 471a and the bottom wall 481b of the front case 481 in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440. 4471 b is formed.

  In the opening 4471b, a tip end portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted. That is, the opening 4471 b is larger than the tip portion 4411 g 1.

  The front base 411 is formed with an engagement wall 4411 g formed in a substantially L shape continuous with the bottom surface of the recovery port 411 f.

  The engagement wall 4411g can regulate that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated at the third position (firing operation) by inserting the tip portion 4411g1 bent in a substantially L shape into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the upper surface of the bottom wall 481b of the lower displacement member 440 positioned in the retracted state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, a state in which each member of lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. FIG. In FIGS. 129 and 130, similarly to FIG. 128, a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 440 are viewed as transparent is illustrated, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is indicated by a chain line. It is illustrated.

  Further, in FIG. 129, the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state, and the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the third position is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 130, the lower displacement member 440 is in the first overhanging state, and the state in which the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 abuts on the top surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engagement wall 4411g and the recess 481b1 or the opening Intrusion to 4471b is regulated. Thus, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 is restricted.

  Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is caused to perform a dispensing operation in order to discharge the ball sent onto the orbit region of the ball receiving portion 467 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving portion 467 is at the third position. It is possible to prevent the game balls held inside the ball receiving portion 467 from being discharged as the.

  That is, when the gaming balls exceeding the prescribed number (one ball) are ejected from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 is changed Can be regulated. Therefore, it is easy to discharge only the game balls for the amount exceeding the specified number from the track area.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacing member 440 is displaced to the position in the first extended state (the position not in the retracted position), the lower displacing member 440 is displaced relative to the base member 470. As a result, the opening 4471 b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engagement wall 4411 g are separated. Therefore, in the first projecting state, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform the firing operation.

  That is, when discharging the game balls for more than the specified number (one ball) from the track area of the ball receiving portion 467 according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 is It is easy to maintain the state where the ball receiving portion 467 holds the specified number of gaming balls by suppressing the change, and when the lower displacing member 440 is displaced to the first and second overhanging positions, it is engaged. Since the wall 4411g is separated from the internal space of the opening 4471b, the leg 467a is engaged with the opening 4471b with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 to the third position, thereby changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467 It is possible to easily discharge the specified number of gaming balls from the ball receiving portion 467.

  Next, a distribution unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135. In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution member 540 is rotated to form the storage state and the restricted state has been described, but the distribution member 540 in the fifth embodiment is slide-displaced to form the storage state and the restricted state. Do. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. FIG. 131 (a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional view of distribution unit 5500 taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV of FIG. 131 (a). In FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment is opposed to base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and attached to the front side of base plate 5520 and facing base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 forming a plurality of flow down paths through which balls can flow down, a distributing member 5540 slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520, and a base plate attached to the end face of the base plate 5520 It is mainly provided with an extension path member 530 which extends the flow-down path of the ball formed between the facing of 5520 and the path forming member 510.

  The base plate 5520 has a cylindrical U-shaped cross section 5526 projecting to the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed in a rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section whose upper end is open at the side of the upper end It is mainly provided with a rolling portion 525 which is formed in a shape and extended in the lateral direction, and a locking portion 524 which protrudes in a hook shape on the back side.

  The shaft portion 5526 is formed so as to project two on the back side, and is inserted into the inside of two sliding grooves 5546 described later.

  The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings through which the restricting plate 541 and the reservoir plate 5542 of the distributing member 5540 described later are inserted, and the openings having a width larger than the thickness of the plates of the regulating plate 5541 and the reservoir plate 5542 It is formed. Further, since the distributing member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the sliding direction of the distributing member 5540 than the regulating plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542 It is formed in the opening.

  The distributing member 5540 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view in which one side is formed long, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distributing member 5540 is a sliding groove 5546 formed in an elongated hole substantially in the same direction as the extending direction of the regulating plate 5541 and the reservoir plate 5542 protruding in a plate shape on the front side and the regulating plate 5541 and the reservoir plate 5542. And a locking portion 544 formed in a hook shape on the back side.

  The restricting plate 5541 is disposed at a connection portion between the first ball sending route KR1 and the second ball sending route KR2 via the first opening 5521, and the gaming ball flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 is the second ball sending route KR2. It is a plate member that restricts the flow into the space, and the distance projected from the first opening 5521 is set to be larger than the radius of the gaming ball.

  Further, the restriction plate 5541 is formed in a straight shape in a front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distributing member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slide-displaced, the displacement area of the restriction plate 5541 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

  The storage plate 5542 is a plate member disposed on the second sending path KR2 via the second opening 5522 and causing the gaming ball flowing down the second sending path KR2 to flow upstream of the storage plate 5542, the second The distance projected from the opening 5522 is set to a distance larger than the radius of the gaming ball.

  Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a linear shape in a front view, and the extending direction thereof is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distributing member 540. Thereby, when the distributing member 5540 is slide-displaced, the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be secured.

  The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The sliding groove 5546 has the shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 inserted therein. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 5526 into the slide groove 5546 and fastening a screw or the like from the back side to the tip of the shaft portion 5526, the distributing member 5540 is held in a state where it can slide relative to the base plate 5520. be able to.

  The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two places, and their longitudinal directions are formed in parallel. Thus, the distribution member 5540 can be slide-displaced while suppressing the rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

  Next, displacement of distribution member 5540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b) are partial enlarged views of distribution unit 5500 in range CXXXV of FIG. In FIG. 135 (a), the state in which the distributing member 5540 is disposed at the storage position is illustrated, and in FIG. 135 (b), the state in which the distributing member 5540 is disposed at the regulated position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 135 (a), in the state where the distributing member 5540 is arranged at the restriction position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the third ball sending path KR3 shape, and the restriction plate 5541 is on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is disposed inside a recess 518 formed in the wall.

  In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip of the reservoir plate 5542 protruding inside the third ball sending path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball sending path opposite to the tip is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from the upstream of the third ball sending route KR3 (first ball sending route KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), in the state where the distributing member 5540 is arranged at the restricting position, the restricting plate 5541 is arranged at the connecting portion of the first ball sending path KR1 and the third ball sending path KR3. The restriction plate 5541 is disposed at the connection portion between the first ball sending passage KR1 and the third ball sending passage KR3, and the reservoir plate 5542 is disposed inside the recess 519 formed in the back wall of the passage forming member 510. Ru.

  In this case, the distance dimension L10 between the end of the tip of the restricting plate 5541 which protrudes to the inside of the first sending path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third sending path KR3 is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first throwing path KR1 collides with the restriction plate 5541 and is thrown to the second throwing path KR2.

  That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the restricted position and the storage position, the ball to which the first ball sending path KR1 is thrown is sent to the third ball sending path KR3 and stopped on the third ball sending path KR3; It is possible to form a state in which the ball flowing down the first ball passing path KR1 can not flow into the third ball passing path KR3 and the ball can be thrown into the second ball passing path KR2.

  Therefore, by sliding and displacing one distribution member 5540, the flow-down path of the ball can be reliably switched to either of the flow-down paths of 1 and the flow-down path of 2 when divided.

  Further, the restriction plate 5541 (sorting means) is formed so as to be able to get out and get in and out with respect to the first ball sending path KR1 (falling path) or the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path). (1) The inner wall on the extension of the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the throwing path KR1. Therefore, the restricting plate 5541 can be protruded at a position close to the gaming ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball sending route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required for the game balls to be distributed after the restriction plate 5541 starts to be projected to the down flow path or the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path). As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination by the restriction plate 5541.

  In addition, the restriction plate 5541 (sorting means) is projected to the third ball sending path KR3 (first branch path), and thereby the gaming ball flowing down the first ball passing path KR1 (falling path) is moved to the second ball passing path Since the projecting direction of the restricting plate 5541 is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second ball sending route KR2, the game balls flowing down the first ball sending route KR1 perform the projecting operation. When it abuts on the control plate in the middle of the above, it is possible to push the gaming ball into the second ball sending route KR in accordance with the projecting operation of the control plate. As a result, distribution to the second ball sending route KR2 can be performed more reliably.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 140, a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the load gear 731 e is connected to the drive of the rotating body 800 and the operation of the rotating body 800 is restricted by the inertia force. However, the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the load The gear 731 e is removed. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. FIG. 136 is a front view of the rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of distribution unit 6500. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 136 to FIG. 138, the rotation unit 6700 includes a decoration unit 6750 including a rotating body 800 that is rotationally displaced, a ball pedestal 710 disposed on the upper side of the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, and its ball pedestal. 710 and a rear base 720 disposed on the back side of the decoration unit 6750, a left transmission member 730 disposed on the left side of the decoration unit 6750 in a front view, and a crank cover 743 disposed on the right side of the decoration unit 6750 in a front view And are mainly provided.

  The decoration unit 6750 mainly includes a box member 760 formed in a box shape whose upper side in the direction of gravity is opened, and a rotating body 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotating unit 800 is disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770 in the first embodiment, but in the sixth embodiment, the decorative unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. Ru.

  The left side transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface (the left side in FIG. 136) of the decoration unit 750, a transmission member 6731 transmitting the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. Main components are a motor base 732, a gear cover 733 covering the transmission member 6731, and a ball feeding path cover 734 attached to the gear cover 733 and formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the facing. It is formed and provided.

  The transmission member 6731 has a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c And a transmission gear 731d coaxially disposed by the shaft 735.

  The transmission gear 6731 b is a gear that transmits the driving force to the transmission gear 731 c. In the first embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 is attached to the inside of the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Further, the transmission gear 731 c and the transmission gear 731 d are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Therefore, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from drive motor KM4, the driving force in rotation can be transmitted to shaft 735, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from drive motor KM4, to the inner ring of one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the outer ring slips (slip) and transmission of driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be described. 139 (a) to 139 (c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 in the arrow CXXXIX direction view of FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c) are the arrow CXXXIX direction view of FIG. It is a side view of decoration unit 6750 in.

  139 and 140, the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown as being transparent. Also, in FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (c), the manner in which the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the second section DK2 is sequentially illustrated, and in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (c) The aspect in which the center of gravity G of 800 displaces the first section DK1 is sequentially illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 139, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotary body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (clockwise) when viewed leftward (viewed in FIG. 139).

  As described above, the rotary body 800 is formed asymmetrically about the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G is disposed at a position different from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (a) is located above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140 (b) is displaced to a position substantially horizontal to the rotation axis. Once started, the load exerts a rotational force in the rotational direction.

  Therefore, the engagement of the roller interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 arranged in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (the rotating body 800 side) precedes the inner ring (the drive motor side) And is driven. That is, in the second section, the rotational speed of the rotating body 800 can be made faster than the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

  In addition, the rotating body 800 that rotates the second section DK2 with the load is rotated by the load to a position where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 139 (c) is located below the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in the direction opposite to the rotating direction. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

  Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement mode of the rotating body 800, and the rendering effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring by its own weight (that is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 is increased). The displacement member 7710 in the embodiment causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the gaming ball (ie, accelerates the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 141 and 142 are schematic side views of a displacement unit 7700 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that in FIG. 141, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the raised position is schematically illustrated in FIG. 142 in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the lowered position.

  As shown in FIG. 141 and FIG. 142, the displacement unit 7700 transmits the rotational driving force of the drive member (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710 formed slidably and the displacement member 7710. And a load gear 7730 which is rotated according to the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710.

  The displacing member 7710 is a member supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1. The displacing member 7710 has a driven pin 7711 protruding from the side surface of the displacing member 7710 and a lower surface of the displacing member 7710 A rack gear 7712 engraved along a virtual line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710 are mainly provided.

  In addition, the virtual line L1 is set as a straight line which descends and descends from the rising position shown in FIG. 141 toward the lowering position shown in FIG. That is, in the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is positioned above in the direction of gravity than the lowered position.

  The driven pin 7711 is a member slidably inserted in the drive groove 7723b of the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720, and is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is engaged with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated in accordance with the slide displacement of the displacement member 7710.

  The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding the game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and is rotated about the rotation shaft 7713a to be in the upright state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. It can be formed. In the upright state, the gaming ball can be held by projecting one end side from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the inclined state, the game ball can be discharged from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 by positioning one end side below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

  The ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in the upright state by the biasing force that acts from a biasing spring (for example, a torsion spring) not shown. An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the track of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slidingly displaced to the lowered position, the engagement pin 7740 is engaged with the other end of the ball receiving member 7713. The engagement of 7740 rotates the ball receiving member 7713 to be in a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slidingly displaced to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring, and is returned to the inclined state.

  The transmission member 7720 projects from the end face in the axial direction of the disk-shaped rotary member 7721 which is rotationally driven by the drive means (not shown) described above and the rotary member 7721 and is located eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotary member 7721 It mainly includes a cylindrical drive pin 7722 and an arm member 7723 having an opening formed with a driven groove 7723a in which the drive pin 7722 is slidably inserted at one end.

  A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the drive means. Specifically, when the one-way clutch OW1 has the inner ring connected to the driving means and the outer ring connected to the rotating member 7721 and the inner ring is rotationally driven by the driving means in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) When the rotational driving force is transmitted to the outer ring (that is, the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A), and the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141) , Power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721) is cut off.

  In the arm member 7723, a drive groove 7723b in which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member is slidably inserted is formed on the other end side opposite to the one end side where the driven groove 7723a is formed. The intermediate portion between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b is rotatably supported by the rotation shaft 7723c.

  The drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. The driven groove 7723a and the drive groove 7723b are formed as linear grooves along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 7723.

  According to displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, when rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where displacement member 7710 is disposed at the raised position shown in FIG. The driving pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation shaft 7723c. With the clockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing down the driven pin 7711, and the displacement member 7710 is slidingly displaced along the imaginary line L1, as shown in FIG. It is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the rotating member 7721 is further rotated in the arrow A direction (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where the displacing member 7710 is disposed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 142, the drive pin 7722 is inside the driven groove 7723a. Acting on the wall surface, the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation shaft 7723 c. With the counterclockwise rotation of the arm member 7723, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in the direction of pushing up the driven pin 7711, thereby causing the displacement member 7710 to be slide-displaced along the imaginary line L1, as shown in FIG. It is disposed at the rising position indicated by 141.

  Here, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating, as with the load gear 731 e in the first embodiment. Thereby, the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 to rotate the rotation member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), whereby the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is against the inner ring. Thus, it is possible to suppress leading in one direction (arrow A direction). That is, in a state where the gaming ball is not held, it is possible to suppress that the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the raised position to the lowered position is increased.

  That is, while the rotary member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIGS. 141 and 142) by the rotational drive force of the drive means, displacement is performed at a slide speed corresponding to the rotational drive speed of the rotational drive means. The member 7710 is reciprocally displaced (sliding) between the raised position and the lowered position.

  143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when the gaming ball is held by the displacement member 7710. In FIG. 143, the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the raised position is schematically illustrated in FIG. 144 and the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed at the lowered position.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed so as to be able to hold the gaming ball on its upper surface. That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is disposed in the game area in the area where the gaming balls flow down, and the displacement member 7710 is formed to be able to receive the game balls flowing down on its upper surface. Note that FIG. 143 exemplifies a state in which four gaming balls indicated by symbol T are held on the top surface of the displacement member 7710.

  In this case, in a state where the displacing member 7710 holds the gaming ball, the weight of the displacing member 7710 as a whole is made larger (heavy) by the weight of the gaming ball, and the resistance accompanying the rotation of the load gear 7730 is exceeded. It can be done. That is, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 (the weight including the game ball) is applied to the arm member 7723, and the rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143). Can be advanced in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when the gaming ball is not held (see FIG. 141).

  Further, the weight of the entire displacement member 7710 can be made different according to the number of gaming balls being held. Thus, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be made different (changed) not only depending on whether the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710 but also according to the number of game balls held. As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and accordingly, the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced.

  As described above, in the displacement member 7710, the ball receiving member 7713 is disposed at the tip end (end on the lower side of the inclination). Therefore, when the displacing member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the force exerted on the displacing member 7710 from the game ball is directed toward the lowered position It can act as a displacing force. That is, the force can be applied via the arm member 7723 and the rotation member 7721 in a direction to cause the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to advance in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring.

  Thereby, when the displacing member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives the game ball flowing down, the motional energy of the game ball is used to slide in the direction toward the lowered position of the displacing member 7710 The displacement speed of displacement can be made faster.

  In this case, the game balls flowing down have different flowing directions and falling speeds. Therefore, the force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be made different depending on the difference in the flowing state (flowing direction or falling speed) of the gaming ball to be received. Thus, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is made different depending on whether the game ball is held by the displacement member 7710, the number of held game balls, and the flow state of the game ball (change Can). As a result, the variation of the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and accordingly, the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be enhanced.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotational direction of the rotation member 7721 is one direction, there is no need to switch the drive direction of the drive means. In other words, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocally displaced by continuously rotating the rotation means in one direction. Therefore, the time to switch the drive direction of the drive means can be eliminated. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced by the amount that switching of the drive means is not required.

  In this case, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotationally displaced by immediately performing the displacement of the displacing member 7710, and the reaction is caused when the game ball caught by the displacing member 7710 (the upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) is dropped. The rattling of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

  That is, when the game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load of the displacement member 7710 is lightened by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is easily displaced upward by the reaction. By immediately displacing the displacing member 7710, the reaction by displacing the ball receiving member 7713 exerts a force for displacing the displacing member 7710 downward, thereby counteracting the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacing member 7710. be able to.

  The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball moving along the gravity direction on the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13, but includes game balls moving in a direction different from the gravity direction. As a game ball which moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, it collides with a nail, a tulip, a character or the like, and the game ball which moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity The game ball is moved in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

  Here, in the present embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 does not hold the gaming ball (see FIG. 141), when the displacement member 7710 is slidingly displaced toward the lowered position. The outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 does not precede the inner ring in one direction (the direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

  On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value, and the displacement member 7710 is slidingly displaced toward the lowered position, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is with respect to the inner ring. It may be configured to precede in one direction (direction of arrow A) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is increased). That is, even when only the weight (self weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 and the rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 becomes the inner ring. Alternatively, it may be made to precede.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148, the upper tray 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, a rotation operation unit 8650 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of rotation operation unit 8650. FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotary operation unit 8650 is disposed in the internal space of the upper plate 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation portion 865 described later protrudes outward of the upper plate 8017. It is arranged in the

  The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8652 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651, and an axis of the transmission gear 8652 Mainly formed with a shaft portion 8653 internally fitted in the hole, a one-way clutch OW1 in which the inner ring is externally fitted in the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 in which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted .

  The transmission gear 8651 is coupled to the shaft of the drive motor KM6. Therefore, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated by applying the rotational driving force to the drive motor KM6. As described above, the transmission gear 8651 is disposed in a state of being meshed with the transmission gear 8651. Therefore, when the rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM 6, the transmission gear 8652 can be rotated via the transmission gear 8651.

  The shaft portion 8653 is a rod member formed in a cylindrical shape, and the axial length thereof is formed longer than the width dimension of the rotation operation portion 865 in the left-right direction. As described above, one of the shaft portions 8653 is inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652 and the other is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Thereby, the driving force when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

  One-way clutch OW1 is formed of the inner ring, the outer ring, and the rollers engaged therebetween as described above, and when the inner ring is rotated in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring and the inner ring is in the other direction. When it is rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be made non-transferred to the outer ring.

  The rotation operation portion 865 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed in a state where a part of the outer peripheral surface thereof protrudes from the upper plate 8017. Further, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is internally fitted to the inner circular portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operation portion 865 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation unit 865 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

  As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1, and the rotation operation portion 8654 Is rotated. On the other hand, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted, and the transmission of the rotational drive to the rotation operation unit 8654 is blocked.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the case where the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654 will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. The cross section in FIG. 148 corresponds to that in FIG.

  As described above, the rotation operation unit 865 is configured such that the rotation operation unit 865 is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM6, and the rotation of the drive motor KM6 is not rotated, whereby the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated. It is possible to form an aspect in which the displacement is stopped.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 148, when the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction and the rotation operation unit 8654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654 and the rotation operation unit When a rotational force is generated in the same direction as the rotation A direction 8654, the outer peripheral surface of the one-way clutch OW1 and the rotation operation portion 865 are rotated in advance. That is, the rotation operation unit 865 can be operated by the rotation of the speed higher than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM 6 by the operation of the player.

  Also, when the rotation operation unit 865 is not rotated (the drive motor KM 6 is not rotated), the player applies a driving force to the rotation operation unit 8654 in the rotation A direction to rotationally displace the rotation operation unit 8654. be able to.

  Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation unit 865 not only forms the non-rotation or rotation state by the drive of the drive motor KM6, but also the rotation operation unit 865 is rotated from the stopped state by the player's operation. And, it is possible to form an aspect in which the rotation operation unit 865 is rotated at a higher speed from the rotation state by the operation of the player.

  As a result, since it is possible to form a plurality of modes for causing the player to visually recognize the displacement mode of the rotation operation unit 8564, it is possible to give the player an interest. Further, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation unit 865, a plurality of effect modes of the pachinko machine 10 can be formed, so that the player can be entertained as much as the effect can be increased.

  Note that a sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is disposed on the side surface of the rotation operation unit 8654, and effects can be performed that are changed based on the number of rotations and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 8654.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment will be described. The plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is provided with an inclined surface 9431b1 formed by inclining the contact surface with the cam member 422. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 149 (a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 149 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional schematic view of FIG. 56 (a).

  The lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment is the same as the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, the base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, and A transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410 and a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) which is displaced by transmission of a driving force from the transmission member 420 are provided. In addition, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a link member 9430 connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and displaced with the drive of the transmission member 420, and the displacement of the link member 9430 The lower displacement member 440 is displaced.

  As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is formed in a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, as well as being bent in a V shape in a front view. The first link member 9431 protrudes through the through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (the arrow D direction side in FIG. 149A) and the back side of the other end side (the arrow U direction in FIG. Cylindrical connecting projections 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-like projection 9431b projecting to a position facing the curved wall 411e of the base member 410, and a cylindrical sliding projection 431d projecting to the front side of the bent portion And prepare.

  The plate-like protrusion 9431b extends in a curved shape centering on the axis of the through hole 431a, and protrudes toward the front side (the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431 b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the arrow F-B direction) dimension of the cam member 422. Furthermore, the base member 410 (curved wall 411e) facing the protruding tip end face of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is disposed with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149 (b))).

  The cam member 422 is disposed in a state in which the region between the front of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (rear surface) of the curved wall 411e can be displaced. In addition, the dimensions of the two gaps, which is the total of the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410, are greater than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

  Thereby, when the first link member 9431 is bent in the direction (arrow F direction) in which the distance X14 described above becomes smaller, the base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) that faces the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b. It can be made to abut. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the cam member 422 is pinched between the facing of the front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the projecting surface (rear surface) of the curved wall 411e to restrict the displacement.

  Further, the plate-like protrusion 9431 b is provided with an inclined surface 9431 b 1 protruding toward the front side as it goes to the cam member 422 on the side surface in the circumferential direction on the cam member 422 side (arrow L direction direction in FIG. As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the inclined surface 9431 b 1 is formed so as to incline approximately 45 degrees toward the protruding side (arrow F direction side).

  Thus, when the lower displacement unit 400 is brought into the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 abuts against the plate-like protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is the back surface of the first link member 9431 (arrow F direction side The projection tip surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B), and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the position of the second displacement state.

  In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431 b 1 is formed at the end portion of the cam member 422 in the contact portion with the inclined surface 9431 b 1. As a result, when the cam member 422 and the inclined surface 9431b1 abut on each other, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced to the back side (arrow B direction side).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a general prize winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the adhesive tape 154a is attached to the end of the decoration member 154 has been described in the first embodiment, but in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is the end of the decoration member 10154 It is stuck on the inside separating a predetermined width from the part. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 150 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, the general winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment is disposed in the gaming area (front of the base plate 60) of the gaming board 13 in the same manner as the general winning opening unit 150 in the first embodiment, and flows down the gaming area. It is possible to change the path of the game ball. In addition, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 is the end of gravity direction lower side (arrow D direction direction side) in front view (arrow B direction view) vis-a-vis the game territory which is formed to be enclosed by inner rail 76 and outer rail 77 It is arranged at the position along the part.

  Furthermore, the general winning opening unit 10150 has a main body 151 formed in a crescent shape in a front view, and a first standing part 152 provided upright on the front side (arrow F direction side) from an end of the main body 151. (See FIG. 12) and a second standing portion 153 extending toward the center side of the game area from the end of the first standing portion 152 at the upper side in the direction of gravity (the arrow U direction) (FIG. a) and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) general winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12A) formed on the front side of the main body 151.

  As shown in FIG. 150, the general prize winning opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 disposed on the back of the main body 10151. In the decorative member 10154, an adhesive tape 10154a adhered to the main body portion 151 is attached to the inside of the end of the decorative member 10154 at a predetermined width. Thus, a predetermined gap (space) is formed between the main body 151 and the decorative member 10154 at the end of the decorative member 10154 by the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)), The boundary between the decoration member 10154 and the decoration can be made less visible to the player.

  Specifically, by forming an air layer between the main body 151 and the end of the decorative member 10154, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected and the player's side is reflected from the end of the main body 151 (the inclined surface 151a). The light L emitted to the light L can be prevented from being affected by the decoration at the end of the decoration member 10154 (the wavelength of the light L is less likely to be changed). In addition, light passing through the inside of the adhesive tape 10154a and being affected by the decoration of the decoration member 10154 is emitted to the outside of the main body 151 by being repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151, so that the player's The influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be reduced when being reflected toward the viewpoint.

  Therefore, the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player can be reduced, and the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 can be reduced when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more. Can make it hard to recognize the boundaries of As a result, when the player visually recognizes the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 from a normal angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximate middle position of the game board 13 in the gravity direction) The member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be easily viewed by the player as a decoration of 1, and a predetermined angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)) In the case of visual recognition from the above, it is possible to make it difficult to see the decoration of the boundary portion and to make it difficult for the player to understand that the decoration is divided.

  Next, the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. FIG. Although the case where light is irradiated to the decoration member 450 by the control substrate 491 disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 440 has been described in the first embodiment, the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment is a control substrate The light emitted from 491 allows the player to recognize the position of the game ball inside. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment. 152 (a) and 152 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 11440. FIG. In FIG. 152 (a), the outline of the light emitter 11491a disposed on the control substrate 491 is shown by a chain line, and in FIG. 152 (b), the state in which the decorative member 11450 is removed is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 (a) and 152 (b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and back of the base member 470. , A transmission mechanism 11460 disposed displaceably between the case member 480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member formed in a manner to cover the front and back of the case member 480 (in the direction of arrow F-B) And 11450 and is mainly formed.

  The decorative member 11450 is formed into an outline imitating a pattern or a character, and a picture of the pattern or the character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 is provided on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the front case 481 and on the rear side (the arrow B direction) of the rear case 482. And 452 are mainly provided. In the present embodiment, a pattern (character) of a shark is drawn on the decoration member 11450.

  The front side decorative portion 11451 is formed in an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the front case 481 in a front view, and is attached to the front case 481. As a result, the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front side decorative portion 11451 can be made invisible from the player. Moreover, the front side decoration part 11451 is equipped with the permeation | transmission part 11451b formed from a transparent material in the inner side in front view.

  The transmitting portion 11451b is formed in the entire area facing the plurality of light emitters 11491a disposed on the control substrate 491 described later, and can guide the light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a to the player side It is assumed. In addition, the transmitting portion 11451b is formed such that the front side (arrow F direction side) is curved toward the back side (arrow B direction side) toward the outer end in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction). Thus, light incident from the back side of the transmitting portion 11451b can be easily diffused when it passes through the inside of the transmitting portion 11451b and is emitted from the front side.

  The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, 463 and a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461; A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface meshing with the transmission gear 463 and slidably disposed on the front side of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464, and a base A rack gear 476 formed on a member 470 and having a toothed surface meshed with the transmission gear 465, and a toothed surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and slidably disposed on the front side of the movable rack 464 11466 and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 11466.

  The rack 11466 is formed of a rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and is rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, and the rear surface side (arrow B direction side) from the end of the other end side (arrow L direction side) in the longitudinal direction The shaft portion 466b projecting in a cylindrical shape, two sliding plates 466c projecting in the front side (the arrow F direction side), and a recess formed on the back side from one end (the arrow R direction side) to the other end in the longitudinal direction And a shielding plate 11466e protruding upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a.

  The shielding plate 11466 e is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491 a. Further, the shielding plate 11466e is positioned at a position (position on the arrow U direction side) higher than the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the rear side with respect to the protruding height (height in the arrow U direction) upward. Accordingly, the shield plate 11466e can be displaced in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) in accordance with the displacement of the rack 11466, and the light irradiated from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked.

  The control substrate 491 is disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitters 11491a that can emit light on the front surface side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are ball receiving portions disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470 It is disposed above 467 (in the direction of arrow U). Thus, the ball receiving portion 467 can prevent the light emitted from the light emitting portion 11491 a from being blocked.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, a state in which the game ball is thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. Fig.153 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, FIG.153 (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member 11440 in the CLIIIb-CLIIIb line | wire of FIG. 153 (a), FIG. ] Is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the lower displacement member 11440 in the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. 153 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 153, when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 467, the received game ball is disposed at a position overlapping the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a. Thereby, the game ball received by the ball receiving unit 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a to the player side. As a result, the position of the gaming ball thrown to the inside of the lower displacement member 11440 can be recognized by the player by the shadow formed by blocking the light.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the control substrate 491 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 11450 and can emit light toward the displacement region of the ball receiving portion 467. The control substrate 491 is a part of the ball receiving portion 467. The game ball disposed on the back side and received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 blocks the light emitted from the control substrate 491 and partially divides the light amount of the light emitted from the decorative member 11450 Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 and the light emitted from the decorative member 11450 at other positions By making the amount of light different (darken and forming a shadow), it is possible that the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the light amount is different. It can be recognized to.

  Explaining in detail, when the control board 491 is disposed on the back side of the ball receiving portion 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467. Thus, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 or the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than the other portions of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can recognize that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game receiving ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is positioned on the back side of the small amount (dark) portion emitted from the decorative member 11450.

  Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to receive the lower hemisphere of the gaming ball, and the light emitting body 11491a is disposed at a position higher than the center of the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. It can be made difficult for the light received to be emitted to the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, with the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a, the outer shapes of the ball receiving portion 467 for receiving gaming balls and the rack 11466 for slidingly displacing the ball receiving portion 467 become shadows and shadows are formed in the transmitting portion 11451b. It can be suppressed. As a result, since the shadow can be formed on the transparent portion 11451b only with the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467, the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in a state where the game ball is not received by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it can be suppressed that the player's gaze is focused on the ball receiving portion 467.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is blocked by the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 has been described, but in the twelfth embodiment, the ball is disposed in the ball receiving portion 12467 The three pieces 12467 e shield light emitted from the light emitter 11491 a. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 154, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154 (b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. In FIG. 154 (a), a part of the ball receiving portion 12467 is illustrated by a chain line.

  The lower displacing member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is, like the lower displacing member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment, a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45) and the front and back of the base member 470. And a decorative member 11450 which is formed in such a manner as to cover the front and rear (in the direction of the arrow F-B) of the case member 480. In addition, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment is disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 470 so as to be displaceable, and includes a transmission mechanism 12460 having a ball receiving portion 12467c that can be deformed by receiving the game ball. .

  As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c which is bent in a substantially L shape in a front view, and a second piece 12467d which is connected to the first piece 12467c. And a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and disposed on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

  The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are portions for holding the game balls thrown from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inner side of the lower displacement member 12440, and between the opposing sides of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. When the game ball is thrown, the second piece 12467d is displaced relative to the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are arranged in a U shape in front view Can hold the gaming ball in the inner part of the U-shape.

  The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 forming one extending side formed in an L shape in front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, a receiving piece 12467c4, and a leg portion 467a An annular bending portion 12467c5 in which an axial hole 467b is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion) in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction), and a connecting portion 12467c1 projecting on the opposite side across the bending portion 12467c5. And.

  The receiving piece 12467c4 is a portion forming the side of the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U-shape in a front view by the one piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front, It is formed in the curved shape which becomes concave in the direction away from the 2nd piece 12467d.

  The connecting portion 12467c1 is provided so as to project from two places at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) of the bending portion 12467c5. The connecting portion 12467c1 is a portion that connects a second piece 12467d and a third piece 12467e described later, and extends in the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and has a connecting hole 12467c2 that is opened in a circular shape in cross section. Prepare.

  The connection hole 12467 c 2 is an opening into which a shaft portion 12467 e 3 protruding from a third piece 12467 e described later is inserted. In the connection hole 12467 c 2, the shaft portion 12467 e 3 inserted through an insertion hole 12467 d 3 formed in a second piece 12467 d described later is inserted from the back side (arrow B direction side). The shaft portion 12467 e 3 is fastened by a screw inserted from the opposite side (front side (arrow F direction side)) of the connecting hole 12467 c 2 to the insertion side. Thus, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

  Further, the first piece 12467c is provided with a concave portion 12467c3 which is concave toward the lower side in the direction of gravity (the arrow D direction side) on the protruding base end side of the coupling portion 12467c1. The concave bottom surface of the concave portion 12467 c 3 is formed at the lowest position (lowermost portion) of the bottom surfaces on which the gaming balls are held by the first piece 12467 c and the second piece 12467 d. As a result, the gaming balls held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are rolled inside the recess 12467c3.

  The second piece 12467d is a portion that forms a side surface of the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U-shape in a front view by the receiving piece 12467c4 and the second piece 12467d of the first piece 12467c, and in crescent view While being formed in a shape, it is formed in a curved shape that is concave in a direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. In addition, an insertion hole 12467d3 circularly opening in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) at the connection portion of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and a front side (arrow F direction) from the back side (arrow B direction side) And a concave portion 12467 d 2 which is recessed in a circular shape in cross section toward the side).

  In the second piece 12467d, the shaft portion 12467e3 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3, and the connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c.

  Further, the second piece 12467d is disposed between the facing portions of the connecting portions 12467c1 protruding from the two places of the first piece 12467c, and is connected to the first piece 12467c. As a result, when the second piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the second piece 12467d can be made to abut on the side surface on the opposite side of the connecting portion 12467c1 to prevent the shaft portion 12467e3 from being broken.

  The recessed portion 12467 d 2 is a hole into which a connection shaft 12467 e 4 of a third piece 12467 e described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connection shaft 124 67 e 4.

  The third piece 12467e has a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in a front view, a shaft portion 12467e3 projecting from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and a connecting shaft 12467e4 And.

  The shielding plate 12467e1 is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and can shield light emitted from the light emitter 11491a when disposed on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. Note that the shielding of the light of the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

  The shaft portion 12467 e 3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connection hole 12467 c 2 of the first piece 12467 c and the insertion hole 12467 d 3 of the second piece 12467 d as described above. Further, a hole which can be screwed with a screw to be inserted into the connection hole 12467c2 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3 is formed on the protruding end surface of the shaft portion 12467e3. Therefore, in a state in which the shaft portion 12467 e 3 is inserted into the connection hole 12467 c 2 and the insertion hole 12 467 d 3, the first end 12467 c, the second end 124 67 d, and the third end 124 67 e are connected by fastening a screw to the insertion end surface of the shaft portion 12467 e 3 The third piece 12467e can be made rotatable relative to the first piece 12467c.

  The connecting shaft 12467 e 4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467 d 2 of the second piece 12467 d as described above. Accordingly, when the second piece 12467d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 12467c around the shaft portion 12467e3, the connection shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d.

  Next, displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 155 (a) and 155 (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 along line CLVc-CLVc in FIG. 155 (b). is there. In FIGS. 155 (a) and 155 (b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitter 11491a are illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 155 (a) shows the state before the gaming ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467 (before being held), and in FIG. 155 (b), the gaming ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467. The illustrated (held) state is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in a state before the gaming ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is the first by the load of the third piece 12467e. The third piece 12467 e is positioned lower than the light emitting body 11491 a disposed on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467 so as to approach the piece 12467 c side. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball is received between the facing of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the received gaming ball is formed into the receiving surface of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d (in a U-shape in a front view) The inner side is rolled and guided to the recess 12467 c 3 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. As a result, the second piece 12467 d can be rotated on the outer surface of the gaming ball in a direction away from the first piece 12467 c around the shaft portion 12467 e 3. As a result, it is possible to arrange the third piece 12467e moving with the displacement of the second piece 12467d on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiving portion 12467.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be shielded by the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467. Therefore, the position of the game ball received by the lower displacement member 12440 is the same as that of the light emitting body 11491a. The player can be made aware of the position of the shadow that shields the light.

  In the second piece 12467d, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied. The center of gravity G (see FIG. 154B) of the third piece 12467e is set to the opposite side across the shaft portion 12467e3 from the connecting portion with the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e. Thus, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the second piece 12467d can be rotated toward the first piece 12467c4 by the load of the third piece 12467e. .

  Therefore, when the gaming ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the second piece 12467d can be displaced toward the ball receiving piece 12467c4 of the first piece 12467c by the load of the third piece 12467e.

  Further, like the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated about the shaft hole 12467 b by the operation of sliding the inside of the lower displacing member 12440, and the emission of the lower displacing member 12440 is The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

  Here, as a structure for discharging the game balls received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated in the structure in which the ball receiving portion 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b in accordance with the slide movement of the ball receiving portion 12467. The rotational speed of the ball receiving portion 12467 around the shaft hole 467b is changed by the sliding speed of Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 12467, there is a problem that the discharge speed of the gaming balls from the ball receiving portion 12467 is not stable.

  On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 12467 d is rotated by the load of the third piece 12467 e and the direction of rotation of the ball receiving portion 12467 whose axis is the axial hole 467 b when emitting the game ball is Since they are set in substantially the same direction, it is possible to apply a driving force when the second piece 12467d is displaced to the gaming ball emitted from the emission opening 471. Therefore, even if the force exerted on the gaming ball from the ball receiving portion 12467 when discharging the gaming ball from the emission opening 471 by displacing the ball receiving portion 12467 is reduced, the speed of the emitted gaming ball can be maintained. it can. As a result, the discharge speed of the game balls emitted from the ball receiving portion 12467 can be stabilized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case is described in which the throwing path of the gaming ball having flowed into the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580. In the thirteenth embodiment, the flow path of the game ball flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550 is adjusted by changing the facing distance of the throwing path of the special winning device 13550. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157, the overall configuration of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. 156 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156 (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 156 (c) is a front view of FIG. It is a sectional view of special winning device 13550 in the CLVIc-CLVIc line of a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of special winning device 13550.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side, and a first path member 13560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 13560. And a second path member 13570.

  The first path member 13560 projects from the front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 and the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side) And the first wall portion 13565.

  The front plate 13564 is a plate member serving as a front wall of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 13570 described later and facing the second path member 13570, and is formed of a light transmitting member. Thus, the player can visually recognize the gaming balls flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550 through the front plate 13564. Further, the front plate 13564 is located below the first convex portion 13564 b and the second convex portion 13564 c protruding to the second path member 13570 side, and the first convex portion 13564 b and the second convex portion 13564 c and is a second path member. And a third convex portion 13564 d protruding from the 13570 side.

  The first convex portion 13564 b and the second convex portion 13564 c are projections for guiding the game balls flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550, and are positive from the left and right direction outer side (arrow L-R direction outer side) of the front plate 13564 It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction of the face plate 13564.

  The third convex portion 13564 d is located at the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) and extends in the gravity direction (arrow U-D direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the gaming area of the gaming board 13, the throwing route of the gaming ball flowing down from the special winning device 13550 is different at the left and right of the approximate center position of the special winning device 13550 in the left and right direction (arrow L-R direction). The gaming ball flowing down from the left side in a front view of the special winning device 13550 is thrown to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), and a specific gaming value is given to the player by the thrown gaming ball (predetermined (predetermined) A number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side in a front view of the special winning device 13550 is thrown to the out port 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is disposed below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (arrow D direction side), whereby the special winning device 13550 is viewed from the left side in a front view. A game ball flowing down can be made to flow into the first winning opening 64.

  The first wall portion 13565 is a portion for connecting the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and a connecting plate 13565a protruding leftward and rightward at the protruding tip portion is respectively provided to the left and right first wall portions 13565 Have two places each.

  The connecting plate 13565a is formed with a through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the gaming board 13. The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by the screw inserted into the through hole 13565a1.

  The second path member 13570 has a plate-like base plate 13571 facing the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560 and the left and right (in the arrow L-R direction) end portions of the base plate 13571 of the first path member 13560 And a fourth wall portion 13573 protruding on the front plate 13564 side.

  The base plate 13571 is a member for forming a throwing path of the gaming ball in a gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564, and the outer shape in front view is smaller than the outer shape of the front plate 13564. Thus, the front side of the base plate 13571 can be covered with the front plate 13564, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the base plate 13571.

  Further, the base plate 13571 is located below the fourth convex portion 13571 b and the fifth convex portion 13571 c protruding to the first path member 13560 side, and the fourth convex portion 13571 b and the fifth convex portion 13571 c, and the front plate 13564 side. And a sixth convex portion 13571 d provided in a protruding manner.

  The fourth convex portion 13571 b and the fifth convex portion 13571 c are projections for guiding the game balls flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550, and are from the left and right direction outer side (arrow (L-R direction outer side)) of the base plate 13571 It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side of the base plate 13571.

  The sixth convex portion 13571 d is formed at a position facing the third convex portion 13564 d described above, and has a length having a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564 d. The gap between the third convex portion 13564 d and the sixth convex portion 13571 d is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  In the fourth wall portion 13573, fastening holes 13573a for fastening screws through which the first path member 13560 is inserted are formed in two places in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. Thereby, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

  In addition, a shim member SI is provided around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573 so as to adjust the gap between the facing of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570.

  The shim member SI is formed of a thin plate-like transparent material and is less likely to be viewed by the player. Further, in the present embodiment, the shim member SI is disposed at the end on the left side in the front view, and the distance between the facing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side in the front view is increased.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a game ball flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 (a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 13550 taken along line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb of FIG. 158 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the special winning device 13550, the shim member SI is disposed at the end on the left side in the front view, and the space L14 (see FIG. a) is set larger than the distance L15 (see FIG. 158A) between the facing of the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the right side in front view (L14> L15).

  The distance L14 is the distance between the left (arrow L direction) end portion of the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. The distance L15 is the distance between the right (arrow R direction) end of the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 are opposed. Furthermore, the interval L15 is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball flowing down from above the special winning device 13550 can be made to flow into the special winning device 13550 from any position in the left and right direction ( L14> L15> Diameter ball diameter).

  Further, the special winning device 13550 is divided downstream into the left and right by the third convex portion 13564 d and the sixth convex portion 13571 d. Thus, the gaming ball flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158 (b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 is the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 in front view and It flows into either one of the secondary route HK1 to be formed. As described above, the game area downstream of the special winning device 13550 is formed such that the throwing paths are different at the approximate center position of the special winning device 13550 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the game balls sent from the main path SK2 to the game area are sent to a specific winning opening, and the game balls sent from the sub path HK1 to the game area are sent to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

  Furthermore, the projection dimensions of the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 described above and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be substantially the same. That is, the first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c, which protrude from the front plate 13564 toward the rear surface side, have the same dimension of projection. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571 b and the fifth convex portion 13571 c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are set to have the same protruding dimension. Furthermore, the projection dimensions of the first convex portion 13565 b and the fourth convex portion 13571 b are set to be the same.

  In addition, the first convex portion 13564 b and the second convex portion 13564 c, and the fourth convex portion 13571 b and the fifth convex portion 13571 c are disposed at positions different in height in the vertical direction. That is, the first convex portion 13565 b and the second convex portion 13564 c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back side are protruded from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571 b and the fifth convex portion 13571 c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side protrude from the same height. Furthermore, the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are disposed at different heights, and the fourth convex portion 13571b is disposed below the first convex portion 13565b. Further, the lower side of the first convex portion 13565b protruding from two places in the gravity direction is disposed at an intermediate position of the fourth convex portions 13571b protruding from two places in the gravity direction.

  As a result, the gaming balls flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550 can be flowed down while sequentially colliding with the first convex portion 13564 b and the fourth convex portion 13571 b or the second convex portion 13564 c and the fifth convex portion 13571 c. As a result, the gaming ball can be made to flow down along the extending direction of the first convex portion 13564 b, the second convex portion 13564 c, the fourth convex portion 13571 b, and the fifth convex portion 13571 c.

  The distance L16 (see FIG. 158A) between the facing of the front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 13571b or the base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b on the left side of the special winning device 13550 in front view is determined by the shim member SI. While being set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, the distance L17 between the facing of the front plate 13564 and the fifth convex portion 13571c or the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c in the front view right side of the special winning device 13550 is It is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  The interval L16 is the distance between the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the end of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b on the fifth convex portion 13571c side and the second convex portion 13564c side (arrow R direction side). Distance between the In addition, the distance L17 is opposed to the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571 at the end of the fifth protrusion 13571c and the second protrusion 13564c on the fourth protrusion 13571b and the first protrusion 13564b (in the direction of the arrow L). Distance between the

  Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is disposed below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (arrow D direction side). A game ball flowing down can be made to flow into the first winning opening 64.

  Therefore, the gaming balls flowed into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the right side (arrow R direction side) of the special winning device 13550 in front view are more likely to abut the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c, It becomes easy to be made to flow down along the extending direction of the 2nd convex part 13564c and the 5th convex part 13571c, and to be guided to the subpath HK1 side. On the other hand, the gaming ball, which flows into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the left side (arrow L direction direction) of the special winning device 13550 in front view, hardly collides with the first convex portion 13564 b and the fourth convex portion 13571 b, It becomes easy to be thrown to the secondary path HK1 as it is. As a result, it is possible to change the flow-down direction of the gaming ball that has flowed into the special winning device 13550.

  In the present embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c are the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d (the main path HK1 and the sub path It is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) than the inlet of the gaming ball with SK6. Therefore, most of the gaming balls flowing down the main path SK1 can be made to flow down to the sub path HK1, and a relatively smaller number of gaming balls can be flowed down to the main path SK6 than the sub path HK1.

  Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by the shim member SI and the space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is not parallel. It is possible to adjust the position of the gaming ball (flowing direction of the gaming ball) flowing the

  Therefore, the direction in which the special winning device 13550 is more likely to flow down than in the case where the angle with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 of the nail nailed to the front of the base plate 60 is changed to adjust the direction in which the gaming balls are easily dropped. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player recognizes that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game with the gaming machine, and the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In addition, the game balls flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550 only by changing the two directions (the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction)) in the opposing direction of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be simplified more easily than a nail adjustable in all directions with respect to the front of the game board 13 (base plate 60). As a result, it is possible to easily make the game ball flow down in the direction intended by the coordinator.

  Note that the direction intended by the coordinator is, for example, between the opposing of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub path HK1 side (arrow L direction side) on the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side) A game ball flowing down the inside of the special winning device 13550, which is larger than the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, flows down to the sub path HK1, or the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side Between the opposing path of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 of the sub path HK1 side (arrow L direction side) than the opposing path of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570). The game ball flowing down the inside of the device 13550 flows down to the main path SK6.

  Furthermore, with respect to the first path member 13560 disposed on the front side, the second path member 13570 disposed on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) by sandwiching the shim member SI. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the facing of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. That is, since the second path member 13570 disposed on the far side from the player is moved in the front-rear direction, the first path member 13560 and the first path member 13560 closer to the player are displaced. The distance between opposing sides of the second path member 13570 can be made difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the operating element 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (rear surface side (arrow B direction side)) of the rear case 300. The operating element 14315 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed such that the protruding distal end surface is inclined toward the base end side. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Fig. 159 (a) is a rear view of the back case 300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and Fig. 159 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 taken along line CLIXb-CLIXb in Fig. 159 (a).

  In the rear case 14300 of the fourteenth embodiment, as in the case of the rear case 300 of the first embodiment, the bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and the front edge of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 face the front. It has an outer wall portion 302 which is erected, and is formed in a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is opened by the respective wall portions 301 and 302. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible.

  The rear case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 14310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall 301 (the open side (box F direction side formed in a box shape)) and the rear case 14300. And a fixing member 320 which is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main controller 110).

  As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 extend in directions parallel to each other. The third piece 313 connects the end portions of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312.

  In the first piece 14311, the end of one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41A). Engaging portions 316 that protrude outward in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311, and two places thereof. The concave portion 317 concaved in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first piece 14311 from the substantially middle position of the engaging portion 316 of the rear wall 300 side of the back case 300 (back side (arrow B direction And an operator 14315 protruding toward the side).

  The operating element 14315 is formed at the end of the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and the projecting dimension thereof is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 It is projected to the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that can be grasped by the operator with a finger. As a result, the operating element 14315 can be made to project from the second opening 301 d of the bottom wall 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operating element 14315) can be grasped and operated.

  Further, the protruding distal end surface of the operating element 14315 is formed as an inclined surface 14315 a that approaches the proximal end side of the operating element 14315 as it goes to the engaging portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 (arrow L direction side)). Thereby, when the operator operates the operation element 14315 in the direction (the arrow L direction side) of releasing the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320, the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 Can reduce the force acting in the direction of releasing the

  That is, the force by which the operator operates the operating element 14315 can be dispersed by the inclined surface 14315 a. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to release the engagement between the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operating element 14315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, a worker who attempts to replace the substrate box 100 illegally disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the operating element 14315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the end on the engaging portion 316 side of the inclined surface 14315 a is disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. Thus, the operator's hand operating the operation element 14315 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315 a for the purpose of releasing the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320. As a result, an operator who tries to make the operator 14315 difficult to operate and illegally replaces the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300, Removal of the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300 can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 160 (a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the operation element 315 of the engagement member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (the back surface side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300, but The operating element 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is pivotally supported by the first piece 15311 of the engagement member 15310. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 160 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the fifteenth embodiment. The cross section in FIG. 160 (a) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 159 (b).

  As in the case of the rear case 300 according to the first embodiment, the rear case 15300 according to the fifteenth embodiment faces the bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and the front edge from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall 301. It has an outer wall portion 302 which is erected, and is formed in a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is opened by the respective wall portions 301 and 302. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

  The rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes an engaging member 15310 disposed on the front side (open side (box F direction side formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 15300). And a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) which is disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).

  As shown in FIG. 160 (a), the engagement member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 15311 and the first piece 1511 extend in a direction parallel to each other. A second piece 312 (see FIG. 41) and a third piece 313 connecting end portions of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312 (see FIG. See FIG. 41).

  In the first piece 15311, the end of one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41 (a), and is an engaging portion that protrudes to both outer sides in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. And 316 (see FIG. 41) and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) which is recessed in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first piece 15311 from substantially the middle position of the two engaging portions 316; An operation element 15315 inserted into the second opening 301 d of the rear case 300 and a bearing 15319 on which the operation element 15315 is pivotally supported are mainly provided.

  The bearing portion 15319 projects from the first piece 15311 on the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 is formed with a concave portion into which a cylindrical shaft member 15315 c in which a manipulation element 15315 described later is inserted in the gravity direction (arrow U-D direction) is inserted.

  The operating member 15315 is formed in a rod shape, and is provided with a through hole 15315 b penetrating in the direction of gravity at an end portion on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 15315 c inserted into the through hole 15315 b.

  Therefore, the operating member 15315 is held in a state in which it can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 15311 by inserting the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b into the recess of the bearing portion 15319. Further, the rotation shaft (shaft member 15315 c) of the operation element 15315 is disposed on the front side relative to the first piece 15311. Thus, the rightward (clockwise) rotation in the upper view of the operation element 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160 (a) can be restricted by abutting on the other end of the first piece 15311. It is possible to allow rotation in the left direction (counterclockwise).

  Therefore, when the operator operates the operating element 15315 in the direction (arrow L direction side) of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (the operating element 15315 in the state shown in FIG. When rotating clockwise, the force acting in the direction (the direction of arrow L) in which the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 is released can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to release the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operating element 15315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, a player who intends to illegally replace the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the operation element 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 160 (b), the engaging member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the sliding operation of the engagement member 310 is performed by the operating element 315 has been described, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the end portion of the first piece 16311 of the engagement member 16310 is operated. It takes place in The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 160 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. The cross section in FIG. 160 (b) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 160 (a). Further, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment is, as with the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, directed from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 substantially rectangular in a front view to the front from the outer edge It has an outer wall portion 302 which is erected, and is formed in a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is opened by the respective wall portions 301 and 302. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

  Furthermore, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes an engagement member 16310 disposed on the front side (open side (box F direction side formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 16300). And a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) which is disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main control device 110).

  As shown in FIG. 160 (b), the engagement member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-like outer shape in a front view, and the first piece 16311 and the first piece 16113 extend in directions parallel to each other. A second piece 312 (see FIG. 41) and a third piece 313 connecting end portions of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 See FIG. 41). In addition, the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment is slidable and displaceable by a finger inserted from the rear side to the second opening 301d formed in the rear case 300.

  In the first piece 16311, the end of one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected is the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41 and is formed as an engaging portion with 41) and protrudes to both outer sides in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 311 (see FIG. 41) and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) which is recessed from the substantially intermediate position of the two engaging portions 316 in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first piece 16311. Prepare.

  As shown in FIG. 160 (b), in the state in which the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side of the first piece 16311 (arrow L direction side) The end of the second opening 301d is disposed horizontally outward of the opening of the second opening 301d. Therefore, when the operator operates the engagement member 16310 in the direction (the arrow L direction) in which the engagement between the engagement member 16310 and the fixing member 320 is released, the insertion is performed from the second opening 301d of the back case 300. The finger can make it difficult to displace the engagement member 16310 in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 16310 and the fixing member 320 is released. As a result, a worker who attempts to replace the substrate box 100 disposed in the fixing member 320 improperly operates the engaging member 16310 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. Can be suppressed.

  Next, a rear case 17300 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the operating element 315 of the engagement member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301 d of the back case 300 has been described, but in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301 d of the back case 17300 The operator 315 protruding from the lower part is covered with a part of the back case at a predetermined position. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Fig. 161 (a) is a back view of the back case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and Fig. 161 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 17300 taken along line CLXIb-CLXIb in Fig. 161 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 161, the rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment has a bottom wall portion 17301 substantially rectangular in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected toward the front from outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301. And is formed into a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is opened by the respective wall portions 17301 and 302. In the bottom wall portion 17301, an opening 301a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible.

  Further, the rear case 17300 is provided with protruding portions 301 b protruding from two places on the front side in the bottom wall portion 17301, a first opening 301 c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. It has a second opening 301d that opens at the opposite position, and a covering portion 17301e that covers the back of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side).

  The covering portion 17301 e is erected from the end on the first opening 301 c side (arrow R direction side) of the second opening 301 d toward the back side (arrow B direction side). In addition, the covering portion 17301e includes a bending portion 17301e1 in which the front end portion of the standing portion is bent toward the inside of the opening of the second opening 301d in rear view. As a result, the covering portion 17301e is formed in a box shape having an opening on the side (arrow L direction) opposite to the first opening 301c (arrow R direction).

  Further, the standing distance of the covering portion 17301e (the distance between the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c and the front surface of the bending portion 17301e1) is set larger than the projecting dimension of the operating element 315 projecting from the bottom wall portion 17301c. . Further, in the covering portion 17301e, the dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the bent portion 17301e1 in the rear view is set larger than the dimension in the left-right direction of the operator 315 in the rear view.

  Thereby, in a state where the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), the operating element 315 is inside the covering member 17301e. Will be placed. Therefore, when the operator operates the engagement member 310 in the direction (the arrow L direction) in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released, the operator 315 grips the operation element 315 from the back side of the back case 17300 It can be difficult. Thereby, it is possible to suppress displacement of the engagement member 310 in the direction (arrow L direction) in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released. As a result, an operator (player) who tries to replace the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 illegally operates the engagement member 310 from the back side of the back case 17300 to back the fixing member 320. Removal from the case 17300 can be suppressed.

  Next, a back case 18300 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement member 310 is slidingly displaced in the linear direction (arrow L-R direction) has been described. However, the engagement member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment is the rear case 18300. It is rotationally displaced. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the configuration of the rear case 18300 and the operation of the engagement member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIGS. 162 (a) and 163 (a) are front views of the back case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 162 (b) and 163 (b) are back views of the back case 18300. In FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b), a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged is illustrated, and in FIGS. 163 (a) and 163 (b), the engaging member 18310 is shown. A state in which the engagement between the and the fixing member 18320 is released is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment is erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall 18301 substantially rectangular in a front view and the four sides of the bottom wall 18301. It has an outer wall portion 18302 and is formed into a box shape with one surface side (front side) opened by the respective wall portions 18301 and 18302. In addition, the rear case 18300 is disposed on the rear side of the rear case 18300 and an engagement member 18310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 18301). And a fixing member 18320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main controller 110).

  The bottom wall portion 18301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape in a front view at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 can be viewed through the opening 301a. It is assumed. The bottom wall 18301 is a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a projection that is located below the first opening 18301c (in the direction of the arrow D) and protrudes to the front side And 18301 b.

  The first opening 18301 c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of a fixing member 18320 described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 18332 in a front view. Thus, after the accessory device (rotation unit 700) is disposed inside the rear case 18300, the engagement portion of the fixing member 18320 may be disposed on the front side of the rear case 18300 from the rear side of the rear case 18300. it can.

  The protruding portion 18301 b is a member for pivotally supporting an engaging member 18310 described later, and is protrudingly provided in a cylindrical shape from the front of the bottom wall portion 18301 b. Further, a hole into which a screw is screwed is formed in a recessed manner on the protruding end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. Thus, by screwing the screw on the projecting portion 18301b in a state where the engaging member 18310 is disposed on the back surface case 18300, it is possible to restrict the engaging member 18310 from coming off the projecting portion 18301b.

  The outer wall portion 18302 includes an opening 18302a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) on the side surface on the right side (arrow R direction) in a front view. The opening 18302a is formed on a rotation trajectory of an engagement member 18310 described later. Thus, after the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the back case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be made to protrude to the outside of the back case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

  The fixing member 18320 is composed of an interposing member 18330 engaged with an engaging member 18310 described later, and a pivoting member 340 fastened to the interposing member 18330.

  The interposing member 18330 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, and is provided with a locking portion 18331 projecting from the other side (arrow L direction side) and a back case from one side (arrow R direction side) An engaged portion 18332 which protrudes to the 300 side and is formed in a frame shape, an insertion hole 333 (refer to FIG. 39B) opened in a circular shape in a box-like bottom surface (side surface on the arrow B direction side) And a protrusion 334 protruding from the main body.

  The locking portion 18331 is provided with an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and the opening has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 18301c described above. Is inserted into the bottom wall portion 18301 by the insertion of a protruding wall 18301c1 provided in a projecting manner.

  Thus, when the interposing member 18330 (fixing member 18320) is disposed on the back case 18300, the projecting wall 18301c1 is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposing member 18330, and the other side of the interposing member 18330 (arrow L The direction side can be locked to the back case 18300.

  The engaged portion 18332 is a portion engaged with the engagement member 18310, and the dimension of the projection toward the rear case 18300 (the arrow F direction side) exceeds the engagement member 18310 provided on the rear case 18300. The distance from the inner surface on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the space to be enclosed to the front of the bottom wall 18301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engaging member 18310 to the front of the bottom wall 18301 It is set. Thus, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are disposed at the overlapping position in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

  The engaging member 18310 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a front view, and is bent from one end of the second piece 18312 pivotally supported by the projecting portion 18301 b of the back case 18300 and one end of the second piece 18312 And the first piece 18311 formed.

  The second piece 18312 is provided with a shaft support hole 18312a circularly opened in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction) at an end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The shaft support hole 18312a is a hole into which the above-mentioned protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300 is inserted, and thereby, the engagement member 18310 can be disposed in a state of being axially supported inside the back case 18300.

  The first piece 18311 is extended in an arc around the axis of the above-mentioned axial support hole 18312a. Accordingly, when the engaging member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the support hole 18312a, the displacement area of the first piece 18311 can be minimized. The first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 projecting radially from the shaft support hole 18312a at the end opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and two engaging portions 316. And a recess 18317 recessed from the substantially middle position of the first piece 18311 in the extending direction of the first piece 18311.

  The external shape in front view is formed in substantially triangular shape in the two engaging parts 18316. Further, one engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316 is the first piece 18311 as it goes from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312. It is formed in the external shape which protrudes to the radial direction outer side of. The other engaging portion 18316 of the two engaging portions 18316 is the diameter of the first piece 18311 as it goes from the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 It is formed in the external shape which protrudes in the direction inside.

  The recess 18317 is formed by notching the first piece 18311 in the thickness direction, and from the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the side connected to the second piece 18312 in the extending direction of the first piece 18311 It is recessed toward the connection side with the second piece 18312 along the length. Thus, the end of the first piece 18311 is bifurcated. Thus, the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the side connected to the second piece 18312 is more easily elastically deformed than the side connected to the second piece 18312, and the engaging member 18310 is fixed to the fixing member 18320. It can be made easy to engage.

  Next, the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, the interposing member 18330 and the pivoting member 340 are fastened and combined with a screw inserted from the side of the interposing member 18330 before engaging with the engaging member 18310.

  In addition, as described above, the engaging member 18310 is disposed in a state of being axially supported by the projecting portion 18301b of the back case 18300, and a connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is the same as that of the back case 18300. It is arrange | positioned in the state protruded from the opening part 18302a.

  The center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the rear case 18300 is located closer to the opening 18302a than the projecting portion 18301b of the rear case 18300, and the gravity does not act when an external force is applied. Thus, a force is exerted on the engaging member 18310 so that the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is rotated in the direction in which it protrudes from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300. Thus, when the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engaging member 18310 is caused to protrude to the outside of the back case 18300 to engage the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320. It is possible to prevent the forgetting of a match.

  In the fastening member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 18320), a projecting wall 18301c1 protruding from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposing member 18330. The front side left side (arrow L direction direction side) of the fixing member 18320 is locked to the back case 18300. In this case, the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320 is inserted inside the first opening 18301 c, and the space enclosed by the engaged portion 18332 faces the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310. Are arranged at the

  Next, the worker who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 backs the engaging member 18310 (the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300. The engagement member 18310 is rotated about the projecting portion 18301 b by pushing the case 18300 inside (the arrow R1 direction side) (see FIG. 163).

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engagement member 18310 can be inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 18332. In this case, the separation dimension of the outer end portions of the two engaging portions 18316 is set larger than the opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged portion 18332 in the vertical direction, but the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed to the inside of the recess 18317 so that the separation dimension of the outer ends of the two engaging portions 18316 is The end of the first piece 18311 can be inserted into the inside of the engaged portion 18332 so as to be smaller than the opening dimension of the internal space of the engaging portion 18332 in the vertical direction.

  Further, since the connecting portion between the first and second pieces 18311 and 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted into the opening 18302a of the back case 18300, the engaging member 18310 is engaged in an engaged state. The joint member 18310 can be suppressed from being operated from the outside of the rear case 18300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 18310 from being illegally operated and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 being replaced with the incorrect substrate.

  Next, the release of the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163 (a), the first opening 18301c is substantially L-shaped in a front view, and the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. However, it is possible to operate from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 1300 via the first opening 18301 c.

  Therefore, the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engagement member 18310 is elastically deformed to the recess side of the recess 18317 with a dedicated tool or the like, whereby the engagement between the engagement portion 18316 of the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 The match is canceled. After disengaging the engagement member 18310 from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332 in a direction (arrow L direction) with the engagement released, the deformation of the engagement member 310 is released. The engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 can be released.

  It is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engagement member 18310 and the first opening 18301 c be formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person who removes the fixing member 18320 from the rear case 300 can not be inserted and insertion of a dedicated tool is enabled. As a result, only the worker having a dedicated tool can replace the substrate box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to suppress replacement of the substrate box 100 with an incorrect one.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164, the case where the engaging member 18310 is forgotten to be engaged with the fixing member 18320 will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG. 164 (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. In FIGS. 164 (a) and 164 (b), a state in which the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the engaged portion 18332 is illustrated. Moreover, in FIG. 164 (a) and FIG. 164 (b), the state which removed the upper one piece of the outer frame 11 formed in frame shape in a plain view is illustrated.

  As described above, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be protruded to the outside of the back case 18300 by gravity. In this case, the distance LR1 from the end of the engaging member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) of the game board 13 to the end of the right side (arrow R direction) of the back case 18300 (FIG. 164 (a) Is set to be larger than an inner left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164 (b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 in which the game board 13 is disposed. Thus, when the game board 13 is to be inserted inside the outer frame 11 when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged, the back side of the engaging member 18310 is in contact with the front of the outer frame 11 It can be connected. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged, the game board 13 is prevented from being disposed on the outer frame 11, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged. You can suppress the forgetfulness of

  Next, referring to FIGS. 165 and 166, the engaging member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being operated improperly, but in the nineteenth embodiment, the releasing direction of the engaging member 19310 is released. By restricting the rotation of the engaging member 18310 to prevent the engaging member 18310 from being illegally operated. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. Fig. 166 (a) is a front view of the back case 18300, and Fig. 166 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the one way 19350 taken along line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in Fig. 165.

  As shown in FIG. 165, the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed substantially L-shaped in a front view, and has a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis with respect to the back case 19300, and the second piece thereof. And a first piece 18311 that is formed by bending from one end of 19312.

  The second piece 19312 is provided with a fitting hole 19312 b circularly opening in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312 b is a hole into which a one way 19350 described later is fitted, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer ring 19351 of the one way 19350.

  The one way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on the outer peripheral surface, an outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outer side of the inner ring 19352, and a plurality of rings disposed between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352. When the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the outer ring 19351 (see FIG. 166 (b)), the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 becomes high, which becomes resistance When the inner ring is rotated in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 is lowered and the clutch is slipped to cut off the power transmission. The detailed description of the one way 19350 will be described later.

  In addition, an operator 19360 is inserted at the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operator 19360 includes an operation portion 19361 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the back case 19300 and an insertion portion 19362 projecting from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation portion 19361. Prepare mainly.

  The operating portion 19361 is a portion where the operator operates the operating element 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300, is formed in a circular shape, and the outer shape thereof is formed larger than an opening through which an insertion portion 19362 described later is inserted. . Accordingly, when the operator 19360 is disposed from the back side of the back case 19300, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 19361 from coming out to the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 19300.

  The insertion portion 19362 is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 19361, and is protruded on the front side (arrow F direction side). In addition, the insertion portion 19362 includes a projecting wall 19362a which is provided to radially protrude on the outer peripheral surface thereof.

  The projecting wall 19362a is an engagement portion that prevents the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 from idling with respect to the insertion portion 19362, and is inserted into a recess 19352a formed in the inner ring 19352. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the rotational force acting on the operation element 19360 from being not transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

  Furthermore, a concave portion recessed in a circular shape in a front view is formed on the protruding distal end surface of the insertion portion 19362, and a screw is screwed from the front side to the back side in the concave portion to provide a one way 19350. The operator 19360 can be connected to the.

  Next, the arrangement of the rear case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. The rear case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 to the front, and the respective wall portions 19301 and 302 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released by this. In addition, the rear case 19300 is disposed on the rear side of the rear case 19300 and an engagement member 19310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 19301). And a fixing member 18320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main controller 110).

  The bottom wall 19301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape in a front view at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 19301 can be viewed through the opening 301a. It is assumed. In the bottom wall portion 19301, a first opening 18301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 18320 and a position (arrow D direction) below the first opening 18301c are opened in the front-rear direction. And an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 19362 of the operating element 19360 described above is inserted.

  The engaging member 19310 described above arranges the engaging member 19310 in a state in which the one way 19350 is viewed inside the fitting hole 19312b on the front side of the bottom wall portion 10301 and then operates the operating element 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300. Is inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one way 19350 through the opening of the rear case 19300, and is disposed on the bottom wall 19301.

  Next, the operation of the one way 19350 will be described. As described above, the one way 19350 is switched between the case where transmission of power to the outer ring 19351 is permitted and the case where the transmission of the power to the outer ring 19351 is permitted in the rotational direction of the inner ring 19352 in one direction and the other direction.

  First, the case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring will be described. As shown in FIG. 166 (b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (the arrow LK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer ring 19351 The roller 19354 is sandwiched, and the contact of the roller 19354 acts as a resistance, whereby the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring 19351. In this case, the rotation direction in one direction is set to the direction in which the engagement member 19310 is engaged with the fixing member 18320.

  Next, the case where the power of the inner ring 19352 is shut off will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166 (b))), the roller 19354 is displaced radially inward of the inner ring 19352 by the resistance in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the outer ring 19351. As a result, the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354 decreases, and the roller 19354 slips against the outer ring 19351 to block power transmission. In this case, the rotational direction in the other direction is set to a direction in which the engagement member 19310 is disengaged from the fixing member 18320.

  Thus, with the engaging member 19310 disposed on the back case 19300, the operating element 19360 can be rotated to engage the engaging member 19310 with the fixing member 18320. Furthermore, it is restricted that the operation element 19360 is rotated from the state where the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged to release the engagement between the engaging member 19310 and the fixing member 18320. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 19310 (the operating element 19360) from being illegally operated and the substrate box 100 (the main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 being replaced with the incorrect substrate.

  Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 167 to 169, the engaging member 20310 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted into the back surface base 720 of the rotation unit 700. However, in the twentieth embodiment, the engagement member 20310 is the fixing member 320. When engaged, the movement of the engagement member 20310 is restricted by being engaged with the engagement portion 20724 a formed on the back surface base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 20310 and the rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 20300 and the rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 168 (a) is a front view of the engagement member 20310, and FIG. 168 (b) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310.

  The rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is, as with the rear case 300 in the first embodiment, directed from the outer edge of the bottom wall 301 substantially rectangular in a front view and the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 to the front It has an outer wall portion 302 which is erected, and is formed in a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is opened by the respective wall portions 301 and 302. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

  The rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment includes an engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 (open side formed in a box shape (direction of arrow F)), and the rear case 20300. And a fixing member 320 which is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main controller 110). Further, in the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, a rotation unit 20700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

  As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a crank shape in front view The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 extending in the direction parallel to each other, and the end portions of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are the first piece 311 and the second piece. And a third piece 313 connected in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the sheet 20312.

  The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are respectively formed with sliding grooves 314 having long holes extending in the direction in which the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 extend. Is slidable in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction).

  In addition, the second piece 20312 includes a recessed portion 20312 c that is recessed on the side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engagement member 20310. The recess 20312 c is a recess into which the tip of the engaging portion 20724 a of the back surface base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700 to be described later is inserted, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the engaging portion 20724 a.

  Describing in detail, the recess 20312c has an engagement member having a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168 (a)) from the end on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the second piece 20312 to the third piece 313 The inside of the sliding groove 314 of 20310 is set to be substantially the same as the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168 (b)) in which the projecting portion 301b can slide. In addition, the concave portion 20312 c is recessed in a triangular shape with a right angle in front view, and the portion at the right angle is set on the connection side (arrow R direction side) with the third piece 313 of the second piece 20312.

  The rotation unit 20700 is provided on the right side of the lower portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 (the rear base 20720 having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape disposed on the arrow R direction side) and the front of the rear base 20720 And a rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the side (the arrow F direction side), and an effect for rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via the light transmitting center frame 86 disposed on the game board 13 Can be made visible to the player.

  The back surface base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball support 710 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is disposed on the back surface of the ball support 710 and the decoration unit 750. In addition, the back base 20720 includes a standing wall 20724 which is erected from the back.

  The upright wall 20724 extends in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engagement member 20310 disposed in the rear case 20300. Further, the standing wall 20724 is formed at a position facing the recess 20312 c of the engaging member 20310, and includes an engaging portion 20724 a into which the tip is inserted inside the recess 20312 c.

  The engaging portion 20724 a protrudes from the upright wall 20724 in the direction (arrow R direction) in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, and stands in the direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed at a predetermined gap from the wall 20724. Accordingly, the rigidity of the engaging portion 20724a can be reduced, and the engaging portion 20724a can be easily elastically deformed. In addition, it is possible to secure an area in which the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed by the gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

  Further, the engaging portion 20724a is provided with a bent portion 20724a1 which is bent to the side of the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip end portion, and a front view shape of the bent portion 20724a1 is formed in a triangular shape substantially the same shape as the recessed portion 20312c Be done. Thereby, in the engaging member 20310, the bending portion 20724a1 is disposed inside the concave portion 20312c of the engaging member 20310 before the engagement with the fixing member 320. Therefore, the engaging member 20310 can be made difficult to slide in the displacement direction (the arrow L-R direction) (see FIG. 168 (b)).

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress movement of the engaging member 20310 in the engaging direction with the fixing member 320 (the direction of the arrow R) due to the vibration of the rear case 20300 due to vibration or vibration. Therefore, when the fixing member 320 is disposed on the rear case 20300 by displacing the position of the engaging member 20310 before the fixing member 320 is arranged on the rear case 20300, the engaged portion of the fixing member 320. Contact of the engagement member 332 with the engagement member 20310 can be suppressed. In other words, when the fixing member 320 is disposed in the rear case 20300, the engaging member 20310 is positioned in the displacement area when the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 167) of the fixing member 320 is disposed. Can be suppressed. As a result, since it is not necessary to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction for releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320, the workability at the time of engaging the engaging member 20310 with the fixing member 320 can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engagement member 20310 and the rotation unit 20700 in a state in which the engagement member 20310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged will be described. FIG. 169 (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310, and FIG. 169 (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. 169 (a) and 169 (b) show a state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged. Further, in FIG. 169 (b), the outline of a part of the engaging member 20310 and the standing wall 20724 is illustrated by a chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the operating member 315 is operated from the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the back case 20300, and the engagement member 20310 is on the left side (arrow L) in front view with respect to the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 20300. Is disposed on the inside of the recess 20312 c of the engaging member 20310 when it is displaced from the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 20300 to the right in the front view (the direction of the arrow R) from the state of The bent portion 20724a1 is pushed out to the recessed portion 20312c by the inclined surface of the recessed portion 20312c.

  Here, as described above, the concave portion 20312c has a distance SH1 (see FIG. 168A) to the end of the second piece 20312 on the side opposite to the third piece 313 and on the opposite side (arrow L direction). However, since the inside of the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310 is set to be substantially the same as the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168 (b)) in which the projecting portion 301b can slide, the engaging member 20310 is a fixing member 320. When the second piece 20312 of the engaging member 20310 is displaced to the position where it engages with the third piece 313, the end on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the third piece 313 is the bending portion 20724a1 and the engaging member It is arrange | positioned in the position adjacent to the displacement direction (arrow LR direction) of 20310. FIG. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the engaging member 20310 is improperly displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320 (the arrow L direction).

  As in the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 32010 of the engaging member 20310 by the engaging portion 316 being hooked (engaged) with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320. The displacement in the direction of releasing the engagement is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the back case 300, the engaged portion 332 and the engaging portion 316 are engaged via the first opening 301c. There was a risk of being released illegally.

  On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engaging member 20310 in the direction for releasing the engagement with the fixing member 320 is opposite to the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 20310 engaging with the fixing member 320. Since the end on the side can be abutted against the bent portion 20724a1 and restricted, an illegal thing is inserted from the first opening portion 301c, and the engagement between the end portion of the engagement member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a1 is released. Can be suppressed. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be unfairly released, and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with the incorrect substrate. .

  The fixing member 320 and the engagement member 20310 remove the rotation unit 20700 disposed on the inner side (bottom wall portion 301) of the back case 20300 from the back case 20300, and the end portion and the bent portion of the engagement member 20310 After releasing the engagement with 20724a1, the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed, and the end of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332. The engagement can be released.

  Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 20700 from the front side of the rear case 20300. Therefore, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is improperly released. Thus, it is possible to prevent the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an incorrect substrate.

  Further, as described above, since the engagement member 20310 is formed by bending the shape in a front view in a crank shape as described above, illegal objects such as a wire or a wire inserted from the first piece 311 side are linearly formed in a second shape. It can be regulated that the end of the piece 20312 is sent. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fraudulent object inserted from the first piece 311 side is accurately sent to the engagement portion between the second piece 20312 and the bending portion 20724a1. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be unfairly released, and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with the incorrect substrate. .

  Next, a rotating unit 21700 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. In the first embodiment, the case where the movement of the engagement member 310 is restricted by the screw inserted into the back surface base 720 of the rotation unit 700 has been described, but in the 21st embodiment, the back surface 21720 of the rotation unit 21700 is used. The movement of the engagement member 310 is restricted by inserting the first piece 311 into the formed insertion portion 21724 b. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, the overall configuration of the engagement member 310 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 300 and the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 171 (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310, and FIG. 171 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 21700 taken along line CLXXIb-CLXXIb of FIG. 171 (a).

  As in the case of the rear case 300 according to the first embodiment, the rear case 21300 according to the twenty-first embodiment faces the bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and the front edge from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301. It has an outer wall portion 302 which is erected, and is formed in a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is opened by the respective wall portions 301 and 302. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible.

  The rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment includes an engagement member 310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall 301 (the open side (box F direction side formed in a box shape)), and the rear case 21300. And a fixing member 320 which is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main controller 110). Further, in the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment, a rotation unit 21700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

  As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment is the right side (arrow R direction side) of the lower side (arrow D direction side) portion of the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. And the rotary body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the front side of the rear surface base 21720, and the light disposed on the game board 13 The player can visually recognize the effect of rotationally displacing the rotary body 800 through the transparent center frame 86.

  The back surface base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back surface of the ball support 710 and the back surface of the decoration unit 750, and is disposed on the back surface of the ball support 710 and the decoration unit 750. In addition, the rear base 21720 includes an upright wall 21724 erected on the rear surface.

  The upright wall 21724 extends in a shape surrounding the outer edge of the engagement member 310 in the state of being disposed in the rear case 300. Further, the standing wall 21724 is in a state where the engaging member 310 is positioned at the left end (arrow L direction side) end with respect to the back case 300 (a state where the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released) ), The insertion portion 21724b is provided so as to protrude toward the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 (in the direction of the arrow L).

  The insertion portion 21724 b extends from the erected wall 21724 in a direction parallel to the displacement direction (arrow L-R direction) of the engagement member 310, and in the state of being engaged with the fixing member 320 It is set to the dimension which overlaps in the gravity direction (arrow U-B direction). In addition, a bent portion 21724b1 which is bent toward the back surface side (the engagement member 310 side) is formed at the tip end of the insertion portion 21724b, and the bent tip end portion of the bent portion 21742b1 In the B direction, the length overlapping with the engaging member 310 is set.

  Furthermore, the width dimension in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the insertion portion 21742b is set to be smaller than the width dimension in the vertical direction of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310. Therefore, in the insertion portion 21724b, the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted into the inside of the recess 317 in a state where the engagement member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 into the inside of the recess 317 from the state where the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be unfairly released, and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with the incorrect substrate. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171 to FIG. 173, an operation of the insertion portion 21724b in the case of engaging the engagement member 310 with the fixing member 320 will be described. FIGS. 172 (a) and 173 (a) are rear views of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310. FIG. 172 (b) and 173 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotation unit 21700. In FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), a state in which the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released is illustrated, and in FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b), A state in which the coupling member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, when the engagement member 310 is disengaged from the fixing member 320, the end of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. When inserted into the inner space of the portion 332, the end of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317. Thereby, the width dimension in the up-and-down direction (arrow U-D direction) of crevice 317 is made smaller than the width dimension of the up-and-down direction of insertion part 21724b.

  Further, when the engaging portion 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged portion 332 (in the case shown in FIG. 173A), the end of the first piece 311 is the protruding tip of the inserting portion 21724b. It is placed over the position. In other words, the length dimension in the left-right direction of the engaging portion 316 is set to be larger than the opposing dimension from the protruding tip end of the inserting portion 21724b to the end portion of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

  Therefore, when the engaging portion 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, the end on the first piece 311 side of the engaging member 310 can be brought into contact with the bent portion 21724b1 of the insertion portion 21724b. . In this case, the tip of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out to the front side (arrow F direction side) along the inclined surface of the bending portion 21724b1. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging portion 316 is removed from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, as described above, the width dimension of the recess 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311 Also, since the width dimension in the vertical direction of the insertion portion 21724 b is increased, the bent portion 21724 b 1 is inserted inside the concave portion 317.

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the elastic deformation of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 inside the recess of the recess 317. As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be unfairly released, and the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) connected to the fixing member 320 can be prevented from being replaced with the incorrect substrate. .

  The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 remove the rotation unit 21700 disposed on the inner side (bottom wall portion 301) of the rear case 300 from the rear case 21300, and the end of the engaging member 310 and the rear case After releasing the engagement with 20300, the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is elastically deformed to draw the end of the engagement member 310 out of the internal space of the engaged portion 332. The engagement can be released.

  Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 21700 from the front side of the rear case 21300. Therefore, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is the rear case 21300. It can be suppressed that the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) which is unfairly released from the back side and connected to the fixing member 320 is replaced with the unfair substrate.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320. However, in the twenty-second embodiment, the engaging member 22310 is provided with a recess. The bent portion 22332a1 formed on the fixing member 22320 is engaged with the recessed portion 22311a. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The configurations of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 174 to FIG. 176 (a). FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. FIG. FIGS. 175A and 175B are front views of the back case 22300. FIG. FIG. 176 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 22300 taken along line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa in FIG. 175 (b). Note that FIG. 175 (a) shows the state before the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged, and FIG. 175 (b) shows the state where the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 174 to FIG. 176 (a), the rear case 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment is directed from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 301 substantially rectangular in a front view and the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 to the front. It has an erected outer wall portion 302, and is formed into a box shape whose one surface side is opened by the respective wall portions 301 and 302. In addition, the rear case 22300 is disposed on the rear side of the bottom wall 301 and an engagement member 22310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall 301). And a fixing member 22320 for fixing the substrate box 100 (main controller 110).

  The outer shape in a front view is formed in a crank shape, and the engaging member 22310 has a first piece 22311 and a second piece 312 extending in a direction parallel to each other, and the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312. And the third piece 313 connecting the end portions of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312.

  Further, in the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312, the sliding groove 314 having a long hole in the extending direction is respectively formed, whereby the engaging member 22310 can be formed by the first piece 22311 and the second piece. The piece 312 can slide in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction).

  The first piece 22311 has a recess 22311 a recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction) on the front side (arrow F direction) of the end opposite to the side where the third piece 313 is connected. .

  The concave portion 22311a is a portion into which the bending portion 22332a1 formed in the fixing member 22320 to be described later is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 with the fixing member 22320, and as described later, the first of the engaging member 22310 When the end of one side (the arrow R direction side) of the piece 22311 is accommodated in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the fixing member 22320, it is formed at a position facing the 22332a of the fixing member 22320.

  Further, the internal shape of the recess 22311a is such that the cross section is formed in a substantially right triangle, and the right angle portion is set on the end portion side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311 It forms as an inclined surface which becomes deep in the back side (arrow B direction) toward the end side of one piece 22311.

  The fixing member 22320 is composed of an interposing member 22330 which engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 22310, and a pivoting member 340 which is fastened to the back side of the interposing member 22330.

  The interposing member 22330 is formed in a box shape open on the front side (arrow F direction side), and has a locking portion 331 projecting on the side of one side (arrow R direction side), and the other side (arrow L direction side) An engaged portion 22332 which is formed in a frame shape by projecting from the side surface of the rear case 22300 to the bottom wall 301 side (rear side (arrow B direction side)) of the rear case 22300, and a box-like bottom surface (side surface on arrow B direction) Mainly includes an insertion hole 333 (refer to FIG. 39B) opening in a circular shape and a protrusion 334 protruding from the rear surface.

  The engaged portion 22332 is a portion into which the end of one side (the arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the enclosed internal space, and the inner edge shape is the first It is set to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the piece 22311. Further, in the insertion direction (arrow R direction side) from the one side on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the frame-shaped engaged portion 22332 to the engagement portion 22332 of the engaging member 22310 It has a protruding portion 22332a that protrudes.

  The protrusion 22332a includes a bent portion 22332a1 bent at the end of the tip in the front side (arrow F direction side), and the bent portion 22332a1 is inserted into the recess 22311a of the engaging member 22310 described above. The coupling member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged. That is, the bending portion 22332a1 is formed at a position facing the recess 22311a in the state where the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the engaged portion 22332.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 176A, the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 22300 with the engaging member 22310 interposed therebetween. Be done. Therefore, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall 301, an illegal member such as a wire or a wire from the first opening 301c Can be suppressed from improperly releasing the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

  Furthermore, since the first piece 22311 of the engagement member 22310 can be disposed between the bottom wall portion 301 and the engagement portion of the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, It is possible to suppress that a wire, a wire, or the like improperly inserted from the opening such as the one opening 301c reaches the engaging portion of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in a straight line. As a result, an unauthorized member (a wire, a wire or the like) is inserted from the opening of the bottom wall portion 301, and it is possible to suppress that the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is released improperly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is provided so as to protrude in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332. Therefore, the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. Thus, when an incorrect member such as a wire or a wire is inserted from the first opening 301c of the bottom wall 301, the insertion direction of the incorrect member reaching the engagement portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is set to It can be inclined with respect to the front of the bottom wall 301. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to transmit the force in the direction of releasing the engagement of the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 from the tip end of the incorrect member. As a result, an unauthorized member can be inserted from the first opening 301 c of the bottom wall 301, and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be prevented from being released improperly.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 176 (b), the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the protrusion 22332a for engaging the engagement member 22310 in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 is provided. The protrusion 23332 a protrudes in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the engaged portion 23332 of the engagement member 23310. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 176 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 176 (a). Further, as described above, the twenty-third embodiment is different from the twenty-second embodiment only in the engagement position with the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, so that the engagement between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 is performed. The other parts are the same as those of the twenty-second embodiment, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  The rear case 22300 in the twenty-third embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 23301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected toward the front from outer edges of four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301. The respective wall portions 23301 and 302 form a box having one side (front side) open. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a (see FIG. 5) in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

  The rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment includes an engagement member 23310 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 23301 (open side formed in a box shape (direction of arrow F)), and the rear case 23300. And a fixing member 23320 which is disposed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the substrate box 100 (main controller 110).

  As shown in FIG. 176 (b), in the twenty-third embodiment, as described above, the projecting direction of the projection 23332a which is projected from the engaged portion 23332 is the projection 22332a of the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 176 (a)). ) And a bending portion 23332a1 which is set in the opposite direction (direction of arrow L) and bent toward the back side (direction of arrow B) at the protruding tip of the protrusion 23332a.

  In the engaging member 23310, a rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of the bending portion 23332a1 is formed at a position facing the bending portion 23332a1. Thus, when the engaging member 23310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the bending portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the opening 23310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 It is engaged.

  In the bottom wall 23301 of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment, a third opening 23301 e is formed at a position facing the fixing member 23320. The third opening 23301 e allows the operator to release the engagement portion between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back surface side of the bottom wall portion 23301. As a result, the work of removing the fixing member 23320 from the rear case 23300 can be simplified.

  Next, a rear case 24300 according to a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. In the eighteenth embodiment, when the fixing member 18320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 18301, the case where the engagement between the fixing member 18320 and the engaging member 18310 is released is described, but in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the fixing member 24320 is Is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301, the insertion portion of the engagement member 24310 into the fixing member 24320 is cut. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the back case 24300 taken along line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177 (a). FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the back case 24300 taken along line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII in FIG. 177 (b).

  As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment is provided with a bottom wall portion 24301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front. The outer wall portion 302 is formed into a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is opened by the respective wall portions 24301 and 302. Also, the rear case 24300 is disposed on the rear side of the bottom wall portion 24301 and the engaging member 24310 disposed on the front side (open side (arrow F direction side formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 24301). And a fixing member 24320 which fixes the substrate box 100 (main controller 110).

  The bottom wall portion 24301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape in a front view at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible. In the bottom wall portion 24301, a first opening 24301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 24320 and a left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening 24301c are provided. And an opening (not shown) into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operation element 24360 described later is inserted.

  The engagement member 24310 mainly includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T-shape in a front view, and a first piece 24311 bent from an end of the second piece 24312 and extending in an arc shape. . The second piece 24312 is provided with a through hole 24312 d penetrating in the front-rear direction in a connection portion of two orthogonally extending parts, and the distance from the through hole 24312 d to the outside of the extended part of the second piece 24312 is Each is set to be approximately the same.

  The through hole 24312 d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operation element 24360 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. As a result, when the operating element 24360 is rotated, the engaging member 24310 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 24312 d.

  The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centering on the through hole 24312d, and protrudes from each end of the second piece 24312 in one rotation direction (left rotation in front view). In addition, each first piece 24311 has an engagement tip 24316 protruding to both ends in the radial direction centering on the axis of the through hole 24312d at the tip end of the protrusion, and the connection side with the second piece 24312 from the projection tip surface And a recessed portion 24317 recessed toward the bottom.

  The engaging portion 24316 is a portion to be engaged with a fixing member 24320 to be described later, and elastically deforms the projecting end portion (portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 by the recess 24317 to fix the fixing member 24320 It can be engaged with the engaged portion 24332 formed in A detailed description of the shapes of the engaging portion 24316 and the recess 24317 will be described later.

  The operating element 24360 is an operation member for transmitting an operation from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engagement member 24310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. And an operation part 24361 formed in a cylindrical shape, and an insertion part 24362 coaxially projecting with the operation part 24361. The operation portion 24361 is formed on the bottom wall portion 24301, and its outer diameter is set to a size larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. Accordingly, displacement of the entire operation element 24360 to the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301 can be suppressed.

  The insertion portion 24362 is a portion inserted into the through hole 24312 d of the engagement member 24310 as described above, whereby the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 can be transmitted to the engagement member 24310.

  The fixing member 24320 is composed of an interposing member 24330 which engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 24310, and a pivoting member 340 disposed on the back side of the interposing member 24330.

  The interposing member 24330 is formed in a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open. Further, the interposing member 24330 is provided with a housing portion 24335 which is formed in a box shape which protrudes from the front and is opened at the lower side (arrow D direction side). The housing portion 24335 is a portion into which the engagement portion (the tip end portion of the first piece 24311) of the engagement member 24310 is inserted, and the lower open portion thereof is the displacement of the first piece 24311 of the engagement member 24310 described above. It is arranged on the track. Accordingly, the end of the first piece 24311 of the engagement member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodation portion 24335 by rotating the engagement member 24310.

  In addition, the housing portion 24335 is formed such that the internal space thereof is larger than the engagement portion of one engagement member 24310. Accordingly, when the engaging member 24310 is cut as described later, the cut portion of the engaging member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodation portion 24335. In the present embodiment, the size of the internal space of the housing portion 24335 is set to approximately three times the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311), and the inside of the housing portion 24335 At least three or more engagement members 24310 can be accommodated in the space.

  As shown in FIG. 178, the housing portion 24335 is opened at the lower side, and the stepped portion 24335a is projected in a step shape in the opening portion, and the engaging member 24310 is housed inside the housing portion 24335 in the stepped portion 24335a. The engaging part 24316 of is engaged. Accordingly, when the engagement member 24310 is rotated, the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted into the inside of the accommodation portion 24335 and can be engaged with the engagement member 24310 and the fixing member 24320.

  Further, in this case, the recess depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recess 24317 is the distance from the end of the first piece 24311 in the state accommodated and engaged in the accommodation portion 24335 to the lower side end of the accommodation portion 24335 It is set smaller than the dimension SH4. Accordingly, the recess 24317 formed in the engaged first piece 24311 is accommodated inside the accommodation portion 24335. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the end of the first piece 24311 is elastically deformed and the engagement between the engagement member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 is released.

  Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the fixing member 24320 can be removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 by cutting the first piece 24311 protruding from the accommodation portion 24335 of the first piece 24311 inserted inside the accommodation portion 24335. it can.

  In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodation portion 24335 to the tip end portion of the first piece 24311 is set larger than the above-described distance dimension SH4. As a result, the cut portion of the first piece 24311 can be moved to the upper side of the accommodation portion 24335, and the other first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side (arrow F direction side) of the accommodation portion 24335 and the stepped portion 24335a Can be engaged.

  Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is determined based on the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of the engaging member 24310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335. be able to. As a result, when the fixing member 24320 is unfairly removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 and the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an incorrect substrate, the engaging member 24310 is obtained. The worker can recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been removed illegally by the number of remaining first pieces 24311 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335.

  Further, as described above, the engaging member 24310 has the second piece 24312 formed in a T-shape in a front view, and utilizes the region on the side where the first piece 24311 is not formed (upper side of the T). The engagement member 24310 can be rotated to insert the first piece 24311 into the fixed member 24320. In addition, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated using the cut area of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 can be used as the fixing member 24320. Can be inserted. Thus, the order of accommodation in the accommodation portion 24335 of the first piece 24311 can be determined. Therefore, the operator can visually recognize which position the uncut first piece 24311 is located to determine whether the fixing member 24320 is not released illegally, so the number of first pieces 24311 can be determined. It is possible to prevent a worker from overlooking a trace that has been tampered with, as compared to when the worker counts.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 is adhered to the main body 151 has been described, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is adhered to the front side of the base plate 60. Be done. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 179 (a) and 179 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 25013 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment. 179 (a) and 179 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in FIG. 179 (b), a state in which the general winning opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60 is illustrated.

  The game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 25013 is a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member in a front view, and the base plate 60 thereof. And a center frame 86 disposed in an opening formed in the The game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill, as well as rails 76 and 77, a general winning hole 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 25150 is disposed at the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning opening unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment has a main body 151 disposed along the front of the base plate 60 and A first erecting portion 152 erected at an end of the main body portion 151 and a second erecting portion erected from the front of the main body portion 141 and having one end connected to the first erecting portion 152 Main components 153 are a decorative member 25154 disposed on the back side of the main body 151, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) general winning openings 63 formed in the main body 151.

  The decorative member 25154 is formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material, and is decorated with a pattern or character (pattern) continuous with the decorative member 60c disposed on the front side of the base plate 60. In addition, the shape of the outer edge of the decorative member 25154 is formed slightly smaller than the shape of the inner edge of the recess 151 b formed in the main body 151.

  Further, the decorative member 25154 is provided with an adhesive tape 25154a adhered to the front surface of the base plate 60 (the decorative member 60c) at the end of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. Thus, the decorative member 25154 can be disposed by adhering to the base plate 60. Therefore, when arranging the decorative member 25154 to the base plate 60, the worker can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front of the base plate 60 while visually recognizing the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60. Therefore, the position of the decoration of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily aligned. As a result, the position of the decoration of the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is prevented from shifting, and the player is made the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. It is easy to make it visible.

  Furthermore, since the decorative member 25154 is directly attached to the front of the base plate 60 (the decorative member 60c), the front-rear direction of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is better than in the case where the front side of the main body 151 is decorated. The arrangement in (the direction of the arrow F-B) can be made closer. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in positional deviation of the decorations of the decorative members 25154 and 60c when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 25154 from an angle. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the decoration member 25154 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration.

  Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the recess dimension X1 of the recess 151b of the main body 151 is set smaller than the width dimension X2 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the decoration member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a. Be done. Thus, when the main body 151 is disposed from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154, the decorative member 25154 is prevented from contacting the front surface of the decorative member 25154 with the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the concave portion 151b. it can.

  Therefore, the back surface 151d forming the back surface of the main body 151 excluding the recess 151b can be brought into contact with the front of the base plate 60, and a gap is formed between the back surface 151d and the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress that dust or the like enters between the back surface portion 151 d and the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 60 c of the base plate 60 is less likely to be recognized visually.

  Next, a game board 26013 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, it is formed at the end of the main body 26151. The inclined surface 26151a is formed in an arc shape in cross section which bulges outward. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 180 (a) and 180 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 26013 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment. 180 (a) and 180 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. In FIG. 180 (a), the player visually recognizes the game board 26013 from a position higher than normal (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). The line of sight is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 180 (b), the player visually recognizes the game board 26013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximate middle position of the game board 26013 in the gravity direction). The line of sight is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  The game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 26013 is a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member in a front view, and the base plate 60 thereof. And a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in the opening portion formed in The game board 26013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill, as well as rails 76 and 77, a general winning hole 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the Further, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 26150 is disposed at the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the general winning opening unit 26150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment has a plate-like main portion 26151 along the front of the base plate 60 And a decoration member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 26151.

  The main body portion 26151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters and the like (pattern) of the decoration member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. Further, in the main body portion 26151, an end portion in a front view is inclined toward the back surface side, and an inclined surface 26151a bulging in a cross-sectional arc shape and a concave portion recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 26151 toward the front surface side 151b, and is mainly formed.

  In the inclined surface 26151a, the inclination angle θ1 of the virtual line IL1 connecting the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body portion 26151 and the end on the back side to the front of the base plate 60 is set smaller than 45 degrees. Be done. Thereby, the incident angle when light traveling in the horizontal direction of the main body portion 26151 enters the outside of the main body portion 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is larger than when the inclination angle θ1 is set larger than 45 degrees. . Therefore, when light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 from a position higher than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013, it is easy to visually recognize the connection portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c. Therefore, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 Can be easily viewed as a decoration. In the present embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 26151a is formed in a circular arc shape in cross section that bulges outward, the main portion 26151 is moved in the horizontal direction toward the center side (the lower side in FIG. 180) of the main portion 26151. The incident angle at the time when the light advancing to the light is incident from the inclined surface 26151a to the outside of the main body portion 26151 is increased. Therefore, as the light travels in the horizontal direction of the main body 26151 toward the center of the main body 26151 (downward in FIG. 180A), the incident angle when light enters the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Ru.

  Therefore, it is lower than the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180A) at which the player passes an intermediate position between the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body 26151 and the end on the back side via the inclined surface 26151a. When the decoration on the side is viewed, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the inside of the main body portion 26151 can be easily made close to the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the front of the base plate 60.

  Furthermore, the decoration member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b is a horizontal line HR1 whose end position passes an intermediate position between the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body portion 26151 and the end on the rear side. While being set below (refer to Drawing 180 (a)), it is set up by the back side of slope 26151a. As described above, when the player visually recognizes the decoration on the lower side of the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180 (a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body 26151 Can be easily brought close to a direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the front surface of the base plate 60.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180 (a), even when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than normal, the base plate 60 through the inclined surface 26151a. The decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 can be easily made visible to the player. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily made visible as one decoration.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 26150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 26013, the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a Since the incident angle when light traveling horizontally in the portion 26151 enters from the inclined surface 26151a to the outside of the main body 26151 approximates a right angle, it is possible to make it difficult to refract light emitted to the outside of the main body 26151. Therefore, it is suppressed that the direction of the line of sight of the player is bent when it passes through the inclined surface 26151a, and the positional deviation between the decoration member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is made. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily made visible as one decoration.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150. However, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the end of the main body 26151 is formed. An inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape in cross section which is recessed inside the main body 27151. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 181A and 181B are cross-sectional views of a game board 27013 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 181A, the player visually recognizes the game board 27013 from a position higher than normal (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). The line of sight is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the game board 27013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the gravity direction substantially middle position of the game board 27013). The line of sight is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  The game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 27013 is a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member in a front view, and the base plate 60 thereof. And a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in the opening portion formed in The game board 27013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill, as well as rails 76 and 77, a general winning hole 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a general winning opening unit 27150 is disposed at the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 181, the general winning opening unit 27150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment has a plate-like main body 27151 along the front of the base plate 60 And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 27151.

  The main body portion 27151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters and the like (pattern) of the decoration member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. Further, in the main body portion 27151, an end in a front view is inclined toward the back side, and an inclined surface 27151a having an arc-shaped cross section which is recessed toward the inner side of the main body portion 27151; And a concave portion 151b, which is recessed toward the lower side.

  In the inclined surface 27151a, the inclination angle θ2 of the imaginary line IL2 connecting the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body 27151 and the end on the back side to the front of the base plate 60 is set larger than 45 degrees Be done. Thus, the projection distance of the inclined surface 2751a to the outside can be reduced, and an increase in the outer shape of the main body portion 27151 can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 27151a is formed in a circular arc shape in cross section which is recessed inside the main body 27151, the player visually recognizes the decorative members 60c and 154 through the inclined surface 27151a. In such a case, the area where the decoration of each of the decorative members 60c and 154 can be viewed can be expanded by the concave shape through the inclined surface 27151a. That is, the light incident on the inclined surface 27151a from each of the decorative members 60c and 154 is refracted by the cross-sectional arc shape recessed toward the inside of the main body portion 27151 and condensed toward the player's viewpoint. Can. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the connection of the decorative members 60c and 154 by reducing the patterns and characters (patterns) visually recognized through the inclined surface 27151a. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the positional deviation of the decorative members 60c and 154, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Furthermore, the decoration member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b is a horizontal line HR2 whose end portion passes an intermediate position between the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body portion 27151 and the end on the back side. It is set to the upper side and is set to the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from a position higher than normal, the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154. The incident angle when light traveling horizontally in the main body portion 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion is incident from the inclined surface 26151 a to the outside of the main body portion 26151 is increased. Therefore, the light traveling horizontally in the main body portion 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decoration member 154 is easily refracted to the player's viewpoint side, so that the player can move from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013 When the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 is viewed from a high position, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c can be easily viewed from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position in the front-rear direction of the connection portion of the decorative members 154 and 60c. Therefore, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 Can be easily viewed as a decoration.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181 (b), when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 27150 and the base plate 60 from the normal height of the game board 27013, the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a makes the decoration The light traveling horizontally in the main body portion 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 is incident from the inclined surface 27151a to the outside of the main body portion 27151 at a right angle, so the light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 27151 Can make it difficult to refract Therefore, it is suppressed that the direction of the line of sight of the player is bent when it passes through the inclined surface 27151a, and the positional deviation between the decoration member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 is made. Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily viewed as a single decoration.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b recessed in the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 is parallel to the thickness direction of the main body 151 has been described. The inner surface of the end of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is inclined inward toward the recessed bottom surface 151b2. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 182 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a game board 28013 according to a twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 182 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 182 (a), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximate middle position in the gravity direction of game board 28013) is a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated.

  The game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 28013 is a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member in a front view, and the base plate 60 thereof. And a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in the opening portion formed in The game board 28013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill, as well as rails 76 and 77, a general winning hole 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 28150 is disposed at the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the general winning opening unit 28150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment has a plate-like main body 28151 along the front of the base plate 60. And a decoration member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 28151.

  The main body portion 28151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters and the like (pattern) of the decoration member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. Further, the main body portion 28151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 28151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 28151 toward the front surface side.

  As described above, the inner surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the recessed opening (from the arrow F direction to the arrow B) toward the end of the main body 28151. It is formed to be inclined toward the head. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 (see FIG. 182 (a)) of the inner surface 28151b3 in the cross section of the recess 28151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 is the inclination angle θ4 (FIG. 182) of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151. It is set smaller than (a).

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the inclined surface 28151a of the main body 28151, the player bends by passing through the main body 28151 and is visually recognized by the player. The decoration position of the virtual image can be made close to the decoration position of the real image when the decoration member 60c is visually recognized without the main body portion 28151. That is, the position of the decorative member 60c which is refracted and visually recognized by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body 28151 and the inner side surface 28151b3 of the recess can be positioned on the extension of the line of sight of the player. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the decoration member 60c via the main body 28151, it is possible to suppress the positional shift of the decoration caused by the refraction of light and to suppress the loss of the player's interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (b), the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the case where the inclination angle θ3 of the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 is set smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60 has been described. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner side surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 is set larger than the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 182 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a game board 29013 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 182 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 182 (b), the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximate middle position of the game board 29013 in the gravity direction) is a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated.

  In addition, the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is the same as the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 29013 has a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member in a front view, and the base plate 60 thereof. And a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in the opening portion formed in The game board 29013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill, as well as rails 76 and 77, a general winning hole 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 29150 is disposed at the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the general winning opening unit 29150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the gaming board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment has a plate-like main body portion 29151 along the front of the base plate 60. And a decoration member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 29151.

  The main body portion 29151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters and the like (pattern) of the decoration member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. In addition, the main body portion 29151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 29151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 29151 toward the front surface side.

  As described above, the inner side surface 29151b3 of the concave portion 29151b is outward from the concave bottom surface 151b2 side toward the concave opening side (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction side) to the end side of the main body portion 29151 It is formed to be inclined toward the head. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 (see FIG. 182 (b)) of the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 is the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (FIG. 182). It is set larger than (b).

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), when the player visually recognizes the decoration member 60c through the inclined surface 151a of the main body part 29151, the player through the inclination surface 151a from the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154. The light irradiated to the point of view can be light irradiated in a direction substantially orthogonal to the inclination of the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b. Therefore, when light is incident from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 to the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b, it is possible to suppress the light from being refracted. As a result, when light is incident on the inner side surface 29151b3 of the concave portion 29151b, the light is refracted, so that the connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be prevented from being viewed from the upper side in the gravity direction, and the decorative member 60c Also, the decorative member 154 can be easily viewed by the player as a single decoration.

  In addition, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner side surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decoration member 154, a dimensional error caused when the decoration member 154 is formed can be absorbed by the gap.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 183 (a), a general winning opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment described above, the inner surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b is formed to be inclined. However, in the thirtieth embodiment, the inner surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b bulges inside the recess 28151b and has a circular cross section. It is curved in an arc and formed. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the game board 30013 according to the thirtieth embodiment, like the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member in a front view, and a base plate 60 thereof. And a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in the opening portion formed in The game board 30013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill, as well as rails 76 and 77, a general winning hole 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, a general winning opening unit 30150 is disposed at the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  FIG. 183 (a) is a cross-sectional view of a general winning opening unit 30150 in the thirtieth embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Also, in FIG. 183A, the line of sight when the player visually recognizes the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the approximate middle position in the gravity direction of the game board 30013) is a two-dot chain line. It is illustrated by.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the general winning opening unit 30150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the gaming board 30013 in the thirtieth embodiment has a plate-like main portion 30151 along the front of the base plate 60. And a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body 30151.

  The main body 30151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters and the like (pattern) of the decoration member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. Further, the main body portion 30151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 30151b which is recessed toward the front surface side from the back surface of the main body portion 30151.

  The inner surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b is formed to be inclined toward the end of the main body 30151 outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening (from the arrow F direction side toward the arrow B direction). And bulge out in the form of a circular arc in cross section toward the inside of the recess 30151b. As a result, the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the recess 30151b can be easily directed in the direction (horizontal direction) orthogonal to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, when the decoration of the game board 30013 is viewed through the recess 30151b, the end of the decoration member 154 is prevented from being visually recognized, and the player is made the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154 as one decoration. It is easy to make it visible.

  Next, a general prize winning opening unit 31150 in the thirty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183 (b). In the first embodiment, although the case where the inclined surface 151a is formed as a surface having a linear cross section has been described, the inclined surface 31151a in the thirty-first embodiment includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 183 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a general winning opening unit 31150 in the thirty-first embodiment. Note that FIG. 183 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. Further, in the game board 31013 according to the thirty-first embodiment, like the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 31013 is a base plate 60 formed of a substantially rectangular plate member in a front view, and the base plate 60 thereof. And a center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) disposed in the opening portion formed in The game board 31013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill, as well as rails 76 and 77, a general winning hole 63, a first The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like (see FIG. 2) are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the Furthermore, in the thirty-first embodiment, a general winning opening unit 31150 is disposed at the opening of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the general winning opening unit 31150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 31013 in the thirty-first embodiment has a plate-like main portion 31151 along the front of the base plate 60. And a decoration member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 31151.

  The main body portion 31151 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the decoration of the pattern, characters and the like (pattern) of the decoration member 154 disposed on the back side can be viewed from the player side. Further, the main body portion 31151 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end is inclined toward the back surface side, and a concave portion 151b which is recessed toward the front surface side from the back surface of the main body portion 31151.

  The inclined surface 31151a includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 which are recessed in a direction orthogonal to the inclined direction. The plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged in parallel in the inclination direction of the inclined surface 31151a, and are extended along the end of the main portion 31151 in a front view. As a result, it is possible to irregularly reflect the light which is incident inside the main body portion 31151 and emitted from the end portion (inclined surface 31151 a) of the main body portion 31151. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the decoration visually recognized through the inclined surface 31151a in a blurred state.

  Here, since the end of the decoration member 154 disposed in the main body 31151 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decoration member 154 and the decoration of the decoration member 60c are It is possible for the player to visually recognize in a state where the connecting part of the is blurred. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of the decorative members, and to make it easy for the player to recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjusting means for changing the flow direction by adjusting the distance between facings>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, a special winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the facing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by sandwiching the shim member SI between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 As described above, in the thirty-second embodiment, the case where the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the fastening position of the screw will be described. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the configuration of the special winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment. FIG. 185 (a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185 (b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185 (c) is CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc of FIG. 185 (a). It is a sectional view of special winning device 32550 in the line.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special winning device 32550 in the thirty-second embodiment has a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side, and a first path member 32560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 32560. And a second path member 32570.

  The first path member 32560 is formed of a non-light transmitting material. Further, the first path member 32560 is formed in a plate shape and is provided on a front plate 32564 disposed on the front side of the game area, and protrudes from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the back side (base plate 60 side) And a first wall portion 32565.

  The front plate 32564 is a plate member serving as a front wall of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 32570 described later and facing the second path member 32570, and is made of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, it is possible to make the game ball that flows down the inside of the special winning device 33550 invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the game by suppressing the player from grasping the flow-down direction of the gaming ball inside the special winning device 33550.

  The first wall portion 32565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and is opposed to a through hole 32565c circularly penetrating in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and the first wall portion 32565 of 2. A plurality of side projections 32565d juxtaposed on the surface and projecting in a triangular shape in cross section, and standing on opposing sides of two second wall portions 32566 from both upper and lower ends of the first wall portion 32565 It mainly comprises the standing portion 32565e.

  The through hole 32565c is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed in each of the first wall portions 32565 at one place.

  The one side protrusion 32565d is a portion which is inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 described later, and positions the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, (B), and extends in the vertical direction (arrow U-D).

  The standing portion 32565e is a portion that covers the one side projection 32565d to make the one side projection 32565d invisible from the player, and is set larger than the projection distance of the one side projection 32565d. As a result, it is suppressed that the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is recognized by the player while suppressing the visual recognition of the position where the one side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging that the player is inconvenient and not playing the pachinko machine 10.

  The second path member 32570 includes a plate-like base plate 32571 facing the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 and the left and right (in the arrow L-R direction) end portions of the base plate 32571 of the first path member 32560 And a fourth wall 32573 protruding from the front plate 32564.

  The base plate 32571 is a member for forming a throwing path of the gaming ball in a gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564, and the base plate 32571 is in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the base plate 32571 in front view. The size is smaller than the front plate 32564. Thus, visual recognition of the base plate 32571 from the player side can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the facing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and judging that the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

  Further, the base plate 32571 is positioned below the fourth convex portion 32571 b and the fifth convex portion 32571 c protruding toward the first path member 32560 and the fourth convex portion 32571 b and the fifth convex portion 32571 c, and the front plate 32564 And a sixth convex portion 32571d provided so as to protrude on the side.

  The fourth convex portion 32571 b and the fifth convex portion 32571 c are projections for guiding the game balls flowing down the inside of the special winning device 32550, and the base from the lateral direction outer side (arrow L-R direction outer side) of the base plate 32571 It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side of the plate 32571. As a result, the game ball that collides with the fourth convex portion 32571 b or the fifth convex portion 32571 c by flowing down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 is made of the fourth convex portion 32571 b or the fifth convex portion 32571 c. It can be made easy to flow down in the inclination direction.

  The sixth convex portion 32571 d is formed on the lower side of the fourth convex portion 32571 b and the fifth convex portion 32571 c described above, and is formed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the base plate 32571. The sixth convex portion 32571 d is extended in the gravity direction. Thus, the game balls guided by the fourth convex portion 32571 b or the fifth convex portion 32571 c can be distributed to either the left or right of the sixth convex portion 32571 d while flowing down between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564. .

  The two opposing fourth wall portions 32573 are provided with a plurality of other side concave portions 32573c recessed inward in the opposing direction on the side surface on the outer side in the opposing direction, adjustment holes 32573b penetrating in the opposing direction, and two places. And a housing portion 32573d which is formed on the inner side in the opposite direction of the fourth wall portion 32573 and which surrounds the adjustment hole 32573b.

  The other-side concave portions 32573c are arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction) of the fourth wall portion 32573, and extend in the gravity direction. In addition, the other-side concave portion 32573c is formed to be recessed so as to have a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross-sectional shape thereof is set to be substantially the same as that of the one side protrusion 32565d. Thus, the first path member 32560 can be positioned by inserting the one side protrusion 32565d into the other side recess 32573c.

  The adjustment hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of a screw, which is inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above, is inserted to the accommodation portion 32573d side. In addition, the adjustment hole 32573b is formed in a long hole that is long in the front-rear direction (the arrow F-B direction), whereby movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is permitted.

  The housing portion 32573d is formed to have a U-shaped cross section in a front view, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. In addition, the housing portion 32573d is extended from the front surface of the base plate 32571 to the end portion on the front surface side of the fourth wall portion 32573. In this way, it is possible to accommodate in the space surrounded by the accommodation portion 32573 d a screwed plywood 32 590 in which a screw inserted through the through hole 32565 c and the adjustment hole 32 573 b is screwed.

  Screw plywood 32590 is set to a size that can be inserted into the space formed by housing portion 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-rear direction (the direction of arrow F-B) is the front-back direction size of the space formed by housing portion 32573d ( The projection dimension of the fourth wall 32573 to the front side is set smaller. Thus, the screwed plywood 32590 can be inserted into the inside of the housing portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the screw plywood 32590 includes a screw hole 32591 in which a screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b is screwed, and two holes from both ends of the screw hole 32591 in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). And a guide protrusion 32592 protruding toward the facing surface of the fourth wall portion 32573.

  Screwing holes 32591 are formed at two locations, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Further, the two screwing holes 32591 are formed at positions where the distance dimension of one screwing hole 32591 from the upper end and the distance dimension of the other screwing hole 32591 from the lower end are the same. Thereby, when the screw groove of either screwing hole 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened using the other screwing hole 32591 by vertically inverting the screw plywood 32590.

  The guide projections 32592 are provided with a predetermined amount of protrusion from both front and rear end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction, and include inclined surfaces that are inclined toward the screw hole 32591 side. Thereby, the tip of the screw which penetrated penetration hole 32565c and adjustment hole 32573b can be guided to screwing hole 32591. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the screwing hole 32591 is broken, the new screwing hole 32591 can be used by inverting the upper and lower sides. In this case, since the position of the screwing hole 32591 with respect to the tip of the screw is likely to be out of alignment, a configuration in which the tip of the screw is guided to the screwing hole 32591 as in the present embodiment is particularly effective.

  The adjustment method of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 32550 configured as described above is first inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and screwed into the screw plywood 32590. Loosen the screw that is mated. As a result, the movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is permitted.

  Next, by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, the one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 Is pulled out from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and at the adjusted position, the elastic deformation of the first wall portion 32655 is returned to insert the one side protrusion 32565d into the other side recess 32573c again. Thus, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) with respect to the second path member 32570.

  Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by retightening the screw inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and screwed to the screw plywood 32590. .

  According to this, as described above, since the one side protrusion 32565d and the other side recess 32573c are formed in the corresponding shape, by temporarily fastening the screw, the one side protrusion 32565d is formed on the other side. It can be pushed into the recess 32573c. Therefore, it can be made to adjust so that it may always be in the same position in each position which can insert one side projection 32565d into other side crevice 32573c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in the flow of gaming balls by the worker performing the adjustment, and the adjustment can be simplified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 186 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 32550 along line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb of FIG. 186 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. The distance between the left front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 is wider than that on the right. In this case, since the gaming ball flowing down between the facing of the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 hardly collides with the fourth convex portion 32571b on the left side, the gaming ball can easily flow down on the left facing side . As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the gaming balls flowing down between the facing of the front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 from the lower side on the left side.

  Next, the special winning device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirty-second embodiment, the case where the position of the second path member 32570 with respect to the second path member 32570 is adjusted in a state where the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 is elastically deformed has been described. In the embodiment, the first wall 33565 is variably connected to the front plate 32564. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Fig. 187 (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the thirty-third embodiment, and Fig. 187 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 33550. FIG. 187 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 187, the special winning device 33550 in the thirty-third embodiment has a first path member 33560 disposed on the front side and a second path member disposed on the back side of the first path member 33560. And 32570.

  The first path member 33560 includes a front plate 33564 formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion 33565 pivotally supported by left and right ends of the front plate 33564. .

  The front plate 32564 is a plate member serving as a front wall of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 32570 described later and facing the second path member 32570, and is made of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, it is possible to make the game ball that flows down the inside of the special winning device 33550 invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the flow direction of the gaming ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to suppress the player from stopping the game.

  The holding portion 33564 e is a member for holding a rod RD for pivotally supporting a first wall portion 33565 described later, and is set to such a size that the rod RD can be inserted into the annular inner portion. Further, the holding portions 33564 e are formed at two places separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the holding portions 33564 e is coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, of the two holding portions 33564e, the holding portion 33564e formed on the lower side is formed at the lower end portion of the front plate 33564, and the lower end side is closed. Thus, when the rod RD is inserted from the upper side of the holding portion 33564e to the inside of the holding portion 33564e, the rod RD can be prevented from dropping off (disengaging) from the lower end of the holding portion 33564e.

  The first wall portion 33565 is a portion connected (fastened) to the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c circularly penetrating in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and two first wall portions 32565. A plurality of side projections 32565d arranged in parallel on the opposite surface and projecting in a triangular shape in cross section, and two second wall sections 32566 from both ends of the first wall section 32565 in the upper and lower direction (arrow U-D direction) It mainly includes a standing portion 32565e standing on the opposite surface side, and a supported portion 33565f projecting in an annular shape in cross section on the front plate 33564 side.

  The axially supported portion 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD to be inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the annular inner portion is set to a size that allows insertion of the rod RD. . Further, the supported portions 33565f are formed at two positions separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axis of the annular portion of the supported portions 33565f is coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, a holding portion 33564e which is formed above the holding portions 33564e described above is disposed between the two supported portions 33565f.

  As a result, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 arranges the holding portion 33564e and the pivoted support portion 33565f coaxially, and from the upper side to the inside of the support portion 33564e and the pivoted support portion 33565f. By inserting the rod RD, the first wall portion 33565 is rotatably disposed on the front plate 33564.

  Thus, when the front plate 33564 of the first path member 33560 is disposed nonparallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. The angle of the first wall 33565 can be changed.

  That is, in the thirty-second embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is disposed nonparallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the first wall portion with respect to the front plate 32564 It is necessary to hold 33565 in an elastically deformed state. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564. It is necessary to pull out the one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c from the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, there is a possibility that the connecting portion between the front plate 32564 and the first wall 32565 may be broken.

  On the other hand, in the thirty-third embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated relative to the front plate 33564, there is no need to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall Damage to the connecting portion with the portion 33565 can be suppressed.

  The method of adjusting the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special winning device 33550 configured as described above is first inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and screwed into the screw plywood 32590. Loosen the screw that is mated. As a result, the movement of the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is permitted.

  Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564, the one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 33560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 is After pulling out from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted, and at the adjusted position, the rotation of the first wall portion 33565 is returned to insert the one side protrusion 32565d into the other side recess 32573c again. Accordingly, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

  Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by retightening the screw inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and screwed to the screw plywood 32590. .

  Next, the special winning device 34550 in the thirty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 188 to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the flow direction of the gaming balls is adjusted by adjusting the facing distance of the front and back plates of the special winning device 13550. However, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, it is located inside the flow path. By changing the position of the protrusion protruding toward the direction, the flowing direction of the gaming ball can be adjusted. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189, the entire configuration of the special winning device 34550 will be described. Fig. 188 (a) is a front view of a game board 34013 according to a thirty-fourth embodiment, and Fig. 188 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 34013 taken along line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb of Fig. 188 (a). FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

  As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special winning device 34550 in the thirty-fourth embodiment is disposed above the first winning opening 64 disposed in the game board 34013. In addition, the special winning device 34550 is arranged such that the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 disposed on the front side is colinear with the center line in the left-right direction of the first prize opening 64 in front view .

  Furthermore, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning opening 64 are disposed at positions where the diameter of the gaming ball is separated in the gravity direction (arrow U-D direction). This allows the player to visually recognize the game balls discharged from the special winning device 34550.

  The special winning device 34550 has a first path member 34560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second path member disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 34570 and a fastener 34553 screwed to the back of the second path member 34570.

  The first path member 34560 is a plate member serving as a front wall of the flow-down path of the gaming ball formed between the second path member 34570, which will be described later, and is made of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, it is possible to make the game ball that flows down the inside of the special winning device 34550 invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the game by suppressing the player from grasping the flowing direction of the gaming ball inside the special winning device 34550.

  Further, the first path member 34560 is formed in a plate shape, and a front plate 34564 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the game area, and a back side from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 (arrow And a first wall portion 34565 erected on the B direction side).

  The front plate 34564 is a plate member serving as a front wall of the flow-down path of the gaming ball formed between the second path member 32570 described later and facing the second path member 32570. The outer shape in front view is formed large. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the second path member 34570 disposed on the back surface side (the arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 with the front plate 34564. Therefore, visual recognition of the second path member 34570 from the player side can be suppressed. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, it can be suppressed that the change is recognized by the player.

  The first wall portion 34565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 34060 of the gaming board 13 and is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. As for the standing dimension of the first wall 34565 on the back side, the dimension X3 (see FIG. 188 (b)) between the facing of the front plate 34564 and the fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571 described later It is set to a value slightly larger than that.

  Further, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g which is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the standing end portion, and a through hole 34565g1 penetrating in the front and back direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. Ru. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060 by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 34565g1 to the base plate 34060.

  The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 facing the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 projecting from the back side of the base plate 34571 in a cylindrical shape.

  The base plate 34571 is a member for forming a throwing path of the gaming ball in a gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 34571 includes a fourth convex portion 34571 b that protrudes to the front plate 34564 side. Accordingly, it is possible to change the direction in which the gaming balls flowing down between the base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 collide with the fourth convex portion 34571 b and flow down.

  The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and is formed at a position where the cylindrical axis is coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (the center of the base plate 34571). Further, in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, a circular through hole 34060d is opened at a position corresponding to the support portion 34579, and the support portion 34579 is inserted inside the through hole 34060d. Thus, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

  In the support portion 34579, a fastening hole 34579a is recessed at the protruding tip end thereof. The fastening hole 34579a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and is internally threaded on the inner circumferential surface. Accordingly, the screw portion 34553b of the fixing tool 34553 which is inserted into the through hole 34060d from the back surface side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

  The fixing member 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the above-mentioned second path member 34570 to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and protrudes in the front side of the operation portion 34553a and the operation portion 34553a formed in a cylindrical shape. And a screw portion 34553b to be provided.

  The operation portion 34553a is a portion held by a worker who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and has an outer shape larger than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. In addition, the operating portion 34553 a is set to an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 34060 d of the base plate 34060.

  Thus, when the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060 by screwing the screw portion 34553b of the fastener 34553 into the fastening hole 34579a, the fastener 34553 of the base plate 34060 d through the through hole 34060 d. It is possible to suppress coming out to the front side.

  The screw portion 34553b is formed in a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operation portion 34553a, and is externally threaded on its outer peripheral surface. As described above, the screw portion 34553b is a portion screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. Thus, it is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

  According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550, the worker is formed on the base plate 34060 of the game board 13 1 Insert the hand (arm) from the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the game board 13 through the opening 60a (center frame 86) into the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the base plate 34060, and fix it 34553 Access the operation unit 34553a of

  Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570. As a result, the second path member 34570 is rotatable about the support portion 34579, and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570. When the position of the fourth convex portion 34571 b is changed, the position where the gaming ball flowing down the inside of the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571 b is changed, so the gaming ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 You can change the discharge position of.

  In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis thereof, so the second path member 34570 is rotated. In this case, a change in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 in front view can be suppressed. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player recognizes that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it can be suppressed that the player does not play a game judging to be disadvantageous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the discharge position of the gaming ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (the second path member 34570) is changed will be described. 190 (a) to 190 (d) are cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 34010 taken along line CXC-CXC in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth convex portion 34571 b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape in a front view. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), when the bent side of the V is disposed on the lower side, the game balls flowing from above the special winning device 34550 are sent to the central portion along the slope of the V It is easy to do. As a result, it is possible to easily make the game ball flow into the winning opening 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), when the bent side of the V is disposed on the upper side, the gaming balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are arranged along the slope of the V at both ends. It is easy to throw the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to flow into the winning opening 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (b), when the bent side of the V is disposed at either the left or right end, the gaming ball flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 The ball can be easily thrown along the upper slope of the V, and the gaming ball which is not hit to the upper side of the V but is thrown to the lower side of the V can be thrown along the lower slope of the V Can. Therefore, it is possible to change the direction in which the game ball is thrown by the difference in the area where the game ball collides with the upper side of the V character and the lower side of the V character.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, it is also possible to arrange the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIG. 190 (a) to FIG. 190 (d). For example, when the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees rightward in a front view from the position shown in FIG. 190 (a), the gaming balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are arranged along the V-shaped inclination. The game balls can be easily discharged from the position slightly offset to the left (arrow L direction side) from the upper side of the winning opening 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

  Next, the special winning device 35550 in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the thirty-fourth embodiment described above, the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b. However, in the thirty-fifth embodiment, the second path member 35570 is slid for the fourth convex. Change the position of the part 35571 b. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35550 in the thirty-fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 191 (a) is a front view of a game board 35013 according to a thirty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 191 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 35013 taken along line CXCIb-CXCIb in FIG. 191 (a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of special winning device 35550. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35550 in the thirty-fifth embodiment is arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the first winning opening 64 arranged on the game board 35013. In the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 in front view Are arranged in a shape.

  Furthermore, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning opening 64 are disposed at positions where the diameters of the gaming balls are separated in the gravity direction (arrow U-D direction). This allows the player to visually recognize the gaming balls discharged from the special winning device 35550.

  The special winning device 34550 has a first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second path member disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560 35570 and a fastener 34553 screwed to the back side of the second path member 35570.

  The first path member 35560 is a plate member serving as a front wall of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is made of a non-light transmitting material. As a result, it is possible to make the flow direction of the gaming balls inside the special winning device 35550 invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the game by suppressing the player from grasping the flow-down direction of the gaming ball inside the special winning device 35550.

  Further, the first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape and stands on the back side (arrow B direction side) from the front plate 34564 disposed on the front side of the game area and the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 And a first wall 35565 to be provided.

  The front plate 35564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the second path member 35570 described later and the second path member described later The outer shape in front view is formed larger than the base plate 35571 of 35570. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the second path member 35570 disposed on the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560 with the front plate 35564. Therefore, visual recognition of the second path member 35570 from the player side can be suppressed. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, it can be suppressed that the change is recognized by the player.

  The first wall 35565 is a portion to be fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the standing dimension of the first wall 34565 formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section with the front plate 35564 The dimension X4 (see FIG. 191 (b)) between facing the fourth convex portion 35571b of the base plate 35571 described later is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  Further, the first wall 35565 has a bent portion 35565g bent from the standing front end portion in a direction parallel to the front of the base plate 60, and penetrates in the back and forth direction (arrow F-B direction) in the bent portion 35565g. A through hole 35565g1 and a recessed portion 35565g2 recessed from the rear surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (arrow F direction) are formed.

  The through hole 35565g1 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 35565g1 to the base plate 60.

  The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion that accommodates the left and right (arrow L-R direction side) ends of the base plate 35571 of the second path member 35570 described later, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565g. , It is provided in the up-and-down direction central part of bent part 35565g. Thus, when both left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are accommodated inside the recessed portion 35565g2, both left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portions 35365g. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player recognizes the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it can be suppressed that the player does not play a game judging to be disadvantageous.

  Further, the recess dimension of the recess portion 35565g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the thickness of the base plate 35571, and the separation distance X5 (see FIG. 191 (b)) of the left and right ends of the bending portion 35565g is The width dimension of the base plate 35571 is set to be larger than the width dimension X6 (see FIG. 191 (b)) in the left-right direction. Thus, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. The method of displacing the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) will be described later.

  The second path member 35570 is provided in a rectangular shape in a back view from a plate-like base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560 and the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571 And a supporting portion 35579.

  The base plate 35571 is a member for forming a throwing path of the gaming ball in a gap between the first path member 35560 facing the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position separated from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined amount. Further, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571 b that protrudes to the front plate 35564 side (arrow F direction side). Accordingly, it is possible to change the direction in which the gaming ball flowing down between the base plate 35571 and the front plate 35564 is made to collide with the fourth convex portion 35571 b.

  The support portion 35579 is a portion for pivotally supporting the second path member 35570, and a cylindrical shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (the center of the base plate 34571). In the base plate 60 of the game board 34013, a sliding hole 35060e having a long hole shape long in the left-right direction is opened at a position corresponding to the supporting portion 35579, and the supporting portion 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. Ru. Thus, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

  The slide hole 35060e has a width dimension in the short direction (arrow U-D direction) set to a dimension substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the support portion 35579. The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) is set larger than the dimension in the direction (arrow L-R direction). Thus, the support portion 35579 inserted inside the slide hole 35060e can slide in the longitudinal direction of the slide hole 35060e.

  Further, in the support portion 35579, a fastening hole 35579a is recessed at the tip end of the protrusion. The fastening hole 35579a can be internally screwed to the inner peripheral surface, and the screw portion 34553b of the fixing tool 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. The protruding dimension of the support portion 34579 is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the second path member 35570 is formed by screwing the screw portion 34553b of the fixing tool 34553 into the fastening hole 35579a. It can be fixed to the plate 60.

  According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the discharge position of the gaming ball discharged from the special winning device 35550, the worker is formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 35013. 1 Insert the hand (arm) from the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the game board 35013 into the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60 through the opening 60a (center frame 86), and fix it 34553 Access the operation unit 34553a of

  Next, the operation portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 35579a of the second path member 35570. As a result, the second path member 35570 is made slideable in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slidingly displaced to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570. When the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, the position where the gaming ball flowing down the inside of the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b is changed, so the gaming ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 You can change the discharge position of.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the discharge position of the gaming ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. 193 (a) to 193 (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 35013 along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191 (b). In FIGS. 193 (a) to 193 (c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193 (b) is the reference position, and in FIG. 193 (a), the second path member 35570 is frontal from the reference position. A state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced to the left side is illustrated, and in FIG. 193 (c), a state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced to the right side in the front view (arrow R direction) from the reference position.

  As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571 b has a substantially V-shaped projecting shape in a front view, and the gaming ball flowing from above the special winning device 35550 is centered along the slope of the V It is guided to a part (V-shaped bending part).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is disposed above the first winning opening 64, it is discharged from below the special winning device 35550. Can easily flow into the first winning opening 64.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193 (b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b Since the bent portion of the character is arranged at a position shifted to the left or right from the upper part of the first winning opening 64, the lower part of the special winning device 35550 is compared with the case where the second path member 35570 is arranged at the reference position. It is made difficult for the game ball discharged from to flow into the first winning opening 64.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and the back side of the base plate 60 In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is the back of the base plate 60 by the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551 in the 36th embodiment. It is energized toward the side. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 194 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board 36013 in the thirty-sixth embodiment, and FIG. 194 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 36013. FIG. 194 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the special winning device 36550 in the thirty-sixth embodiment is a first unit disposed on the base plate 60 by being slide-displaced from the inside of the first opening 60a in which the center frame 86 is disposed. It is formed from 36551.

  The first unit 36551 has a space in which the game ball can be thrown, and the space is disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball which flows down the front of base plate 60 can be made to flow into the inside of the 1st unit 36551. In addition, the first unit 36551 includes a fastening portion 36551 b protruding from the side surface (back surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

  The fastening portion 36551 b is a portion through which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted, and is protruded toward the back side (arrow B direction side) and parallel to the back side of the base plate 60. The projecting tip is bent in the direction.

  In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges to the front side (arrow F direction side) on the side surface on the bending side, and a plate thickness direction toward the bending tip side (arrow F-B) than the bulging portion 36551b2 And a through hole 36551 b 1 penetrating in the direction).

  In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front of the bent portion in a state where the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194 (b)) Is set larger than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60. In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (FIG. 194) from the base end (the back surface of the first unit 36551) to the bulging tip position of the bulging portion 36551b2 when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60. (B) is set equal to or slightly smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

  When the screw is fastened to the through hole 36551 b 1, the bulging portion 36551 b 2 presses (biases) the force with which the screw is fastened to the back side (the arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. , And is formed between the proximal end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

  Thus, when the screw through which the fastening portion 36551 b is inserted is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulged portion 36551 b 2 abuts on the back surface of the base plate 60 to divide the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60. The force for pushing the bent tip side toward the base plate 60 by the screw can be converted into a pulling force for pulling out the base end side of the bent portion to the back side (arrow B direction side). Thus, the formation of a gap between the rear surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

  As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw into which the first unit 36551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 36551 can be easily formed large by the fastening margin. Further, in the thirty-sixth embodiment, since the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened, the first unit 36551 is slidingly displaced to form the base plate 60. The first opening 60a can be easily attached.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the special winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 and the back side of the base plate 60 In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened by a screw that is inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, and the back side of the base plate 60 is It is held in a state of being biased toward the side. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 195 (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board 37013 in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 37013. 195 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 195, the special winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed of a first unit 37551 disposed in front of the base plate 60.

  The first unit 37551 has a space in which the game ball can be thrown, and the space is disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60. Thus, the gaming balls flowing down the front of the base plate 60 can flow into the inside of the first unit 37551. In addition, the first unit 37551 includes a plurality of annular convex portions 37551 b that are annularly provided on the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

  The annular convex portion 37551 b is a portion to which a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and is internally threaded on the inner circumferential surface. In the present embodiment, four annular convex portions 37551 b are formed on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

  In addition, in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551 b, a concave portion 37060 d which is recessed in a circular shape is formed. The concave portion 37060 d is a portion into which the annular convex portion 37551 b is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the annular convex portion 37551 b. Further, the recess depth of the recess 37060 d is set larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular convex portion 37551 b.

  Further, a through hole 37060 d 1 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 37060 d in a circular shape coaxial with the recess 37060. The through hole 37060d1 is a hole through which a tip of a screw to be screwed to the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and is formed in an opening having an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the concave portion 37060d. Thus, the screw can be fastened to the first unit 37551 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base plate 60 from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 60.

  In this case, as described above, since the recess depth of the recess 37060d is set larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular convex portion 37551b, by screwing the screw to the annular convex portion 37551b, the annular ring is formed. The first unit 37551 can be disposed on the base plate 60 in a state where the convex portion 37551 b (first unit 37551) is biased to the back side (arrow B direction side). Thus, the formation of a gap between the rear surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

  As a result, it is not necessary to fasten the screw into which the first unit 37551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 can be easily formed larger by the fastening margin. Further, in the thirty-seventh embodiment, since the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060 d of the base plate 60, a space for throwing game balls formed in the first unit 37551 can be used accordingly. It can be enlarged.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side by the game ball>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment described above, the light emitted from the control board 491 forms a shadow on the position of the gaming ball housed in the lower displacement member 11440 and recognizes the position of the gaming ball on the position of the shadow. However, the lower displacement member 11440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment causes the light emitted from the control substrate 491 to be reflected by the outer surface of the gaming ball, and causes the position of the gaming ball to be recognized at a position where the light amount is increased. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacing member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment. 197 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, FIG. 197 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb in FIG. 197 (a), and FIG. 197 (c) FIG. 197 is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc in FIG. 197 (a). In addition, in FIG. 197 (a), while the state by which the front side decoration member 38451 and the front case 38481 were removed is illustrated, LED38483b arrange | positioned by front case 38481 is illustrated by the dashed-two dotted line. Moreover, in FIG. 197 (b) and FIG. 197 (c), the state to which the front side decoration part 451 was attached is shown in figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment has a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and a front-rear direction of the base member 470 (arrow F-B Direction) A case member 38480 covering both sides, a transmission mechanism 460 disposed displaceably between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decoration member 11450 formed in a mode covering the front and back of the case member 38480 Mainly to be formed.

  The case member 38480 is a member covering both sides in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) of the base member 470, and a front case 38481 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction) of the base member 470; And a rear case 482 disposed on the side (arrow B direction side).

  The front case 38481 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view. The front case 38481 is formed so as to project at an opening 481a extending in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) and a lower end surface on the back side (arrow B direction). A bottom wall portion 481b, an axial hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end, and an LED substrate 38483 disposed on the back side are mainly included.

  The LED substrate 38483 is a member that causes the inside of the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481) to emit light, and is disposed on the main body portion 38483a formed in a plate shape and the main body portion 38483a and emits a plurality of light. And an LED 38483 b.

  The main body portion 38483a is a base on which a wire for passing electricity through the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and is extended in the displacement direction (arrow L-R direction) of the ball receiving portion 467. The plurality of LEDs 38483b are disposed at predetermined intervals in the extending direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body portion 38483a.

  Further, each LED 38483 b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes the back side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483 b. As a result, when the gaming ball is positioned on the back side of each LED 38483 b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the gaming ball and can be irradiated to the front side decoration portion 11451. Therefore, as described above, since the front side decoration portion 11451 is provided with the transmission portion 11451b capable of transmitting light, the light which is reflected by the outer surface of the game ball and is irradiated to the front side decoration portion 11451 is transmitted through the transmission portion 11451b. The light can be emitted to the player side (arrow F direction side) via this. Therefore, the amount of light of the light reflected from the player side through the light transmitting portion 11451b can be increased in the portion reflected by the game ball more than the other portions. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the position of the gaming ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 38440 by increasing (changing) the amount of light.

  In the present embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 3848b are disposed is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thereby, even when the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced, at least a part of the gaming ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 3848b. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 can be constantly irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483 b.

  Further, according to the thirty-eighth embodiment, it is preferable that the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the back case 482 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) than the LED 3848b have a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member constitutes a black color scheme. According to this, it is possible to suppress that the light emitted from the LED 38483b is reflected inside the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b of the front side decoration portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front on which the game balls are arranged and the other front, and the player recognizes the position of the game balls received inside the lower displacement member 39440. It can be made easy.

  Next, the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the thirty-eighth embodiment, the case where the player recognizes the position where the gaming ball is disposed by reflecting light by the gaming ball has been described, but in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the ball reception portion 39467 is disposed. The light is reflected by the reflecting member to recognize the position of the gaming ball. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in a thirty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIGS. 199 (b) and 199 (c) are cross-sectional views of the lower displacement member 39440. 199 (b) and 199 (c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 198 (c).

  As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46) and a case member 38480 covering the front and back of the base member 470. A transmission mechanism 39460 disposed displaceably between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decoration member 11450 disposed in a manner covering the front and back of the case member 38480.

  The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and has transmission gears 461, 462 and 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, a transmission gear 463 and a gear engagement. The movable rack 464 is disposed rotatably on the movable rack 464, and has a meshed engagement with the rack gear 476. A transmission gear 465 and a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 are disposed on the front side of the movable rack 464 so that the front surface of the movable rack 464 is slidably displaceable, and the rack 39466 is rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 39466 And a ball receiving portion 39467.

  The rack 39466 is formed of a rod-shaped body having a rectangular shape in a front view rectangular shape, and a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b projecting cylindrically from the end on the other end side, and a front side It is mainly provided with two sliding plates 466c and a recessed portion 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

  The shaft portion 39466 b is a protrusion inserted into a shaft hole 467 b of a ball receiving portion 39467 to be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467 b. Thereby, the ball | bowl receiving part 467 can be rotatably hold | maintained.

  The ball receiving portion 39467 is connected to the first piece 39467c which is bent in a substantially L shape in a front view, the second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and the second piece 39467d and And a third piece 39467e disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the one piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

  The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are portions for holding the game balls thrown from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57) to the inside of the lower displacement member 39440, and between the opposing sides of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. When the game ball is thrown, the second piece 39467d is displaced relative to the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are arranged in a U shape in front view Can hold the gaming ball in the inner part of the U-shape.

  The first piece 39467c includes a receiving piece 39467c4 forming one extending side formed in an L shape in front view, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, a receiving piece 39467c4 and a leg portion 467a An annular bending portion 39467c5 in which an axial hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bending portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 projecting on the opposite side across the bending portion 39467c5 And.

  The receiving piece 39467c4 is a portion forming the side of the other side (arrow R direction side) formed in a U-shape in a front view by the one piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front, It is formed in the curve shape which becomes concave in the direction estranged from the 2nd piece 39467d.

  The connecting portion 39467c1 is provided so as to protrude from two places at predetermined intervals in the axial direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) of the bending portion 39467c5. The connecting portion 39467c1 is a portion for connecting a second piece 39467d and a third piece 39467e described later, and is extended along the axial direction of the axial hole 467b and has a connecting hole 39467c2 opened in a circular shape in cross section. Prepare.

  The connection hole 39467c2 is an opening into which a shaft portion 39467e3 protruding from a third piece 39467e described later is inserted. In the connection hole 39467c2, a shaft portion 39467e3 inserted through an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d described later is inserted from the front side (arrow F direction side). In addition, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened by a screw that is inserted from the side (arrow B direction side) opposite to the insertion side of the connection hole 39467c2. Thus, the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to the first piece 39467c.

  In addition, the first piece 39467c is provided with a recess 39467c3 that is recessed toward the lower side in the direction of gravity (the direction of the arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connection portion 39467c1. The concave bottom surface of the concave portion 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowermost portion) of the side surfaces on which the gaming balls are held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. Thereby, the gaming ball held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d is rolled to the inside of the recess 39467c3. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be easily displaced relative to the first piece 39467c by the load of the game ball.

  The second piece 39467d is a portion forming the side of the other side (arrow L direction side) formed in a U-shape in a front view by the receiving portion 39467c4 and the second piece 39467d of the first piece 39467c, and a crescent in a front view And a curved shape that is concave in a direction away from the first piece 39467c. In addition, the second piece 39467d is a circle from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side) from the insertion hole 39467d3 opened in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the connection portion of the first piece 39467c. And a recessed portion 39467d2 that is recessed in the shape.

  In the second piece 39467d, the shaft portion 39467e3 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3, and the connection shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e is inserted in the recessed portion 39467d2. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is also rotationally displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c.

  Furthermore, the second piece 39467d is disposed between the facing portions of the connecting portions 39467c1 protruding from the two places of the first piece 39467c, and is connected to the first piece 39467c. Accordingly, when the second piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, the second piece 39467d can be made to abut on the side surface on the opposite side of the connecting portion 39467c1 to suppress the shaft portion 39467e3 from being broken.

  The recessed portion 39467 d 2 is a hole into which a connection shaft 39467 e 4 of a third piece 39467 e described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connection shaft 39467 e 4.

  The third piece 39467e is a reflecting plate 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in a front view, a shaft portion 39467e3 protruding from the reflecting plate 39467e1 toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and a connecting shaft 39467e4 And.

  The reflecting plate 39467e1 is formed of a resin material and is coated with a plating on the outer surface. Thereby, when the light radiate | emitted from LED38483b is irradiated to the reflecting plate 39467e1, light can be reflected by the outer surface. In addition, the whole of the reflection plate 39467e1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, when the light irradiated from the front side is reflected, the light can be condensed to a predetermined part. The shielding of the light of the light emitter 11491a by the reflecting plate 39467e1 will be described later.

  The shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d as described above. Further, in the protruding end surface of the shaft portion 39467e3, there is formed a hole in which a screw to be inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 from the opposite side to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3 can be screwed. Therefore, the first end 39467c, the second end 39467d, and the third end 39467e are connected by fastening a screw to the insertion end surface of the axial portion 39467e3 while the axial portion 39467e3 is inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3. And the third piece 39467e can be made rotatable relative to the first piece 39467c.

  The connecting shaft 39467 e 4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467 d 2 of the second piece 39467 d as described above. Accordingly, when the second piece 39467d is rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 39467e3 with respect to the first piece 39467c, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467 e can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467 d.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, in the ball receiving portion 39467, when the game ball is received between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d, the received game ball is the first piece 39467c and the second piece. The receiving surface (the inner side surface formed in a front view U-shape) of 39467d is rolled and guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowermost end of the receiving surface. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be rotated on the outer surface of the gaming ball in a direction away from the first piece 39467c about the shaft portion 39467e3. As a result, the third piece 39467 e that moves with the displacement of the second piece 39467 d can be displaced upward and disposed on the light of the LED 3848 b.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 of the third piece 39467e to the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the lower displacement member 39440 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased to allow the player to recognize the position of the gaming ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 39440.

  In the second piece 39467d, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e always acts. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467 e is set to the opposite side across the shaft portion 394673 e from the connecting portion with the second piece 39567 d and the third piece 39567 e. Thus, in a state where no force other than gravity acts on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467de, the second piece 39467e can be rotated toward the first piece 39467c4 by the load of the third piece 39467e. .

  Therefore, when the gaming ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the second piece 39467d can be displaced toward the ball receiving portion 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c by the load of the third piece 39467e. Therefore, only when the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 39467, it is possible to partially increase the amount of light reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b. As a result, it is possible to suppress that light is reflected by the reflection plate 39467e1 by the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 or the like.

  Further, similarly to the ball receiving portion 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated about the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of sliding the inside of the lower displacing member 39440, and the emission of the lower displacing member 39440 is The game ball received from the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

  Here, as a structure for discharging the gaming balls received by the ball receiving portion 39467, in the structure in which the ball receiving portion 39467 is rotated around the axial hole 467b in accordance with the slide movement of the ball receiving portion 39467, the ball receiving portion 39467 The rotation speed of the ball receiving portion 39467 around the shaft hole 467 b is changed by the sliding speed of Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the slide speed of the ball receiving portion 39467, there is a problem that the discharge speed of the gaming balls from the ball receiving portion 39467 is not stable.

  On the other hand, in the thirty-ninth embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 39467d is rotated by the load of the third piece 39467e, and the rotational direction of the ball receiving portion 39467 whose axis is the axial hole 467b when emitting the game ball Since they are set in substantially the same direction, it is possible to apply a driving force when the second piece 39467d is displaced to the gaming ball emitted from the emission opening 471. Therefore, even if the force exerted on the gaming ball from the ball receiving portion 39467 at the time of discharging the gaming ball from the emission opening 471 by displacing the ball receiving portion 39467 is reduced, the speed of the emitted gaming ball can be maintained. it can. As a result, the discharge speed of the gaming balls emitted from the ball receiving portion 39467 can be stabilized.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, when the game ball is clogged in the curved portion 581a of the main route SK1, the problem is notified. However, in the 40th embodiment, the game ball other than the specified size is the main route When passing SK1, it is possible to notify of fraud. In addition, about the part same as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 200 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 taken along line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200 (a). is there. The cross-sectional view of FIG. 200 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a back side of the first path member 560 (arrow B It is mainly provided with the 2nd channel member 570 arranged at the direction side), and the 3rd channel member 40580 arranged at the back of the 2nd channel member 570.

  The third path member 40580 is a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back side of the second path member 570 at the upper side (arrow U direction side), and a lower side of the second path member 570 (arrow D direction side) The second cover member 582 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back of the first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) disposed between the first cover member 40581 and the second cover member 582 And a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back of the second covering member 582.

  The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a ball throwing path of the gaming ball that curves in a substantially U shape on the back side (arrow B direction side), and is the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. And a plate-like mounting portion 40581b connected to the lower side of the curved portion 40581a.

  The curved portion 40581a is formed to be curved in a U-shaped cross section in which the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (the second path member 570) side is opened, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside thereof Be done. Further, the curved portion 40581a is formed such that the width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is smaller toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and the width dimension in the left-right direction in the curved portion of the U-shaped cross section X10 (see FIG. 200 (a)) is formed to be 1.1 times or less the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, when a game ball having a diameter of 1.1 times or more that of the specified game ball is thrown, the game ball can be stopped inside the bending portion 40581a (main path SK1).

  Further, the curved portion 40581a is disposed inside the concave portion 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similarly to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the game ball stopped inside the bending portion 40581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) to notify the pachinko machine 10 of an error (illegal).

  Furthermore, the curved portion 40581a includes an opening 40581a1 that opens to a curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a storage portion 40581a2 that protrudes in a box shape that opens upward from an end of the opening 40481a1 on the back side.

  The opening 40581a1 is an opening that discharges a ball having a diameter smaller than the diameter of the specified gaming ball from the main path SK1, and the opening dimension X15 (see FIG. 200 (a)) in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) It is formed in a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the gaming ball. The opening 40581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved portion 40581 in the rolling direction of the gaming ball rolling on the first rolling portion 576, and sends the gaming ball passing through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. be able to. Thereby, when a game ball smaller in diameter by 0.9% or more than the specified game ball is thrown, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

  The housing portion 40581a2 is a box for housing the game balls discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed in a size larger than the diameter of the game balls. Thereby, the gaming ball discharged from the opening 40581a1 can be accommodated in the accommodation portion 40581a2, and the accommodated gaming ball can be detected by the detection device 86b3 and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (illegal) .

  In the fortieth embodiment, the case where the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed to have different sizes by 0.1 times with respect to the game ball of the prescribed diameter (11 mm) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The size magnification factor to the gaming ball may be changed.

  Next, a first unit 41551 according to the forty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3 move up and down around the curved portion of the curved path WK1 (arrow Although the case in which the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j in the forty-first embodiment are formed into different shapes has been described. About the part same as a form, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 201 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 201 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 along line CCIb-CCIb in FIG. 201 (a). is there. FIG. 202 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along line CCIIa-CCIIa in FIG. 201 (a), and FIG. 202 (b) is a first unit in line CCIIb-CCIIb in FIG. 201 (a) It is a schematic cross section of 41551.

  As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 according to the forty-first embodiment includes a first path member 41560 disposed on the front side, and a first path member 41560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 41560. It is mainly provided with the 2nd path member 41570 and the 3rd path member 580 (refer to Drawing 19) arranged on the back of the 2nd path member 41570.

  The first path member 41560 has a front plate 41564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) and a substantially U-shaped cross section opened by the upper side (arrow U direction side) And a first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 which are provided on the back side (the arrow B direction side) from the upper side (arrow U direction side) end of the front plate 41564. (Refer to FIG. 21), the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 are continuously provided on the lower side (arrow D direction side) so as to project therefrom, and an end of a part of the front plate 41564 And a second wall portion 566 and a second wall portion 566 that are formed below the first wall portion 565 and project from two places separated by a predetermined distance. And 3 walls 567 (see FIG. 21).

  The front plate 41564 is a plate member serving as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the flow-down path of the game ball formed between the opposing of the second path member 41570 and the third path member 580 described later. It is formed of a permeable member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down the inside of the first unit 551 through the front plate 41564.

  Further, the front plate 564 is provided with a first convex portion 41564b, a second convex portion 41564c and a third convex portion 41564d at positions facing the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j described later. Be done.

  The second path member 41570 projects from the front surface (the arrow F direction side) of the base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560 and the base plate 41571 toward the first path member 41560. A fourth wall portion 573 (see FIG. 21), and a fifth wall portion 574 (see FIG. 21) projecting at a position spaced a predetermined distance downward from the fourth wall portion 573, and the fifth wall And a sixth wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21) which is provided so as to protrude downward from the portion 574 at a predetermined distance away from the portion 574.

  The base plate 41571 is provided with a first recess 41571h, a second recess 41571i and a first recess recessed in the ball sending path (main path SK2, curved path WK1 and main path SK3) of the gaming ball formed between the front plate 41564 and the other Three concave portions 41571 j are provided.

  The first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j are formed in a curved shape so as to be recessed toward the back surface side. In addition, the dimension between the first concave portion 41571h and the first convex portion 41564b, the dimension between the second concave portion 41571i and the second convex portion 41564c, and the dimension between the third concave portion 41571j and the third convex portion 41564d are Each is set to the same facing distance dimension L19 (see FIG. 201 (b)).

  Further, the opposing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and smaller than the opposing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201B) on the back of the front plate 41564 and the front of the base plate 571. Set to As a result, the game ball that is thrown between the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, the third recess 41571j, and the first protrusion 41564b, the second protrusion 41564c, and the third protrusion 41564d is opposed to the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i and the third recess 41571j, and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d, to slow the rolling (falling) speed of the game ball it can.

  Further, the projection dimensions of the first convex portion 41564 b, the second convex portion 41564 c, and the third convex portion 41564 d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. In addition, the front end faces of the protruding end surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d face the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j. The distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201 (b)) is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Thus, the game ball to be thrown between the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j, and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c and the third convex portion 41564d is opposed to the first convex portion The portion 41564 b, the second convex portion 41564 c, and the third convex portion 41564 d can collide with each other. As a result, it is possible to slow the rolling (falling) speed of the gaming ball.

  The first concave portion 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2 and is long and recessed along the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the main path SK2. Thereby, when the game ball sent to the inside of the first concave portion 41571h is thrown inside the first concave portion 41571h, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the first concave portion 41571h. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball flowing down the main path SK2 is stopped due to the contact with the first recess 41571h.

  The first convex portion 41564 b protruding from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571 h is extended in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first concave portion 41571 h. As a result, when the game ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown is brought into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, it is possible to easily throw the game ball to the inside of the first concave portion 41571h.

  The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1, and is long and recessed along the gravity direction (arrow U-D direction). Further, the second concave portion 41571i is formed into an oval whose shape in front view is long in the vertical direction, and the middle position in the left and right direction of the oval is set to the middle position in the horizontal direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the vertical direction. In addition, the bending center on the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i is disposed on the throwing locus of the center of the gaming ball to which the main path SK2 is thrown. Therefore, since the second recess 41571i is recessed upward from the throwing path of the gaming ball thrown from the main path SK2, even if the gaming ball is thrown at a relatively fast speed on the main path SK2, The center of the gaming ball can be passed through the front side of the second recess 41571i. As a result, it is easy to slow the speed of the gaming ball by throwing the gaming ball passing through the main path SK2 to the inside of the second recess 41571i, and it is possible to suppress the runaway of the gaming ball on the curved route WK1.

  The second convex portion 41564c, which is provided so as to protrude from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i, is formed to be bent in a substantially L shape in a front view. In addition, the second convex portion 41564c is set such that the bent portion is on the front side of the curved center on the upper side of the ellipse of the second concave portion 41571i in a front view. In addition, the bending portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c is extended in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the curved path WK1, and the bending portion on the other side is the throwing ball of the gaming ball on the main path SK2. It extends in the direction orthogonal to the direction. Thus, the game ball sent from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 is made to abut the second convex portion 41564c on the other side to throw the ball inside the second concave portion 41571i and to the second convex portion 41564c on one side. It is possible to easily lower the throwing speed of the gaming ball which is brought into contact and throws the curved path WK11. As a result, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball by suppressing the runaway of the game ball sent to the curved path WK1.

  The third concave portion 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3 and is recessed in an elliptical shape long in the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the main path SK3. Thus, when the game ball sent to the inside of the third recess 41571j is thrown inside the third recess 41571j, it is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance with the third recess 41571j. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball flowing down the main path SK3 is stopped due to the contact with the third recess 41571j.

  In the third recess 41571j, the bending center of the end on the upstream side of the ball sending path of the gaming ball is set to the lower side of the lateral center position of the second recess 41571i. Thereby, the game ball which has flowed down the inside of the second concave portion 41571i of the curved path WK1 can be easily received by the second concave portion 41571i, and the game ball can be easily thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

  The third convex portion 41564 d protruding from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671 j is formed so as to be bent in a substantially L shape in a front view. Further, the third convex portion 41564 d is set such that the bent portion is on the front side of the bending center of the upstream end portion of the third concave portion 41571 j in a front view. The bending portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564 d is extended in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the main path SK3, and the bending portion on the other side is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball on the curved path WK1. It extends in the direction. Thereby, the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is made to abut against the third convex portion 41564 d on the other side to throw the ball inside the third concave portion 41571 j, and to the third convex portion 41564 d on one side. It is possible to lower the throwing speed of the gaming ball that brings the main path SK3 into contact by bringing it into contact. As a result, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball by suppressing the runaway of the game ball sent from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 203 to FIG. 206, the game board 42013 in the forty-second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the other end of the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) disposed in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by a screw inserted from the back side of the substrate box 100. As described above, in the forty-second embodiment, the case where the second engaging member 42370 disposed in the back case 42300 is engaged with the substrate box 42100 will be described.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, the overall configuration of a back case 42300 according to the forty-second embodiment will be described. FIG. 203 is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 42300 in the forty-second embodiment. 204 (a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 204 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204 (a). The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 42300 in the forty-second embodiment is erected toward the front from the outer edge of the bottom wall 42301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and the four sides of the bottom wall 42301. It has an outer wall portion 42302 and is formed in a box shape whose one surface side (front side) is opened by the respective wall portions 42301 and 42302.

  Also, the rear case 42300 is disposed on the rear side of the rear case 42300, with the engagement member 310 disposed on the front side (open side (box F direction side formed in a box shape) of the bottom wall portion 42301). And a second engaging member 42370 disposed on the front side of the bottom wall 42301 and fixing the other end of the substrate box 42100.

  The bottom wall portion 42301 has an opening 301a having a rectangular shape in front view formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible. Further, the bottom wall 42301 has a cylindrical shape protruding on the front side, and a protruding portion 301 b inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310 and a first opening opened at a position facing the fixing member 320. An opening 301c, a second opening 301d opening at a position facing the engaging member 310, and a cylindrical shape protruding from the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall 42301, which will be described later The second projecting portion 42301f inserted in the sliding groove 42372 of the member 42370, and the second projecting portion 42301f penetrating in the thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) above (in the direction of arrow U) And 3 openings 42301 g.

  The second projecting portions 42301 f are protrusions that define the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370, and are formed side by side at two points in the gravity direction. Further, the outer diameter of the second projecting portion 42301 f is set to a size slightly smaller than the groove width in the short direction of the sliding groove 42372 of the second engaging member 42370 described later. Further, the two second projecting portions 42301 f are set to have a size in which the distance between the centers of the two second projecting portions 42301 f is smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. As a result, two second projecting portions 42301 f can be inserted and disposed inside the sliding groove 42372.

  The third opening 42301 g is an opening into which a protruding portion 42118 of a substrate box 42100 described later is inserted, and is opened with a dimension larger than the outer shape of the protruding portion 42118 in a front view. The third opening 42301g releases the engagement of the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 in a state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204 (a)). It forms in the position which adjoins in the direction (arrow L direction) to do. Thus, in the state where the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g, it is possible to disable the engagement member 310 from being engaged with the fixing member 320. A detailed description of the positional relationship between the projecting portion 42118 and the engagement member 310 will be described later.

  The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening 42302 b opened in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) on the side surface on the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the front view. The second opening 42302 b is an opening through which an end portion on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of a second engagement member 42370 described later is inserted, and is formed in a displacement region of the second engagement member 42370. Thereby, the second engagement member 42370 can be displaced.

  The substrate box 42100 has a rectangular outer shape in a front view, and a main controller 110 disposed inside. Further, the substrate box 42100 is provided with a bearing portion 117 (see FIG. 206 (a)) projecting from an end on one end side (arrow R direction side) and a projecting portion projecting from one surface on the front side of the substrate box 42100 And 42118.

  As described above, the projecting portion 42118 is a portion inserted into the third opening 42301 g of the back case 42300, and in a state where the front of the substrate box 42100 and the back of the back case 42300 are parallel to each other. It is set to the length by which the opening part 42118a mentioned later is arrange | positioned at the front side of the bottom wall part 42301. Further, the projecting portion 42118 includes an opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity, and a second engaging member 42370 described later is disposed inside the opening 42118a. Thus, the substrate box 42100 can be disposed on the back side (the arrow B direction side) of the back case 42300 in a non-displaceable state by suppressing the substrate box 42100 from rotating about the fixing member 320.

  Further, the third opening 42301g into which the protruding portion 42118 is inserted is engaged in the state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204 (a)). Since the members 310 are formed at positions adjacent to each other in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing members 320 (the direction of the arrow L), the projecting portions 42118 are disposed at positions adjacent to the engaging members 310. In addition, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204 (b)) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301 g is the distance Y7 (see FIG. 204 (b) between the front of the engagement member 310 and the front of the bottom wall 42301). Set larger than). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), the engaging member 310 and the projecting portion 42118 are disposed at the overlapping position at the position in the front-rear direction (the arrow FB direction).

  Therefore, in a state where the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118, the direction in which the engaging member 310 disengages from the fixing member 320 (the projecting portion 42118 is disposed) Displacement is restricted. As a result, in a state where the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be suppressed from being released illegally, and the substrate box 42100 (main control device 110) can be prevented from being exchanged for an illegal basis.

  Further, the opening 42118a of the projecting portion 42118 is opened in the direction of gravity, and the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced in the direction of gravity and inserted. Accordingly, since the displacement direction (gravitational direction) of the second engagement member 42370 and the displacement direction (horizontal direction) of the engagement member 310 are set to be orthogonal to each other, the engagement member 310 can not be determined by the player's fraud. The second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a can facilitate reception of the force when operated. As a result, when the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by the player's fraud, it is possible to suppress the release of the engagement with the fixing member 320.

  The second engagement member 42370 is a plate member 42371 formed in a plate shape having a rectangular shape in a front view and a downward direction (direction of arrow D) from an end portion on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the plate member 42371 A second engaging portion 42373 projecting outward in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper side (arrow U direction side) end of the plate member 42371; A sliding groove 42372 is opened mainly in the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B) at a position below the setting portion 42374.

  As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for displacing the second engagement member 42370, and is long in the gravity direction (arrow U-D direction). Further, the width dimension of the sliding groove 42372 in the short direction (arrow L-R direction) is set to be substantially the same as the diameter of the second projecting portion 42301 f disposed inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, as described above, when the second projecting portion 42301 f is inserted into the sliding groove 42372, the sliding direction of the second engagement member 42370 is defined in the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

  The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for facilitating the elastic deformation of the upper end of the plate member 42371. The recessed portion 42374 is recessed downward and is notched in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rigidity of the upper end portion of the plate member 42371 can be reduced to facilitate elastic deformation.

  The second engagement portion 42373 is a portion engaged with the end portion of the opening 42118 a of the above-described protrusion 42118, and is provided to protrude from both side surfaces in the direction orthogonal to the notch direction of the recess 42374. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204 (a)) of the end portions of the projecting ends on both sides is set larger than the opening dimension X13 (see FIG. 204 (b)) of the opening 42118a in the left-right direction. Thus, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engagement portion 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, whereby the second engagement portion 42373 is opened. You can control getting out of the house.

  The second engagement portion 42373 is formed in a shape projecting outward in the horizontal direction from the upper side to the lower side of the plate member 42371. As a result, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engagement portion 42373 is brought into contact with the inside of the opening 42118a to facilitate elastic deformation of the upper side of the plate member 42371. be able to.

  The lower end of the second engagement member 42370 is the second opening of the outer wall 42302 when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a (the engagement portion 42373 is engaged with the projecting portion 42118). It is arrange | positioned inside part 42302b. Thus, the second engagement portion 42370 can be suppressed from being operated from the outside of the rear case 42300. As a result, the engagement between the second engaging portion 42373 and the projecting portion 42118 can be unfairly released, and it can be suppressed that the substrate box 42100 (main control device 110) is replaced with an unfair base.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205, a method of arranging the substrate box 42100 in the back case 42300 will be described. 205 (a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 205 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along line CCVb-CCVb in FIG. 205 (a). In FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the state after the substrate box 42100 is disposed in the rear case 42300 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b), the rear case 42300. The state before the substrate box 42100 is disposed is illustrated.

  In the substrate box 42100 in the forty-second embodiment, the fixing member 320 is first engaged with the engaging member 310 and one side is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300 as in the first embodiment described above. .

  As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) and 205 (b), when the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320 (before displacement), the tip end of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is , And the front side of the third opening 42301g. Thereby, before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, it can be suppressed that the projecting portion 42118 of the substrate box 42100 is inserted into the third opening 42301 g. As a result, the substrate box 42100 can be prevented from being disposed on the back case 42300 only by the engagement of the projecting portion 42118 and the second engaging portion 42370.

  Next, the other side of the substrate box 42100 is rotated about the connecting portion of the fixing member on one side and the connecting member 320, and the projecting portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300. As a result, the protruding portion 42118 is disposed at a position where it can be engaged with the second engagement member 42370.

  The second engagement member 42370 is disposed on the outer side of the rear case 42300 with the lower side being inserted into the second opening 42302b before being inserted into the third opening 42301g (FIG. 205 (a)). reference). Thereby, the worker who arranges the substrate box 42100 in the back case 42300 operates the second engagement member 42370 from the outside of the back case 42300, and the second engagement member 42370 is positioned inside the third opening 42301g. Can be inserted.

  In addition, since the second engagement member 42370 has its displacement direction set to the gravity direction, it is disposed at the lower end by the action of gravity in the state before being inserted inside the third opening 42301g. . Accordingly, when the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300, a collision with the second engagement member 42370 can be suppressed. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

  In addition, when the second engagement member 42370 is forgotten to be engaged with the projecting portion 42118, the second engagement member 42370 can be disposed outside the back case 42300, so that the operator is not in a normal state. Can be made easier to recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the second engagement member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described. Fig. 206 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and Fig. 206 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line CCVIb-CCVIb in Fig. 206 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 206, standing members 42060f are provided on the back of the base plate 42060 in the forty-second embodiment. The upright member 42060 f is erected toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and the erected front end position thereof is set in the same plane of the bottom wall portion 42301 of the back case 42300. . Further, the standing member 42060 f is disposed on the lower side of the second engagement member 42370 and is disposed on the outside of the rear case 42300. Thus, when the rear case 42300 is disposed on the game board 42013 in a state in which the second engaging member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 are not engaged, the standing portion 42060 f is made of the second engaging member 42370. It can be made to collide downward. As a result, the rear case 42300 is disposed on the base plate 42060 with the second engagement member 42370 and the projecting portion 42118 forgotten to be engaged, or with the substrate box 42100 forgotten to be disposed in the rear case 42300. It can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting substrate that illuminates the inside of the back case 42300 is disposed in the standing portion 42060 f. Accordingly, the standing portion 42060 f can be used as a portion that emits light and a portion that suppresses engagement of the rear case 42300 and the base plate 42060 in an abnormal state. As a result, the outer shape of the base plate 42060 can be suppressed from becoming large.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the first embodiment, in order to retract the ball receiving portion 467 from the third position to the second position or the first position, the drive motor KM2 is driven. However, the third position to the second position or the first position The drive for retracting to the 1 position may be driven by the biasing spring. For example, a biasing spring may be disposed between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470 so that an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

  In this case, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the dispensing operation, the driving of the drive motor KM3 is turned off, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is moved to the second position or the second position by the biasing force of the biasing spring. It can be displaced to the 1 position side.

  Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced by using the time until the driving force of the drive motor KM2 is switched at the third position, and therefore, the discharge when the gaming ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467 The wobble of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction reaction can be suppressed.

  That is, when the gaming ball is discharged from the inside of the ball receiving portion 467, the load of the lower displacement member 440 is lightened by the amount of the discharged gaming ball, and the lower displacement member 440 is easily displaced upward by reaction. By immediately displacing the ball receiving portion 467, a force acting to displace the base member 470 downward is exerted by a reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, thereby counteracting the reaction when the ball is discharged from the lower displacing member 440. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the case where two engaging protrusions 882 for restricting the rotation of the rotating body 800 are formed at predetermined intervals on the side surface of the rotating body 800 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a plurality of connecting members may be provided on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, the rotation of the rotary body 800 can be restricted at any position, and the rotary body 800 can be restricted from rotating by an external force when the lid member 770 is in the open state.

  In the first embodiment, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotary body 800, and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831. However, the opening 831 is opposite to the communication hole 881b of the rotary body 800 It may be formed on the side of the That is, openings may be formed on both side surfaces in the axial direction of the rotating body 800, one may be an inlet for the ball, and the other may be an outlet for the ball. In this case, since the ball sending path of the ball can be formed inside the rotating body 800, especially when there is no arrangement space on the back side of the game board 13, a character (rotary body 800) can be used as the ball sending path. The throwing path can be secured without upsizing the game board 13.

  In the said 1st Embodiment, although the case where the external shape was formed in a column shape was demonstrated in the rotary body 800, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the shape may be a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be complicated, the player can easily recognize that the effect has been switched by the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 865 is formed so as to be operable by the player, but a push-in button may be provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation unit 8654. In this case, the player can perform not only the operation of applying the rotational force to the rotation operation unit 8654 but also the operation of pressing the push button, or the combination of the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 8654 and the pressing operation. . As a result, since a plurality of operation modes of the rotation operation unit 865 can be formed, it is possible to give the player an interest.

  In the eighth embodiment, the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are engaged with each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a torque limiter or the like may be interposed between the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 to interrupt transmission of the driving force when an overload is applied.

  In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotation operation unit 865 in the rotation state, the transmission of the driving force of the rotation from the drive motor KM 6 can be interrupted, and the rotation of the rotation operation unit 865 can be suppressed from continuing. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from being broken when the player inputs a rotation in the opposite direction to the rotation in the A direction to the rotation operation unit 8654.

  Furthermore, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 8654, when the player's finger or clothes are pinched between the rotation operation unit 8654 and the upper plate 8017 on the rotation direction side, the rotation is stopped, Further pinching of the player's finger and clothes can be suppressed. Thus, the player can be prevented from being injured by being pinched between the rotation operation unit 8654 and the upper tray 8017.

  In the eighth embodiment, although the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 865 is the A direction, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 865 may be the left-right direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be made to operate in accordance with the effect of the gaming machine, and the effect of the effect can be improved. For example, it is possible to produce an effect such as hitting a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by tapping and operating the rotary operation unit 8654 so as to rotate it to the right with the left hand.

  In the first embodiment, the substrate box 100 is disposed on the fixing member 320, and the fixing member 320 is engaged with the engagement member 310, thereby preventing the substrate box 100 from being replaced with an incorrect substrate. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and by being disposed on the fixing member 320, another member (for example, the third symbol) can be used as long as it can suppress improper removal. The display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting an unauthorized input such as an unauthorized radio wave or vibration may be used.

  In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d formed in the first unit 551, Although the case where they are formed at mutually opposing positions has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d The first concave portion 571h is disposed on the upstream side with respect to the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and after the game ball flowing down is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c and the third convex portion 564d. , And may be received in the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j.

  Although the case where the thickness dimension of the decoration member 154 is made smaller than the recess depth of the recess 151 b of the main body 151 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the decorative member 154 may be formed of an elastically deformable material, and may be formed thicker than the recess depth of the recess 151 b of the main body 151. In this case, the main winning portion 151 can be disposed in contact with the base plate 60 by being compressed and elastically deformed when the general winning opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60.

  In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is disposed at the position of the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 applied to the cam member 422 from the first link member 431 act in a direction in which the forces mutually cancel each other. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-like protrusion 431b abut may be set in the direction from the contact point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. . According to this, it is possible to suppress that the force in the direction of rotating about the shaft portion 422a acts on the cam member 422.

  Although the case where the other end side of the substrate box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 by a screw has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the other end side of the substrate box 100 may be fixed by a seal that is not removable when engaged with the back case 300. Explaining in detail, a cylindrical sealer in which openings formed at a plurality of places on the other end side of the back case 300 are inserted is inserted into an insertion portion which is recessed in the plurality of places on the back side of the back case 300, The substrate box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state by engaging the insertion portion and the sealing device.

  In addition, when removing the board | substrate box 100, the other end side of the board | substrate box 100 can be removed from the back surface case 300 by cut | disconnecting the engagement part of an insertion part and a sealing tool. In addition, when arranging the other end side of the substrate box 100 to the back case 300 again, a new sealing tool is inserted through the unused opening of the substrate box 100, and the unused insertion portion of the back case 300. The other end side of the substrate box 100 can be disposed on the back case 300 by engaging with.

  In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decoration member 154 in a front view is formed larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end of the decoration member 154 overlaps the decoration member 60c of the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction Although the case where it arrange | positions by the state was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the outer shape of the decoration member 154 in a front view may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

  In this case, by forming the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed of a single sheet. By cutting the decoration member 154 from the sheet, the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c can be formed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decoration member 154 in a separate process, the yield at the time of forming the decoration member 154 can be improved.

  When the outer shape of the decoration member 154 in front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decoration member 154 is disposed inside the second opening 60b to form the decoration member 154 It is preferable to arrange the front of the decorative member 60c on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c coincide with each other in the front-rear direction in front view, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c can be recognized by the player as one decoration.

  In the first embodiment, the first convex portion 571h is provided on the inner surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the ball sending path of the first unit 551 so as to protrude toward the back side (arrow B side direction). , The second convex portion 571i and the third convex portion 571k are formed, and the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, is recessed toward the back side on the back side inner surface of the ball sending path of the first unit 511 And although the case where it has and the 3rd crevice 571j was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this.

  For example, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, the third concave portion 571j, and the first convex portion 571h, the second convex portion 571i, and the third convex portion 571k are formed on the inner surface on the opposite side in the front and rear direction in front view. Also good.

  In addition, a recess that is recessed toward the front may be formed on the inner surface on the front side of the position facing the second recess 571i. In this case, it is possible to make the ball sending space larger because the concave portion is recessed in the ball sending space of the curved path WK1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball from being too slow in the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from remaining on the curved path WK1.

  In the ninth embodiment, although the case where the inclined surface 9431 b 1 protrudes to the front side as it goes to the cam member 422 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the inclined surface 9431 b 1 may be formed as an inclination such that the amount of protrusion to the front side decreases as it goes to the cam member 422.

  In this case, the cam member 422 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411 when the lower displacement unit 400 is brought into the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 abuts against the plate-like projection 9531a. . As a result, the cam member 422 can be prevented from swinging in the front-rear direction, and the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained at the second displacement state.

  In the eleventh embodiment, although the case where the light emitter 11491a is formed at a position higher than the center of the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 (in the direction of arrow U) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the light emitter 11491a may be disposed at substantially the same height as the center of the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is preferable that the height position of the transmitting portion 11451 b be formed from the center of the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion 467 to the upper side of the center.

  According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the gaming ball, the shadow of the gaming ball formed on the transmitting portion 11451b is formed in a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the gaming ball it can. Thus, the roundness of the gaming ball can be formed in the shadow formed on the transparent portion 11451b, so that the player can easily recognize the position of the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion 467.

  In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the case where the displacement of the third piece 12467e, 39467e is performed by the load of the gaming ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a sensor for detecting that the gaming ball has passed is attached to the ball receiving portion 12467, 39467 to the throwing path for sending the gaming ball, and the third piece 12467 e, due to the detection of the gaming ball by the sensor You may displace 39467e independently. According to this, since it is not necessary to displace the second pieces 12467d and 39467d by the load of the gaming ball, it is possible to improve the reliability of the displacement of the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467. In this case, driving devices for independently displacing the third pieces 12467 e and 39467 e are disposed in the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467.

  In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments, the case where the rotation axes at the time of the rotational displacement of the third piece 12467e and 39467e is formed on the first piece 12467c and 39467c has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e may be inserted into the openings formed in the rack 466, and the third pieces 12467e and 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, the distance between the rotation shaft and the connecting portion between the second piece 12467d and the 39467d can be easily increased, so the displacement amount of the third piece 12467e and 39467e with respect to the displacement amount of the second piece 12467d and 39467d can be easily increased. . As a result, the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e can be easily disposed on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. In this case, the openings formed in the rack 466 are formed in elongated holes in which the shaft portions 12467 e 3 and 39 47 6 e 3 can slide.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The two path members 13570 may be moved in the front-rear direction. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front of the base plate 60 (game board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the first and second members facing each other. it can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments described above, the decorative members 154, 10154, 25154 are attached by the adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, 25154a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, An adhesive made of a liquid may be used.

  In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 disposed on the front side are formed of a non-light-transmissive material. Although the case where it is difficult for the player to recognize the gap between the one path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 has been described, this is not necessarily the case.

  For example, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 is formed with a slit-like opening having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 The game ball flowing down between the facing of the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 may be viewed by the player through the opening. In this case, in the plural openings formed in the slit shape, the distance to the adjacent opening is set to be smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  As a result, the player can be made to recognize the game ball flowing down between the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 through the opening.

  In addition, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 have circular openings smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560, and the second path members are formed. The player may be made to visually recognize the game ball flowing down between the path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 through the opening. In this case, the adjacent width dimensions of the plurality of openings are formed smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. Therefore, the opening can be made smaller than when the opening is formed in a slit shape, so the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member can be made through the openings. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the interval between the opposing faces 13570, 32570, 34570.

  In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the fixing member 18320 is formed with the portion (engaged portion 18332) with which the displacement member 18310 is engaged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 in which the displacement member 18310 is engaged may be formed on the substrate box 100 crimp-fixed to the fixing member 18320.

  In this case, in a state where the substrate box 100 is not disposed in the back case 18300, the displacement member 18310 can not be disposed inside the back case 18300, and the displacement member 18310 protrudes outside the back case 18300 by its own weight. It can be in the state.

  As a result, when the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the back case 18300, when the game board 18013 is disposed on the outer frame 11, the displacement member 18310 is hooked on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164 (b)). Thus, the worker can be made to notice that the substrate box 100 has not been attached.

  In the twenty-first embodiment, the insertion portion 21724b of the rotation unit 21700 disposed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 302 of the rear case 300 is inserted into the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 and displaced. Although the case where the engagement between the member 310 and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being released improperly has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the insertion portion 21724 b inserted inside the recess 317 of the displacement member 310 may be formed on the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320.

  In this case, the insertion portion 21724 b is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall portion 302 via the opening formed in the fixing member 320. Furthermore, the insertion portion 21724 b is formed at a portion where a shaft fixed to the fixing member 320 by caulking is inserted. Accordingly, when the bearing portion 117 of the substrate box 100 is cut and improperly removed from the rear case 21300, the insertion portion 21724b can be left inside the concave portion 317 of the displacement member 310. As a result, it can be difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 21300.

  Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correct the caulking portion of the substrate box 100 and the fixing member 320 (cut the caulking portion). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the back member 21300 illegally, so it is possible to suppress the removal of the fixing member 320 and replacement with an incorrect substrate box.

  In the forty-second embodiment, the light emitting substrate for emitting light is provided in the standing portion 42060f, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a driving member provided in the base plate 42060 It may be formed as a control board for controlling the board or a passage for throwing the game ball.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<About the concept of the invention which makes lower displacement unit 400 an example>
A displacement member which is formed displaceably in a first direction from a reference position and which is formed to be able to move the gaming ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and to the trajectory region of the displacement member from outside the trajectory region of the displacement member In the gaming machine, further comprising: restricting means for restricting the ball from being thrown, the displacing member is formed displaceably from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction. A game machine A1.

  Here, a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in the first direction from the reference position and is formed to be able to move the gaming ball in accordance with the displacement in the first direction, and the trajectory region of the displacement member from outside the trajectory region of the displacement member There is known a gaming machine provided with a control means for restricting the game ball from being thrown (for example, JP-A-2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to suppress that more than the specified number of gaming balls are thrown to the track area of the displacement member by the restriction of the restriction means. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, for example, when the control means malfunctions due to sticking or abrasion, there is a risk that more than the specified number of gaming balls will be thrown toward the track area of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that there is a risk of causing a problem due to the game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, there is a possibility that the game balls of a number exceeding the specified number may enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and be caught in the movable part, resulting in breakage. Alternatively, there is a risk that the game balls exceeding the specified number may flow out of the game area (for example, the back side of the game board).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so that the track area of the displacement member can be enlarged accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the control means malfunctions and the game balls of the specified number or more are thrown, the game ball of the portion exceeding the specified number is used as the track area because the track area of the displacement member is expanded. It can be accepted. As a result, it is possible to move the game balls by an amount exceeding the specified number in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism portion of the displacement member and flowing out of the game area, and as a result, the problems caused by the game balls from exceeding the specified number. It can be hard to occur.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member formed as a passage through which gaming balls can pass, and the downstream is communicated with the track region of the displacement member, and the restricting means restricts passage of the gaming ball in the passage member. A game machine A2 that features.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the passage member is formed as a passage through which the game ball can pass, and the downstream is communicated with the track region of the displacement member. Since the passage of the ball is restricted, for example, even if the restriction means causes a malfunction and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the game balls for the specified number exceed the specified number via the passage member The ball can be reliably thrown into the orbit area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles due to the game balls exceeding the specified number.

  In the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to receive and hold a specified number of gaming balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least the diameter of the gaming ball in the second direction from the reference position. A game machine A3 characterized in that it is displaceable by a distance exceeding.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be able to receive and hold the specified number of gaming balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position and Since it is formed displaceable in the direction by at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the gaming ball, after receiving a prescribed number of gaming balls at the standard position, displacing the displacement member in the second direction from the standard position It is possible to send the game ball to the track area of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member) by an amount corresponding to the excess. Therefore, it is possible to move the game balls by an amount exceeding the specified number in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction.

  In this case, since the displacement member holds the specified number of gaming balls and can send the game balls for the specified number to the track area, the predetermined number of game balls and the specified number of game balls are separated. can do. Thus, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, the displacement member holds the specified number of gaming balls while maintaining the state that the displacement member holds, while discharging only the gaming balls for the specified number from the track area. It becomes possible.

  In the gaming machine A3, when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position, the attitude is formed so as to be changeable.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is displaced in the first direction so that its posture can be changed when it reaches a predetermined position. It is easy to maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the ball, and it is possible to suppress the falling off of the gaming ball from the displacement member, but when it reaches a predetermined position, the game ball is utilized utilizing the change of the attitude of the displacement member. Can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

  The gaming machine A4 includes a recess recessed in a track area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the recess when displaced in the first direction. A game machine A5 comprising: a projection to be engaged, and the posture being changeable by the projection being engaged with the recess.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the recessed portion is provided in the track area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction Since the protrusion is engaged with the recess and the protrusion is engaged with the recess so that the posture can be changed, the structure for changing the posture of the displacement member can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine A5, the projection is provided to project from the displacement member in the first direction, and the projecting tip is in contact with the lower half of the gaming ball which is thrown to the track area of the displacement member. A game machine A6 characterized by being connected.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the projection is provided protruding from the displacement member in the first direction, and the gaming tip is provided with the tip of the projection thrown to the track area of the displacement member (I.e., it is formed to be able to abut on the lower half of the game balls for the number exceeding the specified number), so when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, It can be moved while pushing. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the game balls from the track area by more than the specified number.

  In addition, the projection is interposed between the specified number of gaming balls held by the displacing member and the gaming balls (the gaming balls for the number exceeding the prescribed number) sent to the track region of the displacing member. Because of the projected length of the part, it is possible to secure an interval between the specified number of gaming balls and the more than specified number of gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls for the number exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the displacement member holding the specified number of game balls.

  Furthermore, the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engagement with the recess and the role of moving the gaming ball while pushing the lower half face is also used as a protrusion, so the number of parts is reduced by that amount. Cost reduction can be achieved.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, a gaming machine A7 characterized in that the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball is thrown to the track area of the displacement member. (I.e., more than the specified number of gaming balls) can easily pass through the recess when being moved with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. As a result, it is possible to easily discharge the game balls from the track area by more than the specified number.

  In any one of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the gaming ball in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position and at the same time The gaming ball is provided with a wall portion positioned in the first direction side, and when the gaming ball sent to the track area of the displacement member is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the gaming ball is moved to the wall A game machine A8 characterized in that the posture change of the displacement member is restricted by being abutted against the part and the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the gaming ball in the track area when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position The gaming ball is provided with a wall portion positioned on the first direction side of the moving member, and the gaming ball is moved along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction when the gaming ball sent to the track region of the displacement member is moved. Since the position change of the displacement member is regulated so as to be in contact with the displacement member, only the number of game balls exceeding the specified number can be maintained while maintaining the predetermined number of game balls held by the displacement member. It can be easily discharged from the track area.

  That is, since the wall portion is erected at a height lower than the radius of the gaming ball, when the gaming ball is moved by being pushed by the projection along with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the gaming ball is The lower half of the lower surface is brought into contact with the wall so that the game ball can easily ride over the wall. In this case, the game ball is abutted against the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall portion), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member. It is possible to regulate the attitude change, and to suppress dropping of the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of gaming balls, it is possible to easily eject only the gaming balls for the number exceeding the specified number from the track area.

  On the other hand, when the game ball (ie, game balls exceeding the specified number) is not thrown in the track area of the displacement member, the game ball is not interposed between the wall portion and the displacement member, so By being engaged, the posture of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to easily eject the specified number of gaming balls (that is, gaming balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member by utilizing the change in the attitude of the displacement member.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A8, a game machine A9 characterized in that the restriction means is formed so as to be interlocked with displacement of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the restricting means is formed movably interlockingly with the displacement of the displacing member. It is possible to regulate or allow the throwing of the gaming ball to the track area of the member. That is, since regulation or allowance of throwing of the game ball can be mechanically synchronized with the displacement of the displacement member and switched, for example, according to the sensor device which detects the position of the regulation means or the detection result of the sensor device It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of these means, and it is possible to reduce the product cost and to improve the reliability of the operation.

  In the gaming machine A9, the restricting means permits the game ball to be thrown to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement member being displaced from the reference position in the second direction. A game machine A10 that features.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the regulating means moves the gaming ball to the track area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position to the second direction. Since it is permitted to throw balls, it is possible to reliably throw the game balls to the track area of the displacement member, which is the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

  In any one of game machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is movably disposed, and a vertically upper portion of the base member disposed vertically downward of an end portion on the first direction side. And a recovery member having an opening in the game machine A11.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, the displacement member is disposed vertically below the base member on which the displacement member is disposed and the end portion on the first direction side of the base member. And a recovery member having an opening at the upper side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls are moved along with the movement of the displacement member in the first direction and discharged from the track area of the displacement member The gaming ball can be received from the opening of the collecting member and collected.

  In the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and an opening of the recovery member is at least the first one of the base members displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A game machine A12 having a size that is located vertically below an end on the direction side.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed displaceably between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the recovery member is displaced at least to the retracted position or the displaced position. The base member is formed to have a size located below the end in the first direction of the first direction in the vertical direction, so that it is discharged from the track region of the displacement member even when the base member is displaced to either the retracted position or the displaced position. The game balls to be played (i.e., game balls for more than a specified number) can be received from the opening of the collection member and collected.

  In any one of the game machines A5 to A8, a game machine A13 including an insertion member for restricting the engagement of the protrusion with the recess by being inserted into the recess space of the recess. .

  According to the gaming machine A13, since any of the gaming machines A5 to A8 is provided with the insertion member for restricting the engagement of the projection with the recess by being inserted into the recess space of the recess, the displacement member It is possible to suppress the change of the attitude of the displacement member when discharging the game balls from the track area of the displacement member by more than the specified number according to the displacement in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to easily eject only the game balls for the number exceeding the specified number from the track area while maintaining the displacement member holding the specified number of game balls.

  The gaming machine A13 includes a base member which is formed displaceably between the retracted position and the displaced position and on which the displacement member is disposed displaceably, and the insertion member causes the base member to be displaced to the retracted position. Then, the game machine A14 is inserted into the recess space of the recess and is separated from the recess space of the recess when the base member is displaced to the displacement position.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recess space of the recess, so displacement of the displacement member in the first direction The state in which the displacement member holds the specified number of gaming balls by suppressing the change of the attitude of the displacement member when discharging the game balls from the trajectory area of the displacement member by more than the specified number. However, when the base member is displaced to the displacing position, the insertion member is separated from the inside of the recess space of the recess, so that the projection engages with the recess with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction. By being combined, the posture of the displacement member can be changed, and the specified number of gaming balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention which makes distribution unit 500 an example>
A falling passage through which gaming balls flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the flowing passage, and a gaming ball flowing down the flow passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage In a gaming machine having a sorting means for sorting, the gaming machine further comprises a displacing member formed displaceably and receiving the gaming ball from the first branch passage, wherein the displacing member is displaced in contact with the sorting means. And the distribution means is displaced, and the distribution destination is switched.

  Here, the flow-down passage in which the gaming ball flows down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. There is known a gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting (for example, JP-A-2014-223176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the gaming balls having flowed down the flow-down passage are alternately distributed to the first branch passage and the second branch passage one ball at a time, the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage are It distributes equally to the 1st branch passage and the 2nd branch passage (namely, it divides by half). That is, there is a problem that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can not be changed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the displacing member is provided with a displacing member which is formed displaceably and receives the gaming ball from the first branch passage, and the displacing member abuts on the distributing means to displace Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of gaming balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine B1, since the distributing means can be displaced using displacement of the displacing member, it is unnecessary to separately provide a driving means and a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the product cost.

  Further, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distributing means is controlled using position detection by the sensor device or driving by the driving means, the reliability of the distributing operation of the distributing means is lowered due to erroneous operation due to detection failure or control failure. According to the gaming machine B1, since the distribution destination by the distribution means can be mechanically synchronized with the displacement of the displacement member and switched, the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

  In particular, since the displacement member is a member for receiving the game ball from the first branch passage, the first branch passage can be switched to the distribution destination of the distribution means in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. The game ball distributed to the passage can be reliably received by the displacement member.

  The gaming machine B1 includes biasing means for applying a biasing force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in one of the first branch path and the second branch path, the displacement member Displacing the distributing means in a direction that opposes the direction of the biasing force, the distribution destination by the distributing means is switched to the other of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the biasing is performed. A game machine B2 characterized in that a distribution destination by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch path and the second branch path by the biasing force of the means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the biasing force is applied to the sorting means, and the sorting destination by the sorting means is maintained in one of the first branch path or the second branch path. Since the biasing means is provided, it is possible to suppress inadvertent switching of the distribution destination by the distributing means. In this case, after the sorting means is displaced according to the displacement of the displacing member and the sorting destination is switched, the return to the sorting destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing means. It can be unnecessary that the member is in contact with the distributing means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the freedom of design of the movable range of the displacement member can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine B2, the energizing means applies an energizing force to the distributing means to maintain the distribution destination by the distributing means in the second branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the biasing means applies biasing force to the sorting means to maintain the sorting destination by the sorting means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member When the player can not receive the game ball, it can be suppressed that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage.

  The gaming machine B3 includes a base member which is formed displaceably between the first position and the second position and on which the displacement member is disposed, and in the state where the base member is disposed at the first position. The displacement member is capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and is capable of abutting on the distribution means, and the displacement is performed in a state where the base member is disposed at the second position. A game machine B4 characterized in that the member can not receive the game ball from the first branch passage and can not abut on the distribution means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the base member is formed so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member The aspect which displaces a displacement member in the state which arranged the base member in the 1st position, and the aspect which displaces the displacement member in the state which arranged the base member in the 2nd position can be formed. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced by that amount.

  In this case, in the state where the base member is disposed at the second position, the displacement member can not receive the gaming ball from the first branch passage, and in such a state, the displacement member can not contact the distributing means. Therefore, in a state where the displacement member can not receive the game ball (a state in which the base member is disposed at the second position), it can be suppressed that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage.

  The gaming machine B4 includes a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distributing means is disposed on the second base member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the second base member formed as a separate member from the base member is provided, and the sorting means is disposed on the second base member. The increase in size of the base member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is at least displaceably formed between the switching position and the receiving position set to a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position In the state, the distribution destination by the distributing means is switched to the first branch passage, and the displacement member can receive the game ball from the first branch passage when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. A game machine B6 characterized in that a distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed so as to be at least displaceable between the switching position and the receiving position set to a position different from the switching position. When the displacing member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distributing means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacing member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacing member moves the game ball from the first branch passage. Since it is possible to receive and the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to suppress that the game balls exceeding the specified number that the displacement member can receive are distributed to the first branch passage.

  That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacing member receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distributing means is switched to the first branch passage, so the displacing member There is a risk that the game balls may be distributed to the first branch passage beyond the specified number that can be received. When a means for restricting the flow of gaming balls into the first branch passage is additionally provided, the structure is complicated and the reliability is lowered, and the product cost is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, after the displacement member is displaced to the switching position and the specified number (or less than the specified number) of gaming balls is distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position Then, since the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing into the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game balls exceeding the specified number which the displacement member can receive are distributed to the first branch passage. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the above-described means, it is possible to improve the reliability and reduce the product cost.

  In the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or a plurality of projections or recesses provided on the inner wall surface so as to protrude or be recessed, and applies resistance to the gaming ball passing through the first branch passage. A game machine B7 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or depressions protruding or recessed from the inner wall surface thereof and passes through the first branch passage Since the resistance means for giving resistance to the game ball is provided, the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage can be reduced. Therefore, since the time required when the displacement member is displaced from the switching position to the reception position can be increased by that amount, the displacement ball can reliably receive the game ball. Moreover, since the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, the output of the drive means can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distribution means includes a first projecting portion and a second projecting portion formed to be able to protrude and retract with respect to the first branch passage in accordance with the displacement of the distributing means. (1) The projecting part is formed so as to be able to distribute the gaming balls flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage by projecting to the first branch passage, and the second projecting / retracting portion is from the first projecting / retracting portion The first branch passage is also located downstream of the first branch passage, so that the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be restricted by being projected to the first branch passage. And, in a state where one of the second projecting / retracting portions protrudes into the passage of the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the passage of the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the sorting means is formed so as to be able to move in and out with respect to the first branch passage according to the displacement of the sorting means and The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a second ingress / retraction portion, wherein the first ingress / retraction portion is formed to be able to distribute game balls flowing down the downflow passage to the second branch passage by projecting into the first branch passage. It is formed on the downstream side of the first branch passage with respect to the projection / recession portion, and by projecting into the first branch passage, the flow of the gaming balls distributed to the first branch passage can be restricted. And one of the second projecting and retracting parts displaces the distributing means in accordance with the displacement of the displacing member since one of the first and second projecting parts retracts out of the path of the first branch path when the other projects into the path of the first branch path. Then, only the specified number of gaming balls are distributed to the first branch passage and used as the displacement member. It can be only taken.

  In other words, the first projecting / projecting section projects the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage into a second branch passage, and the first projecting / retracting section retracts the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage. The second state of distributing to the first branch passage, and the third state of restricting the flow-down of the gaming ball distributed to the first branch passage (retention of the game ball) by the second projecting / recessing portion projecting, and 2 By retreating the appearance part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the gaming ball stored in the first branch passage is made to flow down and be received by the displacement member, and combining these respective states, it is prescribed Only the number of gaming balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

  Further, according to the gaming machine B8, since the sorting means includes the first and second projecting portions and the second projecting and receding portions, that is, it is formed as one part, the structure of the sorting means (the first and second projecting and retracting portions Can be simplified) in order to operate them and to perform their functions. Furthermore, in the state where one of the first and second projecting parts and the second projecting and projecting part protrudes into the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the first branch passage, so that two positions of the displacement member (switching position And depending on the receiving position, it is sufficient if the distributing means is also formed displaceable in two positions. That is, the first to fourth states described above can be formed by displacing the distributing means at the two positions. Therefore, the structure of the distributing means and the structure for displacing the distributing means with the displacement of the displacing member can be simplified, and the reliability of the distributing operation of the game balls can be improved accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention which makes distribution unit 500 an example>
A falling passage through which gaming balls flow down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the flowing passage, and a gaming ball flowing down the flow passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage A gaming machine having a sorting means for sorting, characterized in that the gaming state changing means is located downstream of the sorting means, and regulates or allows the flow of gaming balls in the first branch passage. Game machine C1.

  Here, the flow-down passage in which the gaming balls flow down, the first branch passage and the second branch passage branched from the flow-down passage, and the gaming ball flowing in the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. There is known a gaming machine provided with a sorting means for sorting (for example, JP-A-2014-223176). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the gaming balls flowing down the flow-through passage are only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, it is insufficient to give the player an interest There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the player is provided with flow state changing means located downstream of the distribution means and restricting or permitting the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage. Can be given.

  That is, by the operation of the flow-down state changing means, the flow-down of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage is restricted to store the game ball in the first branch passage, and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is allowed. The game ball stored in the first branch passage can be made to flow down (open). Thereby, in addition to the operation of distributing the gaming balls flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of stopping the flow of the gaming balls distributed to the first branch passage at one end And an operation of flowing down (opening) the stopped (stored) gaming ball. As a result, the player can be given an interest.

  The gaming machine C1 includes an integral member in which the sorting means and the flow-down state changing means are integrally formed, and in a state where the sorting destination by the sorting means is the first branch path, the first branch path In the state where the flow down of the game ball in is restricted by the flow down state changing means and the distribution destination by the distribution means is the second branch passage, the flow down of the game ball in the first branch passage is by the flow down state change means A gaming machine C2 characterized by being acceptable.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are integrally formed with an integral member, so the distribution means and the flow-down state changing means are operated. It is possible to simplify the structure and improve the reliability of the operation. That is, when the distributing means and the flow-down state changing means are separately formed, there are two parts, so the structure for operating the two parts becomes complicated and the reliability of the operation is lowered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the sorting means and the flowing state changing means can be formed as one part, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced and the operation reliability can be improved. Can be

  Further, in this case, when the distribution destination by the distribution means is made the first branch passage by the operation of the integral member, the flow-down state change means regulates the flow-down of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage. When the game ball is stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution unit is set as the second branch passage, the flow state change unit allows the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage and stores it in the first branch passage. The game ball being played can be made to flow down (open). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, an operation of stopping the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage one end (reserving); Not only can the stopped (stored) game balls be allowed to flow down (open), but these storage and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the sorting operation.

  In the gaming machine C2, the integrated member is displaceably formed in the first state position and the second state position, and in a state in which the integrated member is displaced to the first state position, the sorting means is the first distribution position. (1) The branch passage is disposed at a distribution destination, and the flow-down state changing means is disposed at a position for restricting the flow of gaming balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position In the state, the distribution means is disposed at a position where the second branch passage is a distribution destination, and the flow-down state change means is disposed at a position where flow-down of gaming balls in the first branch passage is allowed. A gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the integral member is displaceable between the first state position and the second state position, and in the state in which the integral member is displaced to the first state position The distributing means is arranged at the position to which the first branch passage is to be distributed, and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at the position to restrict the flow of gaming balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position In the closed state, the distributing means is arranged at the position to which the second branch passage is to be distributed and the flow-down state changing means is arranged at the position to allow the game ball to flow down in the first branch passage. By displacing the game ball at two positions (first state position and second state position), in addition to the operation of distributing the gaming balls flowing down the down flow passage to one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, Sorted game It is possible to form an operation of stopping (storing) one end of the flow of fluid and an operation of flowing down (opening) the stopped (stored) gaming ball, and interlocking the operation of storing and releasing with the distributing operation Can be formed alternately. That is, the structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost and improve the operation reliability.

  In the gaming machine C3, the integral member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed to be able to protrude and retract with respect to the first branch passage, and the game ball is projected by projecting into the first branch passage. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is formed in an arc-like curved shape centering on the rotation axis of the integral member while restricting the flow-down.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the integral member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow-down state changing means is formed to be able to protrude and retract to the first branch passage, and the first branch passage Since it is formed in the shape curved in the shape of a circular arc centering on the axis of rotation of the integral member by controlling the flow down of the game ball by projecting to the inner wall, the inner wall of the first branch passage for the appearance of the flow down state changing means It is possible to reduce the area of the holes opened in the

  In the gaming machine C4, the flow-down state changing means is disposed in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch path is concave.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4, the flowing state changing means is disposed in a posture in which the side facing the upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so the flowing state changed to the first branch passage In the initial state in which the means starts to project (that is, only the tip side of the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the passage), the shape of the tip-side of the flow-down state changing means tends to restrict the flow of the gaming ball It can be disposed in the direction, and it is easy to restrict the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage.

  In addition, in the state where the flow-down state changing means is maximally projected to the first branch passage and restricts the flow-down of the gaming ball, the game ball can be stably held by the depression of the flow-down state changing means, thereby preventing runaway of the game ball .

  In the gaming machine C4 or C5, the inflow state changing means is provided with an urging means for applying an urging force to the integral member so that the inflowing state changing means projects in the direction of the first branch passage. A game machine C6 characterized in that the distance to the rotation shaft of the integral member is larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation shaft of the integral member.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the inflow state changing means is provided with biasing means for biasing in the direction of projecting into the first branch passage by applying biasing force to the integral member. Therefore, utilizing such an urging force, the integral member can be easily maintained in the posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage.

  In this case, in the gaming machine C6, the distance from the flow-down state changing means to the rotation shaft of the integral member is larger than the distance from the distribution means to the rotation shaft of the integral member And, even if the same impact force is applied because the distance from the rotation axis is large, the flowing direction changing means is easily immersed, the biasing direction of the biasing means, the flowing state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage By setting it as the direction which it carries out, it can suppress that the flow-down state change means is immersed by the part | minute of the urging | biasing force.

  In the gaming machine C6, the integrated member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage by its own weight.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the integral member is rotated in the direction in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage by its own weight. The member can be easily maintained in the posture (that is, the first state position) in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the sinking of the flow state changing means by the weight of the game ball.

  In addition, even when the biasing means is dropped, the game ball is allowed to flow down to the first branch passage while maintaining the integrated part in a posture in which the flow-down state changing means protrudes to the first branch passage by its own weight. It can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage, and the flow-down of the game ball in the first branch passage is restricted by the flow-down state changing means, In a state in which a specified number of game balls are stored in a branch passage, a game ball flowing down the flow-down passage is formed to be able to flow down to the second branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is the first branch passage and the flow of the game ball in the first branch passage is the flow state change means In the state where it is regulated by the first branch passage and the specified number of game balls are stored, the game balls flowing down the flow down passage are formed to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so more than the specified number of game balls flow down When flowing down the passage, it is possible to prevent the game balls from remaining in the flow-down passage by more than a specified number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of setting the distribution destination to the second branch passage) is inhibited by the gaming ball stuck in the flow-down passage.

  In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall facing the second branch passage in the flow-down passage is the end of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage A game machine C9 characterized in that the game ball is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the second branch passage side in the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8, the inner wall facing the second branch passage in the flow-down passage has a specified number of gaming balls which flow down the flow-down passage and are stored in the first branch passage. Since the guide ball is formed to be able to be guided to the side of the second branch passage in the last game ball among the game balls, the game ball flowing down the flow down passage is made to collide with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls. After that, it can be easily made to flow down to the second branch passage.

  The game ball at the end of the specified number of game balls means a game ball located on the upstream side (opposite to the flow-down state changing means). In addition, when the prescribed number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

  In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downstream direction of the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a direction different from the downstream direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downstream direction of the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a direction different from the downstream direction of the upstream end of the first branch passage. When the flowing game ball collides with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force applied to the last game ball is the same as that of the first branch passage. It can be different from the downstream direction of the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to suppress the trailing gaming ball from jumping out from the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force at the time of the collision.

  In any one of the game machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed to be able to withdraw from or into the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position is the flow-down direction at the downstream end of the flow-down passage. A game machine C11 characterized by being an inner wall on the extension of

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the sorting means is formed to be able to enter and exit from the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the appearance position is flowed down Since the inner wall is on the extension of the downstream direction at the downstream end of the passage, the sorting means can be protruded at a position close to the gaming ball flowing down from the downstream end of the downstream passage. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the start of projecting the sorting means to the down flow path or the first branch path until the gaming balls can be distributed. As a result, it is possible to more reliably switch the distribution destination by the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine C11, the distribution means is for projecting game balls flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage by being projected to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage, and the distribution A game machine C12 characterized in that the projecting direction of the means is set to point to the upstream end of the second branch passage.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C11, the sorting means is for projecting the game ball flowing down the flow-down passage to the second branch passage by being projected to the flow-down passage or the first branch passage. Since the projecting direction of the distributing means is set to the direction toward the upstream end of the second branch passage, the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down passage abuts on the distributing means in the middle of the projecting operation. The game ball can be pushed into the second branch passage along with the projecting operation of the distributing means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the gaming ball is formed to be able to roll the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. A game machine C13 characterized in that the changing means is formed to be able to enter and exit into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream and the gaming ball is an inner wall on the lower side in the gravity direction. The roll state changer is formed so as to be able to slide into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The time required to be able to regulate the flow of the ball can be shortened. As a result, when the sorting destination of the sorting means is switched from the second branch path to the first branch path and the gaming ball is distributed to the first branch path, the flow state change means of the flow control of the gaming ball The protrusion can be easily made in time.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed to be able to get in and out with respect to the first branch passage, and in a state of projecting at least to the first branch passage, A gaming machine C14 characterized in that a force component is applied from the gaming ball to the flowing state changing means.

  According to the gaming machine C14, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow-down state changing means is formed to be able to enter and retract with respect to the first branch passage, and protrudes in at least the first branch passage. Since a force component in the direction of movement is applied from the game ball to the flow-down state changing means, when restricting the flow-down of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage, the flow is caused by an impact when the game ball collides. It is possible to suppress immersion of the state change means. Therefore, it is possible to easily restrict the flow of the game ball.

<About the concept of the invention which makes lower displacement unit 400 an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a base member disposed on one side of the base member so as to be displaceable on one side, and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable, the base accompanying displacement of the displacement member. A game machine D1 characterized by comprising suppression means for suppressing a reaction of members.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a base member, a base member on one side of which is disposed displaceably on one side thereof, and a displacement member disposed on the base member in a displaceable manner (for example, JP-A-2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between the overhanging position where it is visible to the player by overhanging the game area and the retracted position where it is retracted from the game area, the base member is In the state of being disposed at the overhanging position, an effect of displacing the displacement member can be performed.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is disposed displaceably on the base member, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the base member rattles against the base member with the one side as a fulcrum Was apt to occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the suppression means for suppressing the reaction of the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is provided, the occurrence of rattling of the base member relative to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

  In addition, as a reaction force accompanying displacement of the displacement member, for example, it is generated by the change of the center of gravity accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, or generated by the action of inertia force accompanying the increase / decrease of the displacement speed of the displacement member For example, those generated with the reaction force when the displacement member is displaced and the game ball is emitted are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes a disposing member disposed displaceably on the base member, the displacing member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the disposing member is A game machine D2 that is displaceable when the game ball is emitted from the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes a disposing member disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displacing member is capable of holding the game ball and emitting it. Since the disposition member is displaceable when the gaming ball is emitted from the displacement member, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member can be suppressed. That is, when the game ball is fired from the displacement member, the center of gravity of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, in the direction to offset the change of the center of gravity with the release of the game ball. When the configuration for displacing the installation member is adopted, the occurrence of rattling of the base member due to the change of the center of gravity can be suppressed. In addition, when the game ball is fired from the displacement member, the base member is subjected to a reaction with the launch of the game ball, for example, a configuration for displacing the disposition member in a direction to cancel the reaction associated with the launch of the game ball When employed, the occurrence of rattling of the base member associated with the reaction can be suppressed.

  In the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, the game machine D3 includes a reverse member which is displaced with at least a displacement component in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, the reverse member is displaced with at least a displacement component in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Since it comprises, it can make small that the gravity center position of a base member changes with displacement of a displacement member by displacement of a reverse member. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling of the base member due to the change of the center of gravity position.

  If the displacement of the opposite member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, it is possible to cancel at least a part of both of the inertial forces. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stop state.

  The gaming machine D2 or D3 includes a transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the disposition member and / or the reverse member to displace the disposition member and / or the reverse member. Gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the transmission mechanism for transmitting the displacement of the displacement member to the disposition member or / and the reverse member to displace the disposition member or / and the reverse member Therefore, there is no need to separately provide drive means for displacing the arrangement member and / or the reverse member. That is, the drive means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the drive means for displacing the disposition member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced accordingly, and rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Further, since the arrangement and / or the reverse member can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, for example, the position of the displacement member is detected by the sensor device, and the disposition is arranged according to the detection result. It is not necessary to control to drive the member or (and) the opposite member by the driving means, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) the opposite member with respect to the displacement member Can be secured.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts displacement from a second position, and displacement starts from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. The game machine D5, which is capable of forming at least the base member arranged at a predetermined position relative to the base member, starts displacement from the first position.

  Here, when the displacement member is displaced from the stop state, the change in acceleration is maximized, and therefore the base member tends to rattle due to the influence of the inertial force.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts displacement from the second position, and one side of the base member than the second position. And the base member is disposed at a predetermined position with respect to the base member (for example, the base member protrudes from the game area to the player) In the overhanging position which is made visible, since the displacement is started from the first position, rattling of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, by setting the first position as the start position of the displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the displacement member can be The member can be brought close to the fulcrum when rattling with respect to the base member, and accordingly, the influence of the inertial force when the displacement member is displaced from the stop state can be made difficult to act on the base member. As a result, rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

  The gaming machine D5 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear engaged with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the gaming machine D6 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member, and a rack member on which a rack gear is engaged with the pinion gear. When starting displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is one side of the base member (the base member is relative to the base member It can be kept close to the fulcrum). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress rattling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stop state.

  In the gaming machine D6, a displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction in which it is separated from one side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is the direction in which the displacement member is away from one side of the base member. The rack member can be closer to one side of the base member in the state of being disposed in That is, in order to displace the displacing member (rack member) in a direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member is based on the portion on the rack gear side where the pinion gear is engaged after displacement of the displacing member is started. It will be directed to one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the support point when the base member rattles against the base member), and as a result, the displacement member is displaced from the stop state. The rattling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the base member includes a support structure for movably supporting one side of the base member, and a drive mechanism for driving the base member supported by the support structure, The displacing member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism restricts the displacement of the base member in the direction of the reaction when the game ball is emitted from the displacing member. A game machine D8 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a supporting structure for movably supporting one side of the base member on the base member and a base member supported on the supporting structure are driven. The displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is to displace the base member in the direction of the reaction when the game ball is emitted from the displacement member. Since the control means to control is provided, it can suppress that a base member is displaced with respect to a base member in reaction. As a result, the occurrence of rattling of the base member can be suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body formed so as to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, the game machine further comprises a displacement member arranged displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body. A game machine E1 to be characterized.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member which is rotatably formed and arranged so that the outer peripheral surface thereof can be visually recognized by a player (for example, JP-A-2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since it is only possible to form the effect mode for causing the player to visually recognize the display on the outer peripheral surface with the rotation or stop of the rotating member, the change in the effect mode is scarce. Was insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member disposed displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is provided, the player can display the outer peripheral surface as the rotating body member rotates or stops. In addition to the effect mode for visual recognition, since the effect mode for displacing the displacement member can be formed, the effect can be enhanced by providing a change to the effect mode.

  In addition, the cross-sectional shape cut | disconnected by the plane perpendicular | vertical to the rotating shaft does not need to be circular, and a rotating body member may be polygonal shape, elliptical shape, and the shape which combined them. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member may not be the peripheral surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and in the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is formed by the displacement member. In the second position, at least a part of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be reduced, and accordingly, the space required for rotating the rotating body can be reduced. On the other hand, when the displacing member is displaced to the second position, at least a part of the displacing member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating member, which makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the displacing member. Can be enhanced. Also, for example, by rotating the rotating member in a state where the displacing member is disposed at the first position, and displacing the displacing member to the second position when the rotation of the rotating member is stopped (displaced), It is possible to form an aspect in which the portion (displacement member) that has been recognized as the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member protrudes outward in the radial direction of the rotating body member, and the interest can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine E2 includes light emitting means for emitting light, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is the second When displaced to a position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened, and the internal space is communicated with the outside.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the light emitting means for emitting light is provided, and the rotating member is formed to have an internal space, and the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space When the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside, so that light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside, and the displacement member Is displaced to the first position, it is possible to block the outgoing radiation to the outside. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, a game machine E4 comprising a drive means for generating a drive force and a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the rotating body member and the displacement member. .

  Here, in order to form the rotating body member rotatably and displacably arrange the displacement member on the rotating body member, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body member and the displacement member, and the product cost is reduced. It is bulky. In addition, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the rotating body member, the weight of the rotating body member increases, so it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means to the rotating member and the displacement member Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, the rotation of the rotating member and the displacement of the displacement member can be performed by using one driving means. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to mount the drive means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating body member, the weight of the rotating body member can be reduced, and the rotation of the rotating body member can be smoothly started or stopped.

  In the gaming machine E4, the drive means is formed so as to be capable of generating rotational drive force, and the transmission means is a rotation-side transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the rotating drum member; A displacement side transmission means for transmitting a rotation drive force to the displacement member, and the rotation drive force for transmission to one of the rotation side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means according to the rotation direction of the rotation drive force of the drive means. A game machine E5 comprising: a one-way clutch mechanism for blocking transmission to the other.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the drive means is formed to be able to generate rotational drive force, and the transmission means transmits the rotational drive force of the drive means to the rotating member. Means, the displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the displacement member, and the rotational drive force according to the rotational direction of the rotational drive force of the drive means is transmitted to one of the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means In addition, since the one-way clutch mechanism for blocking the transmission to the other is provided, only by switching the rotation direction of the drive means, it is possible to switch the drive target (rotational member or displacement member) to be driven by the rotational drive force. That is, according to the rotation direction of the drive means, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the rotating member and the stop of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stop of the displacement, thereby making it possible to form a plurality of modes. It can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the rotating body member, and one gear of the gear train. A game machine E6 comprising: a load gear to be engaged.

  Here, in the structure in which the driving object (the rotating drum member or the displacement member) is switched according to the rotation direction of the driving means using the one-way clutch mechanism, if the transmission of the driving force from the driving means is interrupted, It is possible to freely rotate or displace in the direction driven by the driving force. Therefore, for example, when the drive target of the drive means is switched from the rotating body member to the displacement member and transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body member becomes rotatable and continues to rotate by inertia force (rotation) There is a risk of

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E5, the rotation-side transmission means forms a gear train forming part or all of the transmission path for transmitting the rotational drive force of the drive means to the rotating member. And the load gear engaged with one gear of the gear train, so that the load (resistance when the load gear is rotated even if the transmission of the rotational drive force from the drive means is interrupted). Can be used to suppress continued rotation of the rotating member.

  The gaming machine E5 or E6 includes reverse rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating body member in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, there is provided a reverse rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the revolving drum member in the direction opposite to the direction rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided, for example, it is possible to suppress the reverse rotation of the rotating body member due to the deviation of the center of gravity position of the rotating body member, the collision of the game balls, or the like.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is opened, and the internal space Is communicated with the game area, and a game machine E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3, the rotating body member is formed to have an internal space, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is displaced when the displacement member is displaced to the second position. Is opened, and the internal space is communicated to the game area, so the game ball flowing down the game area is made to flow into the internal space of the rotating member or the gaming ball in the internal space of the rotating member is discharged to the game area It can be done. In addition, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is closed, thereby blocking the flow of the game ball between the internal space and the game area. As a result, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E8, when one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the rotating body member and the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is the game A game machine E9 characterized by being projected into a region.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, the displacement member is pivotally supported by the rotating member at one side so that the displacement member is displaced to the second position. Since the other side which is to be projected is extended to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space of the rotating member by utilizing the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine E9, in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface is inclined downward from the other side to the one side.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, the upper surface of the displacement member is inclined downward from the other side to the one side in the state of being displaced to the second position. After receiving the dropped game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) to the inner space of the rotating member along the descending inclination of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space of the rotating member by utilizing the displacement member.

  A game machine E11 characterized by comprising, in the game machine E9 or E10, displacement setting means for restricting or allowing displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating body member.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9 or E10, since the displacement setting means for restricting or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotating member is provided, the projecting displacement member Interference with other members around the rotating member can be suppressed.

  In any one of the game machines E9 to E11, the game machine further comprises a rotation restricting means for restricting the rotation of the rotating member, the displacement restricting member being displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member being the rotation restricting member. A game machine E12 characterized by restricting rotation of the rotating body member when it is projected to the game area.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, the gaming machine E12 is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating member, and the displacement regulating member is displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member is projected to the game area, the rotation of the rotation member is restricted, so that the rotation member is rotated in a state in which the displacement member is projected and positioned on the rotation locus Interference of the displacement member with other members can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress that the rotating body member is rotated by the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a rotating body formed so as to be rotatable and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so as to be visible to a player, the rotating body has an inner space formed inside and an outer space outside thereof. A game machine F1 comprising: a communication port communicating with the communication port and a communication port formed to allow passage of the game ball.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rotating body member which is rotatably formed and arranged so that the outer peripheral surface thereof can be visually recognized by a player (for example, JP-A-2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the rotating body member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (pattern) of the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player by rotating the rotating body member or stopping the rotating body member. be able to. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the use of the rotating body member is insufficient only by being used as a member for holding the display for causing the player to visually recognize on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The That is, since it is necessary to hold the display which can be visually recognized by the player, the rotating body member is formed relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the rotating body member is increased, parts other than the outer peripheral surface are not utilized.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the rotating body member is provided with the internal space formed therein and the communication port formed to allow the gaming ball to pass therethrough while communicating the internal space to the outside. The gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body member, which is a dead space, can function as a storage space of the gaming ball or a throwing passage, and the rotating body member can be utilized accordingly.

  The communication port may be formed at only one position of the rotating body member, or may be formed at two or more positions. When the communication port is formed at only one place, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member. Thus, the position of the communication port can be moved up and down in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating member, so that the game ball flows into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward) At the same time, the game balls can be made to flow into the internal space, and the game balls in the internal space can be made to flow out when the communication port faces downward.

  In addition, the rotating body member does not have to have a circular cross-sectional shape cut in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member may not be the peripheral surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

  In the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes the first communication port and the second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is an inlet through which gaming balls flow into the internal space from the outside, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outlet through which the gaming balls flow out from the internal space It can be done. That is, even if the rotating body member is not rotated (while keeping the stopped state), the rotating body member can be used as a throwing passage of the gaming ball. In addition, when the rotating body member is being rotated, the rotating body member may be used as a throwing passage.

  In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body, and is formed as an inlet for allowing game balls flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is A game machine F3 formed on an end face in the rotation axis direction of the rotating body member, and formed as an outlet for flowing game balls from the internal space to the game area.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the spinning drum member and is formed as an inlet for flowing the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area into the internal space. The second communication port is formed on the end face of the rotating shaft direction of the rotating member, and is formed as an outlet for letting the gaming ball flow out from the internal space to the game area, so that the gaming ball to the internal space of the rotating member The player can easily make the player visually recognize the inflow, and the game balls can be discharged while maintaining the rotating body member in the stop state.

  That is, since the first communication port (inflow port) is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member while the outer peripheral surface is provided so as to be visible from the player, the player can recognize the inflow of gaming balls. It can be done easily. On the other hand, when the second communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member, the game ball can not flow out of the internal space when the rotating body member is displaced to the rotational position where the communication port is upward. Since the second communication port (outlet) is formed on the end face of the rotating member in the direction of the rotation axis, it is possible to form a state in which the gaming ball can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotating position of the rotating member.

  In any one of game machines F1 to F3, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body member is provided, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is displaced. A game machine F4 which is shielded by a member and the communication port is opened when the displacement member is displaced to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the displacement member disposed displaceably on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is provided, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position Then, the communication port is shielded by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the outflow and inflow of the game ball through the communication port is blocked and allowed. It can be switched.

  In the gaming machine F4, the communication port is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body, the displacement member is rotatably supported at one side by the rotating body, and the displacement member is at the second position. A game machine F5 characterized in that when displaced, the other side opposite to the one side is projected to the game area.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is pivotally supported by the rotating member at one side so that the displacement member is displaced to the second position. Since the other side which is to be projected is extended to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, it is possible to make the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area easy to flow into the internal space of the rotating body member by using the displacement member.

  In the game machine F5, the displacement member is positioned such that one side thereof is located forward of the other side in the rotational direction of the rotating body member.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, the displacement member is positioned forward in the rotational direction of the rotation member relative to the other side, so that the rotation member is rotated. Even if the displacement member interferes with the member disposed around the rotating body member, the force generated by the interference can act in the closing direction (displacement to the first position) of the displacement member. That is, it is possible to suppress that the displacement member interferes with other members and is overhanged (displaced to the second position) when the rotating body member rotates. Moreover, it can suppress that a displacement member engages with another member and rotation of a rotation member is inhibited.

  In any one of game machines F1 to F6, a base member on which the rotating body member is rotatably disposed, and a base member supported by the base member and disposed in an inner space of the rotating body member A game machine F7 comprising: a fixed member which is made non-rotatable.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the base member on which the rotating body member is rotatably disposed, and the inner space of the rotating body member supported by the base member , And the game ball introduced into the internal space is held by the fixing member or rolled on the fixing member toward the outlet. The game ball can be prevented from going wild in the internal space or the rolling of the game ball being inhibited and staying in the internal space as the rotating body member rotates.

  A game machine F8 comprising: displacement setting means for restricting or allowing displacement of the displacement member in any one of the game machines F4 to F6 in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating body member.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, displacement setting means for restricting or allowing displacement of the displacement member in accordance with the rotational position of the rotating member is provided. Interference of the displaced displacement member with other members around the rotating member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the gaming machine F5 or F6 is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating body member, the displacement regulating member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is disposed to the gaming area A game machine F9 characterized by restricting rotation of the rotating body member when it is extended.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5 or F6, the gaming machine F9 is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotating body member, and the displacement regulating member is displaced to the second position. When the other side is extended to the game area, the rotation of the rotating member is restricted, so that the rotating member is rotated in a state in which the displacement member is extended, and another member located on the rotation locus Interference with the displacement member can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress that the rotating body member is rotated by the load acting when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

  In the gaming machine F3, light emitting means is formed so as to emit light and is provided in the inner space of the rotating body member, and the second communication port is an end face in the rotation axis direction of the rotating body member. A game machine F10 comprising: an end face to be formed and an opening formed in an end face on the opposite side, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the opening is formed on the end surface of the rotating drum member in the rotation axis direction opposite to the end surface on which the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening, it is easy to secure a usable space for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly drained through the second communication port, and the wiring work to the opening of the electrical connection line can be facilitated. Further, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated as much as possible, it is possible to easily suppress the interference between the game ball rolling in the inner space to the second communication port and the electrical connection line.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
It is provided with a first member and a second member formed displaceably, and a covering position where the first member covers at least a part of the second member in an invisible manner and a state where the first member is arranged in the covering position In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first member is displaceable to the retracted position, and the second member is displaceable to the retracted position where the first member is displaceably formed between the retracted position and the retracted position for reducing the area covering the second member invisibly. A game machine G1 characterized in that it is capable of regulating the displacement of the game machine G1.

  Here, the first member includes a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed, and the first member is disposed at a covering position that covers at least a part of the second member in an invisible manner and at the covering position There is known a gaming machine which is more displaceable between a retracted position where the second member can not be seen visually, and a retracted position which reduces the area (e.g., JP-A-2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the first member is disposed at the covering position, and the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from the state in which the second member is not visible from the player. It is possible to perform an effect of making the player visually recognize.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the second member is formed to be displaceable, when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is displaced. There is a risk of As a result, the player can not visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state, and the effect of rendering is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member in the state of being displaced to the retracted position, so the player is held in the proper state of the second member. The visual effects can be secured. That is, when performing the effect of displacing the first member to the retracted position and exposing the second member, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position which must be performed for the effect is the second member Use as a means to regulate displacement. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism for restricting the displacement of the second member or to perform control, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

  In the gaming machine G1, a gaming machine G2 characterized in that the second member is formed rotatably and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the center of rotation.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed rotatably and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member Can be enhanced. That is, the second member does not have to have a shape whose center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and can adopt, for example, an asymmetric shape with respect to the rotation axis, thereby enhancing the rendering effect by the second member. . On the other hand, when the position of the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric as described above, there is a possibility that the second member may rotate (rotate) about its center of rotation by its own weight. Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the effect of presentation.

  The gaming machine G1 or G2 includes a displacing member disposed displaceably on the second member, and the displacing member is displaceable so that at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. A game machine G3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member is provided, and at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the displacement effect is further enhanced by displacing the displacement member, so that the effect is enhanced. Can. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity moves with the displacement, and the second member may be rotated (rotational). Therefore, the configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, thereby allowing the player to visually recognize the second member in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the effect of presentation.

  In the gaming machine G3, the outer peripheral surface of the second member is disposed so as to be visible to the player, the one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the one side is A game machine G4 characterized in that the other side which is the opposite side is formed so as to be able to be projected to the game area.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the second member is disposed such that the outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, and one side of the displacement member is rotatable to the outer peripheral surface of the second member Since the other side opposite to one side is formed to be able to project to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the top surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the inflow port of the game ball is formed in the second member, the game ball flowing down the game area can be made to easily flow the game ball into the inflow port using the displacement member. . In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the second member may be rotated by the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, whereby a state in which the displacement member is projected to a predetermined position in the game area Can be easier to maintain.

  In the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member in the covering position, and is outside the gaming area in the retracted position. A game machine G5 characterized in that the game machine is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer peripheral surface of the second member at the covering position, so the game flows down the gaming area It is possible to suppress that the ball collides with the second member and the second member is rotated. In particular, when the rotational position of the second member is a rotational position to turn the displacement member toward the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tension Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first member is disposed outside the game area at the retracted position, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position can secure a space for the displacement member to project into the game area. . Accordingly, the outer peripheral surface of the second member can be brought closer to the gaming area side (player side) by that amount, and the player can easily make the displacement member visible.

  In the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed rotatably in a plate shape which is formed so as to be rotatable about a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member and curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A game machine G6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed rotatably around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer peripheral surface of the second member Since it is formed in the shape of a plate curving along the line, it is possible to reduce the space required for displacement between the covering position and the retracted position. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space for arranging other members. In addition, by curving the first member in this manner, the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area is prevented from being retained on the first member disposed at the covering position, and thus smoothly. It can be drained.

  One of the gaming machines G3 to G6 comprises a driving means for generating a driving force, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member. .

  Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and displacably arrange the displacement member on the second member, a driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, and the product cost is reduced. It is bulky. In addition, when the driving means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the weight of the second member increases, and it becomes difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the second member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G3 to G6, the driving means for generating the driving force and the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member Since the transmission means for transmitting is provided, the rotation of the second member and the displacement of the displacement member can be performed by using one driving means. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced. Moreover, since it is not necessary to mount the drive means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and the rotation or start of the rotation of the second member can be smoothly performed.

  A game machine G8 comprising connecting means for connecting the first member and the displacement member and interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member in the game machine G7.

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the first member and the displacement member are coupled, and the connection means for interlocking the displacement of the first member with the displacement of the displacement member is provided. The driving means for driving can be used also as a driving means for moving the first displacement member. In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of the separate drive means, there is a possibility that the displacement member and the first member may interfere with each other when the control failure occurs. Since one member can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacement, interference between the displacement member and the first member can be reliably suppressed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Rotation Unit 700 as an Example>
In the gaming machine, the transmission means includes a drive means for generating a drive force, a displacement member displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the displacement member. A first member, a second member positioned closer to the displacement member in the drive force transmission path than the first member, and an engagement member disposed between the first member and the second member When the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engagement member is engaged with the first member and the second member to transmit the driving force. And the second member is displaced in advance in the one direction with respect to the first member in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member.

  Here, a gaming machine is known which comprises a drive means for generating a drive force, a displacement member displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means for transmitting the drive force of the drive means to the displacement member. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the drive means to the displacement member is always constant, the displacement member is also constant when the drive means is driven at a constant drive speed. It is displaced at the displacement speed, and no change can be given to the displacement mode of such a displacement member. Therefore, there is a problem that the rendering effect of the rendering accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient.

  The displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the driving means, but the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in the other sections. In order to achieve the speed, a sensor device for detecting the position of the displacement member is disposed, and control is required to increase or decrease the output of the drive means according to the detection result of the sensor device, resulting in increased product cost and control cost. . In addition, the structure and control become complicated, and the reliability thereof is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the transmission means includes the first member, the second member positioned closer to the displacement member in the drive power transmission path than the first member, and the first member and the second member. And the engaging member is engaged with the first member and the second member when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member. The driving force is transmitted, and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced forward in one direction with respect to the first member. Thus, regardless of the driving state of the drive means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections. Therefore, a change can be given to the displacement aspect of a displacement member, and the rendering effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be heightened.

  Further, according to the gaming machine H1, the second member can be made to advance in one direction with respect to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means. For example, in all sections in the displacement section of the displacement member, The drive means can be driven at a constant drive speed, and there is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive means in the middle of the displacement section of the displacement member (that is, depending on a predetermined section or another section). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operation reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the drive of the drive means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, the consumption energy can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the gaming machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engaging member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. The displacement member can be brought to a stop state (non-drive state), and the drive force of the drive means in such a drive state can be used as a drive force for driving other members. That is, by switching the drive direction of the drive means, the two members of the displacement member and the other members can be displaced respectively.

  The transmission means is formed such that, when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed, and the position of the center of gravity is eccentric from the rotation center, and in the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member moves the second member in the one direction. A game machine H2 characterized in that it is formed to be operable in the direction of displacement.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is rotatably formed and its center of gravity position is eccentric from the rotation center, and in a predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member is The second member can be displaced in advance in one direction with respect to the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacement member because it is formed to be operable in the direction of displacing the two members in one direction. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  For example, when the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of repeating 360 degrees of rotation about its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotational speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is An aspect in which the displacement speed (rotational speed) is made faster, that is, a rotational aspect in which the rotational speed is increased or decreased during one rotation can be repeated.

  In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is a main body rotatably driven by the second member and a crank member having a pin portion protruding from the main body portion and located eccentrically from the rotational center of the main body portion; The crank member includes an arm member having a slide groove formed at one end thereof for slidably inserting a pin portion of the crank member and rotatably supported at an intermediate portion, the other end of the arm member being displaced A game machine H3 characterized in that it is connected to a member.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the transmission means is provided protruding from the main body rotationally driven by the second member and the main body and located eccentrically from the rotational center of the main body Since the crank member having the pin portion and the sliding groove in which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed at one end side and the intermediate portion is rotatably supported rotatably, the arm member is provided. By rotating the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position along with the reciprocation of the other end of the arm member. . That is, the displacement direction of the displacement member can be switched without switching the drive direction of the drive means.

  In the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position along with the reciprocation of the other end side of the arm member, and is displaced from the first position to the second position. And in the middle of being displaced from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member corresponds to the second member. A game machine H4 characterized in that the second member is changed in the direction of displacement from the direction of displacement in the direction.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position along with the reciprocation operation on the other end side of the arm member, the first position The direction in which the weight of the displacing member is applied to the second member during the displacement from the second position to the second position and during the displacement from the second position to the first position is the second member Since the second member is displaced in the other direction from the direction in which it is displaced in the other direction, when the displacing member is reciprocated, it is from the middle of the displacement when it is displaced in any direction. The displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an overhanging position (first position), which is a position where the displacement member is visible so as to be visible from the player, and a retraction position, which is the overhanging position or the retracted position (second position). When moving the displacement member from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the displacement member is made to move faster by moving the displacement member at an intermediate speed while displacing the displacement member at a constant displacement speed. The displacement member can be extended to the extension position, and when the displacement member is retracted from the extension position to the extension position, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased from the middle while the displacement is performed at a constant displacement speed. Thus, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidably displaceable, and in the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member is the second member by being inclined downward toward the slide displacement. The gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is operable to move in one direction.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed so as to be slide-displaceable, and in a predetermined section, the displacement member is inclined downward in the direction of slide displacement. Since the second member is operatively formed in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, the weight of the displacing member is used to displace the second member in advance in one direction with respect to the first member. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  In any one of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be capable of holding a game ball at least in the predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed so as to be able to hold the gaming ball at least in a predetermined section, so the displacement member holds the gaming ball In the state, it is possible to increase the weight of the entire displacement member by the weight of the gaming ball, and to accelerate the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section. Also, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made different depending on whether the game ball is held by the displacement member or not, or depending on the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  In any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving portion receives the game ball, the game ball A gaming machine H7 characterized in that a force applied to the displacement member from the second member is acted in a direction of displacing the second member in the one direction.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in any one of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacing member has a receiving portion for receiving the game ball flowing down the game area, and the receiving portion receives the game ball at least in a predetermined section. The force exerted on the displacement member from the gaming ball is formed to be able to act in the direction to displace the second member in one direction, so that when the receiving portion receives the gaming ball, the kinetic energy of the gaming ball Can be used to make the displacement speed of the displacement member faster in a predetermined section. Also, the force applied to the displacement member is made different depending on whether the receiving portion receives or does not receive the game ball, or the flow velocity (size of kinetic energy) of the game ball at the time of receiving. be able to. Thereby, in each case, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, it is possible to impart a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member, and to enhance the effect of the effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

  The game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to the game ball moving along the direction of gravity along the front of the game board, but also includes the game ball moving in a direction different from the direction of gravity. As a game ball which moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity, for example, it collides with a nail, a tulip, a character or the like, and the game ball which moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity The game ball is moved in a direction different from the direction of gravity.

  In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means may include a gear train forming a part or all of a transmission path of the driving force, and a load gear engaged with one gear of the gear train. A game machine H8 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means is engaged with the gear train forming a part or all of the transmission path of the driving force and one gear of the gear train. Since the game ball is held by the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving portion in a predetermined section, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used in a predetermined section. While the second member is displaced relative to the first member in one direction (ie, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section is made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other sections); If the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the game ball is not received by the receiving portion, the second member can be made to the first member by using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear. It is displaced in advance in one direction ( Chi, displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined interval is faster) it can be suppressed.

  That is, when the gaming ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving portion does not receive the gaming ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or when the receiving portion receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section is higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in the other section. It is easy to form an aspect of speeding up.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Back Case 300 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a gaming board, a back member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixed member disposed on the back member, the gaming machine is disposed between the facing from the gaming board to the back member A displacement member provided on the back side of the game board, the displacement member being operable from the outside between the game board and the back member, and the fixing member is provided with a projection that engages with the displacement member. A game machine I1 comprising: a projection part thereof engaged with the displacement member; and the fixing member disposed on the back surface member.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that includes a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member -33603). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by the screws inserted from the front side of the back member. This prevents the fixing member from being removed from the back side of the game board.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the step of arranging the fixing member on the back member is the step of arranging the fixing member on the back member and the step of fastening the fixing member to the back member is the operation from the back side of the back member. And work from the front side of the back member is work from the opposite direction. For this reason, there has been a problem that the number of working processes for arranging the fixing member on the back member is increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the displacement member is disposed between the gaming board and the facing of the back member, and can be operated from the outside of the facing between the gaming board and the backing member on the back side of the gaming board (The displacement member 310), the fixing member includes the protrusion (engaged portion 322) engaged with the displacement member, the protrusion and the displacement member are engaged, and the fixing member is disposed on the back surface member Since it is provided, the fixing member can be disposed on the rear case by the operation in one direction from the rear side. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the process of turning to the front side or reversing the back member after working from the back side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of operation steps for arranging the fixing member on the back member.

  The gaming machine I1 includes a first member disposed between the gaming board and the back member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. I2.

  Here, in recent gaming machines, there is a tendency for a first member (feature device or the like) disposed between facings from the game board to the back member to be upsized. Therefore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the enlarged first member is disposed in front of the fixing member or in a position close to the fixing member, the fixing member is fastened from the front side of the back member At the time, the first member gets in the way. Therefore, it has been difficult to fasten the fixing member with a screw that is inserted from the front side of the back member, and to arrange the fixing member on the back member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the first member disposed between the game board and the back member is provided with the first member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. The displacement member can be engaged with the fixing member by operating the displacement member from the outside between the facing from the game board to the back member in a state where the first member is disposed between the facing to the back member. . Therefore, the fixing member can be disposed on the back member without being disturbed by the first member disposed between the game board and the back member.

  Further, since the displacement member is disposed between the back member and the first member, the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be disposed between the back member and the first member. Therefore, access to the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being unfairly released, and the fixing member from being unfair (for example, being replaced with an incorrect fixing member).

  In the game machine I1 or I2, a game machine I3 characterized in that the displacement member is slide-displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the game board.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the displacement member is slidingly displaced on a plane parallel to the opposing surface of the back member and the game board, so when the displacement member is displaced. The amount of displacement in the opposite direction between the back member and the game board can be zero. Thereby, the space which arrange | positions a 1st member between opposing of a displacement member and a game board can be ensured. As a result, the outer shape of the first member in the opposing direction of the back member and the game board can be enlarged, and the degree of freedom in the design of the first member can be improved.

  In any one of gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member includes a bottom wall facing the gaming board, and a side wall standing from the edge of the bottom wall to the gaming board side. An opening is formed in one of the bottom wall and the side wall, and the displacement member is inserted into the opening and protrudes from the inside of the back member to the outside. A game machine I4 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is erected on the gaming board side from the bottom wall facing the gaming board and the edge of the bottom wall And the side wall portion is formed in a box shape having an opening portion formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted from the inside to the outside of the back member through the opening portion. Since the projecting operation element is provided, the displacement element can be displaced by operating the operation element from the outside of the back surface member (outside between the facing from the game board to the back surface member). Therefore, even if the first member is disposed on the inner side of the back member (between the game board and the back member), the displacement member can be displaced without being disturbed by the first member. .

  The gaming machine I4 is characterized by including biasing means for biasing the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixing member in a state where the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released. A gaming machine I5.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4, the displacement member is biased in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member in a state where the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released. Since the biasing means is provided, the displacement member is engaged with the fixing member when the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged or when the displacement member and the fixing member are not completely engaged. It can be displaced in the release direction. Therefore, the worker can determine whether the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is correct or not at the position where the operation element projecting to the outside of the back surface member is disposed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being forgotten.

  The biasing means may have a spring, a rubber or the like disposed between the displacement member and the back member to bias the displacement member in the direction to release the engagement with the fixing member, or the weight of the displacement member An example is given in which the displacement member is caused to act in the direction for releasing the engagement with the fixing member.

  The gaming machine I4 or I5 includes an outer frame formed in a frame shape that can accommodate the game board and the back member, and an inner shape of the outer frame is an outer shape of the game board and the back member in a front view A gaming machine characterized by being formed substantially in the same manner, and in a state in which the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged, the operation element is disposed outside the facing from the game board to the back member. I6.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4 or I5, the gaming machine is provided with an outer frame formed in a frame shape that can accommodate the gaming board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the gaming board and the back member When the displacement member and the fixing member are not engaged, the operation element is disposed on the outside between the facing from the game board to the back member. When the game board and the back member are accommodated in the outer frame when the second and third fixing members are not engaged with each other, the operation element can be brought into contact with the outer frame. Thereby, it can suppress that a game board and a back member are accommodated in an outer frame. Therefore, when forgetting to dispose the fixing member on the back surface member or when forgetting the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member, the worker can be made to notice the forget (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being accommodated in the outer frame in a state in which the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back surface member or the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is forgotten.

  A game machine I7 according to any one of the game machines I4 to I6, comprising restraining means for suppressing the operation of the operation element in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member. .

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the gaming machine I7 is provided with a restraining means for restraining the operation of the operating element in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member when the operation element is operated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the release of the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member by using the operation element.

  In addition, as a suppressing means which suppresses that an operation element is operated in the direction which cancels engagement of a displacement member and a fixing member, the form supported rotatably so that idleness is possible in the direction which an operation element releases engagement. A mode in which the projecting end of the operating element is formed on an inclined surface projecting in a direction in which the displacement member and the fixing member are disengaged, and a mode in which the operating element is disposed between the displacement member and the fixing member Etc. are illustrated.

  In any one of the game machines I1 to I7, the displacement member includes an elastically deformable elastic piece, and a first protrusion projecting from the elastic piece, and the fixing member displaces the displacement member. The storage portion includes an accommodation portion opened in a region and recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the accommodation portion includes a second projection projectingly provided in the displacement region of the first projection, the second The protrusion abuts on the first protrusion by displacing the displacement member in one direction so that the elastic piece is displaceable, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction. A game machine I8 characterized in that the displacement member and the fixing member are made engageable by coming into contact with one member.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines I1 to I7, the displacing member is provided with an elastically deformable elastic piece and a first projection projecting from the elastic piece, and the fixing member is An accommodating portion opened in a displacement region of the displacing member and recessed in a displacing direction of the displacing member, wherein the accommodating portion includes a second protrusion projecting in a displacing region of the first protrusion; When the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the projection is brought into contact with the first projection to be able to displace the elastic piece, and the displacement member is displaced in the other direction. Since the displacement member and the fixing member are made engageable in contact with each other, the displacement of the displacement member in one direction can be permitted by the second projection, and the displacement in the other direction of the displacement member can be regulated. Thereby, displacement of the displacement member in both directions of the engagement direction with the fixing member and the dismounting direction can be restricted.

  In the gaming machine I8, the housing portion is set to a size capable of housing the elastic piece, and the elastic piece is engaged with the housing portion when the first projection and the second projection are engaged. Is housed in the game machine I9.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I8, the housing portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic pieces, and when the first projection and the second projection are engaged, Since the elastic piece is accommodated in the accommodating portion, it is possible to make it difficult to operate the elastic piece from the outside of the accommodating portion when the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the elastic piece is manipulated from the outside of the housing portion and elastically deformed. As a result, it can be suppressed that the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member is released improperly. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (the base end portion of the received portion) located outside the receiving portion.

  In the gaming machine I9, the displacement member includes a plurality of the elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodation portion, and the accommodation portion is set to a size that can accommodate a plurality of the elastic pieces. Machine I10.

  According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I9, the displacement member is provided with a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating portion, and the accommodating portion is set in a space large enough to accommodate a plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the displacement member (proximal end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the accommodation portion is cut and the fixing member is removed from the back member, the cut displacement member (elasticity piece) is placed inside the accommodation portion The displacement member (elastic piece) which is not cut in that state can be accommodated inside the accommodation portion. Therefore, since the displacement member (elastic piece) which has been cut can be accommodated and left inside the accommodation portion, the number of displacement members accommodated in the accommodation portion is compared with the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member. Then, when the fixing member is illegitimately removed and changed to an illegitimate fixing member, it is possible to make the worker detect that the gaming machine is illegitimate by the number being different.

  In any one of game machines I1 to I10, the first member regulates the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member when the displacement member is engaged with the fixing member. A game machine I11 characterized by comprising a regulation means for

  According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines I1 to I10, when the displacement member is engaged with the fixing member, a regulation that restricts the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member. Since the means is provided, displacement of the displacing member can be restricted when force acts in a direction to release the engagement between the displacing member and the fixing member due to fraud. Therefore, when force acts in a direction in which the displacement member releases the engagement with the fixing member due to fraud, concentration of force in the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fastening member can be suppressed, and therefore fraud It can suppress that a displacement member or a fixing member is damaged by the force input by this.

  Further, since the first member is provided with the restricting means, when the fixing member is removed from the back member, the restriction of the displacement of the displacement member by the restricting means can be released by removing the first member from the back member. In this case, since the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed by removing the first member, the working efficiency at the time of removing the fixing member from the back member can be improved.

  The restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacing member may be, for example, a form in which a protrusion is disposed inside the engagement recess to restrict elastic deformation of the displacing member, or a form in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacing member.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the general winning opening unit 150 as an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, a first decoration means for forming a decoration on the front surface of the base member, and a second decoration means for forming a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in front view; A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the first decoration means and the second decoration means are disposed at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction in front view.

  Conventionally, a base member having a game area on the front side, a first decoration means disposed on the front of the base member and a decoration formed on the front, and a first decoration means disposed on the front of the first decoration means There is known a gaming machine provided with one member and second decoration means disposed in front of the first member and having a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means in front view (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2007-000195). According to this gaming machine, the designability of the base member can be secured by causing the player to visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the second decoration means as one decoration.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the second decoration means is provided in front of the first member, the second decoration means is provided from the first decoration means by the thickness of the first member. It is placed at a distant position. Therefore, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are viewed with a deviation of the thickness of the first member by the position (direction of the line of sight) at which the player visually recognizes the base member. There is a problem that the designability of the member is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, since the first decoration means and the second decoration means are disposed at positions adjacent to each other in the front and back direction in front view, the first decoration means and the second decoration means The distance between front and back can be reduced. Thereby, when the first decorative means and the second decorative means are viewed from an angle inclined to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the decoration of the first decorative means and the decoration of the second decorative means It is possible to prevent the user from being shifted and viewed. Therefore, the player can easily make the player decorate the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration, and the design of the base member can be improved.

  In addition, the first decoration means may be anything on which a decoration is formed. For example, a sealing member having a decoration printed on a plate-like member is attached to the front of the base member, or a decoration on the front of the base member To print.

  When the second decoration means is attached (adhered) to the front of the first decoration means, the worker may attach (adhere) the second decoration means while visually recognizing the decoration of the first decoration means. it can. Therefore, the worker can easily attach the second decoration means to the first decoration means at a position where the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are continuous. Therefore, the workability of the worker who applies the second decoration means to the first decoration means can be improved.

  The gaming machine J1 includes a front member formed of a light transmitting material, having an outer shape larger than an outer shape of the second decoration means in a front view, and provided on a front surface of the second decoration means; The member is provided with a recess which is recessed on the surface facing the second decoration means in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the recess dimension of the recess is greater than the thickness dimension of the second decoration means A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it is also set to a large value.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is formed of a light transmitting material, has an outer shape larger than that of the second decoration means in front view, and is disposed in front of the second decoration means The front member includes a concave portion recessed on the surface opposite to the second decorative means in a shape larger than the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the concave dimension of the concave portion is the second decorative means The front member can be disposed on the base member in a state in which the second decoration means is accommodated in the recess. Thereby, it can control that the 2nd decoration means falls out between the base member and the front member.

  Moreover, since the recess dimension of the recess is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension of the second decoration means, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decoration means. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that dust or dirt gets caught between the front member and the first decoration means and the decoration of the first decoration means becomes less visible.

  The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the recess is formed such that the inner surface is along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is adhered to the bottom surface of the recess of the recess. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2, the recess is formed with the inner side surface along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is adhered to the bottom surface of the recess of the recess Since the second decorative means is provided along the recess of the front member, the second decorative means can be positioned relative to the front member. Thus, when the front member is disposed on the front of the first decoration means, the second decoration means can be prevented from being caught between the edge of the front member and the facing of the first decoration means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decorative means and the front member, and dust and dirt are caught between the front member and the first decorative means to visually recognize the decoration of the first decorative means. It can suppress becoming difficult.

  In the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from the surface facing the base member, and the base member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion, the protrusion Is inserted into the opening to position the front member relative to the base member.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J3, the front member includes a projection that protrudes from the opposite surface to the base member toward the base member, and the base member is an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the projection. Since the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by including the portion and the protrusion is inserted into the opening, the positional deviation of the front member with respect to the first decoration means can be suppressed. The second decoration means is positioned relative to the front member by the recess of the front member. Therefore, by positioning the front member with respect to the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress displacement of the arrangement of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

  In the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the bottom surface of the recess in the recess, and a through hole is formed in the second decoration means at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. Game machine J5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J4, the projection is formed on the bottom of the recessed portion of the recess, and the second decoration means is formed with a through hole penetrating to a position corresponding to the projection. Since the projections are inserted into the holes, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be simplified. That is, only by arranging the second decoration means inside the recess of the front member, it is necessary to arrange the edge of the second decoration means along the recess, while the protrusion is provided on the second decoration means. By forming the through holes to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be determined only by inserting the projections into the through holes. As a result, the arrangement of the second decoration means with respect to the front member can be simplified.

  In addition, since the projection for positioning the front member is inserted into the through hole of the second decorative means with respect to the first decorative means, the second decorative means and the first decorative means are positioned with the same portion (protrusion) As a result, the positioning accuracy of the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

  In any one of the game machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion which inclines toward the first decoration means as it goes to the outer edge in a front view, and the edge of the second decoration means on the back side of the inclined portion. A game machine J6 characterized in that a section is disposed.

  Here, in order to make it easy for the player to visually recognize both the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as the one decoration, it is necessary to suppress the positional deviation between the two decorations. However, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are overlapped in the front-rear direction, the first decoration means or the first decoration means may be displaced because the positions of the two decorations are offset in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decoration means. When the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle inclined to the front view of the two decoration means, there is a problem that there is a possibility that front and rear positional deviation may be recognized.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member is provided with an inclined portion which inclines toward the first decoration means toward the outer edge in front view Since the edge of the second decoration means is disposed on the back side of the part, the positional deviation of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement of the second decoration means and the first decoration means in the front-rear direction The refraction of light can make it difficult for the player to recognize.

  More specifically, light reflected by the decoration of the first decoration means or the second decoration means and passing through the inside of the front member and emitted from the inclined portion is inclined in the passing direction of the light with respect to the front of the base member When the angle is smaller than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the inclined surface of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the inclination angle of the light emission direction from the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is the base It is smaller than the inclination angle of the passing direction of light with respect to the front of the member. Therefore, the connection portion between the first decorative means and the second decorative means from the direction of the crossing angle smaller than the inclination angle of the front surface of the base member with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light recognized by the player who visually recognizes the can be made close to the overlapping direction of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the positional deviation before and after.

  In the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesive surface adhered to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface not adhered to the front member, and at least the inclined portion and the second decorative means A game machine J7 comprising the non-adhesive surface at opposing positions.

  Here, when the player visually recognizes the connected portion of the decoration of the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclined portion, the front and back of the first decoration means and the second decoration means There is a possibility that the player recognizes the positional misalignment of the direction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesive surface adhered to the front member and a non-adhesive surface not adhered to the front member, Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at a position where the inclined portion and the second decorative means at least face each other, a gap is formed between the second decorative means and the front member (inclined portion) on the non-adhesive surface. It is possible to totally reflect the light passing through the non-adhesive surface. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the second decoration means from the direction perpendicular to the inclination of the inclined portion, the player can be prevented from visually recognizing the decoration of the end of the second decoration means. . As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction orthogonal to the inclination of the inclination portion, it is difficult to visually recognize the decoration of the second decoration means. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation of the decorations in the front-rear direction of the first decoration means and the second decoration means.

  In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which the outer edge of a cross section in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in front view is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member And an end of the second decoration means is disposed on the center side of the front member in a front view than a substantially intermediate position of a straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portion. J8.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J6 or J7, the outer edge of the inclined section in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member in front view is convex toward the outer edge of the front member Since the end of the second decoration means is disposed on the center side of the front member in a front view than the substantially intermediate position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions, which is formed in a circular arc shape curving When the first decorative means and the second decorative means are viewed from an angle inclined with respect to the front view of the first decorative means or the second decorative means, the light is refracted by the curvature of the inclined portion, and the center of the front member The direction of the light passing through the side can be made close to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. In addition, since the end of the second decoration means is disposed at the center side of the front member than the approximate middle position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portions, the first decoration means and the second decoration means It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the positional deviation in the front-rear direction of the. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means as one decoration.

  In any one of the game machines J2 to J8, the inner side surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion which is inclined outward in a front view toward the first decoration means, and the second inclined portion is the base A game machine J9 characterized in that the inclination angle with respect to the front of the member is set smaller than the inclination angle of the inclined part with respect to the front of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner side surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined portion which is inclined outward in a front view toward the first decoration means side. Since the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set smaller than the inclined angle of the inclined portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the decoration of the first decorative means (visible through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion The position of the virtual image can be brought close to the position of the decoration (real image) of the first decoration means which is visually recognized without passing through the inclined portion and the second inclined portion. As a result, when the first decoration means is viewed through the front member, it is possible to suppress that the decoration of the first decoration means is less likely to be viewed due to the refraction of light through the front member.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the special winning device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side; and a path unit disposed on the gaming board and having a path for guiding a throwing of a game ball flowing down the gaming area, the path unit comprising: A first path for throwing game balls to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the gaming board in front view, and a game ball sent from the first path in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path A second path for throwing balls to the other side, and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path, the third path being a front side or a back side with respect to the gaming board A game machine K1 comprising guiding means for throwing game balls on at least one of the inner walls of at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board.

  BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that includes a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, and a path unit disposed on the gaming board and having a path for guiding a throwing ball of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, by guiding (rolling) the game ball having flowed into the guide route formed in the route unit along the route of the guide route, it is interesting to roll (flow down) the game ball Can be

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to secure the throwing distance of the gaming ball of a predetermined distance inside the route unit, the first path for throwing the gaming ball to one side with respect to the gaming board and When a second route for sending game balls sent from one route to the other side with respect to the game board and a third route for connecting one side of the first route and the second route are formed, the first route In order to maximize the speed of the game ball rolling on the third path and the communication portion with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the game ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of throwing is changed. It is easy to collide and bounce back. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball which collided with the inner wall of the 3rd route returns to the 1st route, or swings (flickers) in the throwing direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the 1st route inside the 3rd route. Therefore, since the game ball sent from the first path to the third path swings along the third path, the player's line of sight can not follow the game ball sent to the third path in a certain direction. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball sent to the route.

  In this case, by lengthening the path of the third path, the game ball traveling from the first path is smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, and the game ball passes the third path. However, since the third path is formed long, the size of the entire path unit is increased accordingly, and it is not possible to secure a space for arranging the path unit on the game board.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the route unit sends the game ball on one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board in front view, and the game ball thrown from the first route. The third path includes a second path for throwing the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path, and a third path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path, wherein the third path is Since at least one inner wall of the front side or the back side with respect to the game board is provided with guide means for throwing the game ball to at least one of the front side or the back side to the game board, the game ball passing the third route is It can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front and back direction of the game board in front view). The game ball accelerated by rolling the first route by moving the game ball on the front side or the back side can be slowed in the third path, and the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path is It is possible to suppress swinging (flipping) in the throwing direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the first path in the first path or in the third path. As a result, the player's line of sight can follow the game ball sent from the third route in a certain direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball thrown on the third path.

  In addition, since it is possible to suppress swinging (flickering) of the gaming ball in the horizontal direction (front view left and right direction) with respect to the game board in front view, a portion for the third path connecting the first path and the second path It is not necessary to lengthen the path to suppress the swing of the gaming ball, and the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the gaming board, and a space for arranging the route unit for the gaming board can be secured.

  In addition, as a guide means for guiding the game ball, the game ball is guided to the second route by switching the rolling direction of the game ball due to unevenness, arranging the displacement member at the switching portion of the path, and displacing the displacement member. The method to do is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine K1, the guiding means is composed of a concave portion provided on the inner wall of either the front side or the back side and a convex portion provided on the other inner wall of the front side or the rear side. A game machine K2 characterized in that the recess and the protrusion are formed at positions facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, the guide means includes a recess provided in the inner wall of either the front side or the back side, and the other inner wall of the front side or the back side. , And the concave portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other, so that the gaming ball is partially displaced in the middle of the path of the third path, and the gaming ball is formed. Can slow down the throwing speed of Thus, the path of the third path can be shortened. As a result, the path unit can be easily accommodated within the predetermined area with respect to the gaming board, and a space for arranging the path unit with respect to the gaming board can be secured.

  A gaming machine K3 characterized in that in the gaming machine K2, a horizontal separation dimension from a protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than a diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, the horizontal separation dimension from the protruding end of the convex portion to the inner wall of one of the third paths is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball The game ball, which flows down the third path and is thrown to the guide means, can easily be made to abut on the convex portion of the guide means. As a result, it is possible to easily make the rolling speed slower by bringing the game ball, which flows down the first path and is thrown to the third path, into contact with the convex portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the game ball colliding with the inner wall of the third path returns to the first path or swings in the direction different from the throwing direction of the third path in the third path. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the gaming ball passing through the third path.

  In the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the gaming board Machine K4.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and the concave portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the gaming board Thus, the thickness of the front side of the path unit can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the inside of the path unit via the front of the path unit, and to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball to which the inside of the path unit is thrown. Further, by forming the recess in the inner wall on the front side of the path unit, it is possible to suppress the projection of the guiding means on the front side of the path unit, so the path unit is disposed on the player side by that amount. It is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the route unit.

  Specifically, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit needs to be larger than the recess depth of the recess. Therefore, as the thickness on the front side of the path unit increases, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball which is thrown on the back side. Also, it is conceivable to curve the front plate of the path unit along the shape of the recess when the recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, but in this case, it is possible to A space from the glass plate that forms the front of the area is necessary, and it is necessary to place the entire game board on the back side. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball from which the path unit is thrown, by the distance from the player to the back side.

  Furthermore, it is also conceivable to open the portion where the recess is formed when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, but in this case, the rigidity of the route unit is reduced by the amount of the opening, and the route is formed. The unit is easily damaged. In addition, if an opening is formed on the front of the path unit, it may pass through the opening and be tampered with.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, the concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, so that the thickness of the entire front side of the path unit is suppressed. The game ball passing through the inside of the path unit can be easily viewed, and the path unit is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine while suppressing partially projecting to the front side of the path unit, thereby the inside of the path unit It is easy to visually recognize the game ball passing by.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, in a front view, the convex portion and the concave portion are formed such that a cross section in a gravity direction is formed in an arc shape, and an axis of the arc is set coaxially.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the cross section in the gravity direction is formed in an arc shape in the convex portion and the concave portion, and the axis of the arc is set coaxially. The separation distance can be made constant. Thereby, it can suppress that the separation distance of a convex part and a concave part becomes smaller than the diameter of a game ball partially, and controls that a game ball which passes the inside of a course unit is pinched between a convex part and an inner wall it can.

  In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the concave portion is formed at a position along an extension of a rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine K6, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extension of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path in a front view, so that the game rolls on the first path Even when the rolling speed of the ball is fast, it is possible to suppress that the center of the gaming ball thrown from the first path to the third path is thrown above the upper end of the recess. As a result, it is possible to throw the gaming ball, which is thrown from the first path to the third path, to the inside of the recess.

  In any one of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position spaced apart from the horizontal dimension of the third path in a front view than the radial dimension of the gaming ball. .

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recess is formed at a position spaced apart from the horizontal dimension of the gaming path in the horizontal view in front view of the third path. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess collides with both side surfaces in the horizontal direction in the front view of the path unit and swings inside the recess. As a result, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball, which is thrown along the inside of the recess, to the second path.

  In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recess is formed such that a cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in a front view is arc-shaped in cross section centering on a central portion in the horizontal direction of the third path. A game K8 characterized in that a cross section of the convex portion in the throwing direction of the first path in a front view is provided so as to protrude in a rectangular shape.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recess has a cross section in the throwing direction of the first path in a front view concaved in a circular arc shape and the protrusion is the front Since the cross section of the first path in the throwing direction in the view is provided so as to protrude in a rectangular shape, the distance between the facing of the concave and the convex portion is narrowed as the guiding means is closer to both ends in the throwing direction of the first path. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball, which is thrown inside the recess, to swing in the throwing direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the gaming ball thrown on the third path.

  In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended downward and inclined to one side opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the second path in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K8, the convex portion is extended downward to one side opposite to the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the second path in a front view, When flowing down the three paths, it is possible to guide the gaming ball in contact with the convex portion in the inclination direction of the convex portion. Thus, the gaming ball in contact with the convex portion can be guided along the inner wall of the concave portion on the side separated from the second path. As a result, the gaming ball flowing into the second path from the third path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the gaming ball of the second path, and the gaming ball can smoothly flow into the second path from the third path. it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guiding means at a connecting portion with the third path, and the gaming ball to be thrown from the first path by the second guiding means. A game machine K10 characterized in that guidance can be made to the guidance means.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with the second guiding means at the connecting portion with the third path, and from the second guiding means Since it is possible to guide the game ball which is thrown from the path to the guiding means, it is possible to easily throw the game ball which is thrown from the first path to the third path to the guiding means of the third path. This makes it possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, since it is easy to throw the game ball thrown from the first path to the guide means, the flow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be made smooth. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game balls of the entire route unit.

  In the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means is provided with a second convex portion protruding from one of the front side and the back side of the first path and a concave portion facing the second convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that the second concave portion is configured to have a large width dimension in a direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the gaming ball toward the upstream side of the first path in a front view. K11.

  According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K10, the second guiding means is provided with a second convex portion provided on one of the front side and the rear side of the first path, and the second convex portion thereof. Composed of a second recess recessed in the opposite position, the second recess having a larger width dimension in a direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the gaming ball toward the upstream side of the first path in front view Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to receive the game ball to be thrown in the first path into the second recess. This makes it possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first path to the third path. Therefore, since it is easy to throw the game ball thrown from the first path to the guide means, the flow of the game ball from the third path to the second path can be made smooth. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of the game balls of the entire route unit.

  In the gaming machine K10 or K11, a gaming machine K12 is characterized in that the downstream end of the first path of the second recess is located downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. .

  According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K10 or K11, the downstream end of the first path of the second recess is located downstream of the rolling surface of the gaming ball of the first path. Thus, the gaming balls flowing from the first path to the third path along the inner wall of the second recess can be made to flow from the first path to the third path on the far side. As a result, the gaming balls flowing into the third path from the first path can be easily thrown inside the recess, and the inflow of gaming balls from the third path into the second path can be facilitated.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the special winning device 550 as an example>
In the gaming machine, provided with a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side, and a flow-down direction changing means arranged on the front of the gaming board to change the flow-down direction of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area. A first member disposed in front of the gaming board, a second member disposed at a predetermined distance on the front side of the first member, and at least the first member or the second member An adjusting means for displacing one of the game balls, wherein the space between the first member and the second member is changed by the adjusting means, and the game ball flows down between the first member and the second member; A game machine L1 characterized in that the flow-down direction of is adjustable.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that includes a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and a nail that is hit on the front of the gaming board (e.g., JP-A-11-197311). According to this gaming machine, it is possible to adjust the flow direction of the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area by adjusting the angle of the nail hit on the gaming board (bending the nail). However, if the angle of the nail is changed to change the flowing direction of the gaming ball, the angle of the nail is visually recognized from the player, and it is difficult for the player to flow When it is recognized that the angle is the angle of the nail, there is a problem that the player ceases to play with the gaming machine determined to be disadvantageous, and the operation rate of the gaming machine is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the flow-down direction changing means is disposed at a predetermined distance from the first member disposed in front of the gaming board and the front side of the first member. And adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member and the second member, and changing the distance between the facing of the first member and the second member by the adjusting means to change the first member and the second member. Since it is possible to adjust the flow direction of the game ball flowing between the two members facing each other, the flow direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) at a distance in the front-back direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, for the front view of the game board, it is suppressed that the player visually recognizes the flow-down direction changing means and judges it as disadvantageous or advantageous than the nail which changes the flow-down direction of the game ball by the horizontal separation distance. it can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the second member is fixed to the gaming board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjusting means. At least a part of the first member disposed on the back side by the two members can be hidden to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the position of the first member. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the interval between the facing of the first member and the second member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being inconvenient to play a game on the gaming machine on the basis of the interval between the first member and the second member facing each other, and the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L2, the gaming board includes a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and a fastening member for inserting the first opening from the back side of the gaming board is the first member. The game machine L3 characterized in that the first member is disposed on the game board by fastening to the game board.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the gaming board has a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the gaming board By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is disposed on the game board, so that it is not necessary to form a fastening portion for fastening the first member on the front side of the game board, and that amount, the front The outer shape of the first member in view can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members in front of the game board.

  Further, since the fastening members are fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening members from the front side of the game board in a state where the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it can be suppressed that the fastening member is illegally operated and the position of the first member is illegally changed.

  In the gaming machine L3, the first member includes a projecting portion which protrudes toward the gaming board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the projecting portion, A game machine L4 characterized in that a first member is disposed on the game board.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3, the first member includes a projecting portion which protrudes toward the gaming board and is inserted into the first opening, and a fastening member is fastened to the tip of the projecting portion Since the first member is disposed on the game board, the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, since it can suppress that the fastening part with a fastening member protrudes on the front side of a 1st member, the space between the opposition of a 1st member and a 2nd member is securable.

  In the gaming machine L4, the first member is slidable on a plane parallel to the front of the gaming board by the adjusting means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the projection. A gaming machine L5 characterized in that it is opened.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine L4, the first opening is opened to the same size as the displacement area of the projection, and therefore the projection is caused when the position of the first member is displaced. The portion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when displacing the position of the first member, it can be suppressed that the first member is displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction displaced by the adjusting means). As a result, the work when the worker adjusts the position of the first member can be simplified.

  In any one of game machines L3 to L5, the game board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming board includes the second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening, so that the game is performed via the second opening The fastening member fastened on the back side of the disc can be operated. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means can be simplified.

  That is, since the character apparatus and the case member for housing the character apparatus are disposed on the back side of the game board, the character apparatus and the case are operated when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board. Where it is necessary to remove the case member housing the character apparatus from the game board, the second opening allows the fastening member to be operated from the front side of the game board, so that the operator can move to the back side of the game board Since it is not necessary to remove the accessory device to be disposed and the case member for housing the accessory device, the work process of the worker can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine L1, a gaming machine L7 characterized in that the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in front view by the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member with respect to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction in front view. As compared with the case where the position is changed to the left or right or the up and down direction in the front view, the change of the position of the second member in the front view can be suppressed. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the player judges as advantageous or disadvantageous by changing the position of the second member in the front view. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, the outer shape in a front view is formed larger than the first member, and the first member is in the front view A game machine L8 characterized in that the second member is covered.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and the outer shape in front view is formed larger than the first member. The first member is covered with the second member in the front view, so the first member can be hidden by the second member in the front view, and the player can not easily recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the interval between the facing of the first member and the second member, and improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member protrudes to the other of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L9 characterized by comprising a projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and at least one of the first member or the second member is the first member Alternatively, since the projection provided on the other side of the second member is provided, the game ball sent between the first member and the second member may be brought into contact with the projection to change the throwing direction. it can. Therefore, by recognizing the interval between the facing of the first member and the second member, it can be suppressed that the player judges as advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means can adjust the position of the other of the first member or the second member stepwise with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A game machine L10 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the advantageous effects of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means sets the other position of the first member or the second member with respect to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjustment means capable of adjusting stepwise is provided, an operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change of the position stepwise. As a result, the occurrence of an error in the adjustment position of the first member or the second member can be suppressed. Therefore, position adjustment of the first member or the second member can be simplified.

  In addition, as a means to adjust the position of a 1st member and a 2nd member in steps, with respect to the some groove | channel provided concavely by one of a 1st member or a 2nd member, a 1st member or a 2nd member is used. The first member or the second member is changed in position by changing the insertion position of the protruding portion, and the first groove is formed in one of the plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board. The form which changes the position of a 1st member is illustrated by changing the insertion position of the convex part protrudingly provided by the other of a member or a game board.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the special winning device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine, comprising: a game area in which game balls are flowed down; and a plurality of guide routes for guiding a throw of the game balls flowing down the game area, and a path unit provided in the game area; The unit is formed of a material capable of transmitting light and is disposed on the front side of the game area, and the second guidance path disposed on the back side of the first guidance path. And the first guide route includes a first winning opening through which game balls can be entered, and the second guide route includes a second winning opening through which game balls can be inserted. A gaming machine M1 characterized in that a gaming ball entering the first winning opening is provided with a gaming value higher than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a path unit having a plurality of guide paths for letting the game ball flow down is disposed in the game area, and the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing inside the unit to improve the interest of the player. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-131046).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to make the player visually recognize the gaming balls flowing down the guide route and improve the interest of the player, there is a tendency for the routing of the respective guide routes to be formed in a complicated manner. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which route of the respective guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, if the gaming value of the gaming ball flowing down the guidance route is different, the player may pass through the advantageous (high gaming value is awarded) or disadvantageous (low gaming value is awarded) route. This makes it difficult to judge, and the game ball flowing down the path unit can not sufficiently improve the player's interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the route unit is formed of a material capable of transmitting light, and the first guide route disposed on the front side of the game area and the back surface of the first guide route A second guide route disposed on the side, wherein the first guide route comprises a first winning opening capable of entering a game ball, and the second guide route enters a game ball Since a gaming ball having a possible second winning opening and entering the first winning opening is given a higher gaming value than a gaming ball entering the second winning opening, the first guide route It is possible to make it easy for the player to watch the game balls flowing down. In addition, when game balls flow down to the first and second guide routes at the same timing, the second guide route including the second winning opening with low gaming value is on the back side of the first guide route. Since it is formed, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down the first guide path provided with the first winning hole with high game value. As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the gaming ball to which a high gaming value is given, so it is possible to easily improve the player's interest.

  The predetermined gaming value means, for example, a gaming ball to be paid out to the player as a bonus when the gaming ball enters the first or second winning opening.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first guiding path is a first path for throwing game balls on one side in a horizontal direction in front view, and a game ball for sending balls from the first path. A second path for throwing game balls on the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guide direction of the guide, and a connection path for connecting one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity; A game machine M2 characterized in that the path is formed by being curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the game area.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the first guide route is a first route for throwing the game ball on one side in the horizontal direction in front view, and is thrown from the first route The second path which throws the game ball on the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the game ball on the first path, and the one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity And the connection path is formed to be curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the game area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected at the shortest distance. The bent portion of the throwing path can be increased more than in the case of As a result, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball can be gradually reduced at the bending portion, and it is possible to suppress that the gaming ball collides with the inner wall of the connection path and shakes (shakes) in the connection path. As a result, since the gaming balls can be smoothly flowed from the first path to the second path, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the throwing of the gaming balls from the first path to the second path.

  In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (blurring), the internal space of the connection path is enlarged in the throwing direction of the first path, and the game ball repeatedly repeats on the inner wall of the connection path. Although it is conceivable to suppress the collision, in this case, the connection path is projected in the horizontal direction in the front view as the internal space of the connection path is enlarged in the throwing direction of the first path. Therefore, since the path unit in front view is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to fit the path unit in a predetermined range in front view.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, since the connection path is curved in a semicircular shape toward the back side, the outer shape of the path unit in front view can be contained within a predetermined range. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the gaming ball flowing down the first guide route, the range visually recognized by the player can be contained within the predetermined range (the outline of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

  In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in a front view, and the connection path is formed on one side in the horizontal direction of the path unit in a front view. The game machine M3 which features.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side in the horizontal direction of the gaming area in the front view, and the connection path is one in the horizontal direction of the path unit in the front view. Since it is formed on the side, the connection path can be formed at a position close to the player located in front of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path. As a result, even if the game ball is thrown to the back side by the connection path, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path.

  In the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is disposed between the first path and the second path in a front view.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is disposed between the first path and the second path in a front view, so that the first path and the first path The first winning opening can be formed in the first guide route by using the dead space forming the two routes. Thereby, it can suppress that the external shape of the path unit in a plain view becomes large. As a result, the range in which the player visually recognizes the path unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize the gaming ball flowing down the route unit.

  In any one of the gaming machine M2 to the gaming machine M4, the connection path is a third winning opening capable of entering the game ball in two places of the connection portion with the first path and the second path, and the third winning opening thereof A displacement member movable to a position where the winning opening is closed or opened, and the gaming ball entering the third winning opening is the same as the gaming ball entering the first winning opening A gaming machine M5 characterized in that a gaming value is given.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connection path is a third winning opening capable of entering the gaming ball at two points of connection with the first path and the second path A displacement member movable to a position for closing or opening the third winning opening, and the gaming ball entering the first winning opening into the gaming ball entering the third winning opening; Since the same gaming value is provided, the game ball which is sent from the first route to the connection route can be made easy to enter into either of the two third winning openings, and the connection route is made to flow down. This makes it easy to give the player an interest by the playing ball.

  That is, between the upstream third winning opening formed in the connection path and the connecting portion of the first path and the downstream third winning hole formed in the connecting path and the connecting portion of the second path The third winning opening is closed by the displacement member when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing to a position where the third winning opening is closed or released. In this case, the game ball sent from the first path to the connection path flows down the connection path curved to the back side, thereby securing a time until the third winning opening is released. It can be made to flow into the winning opening of. As a result, since it is easy to make the game ball thrown to the connection path flow into the third winning opening, it is easy to give the player an interest by the game ball flowing down the connection path.

  In addition, since the two third winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connection path (the connection portion between the first route and the second route), they enter the third winning opening. The ball can be extended for a long time. Therefore, the time for giving the player an interest can be extended, and the interest for the player can be easily enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a gaming machine M6 characterized in that detection means for detecting passage of gaming balls is disposed outside the connection path.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, detection means for detecting passage of gaming balls are disposed in the connection path, so the game balls are clogged in the connection path In this case, by continuing the detection of the detection means, it is possible to make the gaming machine detect an error. In addition, since the detection means is disposed outside the connection path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being caught in the detection means as compared to the case where the detection means is provided in the connection path, It is possible to prevent the ball from clogging in the connection path.

  Furthermore, since the detection means is disposed outside the connection path where rolling of the game balls is delayed, the number of game balls passing through the connection path can be easily detected accurately. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detection means is larger than the number of balls winning in the first winning opening or the third winning opening, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that the fraud is being made. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the injustice by notifying that the injustice is being performed by a warning sound, an abnormal lighting, or the like.

  In the gaming machine M6, in the connection path, the facing dimension of the inner wall in front view is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the inner wall of the first path is in the direction orthogonal to the throwing direction of the game ball. A game machine M7 characterized by being set smaller than the inter-dimension.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M6, in the connection path, the opposing dimension of the inner wall in front view is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball and is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball It is set smaller than the opposing dimension of the inner wall of the first path in the direction, so when a game ball with a diameter larger than a predetermined size (a diameter larger than a specified size) is thrown, the game ball remains in the connection path. It can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball having a diameter larger than the specified one from flowing down the path unit.

  In addition, since the detection means for detecting the passage of the game balls is disposed in the connection path, when the game balls having a diameter larger than the specified diameter stay (clogged) in the connection path, the detection means Can detect errors.

  In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connection path is formed with an opening that opens at a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the game ball on the radially outer side wall of the path curved in a semicircular arc toward the back side Game machine M7 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connection path is a predetermined diameter smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball on the radially outer side wall of the path curved in a semicircular arc toward the back side. Since an opening opening at a value of is formed, when a game ball having a diameter smaller than a predetermined size (a diameter smaller than a prescribed size) is thrown, the game ball is made outside the connection path from the opening of the opening. It can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball having a diameter smaller than the specified one from flowing down the path unit.

  In addition, since the opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the connection path which is the rolling surface of the gaming ball flowing down the connection path, the gaming ball flowing down the connection path has a diameter smaller than specified. It is easy to eject the game ball.

  The gaming machine M8 includes a box-shaped storage unit projecting from the radial direction outer side of the connection path and formed in a box shape communicating with the opening, and the storage unit is set to a size capable of housing the gaming ball A game machine M9 formed in the detection range of the detection means.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine M8, the gaming machine M9 includes a storage portion formed in a box shape protruding from the radially outer side of the connection path and communicating with the opening portion. Since the ball is formed in a size that can accommodate the ball and is formed within the detection range of the detection means, the game of a diameter (diameter smaller than the specified size) or less discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connection path A ball can be stored inside the receptacle. In addition, since the containing portion is formed in the detection range of the detecting means, the game balls stored inside the containing portion can be detected by the detecting means. As a result, when the gaming ball is stored inside the housing portion, the detecting means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

  In any one of the game machine M1 to the game machine M9, a position where the inflow port of the game ball of the first guide path and the inflow port of the game ball of the second guide path are horizontally adjacent in front view A gaming machine M10 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inflow port of the gaming ball in the first guide path and the inflow port of the gaming ball in the second guide path Since the game balls are formed at positions adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction in front view, the game player who flows down the game area of the game board flows into the first guide path or the second guide path until just before it flows into the player Can be difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to watch the game ball which is thrown down to the path unit by flowing down the game area. As a result, it is easy to give the player an interest.

<About the concept of the invention which makes lower displacement unit 400 an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member disposed on the front side of the base member and having a throwing path formed as a space capable of throwing game balls flowing down the game area In the gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member by fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. A game machine N1 to be

  Conventionally, a base member having a gaming area on the front side, and a first member disposed on the front side of the base member and having a throwing path formed as a space capable of throwing gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, There is a gaming machine provided with (for example, JP-A-2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member is provided with the extending portion extended on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on the side surface (contact portion with the base member) on the base member side, and the extending portion By screwing a screw, which is inserted through an opening drilled in the above, into the base member, the screw is disposed in close contact with the front of the base member.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to dispose the first member in close contact with the front surface of the base member, it is essential to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening for the insertion of the first member in the first member. Here, in order to form the opening in a position not to interfere with the throwing of the gaming ball, it is necessary to form the opening on the outside of the throwing space of the gaming ball, and the extended portion in which the opening is formed to the outside of the throwing space It needs to be formed. Therefore, the area which can be used as a throwing path becomes small with respect to the external shape of the 1st part by the extended part being formed in the outer edge of the 1st member, and the throwing path of the 1st member can not be enlarged enough. There was a problem of that.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be disposed in close contact with each other by the urging force to the back side acting on the first member. In addition, since the first member is disposed on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member, a fastening margin (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted is formed on the front side of the first member). There is no need to form the extension part to be formed. Therefore, the entire region can be used as a throwing route for the outer shape of the first member in front view. As a result, the throwing path of the first member can be enlarged.

  Further, since the fastening portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, removal of the fastening portion between the base member and the first member due to fraud can be suppressed, and the fastening portion is visible to the player By doing this, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  The gaming machine N1 includes a second member disposed on the back side of the first member through the base member, and the second member is inserted from the back side of the second member to the first member A game machine characterized by being fixed to the first member by the fixing means fixed to the first member and being disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1, the second member is provided on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is the back side of the second member The first member is fixed to the first member by fixing means inserted into the first member side and fixed to the first member, and the first member is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When fastening the second member and the second member, it is possible to exert a force that is biased to the back side to the first member by the predetermined gap. Further, since the second member can be urged toward the front side, the base member can be held between the first member and the second member. Therefore, since the first member and the second member are less likely to be displaced from the base member by the holding force between the first member and the second member, it is necessary to fasten the first member or the second member to the base member Therefore, the fastening of the second member can be simplified.

  The predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is a value larger than 0 and set to a value smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction in the front view. As a result, when the first member and the second member are fastened, it is possible to exert an attracting force on both the first member and the second member by the gap.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member is provided with a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member is a projection projecting inside the first opening. The gaming machine N3 characterized in that the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the projection.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes the first opening that is opened at the position facing the first member, and the first member is the first opening. The first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the projecting part, so that the fastening portion of the fixing means is located inside the first opening. Can be placed on Thereby, it can suppress that the fastening part of a fixing means is arrange | positioned at the front side of a base member, and can suppress that the fastening part of a fixing means is formed in the ball sending space of a 1st member. As a result, the size of the throwing space of the first member can be secured.

  In addition, since the fastening margin (insertion depth) of the fixing means can be secured by the projecting portion, the fastening of the fixing means can be suppressed from being detached from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the biasing force to the back side acting on the first member.

  In the gaming machine N1, a second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and a third member disposed between the first member and the second member facing each other , And the base member includes a first opening that is open at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction in a front view in the front view of the base member The dimension of the first member is smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction and disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is A gaming machine N4 fastened to the back surface side of the third member in a state having a predetermined gap with the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back surface side of the base member.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1, the second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member disposed between the first and second members facing each other. A third member provided, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member in a front view The dimension of the first member is smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction in the front view and disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is the base The first member is fastened to the back side of the third member in a state having a predetermined gap with the third member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the member, so that the first member is attached to the back side via the third member. Power can act. Therefore, the biasing force to the back side which acts when fastening a 2nd member and a 3rd member by a fixing means can be made to act also on a 3rd member. As a result, the biasing force acting on the contact portion of the first member with the base member can be reduced, and breakage of the first member can be suppressed.

  Further, the rigidity of the entire first member can be enhanced by the third member being in close contact with the back surface side of the first member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deformation of the throwing path of the game ball formed on the first member by the elastic deformation of the entire first member due to the biasing force to the back side acting on the first member. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing ball of the first member.

  In the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. A gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of the frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening opened in the base member. Thus, the biasing force acting on the third member can be used as a force for biasing the frame-like member to the back side. Therefore, the frame-like member can be easily disposed in close contact with the base member.

  In addition, since the biasing force to the back side acting when fastening the second member and the third member by the fixing means can be exerted on the contact surface between the frame-like member and the base member, the first member The force acting on the contact portion with the base member can be reduced, and breakage of the first member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is a displacement member capable of displacing the ball sending space of the game ball of the first member, and a drive provided to the back side of the first member to drive the displacement member And the third member includes a third opening which is opened to a size capable of inserting the driving means, and the third member has the third driving means inserted into the third opening. A game machine characterized in that it is disposed on the back side of one member.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member is disposed on the back side of the first member, and the displacement member capable of displacing the ball sending space of the gaming ball of the first member. Drive means for driving the displacement member, and the third member is provided with a third opening opened to a size capable of inserting the drive means, and the drive means is inserted inside the third opening The drive means can be covered with the third member because it is disposed on the back side of the first member in the above state. As a result, it is possible to suppress access to the drive means of unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the drive means is tampered with.

  In the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected to the first member side, and the gaming ball, which is in communication with the ball sending space of the first member and sent to the ball sending space of the first member, is used as the second member. A gaming machine N7 comprising a communicating portion capable of throwing balls, wherein the communicating portion is disposed outside the third opening.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N6, the second member is projected to the first member side, and the game is performed by sending the ball to the first member's throwing space in communication with the first member's throwing space. A communication portion capable of sending a ball to the second member is provided, and the communication portion is disposed outside the third opening, so that the third member can be disposed between the communication portion and the drive means. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the drive of the drive means to act on the communication portion. As a result, the game ball sent to the communication portion can be prevented from slowing down the speed at which the game ball passes through the communication portion under the influence of the magnetic force of the drive means, or can be suppressed from stopping at the communication portion. The throwing of the gaming ball to the member can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine N1, the base member is provided with a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes from at least two places on the back side of the first member. A protrusion is provided, and the protrusion protrudes from the rear surface of the first member and passes through the first opening, and the end of the first piece is bent to extend outside the first opening. A second piece extending in the direction, and a raised portion protruding on the front side of the second piece overlapping the base member in a front view, the first piece being a front view of the base member The protrusion dimension is set to be a protrusion dimension larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion has a dimension equal to the width dimension in the front view of the base member in the front view of the base member The bending tip of the second piece is set to be small, By being fastened by serial fixing means to the base member, the gaming machine N8, wherein the first member is disposed in a state of being urged to the rear side with respect to the base member.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine N1, the base member is provided with a first opening that is opened at a position facing the first member, and the first member is the back of the first member A projecting portion that protrudes from at least two places on the side, and the projecting portion is bent at an end portion of the first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and passes through the first opening; A second piece extending toward the outside of the opening, and a raised part protruding on the front side of the second piece overlapping the base member in a front view, the first piece being in the front view of the base member The protrusion dimension is set to a value larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the protrusion is set to have the same dimension as or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member in the front view of the base member. , The bent end of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means Since the first member is disposed in a state of being biased to the back side with respect to the base member, it is not necessary to provide a portion for fastening the fixing means (for example, a screw) on the back side of the first member. , The throwing space of the game ball formed in the first member can be secured. As a result, since the throwing space can be enlarged, it is possible to make the throwing direction of the gaming ball to be changed in the throwing direction of the gaming ball to be thrown to the first member and to make the throwing ball fun.

  Further, since the screwing portion of the fixing means can be used as the base member, the elastic deformation of the ball sending space of the first member can be suppressed by the biasing force acting on the screwing portion of the fixing means. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the first member is elastically deformed and the speed of the gaming ball thrown from the ball sending path of the first member is reduced.

  In the gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening which is open in the front-rear direction in a front view, and a frame-shaped member which is disposed on the front side of the base along the second opening. A game machine N9, characterized in that the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N8, the base member is provided on the front side of the base member along the second opening and the second opening which is opened in the front-rear direction in front view Since the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting portion is disposed inside the first opening using the opening of the second opening. It can be set up. Therefore, since the operation of arranging the first unit on the base member can be simplified, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention which makes lower displacement unit 400 an example>
In a game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driven member coupled to the displacement member and driven by displacement of the displacement member, a driven direction of the driven member The displacing member is disposed between the first position and the second position, and the displacement member is displaced from the first position to an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. A third displacement region for displacing the third position, and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position, and the driven member is configured to move the displacement member from the first position to the first position. By being displaced to the second position, the first driven position is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and the third driven position between the first driven position and the first driven position and the second driven position is displaced. First driven area and the third driven position And a second driven area for displacing a second driven position, at least a part of the second displacement area and the first driven area being set to the same area, and the displacement member sets the second displacement area. At the time of being displaced, the swing of the direction other than the displacement direction of the displacement member is regulated by the regulation means.

  Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably in the base member, and a driven member coupled to the displacement member and driven by displacement of the displacement member are provided, and driven by displacement of the displacement member A gaming machine which displaces a member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-029849). However, in the conventional gaming machine, in order to regulate the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and swinging other than in the driven direction, forming the regulating means for regulating the swinging of both the displacement member and the driven member, It is necessary to form in two places, and there is a problem that shape becomes complicated by that and a manufacturing cost increases.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacing member is provided with regulating means for restraining the swinging of the driven member in directions other than the driven direction, and the displacing member is displaced between the first position and the second position, The driven member includes a first displacement area for displacing a third position of the intermediate position between the first position and the first position and the second position, and a second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position. The displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, whereby the displacement member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and an intermediate position between the first driven position and the first driven position and the second driven position It has a first driven area for displacing the third driven position, and a second driven area for displacing the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a part of the second displacement area and the first driven area is It is set to the same area, and when the displacement member is displaced in the second displacement area, the restricting means The direction of oscillation of the other direction of displacement of the position member is restricted, it is possible to restrict the swing of the driven member and the displacement member using the same part of the regulating means. Therefore, since the restriction means may be formed in one place, the shape can be simplified accordingly, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Further, since the swing of the driven member and the displacement member can be regulated by using the same portion of the regulation means, it is not necessary to form the driven member, the displacement member and the regulation portion in one regulation portion, respectively. The regulation means can be made smaller accordingly.

  In the gaming machine O1, the restricting means is configured as a wall projecting from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member overlaps with at least a part of the base member in a front view. The sliding displacement is possible on a plane parallel to the member, and a region overlapping with the base member in a front view is gradually reduced in accordance with the driving from the first driven position to the second driven position. Game machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O1, the restriction means is configured as a wall projecting from the base member to the driven member side, and the driven member is at least one of the base members in front view The sliding displacement is possible on a plane parallel to the base member at the position overlapping the portion, and the region overlapping the base member in the front view is gradually reduced along with the driving from the first driven position to the second driven position. In the second driven position, the area in which the driven member projects outside the base member in the front view is made larger than the first driven position. Therefore, it is difficult to regulate the swing of the driven member by the restricting means provided on the base member, because the driven member protrudes to the outside of the base member. Therefore, the driven member is more easily rocked toward the base member as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and by restricting the rocking of the displacement member coupled to the driven member, the restricting means It is possible to make the driven member less likely to swing by increasing the number of restricted portions. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is disposed in the second driven region.

  In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape whose one side is long in front view, has a rotatable shaft on one side in the longitudinal direction, and is rotatably disposed on the base member, In the 1 driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates around the rotation axis. A game machine O3 characterized in that the other side of the driven member is disposed above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape having a long side in a front view, and has a rotating shaft rotatable on one side in the longitudinal direction. In the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member is centered on the rotation axis. Since the other side of the driven member is disposed above the rotational axis in the direction of gravity, the driven member is rotated from the first driven position to the second driven position, and the longitudinal side is erected. Therefore, the load of the driven member is likely to act toward the rotation shaft as the driven member stands up, and the load acts on the driven member in the swing direction of the driven member, and the driven member is likely to swing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swinging of the displacement member coupled to the driven member, it is possible to make the driven member less likely to swing by increasing the restricted portion by the restricting means. As a result, it is possible to suppress swinging when the driven member is disposed in the second driven region.

  In addition, when the driven member follows the first driven area where a force for lifting the other end of the driven member is required, the first position to the third position (first displacement area) from which the restriction of the displacement member is released Since it is necessary to displace the displacement member in the first displacement region, the restriction is released by the restriction means, so that the movement of the displacement member can be suppressed from being delayed by the restriction means. Therefore, the displacement force of the driven member can be secured when the displacement force of the driven member is required.

  In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protruding portion protruding at a position facing the wall portion, and a tip end of the protruding portion abuts on the wall portion to displace the driven member. The displacement member is set so as to displace the space between the facing of the driven member and the wall in the second displacement region, and the displacement member is disposed in the facing direction of the driven member and the wall A game machine O3 characterized in that at least a part of the game machine overlaps with the driven member.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O2, the driven member includes a projecting portion projecting at a position facing the wall, and the tip of the projecting portion is abutted against the wall Displacement of the driven member is restricted, and the displacement member is set so as to displace the space between the facing of the driven member and the wall in the displacement region of the end, and at least at least the displacement member in the facing direction of the driven member and the wall Since a part overlaps with the driven member, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from tilting to the opposite side to the wall. As a result, displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall, and it is possible to suppress swinging when the displacement member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine O4, a gaming machine O5 characterized in that the side surface of the displacement member is in contact with the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is in contact with the projecting portion of the driven member at the second driven position. When displaced to the position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the projecting portion of the displacement member and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to use both the role of abutting the wall on the projecting portion to regulate the displacement of the driven member and the role of assisting the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, the displaceable space of the displacement member and the driven member can be secured.

  In the gaming machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member, and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, a displacement direction of a connection portion of the driven member with the displacement member Is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine O5, when the driven member is pivotally supported at one end by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, connection of the driven member to the displacement member Since the displacement direction of the portion is set to the direction toward the axis of the displacement member, displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member can be suppressed when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member. That is, when the displacing member is disposed at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacing member can be set to the dead point, so that displacement of the displacing member can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the displacement member by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

  In the gaming machine O5, when one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base portion and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, a displacement direction of a connection portion of the driven member with the displacement member is A game machine O7 characterized in that a direction obtained by combining the direction in which the reaction force by the contact of the projecting portion and the displacement member acts and the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member is set.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine O5, the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member at one end thereof, and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position. The combined direction of the displacement direction of the connecting portion and the direction in which the reaction force by the abutment of the projecting portion and the displacement member acts is set to the direction toward the axial center of the displacement member, so the load of the driven member is When acting on the displacement member, displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member can be suppressed. That is, when the displacing member is disposed at the second driven position, the direction of the force acting on the displacing member from the follower member is directed to the axial center of the displacing member, thereby rotating the displacing member around the pivotally supported portion. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the displacement member by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

  In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the projecting portion is disposed with a predetermined gap with the wall portion, and the displacement member is abutted to be abutted against the wall portion. Machine O8.

  Here, when the projecting portion of the driven member and the wall portion always abut, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, there is a risk that it becomes difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine O8, the projecting portion is disposed with a predetermined gap with the wall portion, and the displacement member abuts against the wall portion, so that the displacement member is in the second driven position. When being displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging and to suppress that the protrusion and the bulging portion become a resistance during the displacement.

<About the concept of the invention which makes lower displacement member 440 an example>
A decorative member made of a light transmitting material capable of transmitting at least a part of light on the back side in a front view, and disposed on the back side of the decorative member displaceable on a plane parallel to the front, A gaming machine comprising: a receiving unit capable of receiving and holding gaming balls, provided with light emitting means disposed on the back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement region of the receiving unit; The means is disposed on the rear side of the receiving unit or between the decorative member and the receiving unit, and the game ball received by the receiving unit or receiving unit emits light emitted from the light emitting unit A game machine P1 characterized in that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially different by blocking or reflecting.

  Conventionally, a decorative member made of a light transmitting material capable of transmitting at least a part of light on the back side in front view, and the back side of the decorative member are arranged on a back side of the decorative member so as to be displaceable on a plane parallel to the front There is known a gaming machine provided with a receiving unit capable of receiving and holding gaming balls (e.g., JP-A-2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by moving the receiving unit after the gaming ball is received and held in the receiving unit, it is possible to perform an effect of moving the gaming ball along with the movement of the receiving unit.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the receiving unit is disposed on the back side of the decorative member, so it is difficult for the player to recognize the position of the gaming ball received by the receiving unit and the receiving unit. Therefore, after the gaming ball is received (held) in the receiving unit, when the receiving unit moves, the player moves in which direction the gaming ball received (held) in the receiving unit and the receiving unit moves. However, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the position of the gaming ball received by the receiving unit.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine P1, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the receiving unit, and the light emitting means is the back side of the receiving unit or The game ball disposed between the member and the receiving unit and received by the receiving unit or the receiving unit blocks or reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means to partially separate the light quantity of the light emitted from the decorative member And the light amount of light emitted from the decoration member positioned on the front side of the game ball received by the reception portion and the light amount of light emitted from the decoration member at the other position By making the position different, it is possible to make the player recognize that the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the light amount is different.

  Specifically, when the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the receiving unit, the receiving unit or the receiving unit is configured by blocking the light emitted from the light emitting unit by the receiving unit or the gaming ball received by the receiving unit. The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the above can be made darker than the other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the player can recognize that the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion is positioned on the back side of the small (dark) portion of the light amount emitted from the decorative member.

  On the other hand, when the light emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion, whereby the receiving portion or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the gaming ball received by the receiving unit can be made brighter than other portions of the decorative member. As a result, the player can recognize that the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion is positioned on the back side of the large (bright) portion of the light amount emitted from the decorative member.

  In the gaming machine P1, the receiving unit is formed on the lower side in the direction of gravity than the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving unit, and the light emitting means is substantially the same as the center of the gaming ball held by the receiving unit. The game machine P2 is characterized in that a light emission part is disposed at a height of, and the light transmission part of the decorative member is formed at a position higher than the light emission part of the light emitting means.

  Here, in the structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member, and the light is reflected or blocked by the game ball received by the receiving portion or the receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting means is the game ball Not only that the light is irradiated to the receiving part, the light is likely to be reflected or blocked by the receiving part. Therefore, the light and dark of the light formed by the difference in the light quantity of the light emitted from the decorative member is influenced by the receiving part, the shape of the light and dark becomes different from the outer shape of the gaming ball, and the light quantity of the light to the player It may be difficult to recognize that the game ball is placed on the back side of the different part of.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the receiving unit is formed on the lower side in the direction of gravity than the center of the gaming ball held in the receiving unit, and the light emitting means is in the receiving unit The light emitting portion is disposed at substantially the same height as the center of the game ball to be held, and the light transmitting portion of the decoration member is formed at a higher position than the light emitting portion of the light emitting means. It is possible to suppress that the light and dark of the light formed by being emitted and being blocked or reflected by the receiving portion is formed on the front side of the decorative member through the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Thereby, it is possible to make the shape of light and shade of light formed by transmitting the light transmitting portion of the decorative member close to the outer shape (circular shape) of the gaming ball. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the game balls are arranged in portions with different light amounts of light.

  In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving unit is formed of a light transmitting material, and the gaming machine P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, the receiving unit is formed of the light transmitting material, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected or blocked by the receiving unit. It can be suppressed. Thus, when the gaming ball is not received by the receiving unit, it is possible to suppress the formation of a portion with a different amount of light in the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. Therefore, when the gaming ball is not received by the receiving unit, the player can perform the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's gaze at the decoration member by the positioning operation and the return operation of the reception unit, and make the player look at only the displacement operation of the reception unit in the case of wanting to gaze.

  The gaming machine P2 or P3 includes a connecting member formed of a non-light-transmissive material and connected to one side in the displacement direction of the receiving portion, and the light emitting means is on the back side of the displacement region of the receiving portion The connection member is set such that the dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion is larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member. At the same time, the gaming machine P4 is characterized in that it is extended or retracted between the facing of the light emitting means and the decoration member.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2 or P3, the connecting member is formed of a non-light-transmissive material and is connected to one side of the receiving portion in the displacement direction. The connecting member is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the part, and the connecting member is set larger in dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving part than the displacement distance of the receiving part and is disposed on the back side of the light transmitting portion of the decorative member Since the light emitting means and the decoration member are extended or retracted according to the displacement of the light emitting means, the emission area of the light from the decoration member can be changed according to the displacement of the receiving portion. That is, the connecting member can block the light emitted from the light emitting means to the decorative member, and the area for blocking the light can be changed according to the displacement of the receiving portion. As a result, the receiving part and the connecting member are extended and displaced between the light emitting means and the decorative member, whereby the emission area of light emitted from the decorative member can be reduced. As a result, since the light emission surface of the decorative member is reduced, the player can easily recognize a portion having a small amount of light emitted from the decorative member by the receiving portion or the gaming ball received by the receiving portion.

  In the game machine P4, the connection member is a part of drive means for driving the receiving unit.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of the driving means for driving the receiving portion, so that the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving portion The connecting member can also be used to block light emitted from the light source. As a result, the arrangement space of the drive means for driving the receiving portion can be secured.

  In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving portion, and the receiving portion includes a displacement member displaceable from the gaming ball received by the receiving portion, the displacement The member is made of a non-light transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it projects or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the receiving portion receives the gaming ball, thereby A game machine P6 which protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving unit, and the receiving unit is a game ball received by the receiving unit The displacing member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and is displaceable at a position where it projects or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is provided to the receiving portion Is received between the light emitting means and the decorative member so that the displacement member and the game ball block the light emitted from the light emitting means only when the gaming ball is held in the receiving portion. Thus, the position of the gaming ball can be recognized by the player by the shadow (dark portion) formed on the decoration member. Therefore, when the gaming ball is not received by the receiving unit, the player can perform the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player can concentrate on playing the game while suppressing the player from gazing at the decoration member at the wrong timing.

  In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving unit, and the receiving unit includes a displacing member which is displaceable from the gaming ball received by the receiving unit, the displacement The member is made of a non-light transmitting material and is displaceable at a position where it projects or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the receiving portion receives the gaming ball, thereby A game machine P7 characterized in that it protrudes between the facing of the light emitting means and the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving unit, and the receiving unit is a game ball received by the receiving unit The displacing member is formed of a non-light transmitting material, and is displaceable at a position where it projects or retracts between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is provided to the receiving portion Is received between the light emitting means and the game ball, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving portion. Thus, the player can be made to recognize the position of the gaming ball in the bright part (the part where the light amount is larger than the other parts) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the gaming ball is not received by the receiving unit, the player can perform the positioning operation and the returning operation of the receiving unit without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player can concentrate on playing the game while suppressing the player from gazing at the decoration member at the wrong timing.

  In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally formed of a metal material having a light reflectance higher than that of the resin material, or that the outer surface is coated with metal. Thus, the light emitted to the displacement member can be easily reflected, and the difference in the light amount of the light emitted from the decoration member can be made clear so that the player can easily recognize the position of the gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P7, the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape that is recessed on the back side, so that light emitted from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected to the decorative member side When it does, the reflected light can be made difficult to spread (it is easy to condense light). Therefore, by collecting the light which is reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decoration member, the difference in the light amount of the light can be made clear, and the player can easily recognize the position of the game ball.

  A gaming machine P9 characterized in that, in the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to bulge in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to bulge in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so the light of the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member It can be spread easily. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the position where the amount of light formed by the gaming ball received by the receiving unit differs and the player can recognize the position of the gaming ball received by the receiving unit. It can be easy.

  In the gaming machine 01 to P9, the light emitting means is capable of emitting at least two or more colors.

  According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means can emit at least two or more colors, and therefore the degree of expectation at the position where the receiving unit is arranged Can change.

  For example, the light emission is divided into the first area of the first light emission color and the second area of the second light emission color, and the receiving unit is disposed in the first area has the expectation of the jackpot. Make it higher. As a result, it is possible to easily make the player gaze at the position of the gaming ball held by the receiving unit.

  In this case, since the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed only by changing the light emission color, a plurality of effects are formed by changing the light emission range. This makes it easy to give the player an interest.

  Game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I10, J1 to J10, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q1 characterized in that, in any of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8 and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I10, J1 to J10, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, In any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8 and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Game machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I10, J1 to J10, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that, in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8 and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine which adjusts the flow direction of gaming balls flowing down the gaming area by adjusting the angle of a nail hit on the gaming board (bending the nail). JP-A-11-197311).
However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that the operation rate of the gaming machine is reduced.
The present technical concept is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the operation rate of the gaming machine by suppressing the recognition of the gaming state by the player. The purpose is
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 has a gaming board having a gaming area on the front and a flow-down direction change for changing the flowing direction of gaming balls disposed on the gaming board and flowing down the gaming area. And the flow-down direction changing means includes a first member, a second member disposed at a predetermined distance from the first member, and the first and second members. Adjusting means capable of changing the position of the first member or the second member at a position where the opposing surfaces of the first member and the second member are not parallel to each other, You can adjust the position of the ball.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the first member is disposed on the front side with respect to the gaming board, and the second member is a member of the first member. It is disposed on the back side, and the position of the second member can be displaced by the adjusting means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the first member is set such that the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the second member or larger than the outer shape of the second member in front view Be done.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress that the player recognizes as disadvantageous and to improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the player grasps the distance between the first member and the second member (position of the second member) to the player It can be difficult to do.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the position of the second member.

10 Pachinko machine 11 Outer frame 13, 25013, 26013, 27013, 28013, 29013, 30013, 31013 Game board 60, 34060, 42060 Base board (game board)
60a first opening (second opening)
60b second opening 60c decoration member (first decoration means)
34060d recess (first opening)
35060e Sliding hole (first opening)
63 General prize winning opening (inlet)
86 Center frame (frame-like member)
86b Protruding part (third member)
86b1 opening 86b3 detection device (detection means)
86b5 Standing part (folded piece)
100 to 104 , 42100 Substrate box 150 General winning opening unit (plate member)
151 Main unit (front member)
154, 10154, 25154 Decorative member (second decorative means)
151a, 26151a, 27151a, 28151a, 31151a inclined surface (inclined portion)
151b, 28151b, 29151b, 30151b Recesses (recesses)
151b2 recessed bottom surface 155 protrusion 300, 15300, 15300, 16300, 17300 rear case (rear member)
301c first opening 301d second opening 310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 18310, 19310, 20310, 22310, 23310, 24310 engagement member (displacement member)
311, 14311, 15311, 16311, 18311, 21231, 24311 Elastic piece (first piece)
315, 14315, 15315 Operators 315a, 14315a Inclined surface (suppression means)
24316 Engaging part (first projection)
320, 18320, 20320, 22320, 23320, 24320 fixed members 322, 18322, 22233, 223332, 24332 engaged portions (engagement portions)
24335 housing portion 24335a stepped portion (second projection)
19360, 24360 manipulator 410 base member 411 e curved wall (regulating means, wall)
411f recovery port (recovery member)
422 Cam member (part of support structure, displacement member)
430 Link member (part of support structure, driven member)
4441 g engagement wall (insertion member)
11450 decorative member 11451a transmitting portion 460 transmission mechanism 2464 movable rack (reverse member)
465 Transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 Rack (rack member)
11466e Shielding plate (connection member)
467, 12467 Ball receiving part (displacement member, receiving part)
12467c 1st piece (body part)
12467d Second piece (displacement part)
12467e third piece (shield)
11491 Control board (board member)
11491a Light emitter (light emitting part)
3468 First link member (reverse member)
470 Base member (base member)
471a Standing wall (wall)
481b1 Recess 491 Control board (light emitting means)
492 Displacement member (regulation means)
520 Base plate (second base member)
525 Rolling part (passage member)
525b protrusion (resistance means)
540 Distribution members (regulation means, distribution means, integral members)
540a leg (protrusion)
541 Restriction board (1st appearance part, distribution means)
542 Reservoir plate (2nd part, flow down state changing means)
550, 13550, 32550, 34550, 35550, 36550, 37550 special winning device (path unit)
551 1st unit (1st guide route, 1st member)
552 Second unit (second guide route, second member)
561 1st accepting unit (1st winning opening)
562 Second acceptance section (second winning opening)
563 Third Acceptor (Third Prize Win)
564, 13564, 3256, 4325, 4355, 45, 41564 front plate ( second member)
564a Guide part (projected wall)
564c, 41564c second convex portion (a part of the guiding means, convex portion)
564b, 41564b 1st convex part (a part of 2nd guidance means, 2nd convex part)
13564 Front plate (first member)
13564b 1st convex part (protrusion , predetermined part )
13564c 2nd convex part (protrusion , predetermined part )
Base plate ( first member)
571i, 41571i second recess (part of guiding means, recess)
571h, 41571h first recess (part of second guiding means, second recess)
13571 v Base plate (second member)
13571b , 32571b fourth convex portion (protrusion , predetermined portion )
13571c , 32571c fifth convex portion (protrusion , predetermined portion )
32573b adjustment hole (modification means)
574a 1st receiving recess (3rd winning opening)
574b Second receiving recess (third winning opening)
34579, 35579 Support part (protrusion part)
40581a1 Opening 40581a2 Housing 583a First solenoid (drive means)
583b 1st variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
584a second solenoid (drive means)
584b Second variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
32 590 thread plywood (means of change)
615 First communication path (branch path)
616 Second communication path (branch path)
622 Central opening (opening, insertion part)
634 Second central opening (opening, insertion part)
7710 Displacement member 7713 Ball receiving member (receiving portion)
7720 Transmission member (transmission means)
7721 Rotating member (body part)
7722 Drive pin (pin part)
7723 Arm member 7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 Left side transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 Transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 Load gear (load gear)
740 Right transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 Rotating member (crank member)
741a protrusion (pin part)
742 arm member 742b first sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 Box member (lid member)
770 Lid member (displacement member, first member)
780 Rotation restriction member (displacement restriction means)
800 Rotating body (Pivot member, second member)
810 Base plate (fixed member)
811b Communication hole (opening)
812b Communication hole (second communication port)
820 LED base (light emitting means)
831 Opening (first communication port)
870 Opening and closing member (displacement member)
871 Protrusions (part of displacement setting means, part of connection means)
892 Sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connecting means)
KR1 1st throwing route (falling route)
KR2 2nd throwing route (2nd branch passage)
KR3 3rd ball sending route (1st branch passage)
SP4 Biasing spring (biasing means)
KM4 drive motor (drive means)
OW1 one-way clutch (engagement means)
SK1 main route (first route, part of guide route)
SK2 main route (first route, second route, part of guide route, upstream route)
SK3 main route (second route, part of guide route, downstream route)
SK4 main route (part of guide route, detour route)
SK5 main route (part of guidance route)
SK6 main route (part of guidance route)
SK7 main route (part of guidance route)
HK1 secondary route (part of guidance route)
HK2 secondary route (part of guidance route)
HK3 secondary route (part of guidance route)
WK1 Curved route (third route, part of guide route, change route)
SI shim member ( modification means)

Claims (2)

A game board having a game area on the front side , a first member to be disposed on the front side of the game board, and a first member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval, And a second member for enabling the game ball to flow downward between the facing members .
It comprises a pre-Symbol changes means to change the opposing distance between the other of the first member or the to a predetermined portion disposed on at least one of the second member first member or the second member,
The changing means is capable of forming a first state and a second state in which the flowing-down direction of the gaming ball flowing down between the first and second members is different from the first state. Gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a substrate box .

Images